Philips IntelliVue Information Center System
Release N.01
Installation and Service Guide
Part Number: 453564379481
Printed in the U.S.A.
December, 2013
Third Edition
*453564379481*
Proprietary Notice
This document and the information contained in it is proprietary and confidential information of Philips Healthcare (“Philips”)
and may not be reproduced, copied in whole or in part, adapted, modified, disclosed to others, or disseminated without the
prior written permission of the Philips Legal Department. Use of this document and the information contained in it is strictly
reserved for current Philips personnel and Philips customers who have a current and valid license from Philips for use by the
customer’s designated in-house service employee on equipment located at the customer’s designated site. Use of this
document by unauthorized persons is strictly prohibited. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Legal
Department.
This document must be returned to Philips when the user is no longer licensed and in any event upon first written request by
Philips.
Warranty Disclaimer
Philips provides this document without warranty of any kind, either implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Limitation of Liability
Philips has taken care to ensure the accuracy of this document. However, Philips assumes no liability for errors or omissions
and reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein to improve reliability, function, or
design. Philips may make improvements or changes in the product(s) or program(s) described in this document at any time.
Copyright Notice
© 2013 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
Manufacturer
Philips Medical Systems
3000 Minuteman Road
Andover, MA 01810-1085
(+1) 978-687-1501
Printed in USA
Trademark Acknowledgments
Philips trademarks are the property of Koninklijke Philips N.V.
Microsoft, Windows, and SQL Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks, tradenames, and company names referenced herein are used for identification purposes only and are
the property of their respective owners.
Printing History
New editions of this document will incorporate all material updated since the previous edition. The documentation printing
date and part number indicate its current edition. The printing date and edition number change when a new edition is
printed. The document part number changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated.
Third Edition ............................................................................................................................................................. December, 2013
Second Edition .....................................................................................................................................................................July, 2013
First Edition ...................................................................................................................................................................October, 2012
ii
Contents
About This Guide
Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Document Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Notational Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
PIIC System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
PIIC System Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3140 Local Database (Low Acuity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3150 Local Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3145/M3155 Network Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3151 Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3170 Patient Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3177 Trend Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3154 Large Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M3169 Small Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
Compatible Patient Monitors and Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Supported Network Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
ICN Configuration without a Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
ICN Configuration with a Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
ICN Configuration with Small Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
ITS and ICN Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Large Network Database System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
An Overview of PIIC Features and Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Patient Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
All Controls Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Patient Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Alarm Management and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Patient Data Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Configuration and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Alert Data Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Data Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
iii
Contents
Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
IntelliVue Information Center Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Configuring the IntelliVue Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Using Service Screen Menu Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Configuring Patient Monitoring Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Archiving and Restoring System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Getting Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
An Overview of the PIIC Patient Monitoring Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Working with Patient Monitor Plug In Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Displaying Waves and Parameters on the PIIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Telemetry Monitoring Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
PIIC Alarm Annunciation Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Alarm Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Alarm Annunciation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Monitoring Arrhythmia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Basic Arrhythmia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Enhanced Arrhythmia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
ST Segment Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Supported Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
PIIC Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
PIIC PC/Workstation Platforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rp5800 Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP rp5800 Adapter Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rp5800 Audio Amplifier Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Video Displays to the rp5800 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rp5700 and rp5700 Turbo Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP rp5700 Display Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP rp5700 Adapter Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-9
Database Server Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
HP ML350 G6 Tower Server Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
HP ML350 G6 Server Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
HP ML350 G6 Server Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
HP DL380 G6 Rack Server Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
HP DL380 G7 Database Server Controls and Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
HP DL380 G8 Database Server Controls and Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
PIIC Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Flat Panel Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Dual Display Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Video Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
iv
Contents
Remote Slave Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Customer-supplied Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
General Display Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Flat Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-Channel USB Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Printer Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
UPS with Hardware Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
DBS Rack-mount UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Power Distribution Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Network Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
UTP Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Fiber Optic Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
SFP Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Wall Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Environmental Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Chapter 3: PIIC Software Description
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PC Workstation Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Windows Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Supported Operating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Application Programming Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Architectural Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
PIIC Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Real Time Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Control Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Review Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
v
Contents
Support Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Management Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Application Manager (SDProcess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Sound Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Human Interface Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Physio Data Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Patient Database Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Measurement Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Alarm Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Recorder Management Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Documentation Status Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Recorder Documentation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Printer Documentation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Chapter 4: Site Planning and Preparation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
vi
Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Planning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Planning and Preparation Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Philips Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Closet Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Switch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIIC DBS Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPS Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
Network Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing Clinical Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patient Monitoring Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patient Monitor Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Monitoring Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type of Patient Data Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Future Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Connection Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIIC TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8
4-8
Patient Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Medical Device Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Philips Device Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patient Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
Contents
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Cable Plant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Noise Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UTP Cable Plant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RJ45 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Cable Plant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
Unpacking and Inspection PIIC System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpacking System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
Inspecting System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repackaging Components for Shipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
Installing System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Setting up Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Typical Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Mounting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Display Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Installing Wall Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
CPU and UPS Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
PDM Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
IntelliVue Information Center Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Securing Rear Panel Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Proper PIIC/UPS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Small Database Server Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Large Database Server Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Connecting the DBS to Hospital Intranet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Installing Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Interconnecting the PIIC System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Setting Up a Touch Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Mounting the Touch Display Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Calibrating the Touch Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Disabling the Touch Display Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Setting Up a Remote Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Setting up a KVM Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Installing and Configuring KaVoom Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
KM Software Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
KM Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Removing the KM Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
vii
Contents
Providing Electrical Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Assigning IP Addresses and Network Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Host Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Device Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Display IP Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Setting Host Names and IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Device Naming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Verifying NIC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Testing Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Configuring Settings for the Optional Second NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Checking the Node Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Re-installing the PIIC Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Re-installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIIC Software Distribution Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIIC Software Re-installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
Using the Config Wizard Configuration Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Running Config Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
From the Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
From the Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Config Wizard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Navigating the Config Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Completing the Config Wizard Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Backup Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Restore from Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Software Versions and Security Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Purchased Options and Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Database Server General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Local General Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Unit Paging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Configuring Clinical Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Configuring the List of Networked Centrals and Hallways . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Configuring the List of Networked Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Device Pooling Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
viii
Contents
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Setting Up Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Configuring HL7 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Adding Profile Settings for 802.11 Network Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Bed Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Assigning Beds to Patient Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Security Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Report and Recording Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Adding Monitoring LAN Printers at the IIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Adding a Local Printer Attached to a IIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Setting Printer Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Date and Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Creating an Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Finishing Config Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Viewing and Printing the Report Configuration File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Using MininConfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Assigning Equipment Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Re-assigning an Assigned Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Manually Assigning a Monitor Equipment Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Manually Removing a Monitor Equipment Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Manually Assigning a Telemetry Equipment Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Manually Removing a Telemetry Equipment Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Automatically Assigning an Equipment Label (Alternative) . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Activating the Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Activating the Network/Server System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Performing Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surface Cleaning IntelliVue Information Center System Components . . . . .
Cleaning the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing Air Intakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing UPS Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining the 2-channel USB Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Display Sweep Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-6
Troubleshooting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Troubleshooting Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Troubleshooting Alert Data Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Troubleshooting Patient Data Transfer/IIC Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Troubleshooting HL7 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Troubleshooting 12-Lead Export/Holter Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
ix
Contents
Troubleshooting KM Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Troubleshooting Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Troubleshooting PIIC System Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Troubleshooting PIIC User Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Error and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Reviewing the Status Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Reviewing Purchased Options and Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Reviewing Support Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Application Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
System Error Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
System Info Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
The SystemInfo.log appears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Export Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Exception Error Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Backup Error Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Service Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Editing the Service Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Viewing the Service Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Archiving the Service Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Status Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Quick Unit Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
All Data Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Wireless Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Transfer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Lab Results Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Viewing Network Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Viewing HP 2524 Switch Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Pinging Network Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Viewing the Configuration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Viewing Spanning Tree Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Viewing Cisco Switch Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Access Point Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Access Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Search by IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Using PIIC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
!Recorder Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Recording/Printing Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
System Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Performance Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Backup Error Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
USB Recorder Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
x
Contents
Redirect HL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Service Portal Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
RAID Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Using Configuration Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Config Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Read Only Config Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Set Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Report Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Report/Recording Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Add/Remove Database Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Patient Data Transfer - Bandwidth Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Equipment Label Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Device Pool Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Save/View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Using Security Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Change Clinical Units Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Change Service Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Research Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
EWS/Device Location Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
User Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Using Other Service Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
!Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Internet Service Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
System Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Shutting Down a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Shutdown - Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Desktop Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Using Maintenance Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Restart IIS Admin Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Restart DBServ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Restart Network Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Synchronize Large Network Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Reset Recorder Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Reset Database Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
!Upgrade NLS Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
WMTS Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Using HL7 Troubleshooting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Client.exe tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
Qryclnt.exe Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
First Character Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Second Character Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Third and Fourth Character Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Fifth Character Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
xi
Contents
Sixth Character Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Seventh Character Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
LED Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Performing Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Clearing Tripp Lite UPS Watchdog Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Confirming Watchdog Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Enabling/Disabling the Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Correcting APC UPS Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Reconfiguring the APC UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Correcting Philips Recorder Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Restoring Printer Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
Adding DBS Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Repairing Philips Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Re-installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Configuring the ILO Setting for the Large Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
Restoring Large DataBase Server RAID Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Updating the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
BIOS Files on InCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Flashing the BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Configuring BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Navigating the Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
M3154 Database Server BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Configuring the ML350 G6 Server BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Configuring the DL380 G6 Server BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
Configuring the DL380 G7 Server BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Updating the HP DL380e Gen8 BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
IntelliVue Information Center/Client PC BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Changing the rp5800 PC BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Changing the rp5700 PC BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-106
Using the Japanese Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-111
Using Antivirus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-111
Configuring Antivirus Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-113
Updating Virus Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-113
Copying Updated Virus Definition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-113
Updating the Virus Definition List from the Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-114
If a Virus is Found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-115
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116
Replacing rp5800 PC Adapter Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116
Creating an Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116
Replacing a Network Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-116
xii
Contents
Replacing an Audio Amplifier Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-118
Replacing rp5700 PC Adapter Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-125
Removing the rp5700 PC Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-125
About the rp5700 PC Expansion Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-125
Installing a NIC in the rp5700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-126
Installing an Audio Card in the rp5700 PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-127
Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-130
Chapter 8: Verifying Product Assurance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Performing Visual Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Performing a Power On Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Performing the Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Performing the Database Storage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Performing the Power Failure Response Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Verifying Display Sweep Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Performing Test and Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Procedures for IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Procedures for M3170 Patient Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Procedures for M3169 Small Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Procedures for M3154 Database Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Procedures for the IntelliVue Clinical Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Appendix A: Worksheets
Device Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Patient Data Transfer/IIC Web Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
IIC Web Access Requirements and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Passive Infrastructure Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
TCP/IP Network Card Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Web Operation from Network PCs Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Appendix B: Installing the IIC Web Access Option
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Installing the IIC Web Access Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Updating System Files For EWS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Editing the Client PC Registry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
xiii
Contents
Setting Client Internet Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Installing the IIC Web NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Configuring the Web NIC IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Using the Web User Access Config Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Adding Clinicians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Removing/Viewing the Clinician List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Changing Clinician Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Viewing Clinician Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Viewing Audit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Exporting Audit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Installing a Local Printer on the Web Client Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Testing and Inspecting Web Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Appendix C: Enabling Remote Access to PIIC Systems
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
PIIC DBS Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Accessing Remote PC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Using Remote Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Accessing Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reviewing the Remote Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the Remote Event Viewer or Application Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the System Tools Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Out of the Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-4
C-4
C-4
C-4
C-5
Test and Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Appendix D: Installing the DBS Data Export Option
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Installing Data Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Installing a Second NIC on the DBS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Configuring the Second NIC for Data Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Configuring the Data Export Hostname in Config Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Testing Data Export Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Receiving Exported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Windows XP/2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Windows 7/2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
xiv
Contents
Appendix E: Using the ActiveX Control Deployment Tool
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Installing the ActiveX Deployment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Index
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
xv
Contents
xvi
About This Guide
The IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and
Service Guide provides complete procedures for installing and configuring
the Philips IntelliVue Information Center (PIIC) at a clinical site. This
section describes the document and includes:
• Audience
• Document Organization
• Notational Conventions
• Related Documentation
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
xvii
About This Guide
Audience
The IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and
Service Guide is written for Philips-trained service personnel who will
install and configure the PIIC at a clinical site.
Document Organization
The information in this guide is organized and presented as follows:
• Chapter 1, Introduction, provides an overview of the Philips IntelliVue
Information Center (PIIC) System and details PIIC system components,
PIIC system models, compatible monitors and software, supported
network topologies, PIIC features and functions, PIIC patient
monitoring capabilities, and supported applications.
• Chapter 2, Hardware Description, describes the hardware
components comprising the PIIC system including: PC platform server
platform, displays, keyboard-video-mouse switch, USB recorder,
supported printers uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs), and network
cables and connectors.
• Chapter 3, PIIC Software Description, details the PIIC PC Workstation
Platform, the Windows Operating System running on the PIIC platform,
and the IntelliVue Information Center Application Software.
• Chapter 4, Site Planning and Preparation, lists the planning and
preparation that should occur prior to a PIIC deployment at a clinical
site.
• Chapter 5, Installing PIIC Hardware, provides PIIC system hardware
components installation information and procedures and includes
Cable Plant Installation, Unpacking and Inspection PIIC System
Components, Inspecting System Components, Installing System
Components, Providing Electrical Power, and Assigning IP Addresses
and Network Names.
• Chapter 6, Software Installation and Configuration, provides
procedures to re-install and configure PIIC software on systems that
are shipped from the factory with the PIIC application software preloaded.
• Chapter 7, Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC, describes
maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair procedures for the Philips
IntelliVue Information Center system.
• Chapter 8, Verifying Product Assurance, provides a series of Product
Assurance Tests that shall be performed after PIIC system installation,
and after any system repair or upgrade to verify system functionality.
• Appendix A, Network Requirements and Specifications, lists
requirements and specifications for the Hospital LAN on which the
IntelliBridge System is installed.
xviii
About This Guide
• Appendix B, Installing the IIC Web Access Option, details the steps for
installing the IIC Web Access option on a IntelliVue Database Server or
IntelliVue Information Center. The IIC Web Access option permits
viewing Patient Data Review Applications stored on the Server via the
hospital intranet.
• Appendix C, Enabling Remote Access to PIIC Systems, describes the
procedures used to remotely access the IntelliVue Database Server
from a remote PC.
• Appendix D, Installing the DBS Data Export Option, gives the
procedure for installing and activating the PIIC DBS Data Export
options.
• Appendix E, Using the ActiveX Control Deployment Tool, describes the
ActiveX Control Deployment Tool which enables you to download
required ActiveX controls to IIC Web Server clients.
• Index
Notational Conventions
This guide uses the following notational conventions to convey
information:
Note
Notes call attention to important information.
Caution
Cautionary statements call attention to a condition that could result in loss
of data or damage to equipment.
Warning
Warnings call attention to a condition that could result in physical injury.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
xix
About This Guide
Related Documentation
Please refer to these other documents for additional installation and
service information about the Philips IntelliVue Information Center System
N.01 Release:
• Philips IntelliVue Information Center IFU (453564346961)
• Philips IntelliVue Information Center Clinical Configuration Guide
(453564344061)
• Philips IntelliVue Information Center Software Upgrade Installation
Note (453564379491)
• Philips IntelliVue Information Center Demo Application User Guide
(453564387721)
• Philips IntelliVue Information Center Research Data Export Viewer
User Guide (453564387731)
• Philips IntelliVue Information Center HL7 Programmer’s Reference
Guide (453564346971)
xx
1
Introduction
This chapter provides an introduction to the Philips IntelliVue Information
Center (PIIC) system, and includes:
• Overview
• PIIC System Components
• PIIC System Models
• Compatible Patient Monitors and Software
• Supported Network Topologies
• An Overview of PIIC Features and Functionality
• Configuring the IntelliVue Information Center
• An Overview of the PIIC Patient Monitoring Capabilities
• Supported Applications
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-1
Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview
The Philips IntelliVue Information Center (PIIC) system running the Information
Center Release N.01 application software integrates of a wide range of functionality
into a single, standard PC or Server running a Microsoft® Windows™ Operating
System. The IntelliVue Information Center combines the features of a central
monitor—multipatient waveform and parameter display, alarm annunciation, multilead arrhythmia monitoring, and ST analysis—with the patient data review of a
clinical review station to meet the diverse needs of the clinical environment.
Display formats, monitoring controls, alarm response, and patient data
presentation can be configured to suit user preferences and to optimize user
performance. Information System functionality can also be purchased in various
ways to tailor the system to specific clinical needs and applications.
An IntelliVue Database Server can be connected to the IntelliVue Clinical Network
for storing patient data obtained from patient monitors connected to IntelliVue
Information Centers. Patient data are transmitted through the Network to the
Database Server for storage, analysis, and review. The M3154 Large Database
Server can store data for up to 128 patients, which can be viewed by all M3155
Information Centers on the Network and by 12 additional Network-connected
M3151 IntelliVue Information Center Clients. The M3169 Small Database Server
can store data for up to 48 patients, which can be viewed by three M3145 IntelliVue
Information Centers on the Network and by three additional Network-connected
M3151 IntelliVue Information Center Clients. Real-time patient monitoring data can
also be overviewed by all IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients on the Network.
The M3145 IntelliVue Information Center is used with the Small Database Server.
Otherwise, it is identical in features and specifications to the M3155 IntelliVue
Information Center.
PIIC System Components
A PIIC system consists of medical software running on a standard PC or Server with
a Windows Operating System (OS). The specific workstation, display, Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS), and optional printer shipped with each system may vary
depending on the date of purchase.
Displays are sold separately. Philips cannot guarantee compliance with the EMC
Directive of any display not supplied by Philips and will not install those displays.
Throughout this document, only general descriptions of devices are provided. For
more detailed information on a particular device, refer to the appropriate
manufacturer documentation.
Figure 1-1 represents typical basic PIIC system components.
1-2
PIIC System Components







Figure 1-1: PIIC System Basic Components
Reference
Description

PC/Workstation

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

2-channel USB Recorder

Display

Keyboard

Mouse (or trackball)

External Speaker
Warning Components, topologies, and configurations specified by Philips have been tested
to meet a variety of patient monitoring standards. Hardware and software not
supplied by Philips as part of an Information Center system are not approved or
supported for use with Philips Information Center and Clinical Network/Database
Server systems.
Use of hardware and software that has not been approved by Philips for use with
the Information Center and Clinical Network/Database Server can result in the loss
of central monitoring—including alarm annunciation—or in degradation of
monitoring performance.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-3
Chapter 1: Introduction
PIIC System Models
This section describes the different PIIC models available and lists their standard
and optional components.
M3140 Local Database (Low Acuity)
The M3140 Information Center can operate as an independent, stand-alone central
monitor. When the Information Center is operating independently it stores all
patient data. Stored and Real-time patient monitoring data can only be reviewed on
the Information Center on which it was obtained.
M3150 Local Database
The M3150 Information Center can operate as an independent (stand-alone)
central monitor. When the Information Center is operating independently it stores
all patient data. Stored patient monitoring data can only be reviewed on the
Information Center on which it was obtained.
The Information Center Web Access option permits viewing of all patient data stored
on the Server (waves, alarms, events, ST segments, trends, and viewable recording
strip data) by PCs on the Hospital Information System (HIS). Up to 10 simultaneous
users can access stored patient data using standard web browsers, i.e., Internet
Explorer (Release 5.0 or greater and must allow downloads of signed Active X
controls) and Netscape (Release 4.7 or greater. Netscape does not support near
real time overview).
M3145/M3155 Network Database
The M3145/M3155 IntelliVue Information Center connects to a Large or Small
Database Server which stores the patient data. Patient monitoring data can only be
reviewed by another Information Center on the network that is connected to the
same Database Server.
M3151 Client
An Information Center Client provides real-time waveform monitoring display and
patient review functions at hallway locations.
M3170 Patient Link
The M3170 Patient Link operates as a M3150 Information Center local database
without a display. The M3170 Patient Link provides a central location for bedside
recordings and reports initiated from M3/4 bedsides and IntelliVue Patient
Monitors. In addition, the Patient Link provides support for bed to bed overview and
alarm reflection for M3/4 bedsides and IntelliVue Patient Monitors. Patient Link
cannot be used with Telemetry besides. Patient names are not included on the
recording annotation
M3170 Patient Link does have a clinical user interface option (Care Group Settings),
however, it does not generate alert sounds and relies on the bedside monitor for
visual and auditory alarm notification. If this use model is required, a Display would
need to be ordered and installed in the Central Nursing Area. All Clinical User
1-4
PIIC System Models
Settings and Patient Settings are set to the factory defaults and cannot be changed.
The only configuration changes that can be applied are those in the Config Wizard.
M3177 Trend Display
The M3177 Trend Display allows you to view patients trending history through the
use of various trending charts that display in trending sectors. The trending sectors
display the patient’s trending data allowing you to gain a clearer perspective on a
patient’s current status and how your patient’s condition is developing over time.
The Trend Display application is available as an option on dual-display Information
Centers. If used as an M3177 application on a dual-display system, it can be set up
with both displays showing trending data or with one display showing trending data
and the second display containing a full screen Patient Window.
The M3177 Trend Display is available with a single trending display or with two
trending displays. The Trend Display application is for viewing patient trending data;
it provides no visual or audible alarms.
M3154 Large Database Server
The M3154 Large Database Server is a Server that provides database storage of
patient monitoring data for all devices on the Network. Information Center
application software provides for storage of up to 96 hours of patient monitoring
data (full disclosure waveforms, physiologic parameters, alarms, multi-lead
arrhythmia, ST segments, and EASI 12-lead presentations) from 128 patients.
Patient monitoring data, including events and trends, can be reviewed by any
M3155 IntelliVue Information Center or M3151 Client on the Network.
The Information Center Web Access option permits viewing of all patient data stored
on the Server (waves, alarms, events, ST segments, trends, and viewable recording
strip data) by PCs on the hospital’s HIS intranet. Up to 100 simultaneous users can
access stored patient data using standard web browsers -- Internet Explorer
(Release 5.0 or greater and must allow downloads of signed Active X controls) and
Netscape (Release 4.7 or greater. Netscape does not support near real time
overview).
M3169 Small Database Server
The M3169 Small Database Server is a Server that provides database storage of
patient monitoring data for all devices on the Network. Information Center
application software provides for storage of 48 hours of patient monitoring data (full
disclosure waveforms, physiologic parameters, alarms, multi-lead arrhythmia, ST
segments, and EASI 12-lead presentations) from 48 patients. Patient monitoring
data, including events and trends, can be reviewed by up to three M3155 IntelliVue
Information Centers and three Clients on the Network.
Table 1-1 lists the basic hardware and Table 1-2 lists the basic software of IntelliVue
Information Centers, Clients, and Database Servers.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-5
Chapter 1: Introduction
Table 1-1: Basic Hardware for IntelliVue Information Center Systems
M3150
M3155
M3145
M3151
M3170
M3154
M3169
Workstation
Workstation
Workstation
Workstation
Server
Workstation






RAM2
2 GB
2 GB
2 GB
2 GB
6 GB
2 GB
Hard drive space3
80 GB
80 GB
80 GB
80 GB
160 GB
80 GB
Audio card




No
No
10/100 Mb/s NIC






Keyboard and Mouse






650 VA
650 VA
650 VA
650 VA
1000 VA
650 VA
Philips Recorder and Rack
with 60V power supply




No
No
Speaker (external)



No
No
No
Isolation Transformer
(Japan only)


No

No
No
Hardware Description
Processing Unit
3-1/2 inch disk1 and
DVD/CD-ROM drives
Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS)
1. New PC hardware does not have a 3-1/2 inch disk drive.
2. For more than 16 patients or more than 16 patients and Trend Display you must have
2 GB RAM.
3. The required RAM and hard drive space are validated at installation. If either does not
meet the minimum requirements, the installation program will post an error message and
abort the installation.
1-6
PIIC System Models
Table 1-2: Basic Software for IntelliVue Information Center Systems
M3150
M3155
M3145
M3151
M3170
M3154
M3169
Windows Operating System
software
Workstation
Workstation
Workstation
Workstation
Server
Server
Philips applications software
including:






4, 6, 8, 12,
16
4, 6, 8, 12,
16, 64
128
48
128
48
24 - 96 hr
per patient
per PIIC
24 - 96 hr
per patient
per PIIC
150 alarms
per patient
per PIIC
150 alarms
per patient
per PIIC
24 - 96 hr
per patient
per PIIC
24 - 96 hr
per patient
per PIIC
Software Description
Monitoring for # patients
up to:
Data Storage for # patients
up to:
4, 6, 8, 12,
16, 24, 32
4, 6, 8, 12,
16
Data Review for # patients
up to:
4, 6, 8, 12,
16
Display of up to 4
waveforms per patient


Multi-lead arrhythmia
analysis (22 alarms)


ST Segment analysis



Wave storage - 4 waveforms
per patient by Database
Server
24 - 96 hr
Alarm Storage of 30 sec.
alarm records and saved
strips, 4 waves per record
50 or 150
alarms
ST Segment storage
24 - 96 hr
Trend storage with 1 min. of
resolution
24 - 96 hr
24 - 96 hr
per patient
per PIIC
24 - 96 hr
per patient
per PIIC
Event storage with 1 hour
strip function
24 - 96 hr
24 - 96 hr
per patient
per PIIC
24 - 96 hr
per patient
per PIIC
Patient Data Storage
provided by Database
Server
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-7
Chapter 1: Introduction
Compatible Patient Monitors and Software
The Philips IntelliVue Information Center is designed to be compatible with the
latest Philips patient monitoring devices including but not limited to the 802.11
wired/wireless bedside monitors and IntelliVue Smart-hopping Telemetry System
devices as represented in Figure 1-2.
Wired/Wireless
IntelliVue Patient Monitors
Wired/Wireless MP5
Wireless MP5T
Patient Monitor
M3/M4/M5
Wired Patient Monitors
Wired/Wireless
MP2/X2 Patient Monitor
Wired/Wireless
HeartStart MRx
Patient Monitor
Philips IntelliVue
Smart-hopping Telemetry System
Patient-wearable
Telemetry Device
MX40
Patient-wearable Monitor
Figure 1-2: PIIC-compatible Patient Monitoring Devices
1-8
Compatible Patient Monitors and Software
Table 1-3 summarizes compatibility between PIIC system releases and IntelliVue
Patient Monitor software releases.
Table 1-3: IntelliVue Patient Monitor Software/PIIC Release Compatibility
IPM
Software
IntelliVue Information Center Release
D.01
E.0
E.01
F.0
G.0
H.0
J.0
K.0
L.0
M.0
N.01
√
√
A.2
√
√
√
√
√
√
B.0
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
B.1
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
C.0
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
D.0
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√1
√1
√1
√
√
√
F.0
√α
√1
√1
√
√
√
√
G.0b
√1
√1
√1
√1
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
E.0
H.0
J.0
a. Native Language Support (NLS) Text Catalog Upgrade (<ArialBold>page 7-78) is required on IIC and
DBS.
b. With IPM release G, VueLink data is sent by means of SCADA coding. SCADA parameter support is provided with IIC Rls. L and later. Earlier releases require a software patch and NLS catalog upgrade when
connected to a release G and later bedsides so parameters are mapped correctly under both MDIL and
EMFC coding HL7 configurations.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-9
Chapter 1: Introduction
Table 1-4 summarizes compatibility between IntelliVue MP5, MP2, and MPX2
monitors and PIIC.
Table 1-4: MP2/X2 and MP5/PIIC Release Compatibility
Monitor
Model
Monitor
Software
MP5a, b
E.0, F.0
MP2
IntelliVue Information Center Release
D.01
E.0
E.01
F.0
G.0
H.0
J.0
K.0
L.0
M.0
N.01
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
F.0,
G.0c, H.0
√
√
√
√
MP5T
F.0,
G.03, H.0
√
√
√
√
MP5/X2
F.0d,
G.03 H.0
√
√ε
√
√
a. IIC Release G.0 and later supports an MP5 that is used as a traditional monitor.
b. IIC Release J.0 and later is required to support MP5 features: Welch Allyn Sure Temp and Telemetry as a
Parameter (TAAP).
c. IIC Release L.0 and later is required to support MP5, MP5T, X2, or MP2 monitors using Wireless Telemetry
as a Parameter (WTAAP).
d. IIC Release K.0 and later supports an MP5 or X2 with a telemetry label and supports additional parameters (NBP, SpO2, Welch Allyn Sure Temp) being sent by means of telemetry when an MP5 or X2 is not networked.
e. WTAAP support with PIIC Release L.0 and later.
Table 1-5 lists the PC platforms that are compatible with the PIIC N.01 release.
Table 1-5: PC Models Supported for Use with PIIC N.01
PC Model
Philips Part Number
HP rp5700 KB212UC
453564067761
HP rp5700 SL008UC
453564213931
HP rp5800 SP978UC
453564450621
Table 1-6 lists the server platforms that are compatible with the PIIC N.01 release.
Table 1-6: Server Models Supported for Use with PIIC N.01
1-10
Server Model
Philips Part Number
HP ML350 G6 AN200A
453564162631
HP DL380 G6 2GHz Rack Mount AW198A
453564163221
HP ML350 G6 BT822A Tower
453564213941
HP DL380 G7 BT823A Rack Mount
453564213951
HP DL380 G8 Rack Mount
453564383431
Compatible Patient Monitors and Software
Table 1-7 lists software that is compatible with PIIC release N.01.
Table 1-7: Information Center Compatible Software
Product Name
Software Release Required for N.01
TraceMasterVuea,b
B.02.03
B.03.xx
C.00.xxc
Holter
2.6 and later
Emergin Integration Server
8.00.11 (SP1), 9.00, 10.0
Emergin Runtime Library
8.00.09 (SP1), 9.00, 10.0
Clinical Data Services
B.01.17
Device Location Map Application
A.00.06, A.00.13, A.00.16 and later
Research Data Export Client Applicationd
B.00.xx
CareVue Integration Engine/ICIPe
C.00
Enhanced Web Server (for DBS)
N.00.xx
PDA Viewer Software
K.00.10 and Later
a.
b.
c.
d.
PIIC Release K.00.xx and later does not support TraceMasterVue NT.
XML 1.04 is required on IIC.
TMV C.00.xx requires .NET 3.0.
RDE viewer does not support EASI lead export. Standard lead export must be
selected in Config Wizard to view waves (<ArialBold>page 6-27).
e. PIIC Release M.00.xx supports ICIP C.0 if ICIP is resident on the hospital LAN,
not the Philips Monitoring LAN. ICIP C.0 software update is required for new
ADT HL7 functionality in IIC M.0.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-11
Chapter 1: Introduction
Supported Network Topologies
Using the capabilities of the IntelliVue Clinical Network and Database Server, Philips
IntelliVue Information Systems can be designed to meet a wide range of clinical
monitoring requirements. Possible network topologies include:
• Standalone Information Center (without an IntelliVue Database Server) supports one IntelliVue Information Center or M3170 Patient Link connected to
IntelliVue and/or M3/M4 Patient monitors, and/or hardwired and 802.11
wireless IntelliVue Patient Monitors, and up to five M3151 Clients.
• IntelliVue Database Server - supports up to eight IntelliVue Information Centers
connected to Network patient monitors (hardwired, wireless and telemetry) and
up to 12 M3151 Information Center Clients for reviewing patient data (up to 128
patients).
• IntelliVue Small Database Server - supports up to three IntelliVue Information
Centers connected to Network patient monitors (hardwired, wireless and
telemetry) and up to five M3151 Information Center Clients for reviewing patient
data (up to 48 patients).
• IntelliVue Telemetry System - The IntelliVue Smart-hopping Telemetry System is
installed as part of an overall IntelliVue Clinical Network installation. There are
two basic IntelliVue Clinical Network topologies into which the IntelliVue
Telemetry System can be installed, routed and non-routed configurations.
ICN Configuration without a Database Server
Figure 1-3 shows a patient monitoring system using the IntelliVue Clinical Network
to connect wired M3/M4/M5 and wired or 802.11 wireless IntelliVue Patient
Monitors to an IntelliVue Information Center. In this configuration, the ICN supports
one IntelliVue Information Center, two laser Printers and up to 16 patients. A
Database Server is not required in this configuration.
IntelliVue Clinical Network
Information Center
Wired IntelliVue
Patient Monitors
16 patients
Hospital LAN
Wireless IntelliVue
Patient Monitors
802.11 a/g
Wireless Infrastructure
Network Switch
Laser
Printer
Figure 1-3: ICN Configuration without a Database Server
1-12
Supported Network Topologies
ICN Configuration with a Database Server
Figure 1-4 shows a patient monitoring system using the ICN and IntelliVue Database
Server. Patient monitoring data from wired M3/M4 and wired or 802.11 wireless
IntelliVue Patient Monitors are transmitted to IntelliVue Information Centers via a
network switch. Data from Information Centers are transmitted to the Database
Server via Network switches where they are stored. The Database Server can store
up to 96 hours of patient data for up to 128 monitored patients, 16 max per
Information Center, and 32 transfer patients. This Network system can support up
to eight Information Centers, 12 Information Center Clients, and eight Laser
Printers.
IntelliVue Clinical Network
12 patients
Laser Printers
M3151
Clients
10 Mbps
12 patients
100 Mbps
Network Switch
12 patients
100 Mbps
M3151
Clients
12 patients
M3154 IntelliVue
Database Server
Laser Printer
10Mbps
128 patients
(max)
100 Mbps
10Mbps
HIS LAN for
web access
18.5
Wired IntelliVue
Patient Monitor
Information
Center
100 Mbps
16 patients
Information
Center
Wireless IntelliVue &
M3/M4/M5 Monitors
16 patients
M3151
Clients
Network Switch
10 Mbps
16 patients
M3151
Clients
IntelliVue 802.11 a/g
Wireless Infrastructure
Laser
Printers
16 patients
Figure 1-4: ICN Configuration with a Database Server
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-13
Chapter 1: Introduction
Up to 25 M3154 Database Servers can be interconnected on the hospital LAN. (If
connecting to the IntelliVue Telemetry System through a Network Router, only 22
M3154 Database Servers can be interconnected).This connectivity provides
Information Centers with the ability to transfer patient data to a clinical unit outside
of its Database Server. Retrospective data, near real-time waves, parameters, and
alarms for patients across care units that are on separate database servers can
also be reviewed. Web-based applications can be displayed on the IntelliVue
Information Centers.
ICN Configuration with Small Database Server
Figure 1-5 shows a patient monitoring system using the Clinical Network and the
IntelliVue Small Database Server. Patient monitoring data from wired M3/M4 and
wired or 802.11 wireless IntelliVue Patient Monitors are transmitted to IntelliVue
Information Centers via a network switch. Data from IntelliVue Information Centers
are transmitted to the Server via Network switches where they are stored. The
Server can store 48 hours of patient data for up to 48 monitored patients, 16 max
per Information Center, and up to 12 transfer patients.
This ICN configuration can support up to three Information Centers, three IntelliVue
Information Center Clients, and four Laser Printers.
IntelliVue Clinical Network
10 Mbps
Small Database Server
Wired
IntelliVue Patient Monitor
100 Mbps
Information
Center
16 patients
100 Mbps
HIS LAN for
web access
48 patients
(max)
18.5
Information
Center
16 patients
16 patients
Clients
Information
Center
100 Mbps
16 patients
16 patients
Network Switch
Clients
10 Mbps
16 patients
Laser Printers
Figure 1-5: ICN Configuration with a Small Database Server
1-14
Supported Network Topologies
ITS and ICN Topologies
The IntelliVue Smart-hopping Telemetry System (ITS) is installed as part of an
overall IntelliVue Clinical Network installation. There are two basic IntelliVue Clinical
Network topologies into which the IntelliVue Telemetry System can be installed:
• non-routed ICN topology
• routed ICN topology
Installing the ITS within a Non-routed ICN
In a non-routed ICN configuration, the ICN functions as an independent network
with a single IntelliVue Database Domain (DBSD). Figure 1-6 represents an ITS
installed in a non-routed ICN.
Note the following guidelines for installing the ITS within a non-routed ICN topology:
• All ITS wireless devices (transceivers/wireless bedside monitors) must reside on
the ICN Database Domain on which the ITS infrastructure is installed.
• Up to 48 ITS Access Points may be installed on a non-routed ICN topology.
• Multiple ITSs at a single hospital are supported only if the topology,
configuration, and Sync Network requirements listed in the ITS Infrastructure
Installation and Service Guide are met.
Figure 1-6: An ITS Installed within a Non-routed ICN Topology
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-15
Chapter 1: Introduction
Installing the ITS on a Routed ICN Topology
In a routed ICN configuration, the ITS infrastructure is installed as a separate
subnet to which multiple ICNs have access via routers. Figure 1-7 represents an ITS
installed within a routed ICN topology.
Note the following guidelines for installing the ITS within a routed ICN topology:
• An ITS subnet can be connected up to 22 ICN Database Domains via routers.
• Up to 320 ITS Standard Access Points may be installed on a routed ICN
topology.
• Up to 320 ITS Core Access Points and up to 640 Remote Antennas (i.e., two per
Core AP) may be installed on a routed ICN topology.
• ITS Standard and Core APs may exist together on a routed ICN topology so long
as the maximum number of APs does not exceed 320.
Large Network Database System
You can interconnect up to 25 Large Database Servers (22 if connecting to the
IntelliVue Telemetry System through a Network Router) on the hospital LAN. This
connectivity provides Information Centers with the ability to transfer patient data to
a clinical unit outside of its Database Server. The clinical operator selects a
destination clinical unit when discharging. Retrospective data, near real-time waves,
parameters, and alarms for patients across care units that are on separate
database servers can also be reviewed. Web-based applications can be displayed
on the IntelliVue Information Centers.
The following specifications apply to a Large Network Database System:
• In a large network system, you can combine E.0 and greater Large Database
Server systems. All Large Database Servers and connected Information Centers
and Clients must be running the same revision of Information Center software.
(L.0 Information Centers are connected to an L.0 Database Server; J.0
Information Centers are connected to a J.0 Database Server, and so on.)
• One of the Large Database Servers must be designated as the “Master Server”.
The master server maintains the list of other servers in its database; it also
provides for the addition/deletion/changing of additional servers during
monitoring. In a mixed large network system, the Master Database Server must
be running J or greater.
• The Master Database Server must be installed and configured first.
• The remaining Large Database Servers (non-masters) must add the Master
Server name in the Purchased Options and Support Information screen. If a
non-master server is not registered with the Master Database Server, it cannot
receive or send patient data outside of its domain.
• If a Master Database Server adds a non-master server to its list you must verify
that the non-master does not already have a Master Database Server
associated with it. If the non-master has another Master Database Server name
configured, it will not accept the new Master Database Server.
1-16
Supported Network Topologies
Figure 1-7: An ITS Installed within a Routed ICN Topology
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-17
Chapter 1: Introduction
• The Master Database Server behaves as the external time source for all nonmaster servers. If an external time source (other than the Master Database
Server) is configured, all connected Information Centers and Clients have the
Date/Time configuration window disabled. The Database Server is enabled, but
it is overridden by the external time source. If there is no external time source
configured, only the Master Database Server domain has the Date/Time
application enabled.
• The Master Database Server list is part of the archive/restore for the Master
Database Server and all the non-masters.
• When restoring archive files in a large network system, verify that the archive is
for the correct Database Server. If a Master Database Server archive is restored
on a non-master Database Server, an invalid configuration is introduced (two
Database Servers cannot be set to master).
• When Web Access/Large Network system option is enabled and a new Master/
non-master relationship is configured, all clinician data (user names,
passwords) on the non-master server will be lost.
• Because the Master Database Server is responsible for maintaining the Patient
List, the non-master Database Servers cannot use the Information Center Web
to view the review applications if the Master Database Server is offline. There is
no message on the Information Centers connected to the non-master Database
Server that the Master is offline.
• IntelliVue Telemetry System network devices can be added (with Config Wizard)
to more than one Database Server in a large network system. Only one server
can be configured to receive alerts from these components (configured as part
of the IntelliVue Telemetry System).
• You can configure compatible printers on the Monitoring or Hospital LAN. If a
DBS configured printer is local or on the Hospital network, then you can share it
with IntelliVue Information Centers in the domain.
Time Synchronization
All patient monitoring network components are time synchronized. Single
synchronization is supported from a master time source located either within the
IntelliVue Clinical Network or provided externally by the hospital. The external time
source is added as a network device as part of the configuration of Equipment
Setup, as described in Chapter 6.
Table 1-8 illustrates the supported configurations and the time synchronization
rules.
Table 1-8: Time Synchronization Behavior
System Component
Can Date/Time be set
on this component?
Expected Behavior on Time Change
M3150 IntelliVue Information Center (Local Database) Without External Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center
Yes
Immediate Synchronization
Bedside
No
Synchronized within 5 minutes
1-18
Time Synchronization
Table 1-8: Time Synchronization Behavior
System Component
Can Date/Time be set
on this component?
Expected Behavior on Time Change
M3150 IntelliVue Information Center (Local Database) With External Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center
No
Synchronized 0-15 minutes
Bedside
No
Synchronized within 5 minutes after Information
Center synchronization
Database Server System Without External Time Source
Database Server
Yes
Immediate synchronization
IntelliVue Information Center
No
Synchronized within 1 minute
IntelliVue Information Center Client
No
Synchronized within 1 minute
Bedside
No
All bedsides synchronized within 5 minutes
Database Server System With External Time Source
Database Server
No
Synchronized 0-15 minutes
IntelliVue Information Center
No
Synchronized within 1 minute after Database Server
IntelliVue Information Center Client
No
Synchronized within 1 minute after Database Server
Bedside
No
All bedsides synchronized within 5 minutes after
Database Server
Large Network System Without External Time Source
Master Database Server
Yes
Immediate synchronization
Non-Master Database Servers
No
Synchronized within 1 minute
IntelliVue Information Center
No
Synchronized within 1 minute
IntelliVue Information Center Client
No
Synchronized within 1 minute
Bedside
No
All bedsides synchronized within 5 minutes
Large Network System With External Time Source
Master Database Server
No
Synchronized 0-15 minutes
Non-Master
Database Servers
No
Synchronized within 1 minute after Master Database
Server
IntelliVue Information Center
No
Synchronized within 1 minute after Master Database
Server
IntelliVue Information Center Client
No
Synchronized within 1 minute after Master Database
Server
Bedside
No
All bedsides synchronized within 5 minutes after
Master Database Server
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-19
Chapter 1: Introduction
An Overview of PIIC Features and Functionality
The Information Center is a central monitoring station that provides multi-patient
display of real-time patient waveforms and physiologic parameters. It also provides
annunciation of alarms and patient data storage and review functions--full
disclosure waves and parameters, alarms, ST segments, events, trends, and EASI
12-lead presentations. The patient monitoring features of the Information Center
are described briefly in this manual; for detailed information, refer to the Philips
Information Center Instructions for Use.
Main Screen
The Main Screen of the Information Center (Figure 1-8) can show up to 16 patients
in Patient Sectors that can have 3 waves per patient with a maximum of 24 waves
per screen (32 waveforms for one display, but dual display is recommended). You
can design Patient Sector arrangement to suit user preference and can have up to 2
columns and 8 rows. The patient name can be shown in various formats.
Figure 1-8: PIIC Main Screen
Patient data can be color coded for easy identification. Colors for waves and
parameters can be individually selected using color pallets available in display
configuration screens. Patient Sectors in alarm are highlighted in color for
immediate recognition of alarm conditions and severity. The date, time, and
messages regarding Recorder and Printer status appear at the top of the Main
Screen.
1-20
An Overview of PIIC Features and Functionality
Patient Window
You can view specific data for each patient in the Patient Window (Figure 1-9). To
open the Patient Window for a particular patient you must position the cursor in the
patient sector so that the Patient Window button appears. When you click the
button the Patient Window for the selected patient opens and can show up to 4
waves and 12 parameters.
When you open the Patient Window on an Information Center with a single display,
the Main Screen resizes to accommodate the Patient Window. For systems with a
second display, the Main Screen is the first display and the Patient Window opens in
the second display. The Main Screen can also occupy both displays. The Patient
Window in a dual display system can show up to 11 waves for a single patient.
Figure 1-9: PIIC Patient Window
In dual display systems, both displays can have Patient Sectors on the Main Screen.
For example, on a 16-patient system the Main Screen of each display includes 8
Patient Sectors. This feature is available for 8-, 12-, and 16-patient information
centers. When an application window is open, all patient sectors move to one
display, and the application opens on the second display. To close the application,
click the Main Screen button.
Additional functions for accessing patient information and changing monitoring
parameters are at the bottom of the Patient Window.
Data Storage
The Large Database Server can store up to 96 hours of patient data for up to 128
active patients, e.g. eight Information Centers with 16 patients each. The Small
Database Server can store up to 48 hours of patient data for up to 48 active
patients, e.g. three Information Centers with 16 patients each. Patient data are kept
on the Server until the patient is discharged. The Large Database Server can store
up to 64 discharged patients; a Small Database Server can store up to 24
discharged patients; and a Standalone Database Server can store up to 8
discharged patients.
The 96 hours of stored patient data include:
• full disclosure waves, 4 waveforms per patient
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-21
Chapter 1: Introduction
• physiologic parameters
• 150 30-second alarm records and saved strips, four waves per record
• trends with one minute of resolution
• ST segments
• events with one-hour strip function
All Controls Window
All Controls is the primary control window for an IntelliVue Information Center. When
you click the All Controls button from the main screen, the following selections
appear.
• Patient Management
• Alarm Management and Setup
• Patient Data Review
• Configuration and Support
The Patient Management, Alarm Management and Setup, and Patient Data Review
selections are intended for clinical users. Their purpose and operation are
described in detail in the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use.
Note Not all features described may be available in all systems unless they are
purchased. Not all features are available in local mode.
Patient
Management
Patient Management provides selections for managing Patient Sectors. These
include Admit, Care Groups, Discharge, Sector Setup, Stored Waves, Standby, and
Lab Data Entry.
Alarm
Management
and Setup
Alarm Management and Setup permits configuration of Arryth Alarms, ST Alarms,
Record/Store/Page, ST Setup, QT Setup, Volume Control, Telemetry Setup, and
Paging Controls.
Patient Data
Review
Patient Data Review windows display patient physiological parameters and alarm
events that have been collected over time from bedside and telemetry monitors.
Review windows can be designed in a variety of formats to facilitate clinician
evaluations of patient status and decisions of diagnosis, prognosis, medication, and
patient transfer and discharge.
Note Refer to the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use for detailed
descriptions of the Patient Data Review selections.
Patient Data Review provides Trend Review, Alarm Review, Event Review, Wave
Review, ST Review, and 12-Lead Review selections. Stored data for all patients on
the Server are available for review by any Information Center and Client on the
Network. Full Control, Read Only, or No Access to patient data stored on the Server
is controlled at the Information Center supplying the data. All stored data - full
disclosure waves, alarms events, ST segments, and trends - for each patient can be
reviewed.
1-22
An Overview of PIIC Features and Functionality
Table 1-9 summarizes the Patient Data Review functions:
Table 1-9: Patient Data Review Functions
Trend Review
• Tabular display of physiological parameters
• Graphical presentation at 1 min. resolution using bivariate trend plots
• 10 configurable groups with 5 bivariate trend plots, 10 parameters per
group
• Exact parameters displayed for cursor time location
• Simultaneous display of trend plots:
• single display - 2 trend plots
• dual display - 5 trend plots
• Trends displayed in 1, 4, 8, 12, and 24 hour time scales
Alarm Review
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Event Review
• 10 configurable groups, up to 5 alarm criteria per group
• strip displayed for verification of event criteria
• total occurrences of alarms calculated and displayed in 1, 4, 8, 12, and
24 hour time scales
Wave Review
•
•
•
•
•
•
Continuous Full Disclosure of up to 4 configurable waves per patient
1 to 60 minutes wave duration per screen:
single display - 1 wave for up to 30 minutes
dual display - 4 waves for up to 60 minutes
Timeline, Trend, and Event Navigators
Strip Reports
•
•
•
•
•
ECG complexes stored at 1 minute resolution for connected patients
50 mm/sec. presentation for increased resolution
EASI 12-lead presentations
Superimposition of up to 4 sets of complexes with ST values
Trend, event and ST topology navigators for fast searches and greater
context
ST Review
12-Lead Review
30-second compressed waveforms of alarm or saved strip events
Up to 4 waveforms per event
Simultaneous display of alarm events:
single display - 5 alarm strips
dual display - 10 alarm strips
Search by alarm severity
Interval measurement
Label alarm
• Retrospective review of 12 derived leads
• 2.5 to 10 second snippets
• 3 x 4, 6 x 2, and 12 x 1 (row by column) display and reports
(12 x 1 is not available on single display)
• EASI leads from M3-E patient monitors are not available
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-23
Chapter 1: Introduction
Trend Review displays graphs or tables of patient physiological parameters that
have been automatically stored during patient monitoring. All parameters stored
can be trended. Trends are organized into pre-configured trend groups. Each group
can contain up to 10 trends presented two at a time in trend charts with up to 5
bivariate trend plots of 10 parameters per group. One trend uses the left axis and
the other the right axis. Data include the parameter name, measurement units,
trend plot, scales, and values. Several different trend presentations are provided,
depending on the parameter.
• Periodic Parameters: Single-value, periodic, continuously monitored
parameters, such as heart rate, are displayed as a single line plot. Triple-value,
periodic parameters, such as invasive blood pressure, are shown as 3, single
line plots of the same color.
• Aperiodic Parameters: Aperiodic, non-continuous parameter presentations
depend on the number of values to be shown.
• Multiple Parameters: Multiple parameters, such as ST, are presented as
separate curves, each of a different color.
• Discrete Events: Discrete events, such as VPB count, are histograms.
The time scale of trend plots can be 1, 4, 8, 12, or 24 hours and the vertical scale is
changeable. Information Center systems with a single display can display 2 trend
plots and systems with dual display, 5 trend plots. Trend storage of 24 hours is
standard with 48, 72, or 96 hours available as options.
Alarm Review shows the alarm events that have been automatically stored during
patient monitoring and alarm strips that were saved for each alarm. Stored alarms
are those that were configured in Alarm Management and Setup and have been
stored in the alarm history database during patient monitoring. Up to 50, 30-second
alarms can be stored in the standard system and up to 150, 30-second alarms as a
purchased option. Each stored alarm includes the date and time, alarm text, and a
30-second compressed waveform. Systems with a single display can display 5
alarm strips, and systems with dual display, 10 alarm strips.
Saved strips are those that are manually saved from Wave Review, Event Review, or
Alarm Review windows. These strips are labeled “Saved” and can be viewed along
with stored alarms. Up to 10 strips can be saved in the standard system and up to
30 for the 150, 30-second alarm option for the Information Center. Each saved strip
contains up to 4, 8-second, un-compressed waveforms and includes the date and
time.
1-24
An Overview of PIIC Features and Functionality
Event Review provides an overview of the frequency and duration of specific events,
such as VTach, along with a strip of the waveform during the event. Up to 10 event
groups can be configured with up to 5 alarm criteria per group. Each event includes
the name of the event, its duration, the name and value of the parameter that
exceeded its limit, and the time and date. Event bars show the duration of the event
and are color coded to represent its severity as follows:
• Red
3-star event ***
• Yellow (**) (long yellow) 2-star event **
• Yellow (!!)
• Yellow (*)
• Cyan
1-star event
1-star event
!!
*
*
Most severe.
Medium severe - Non-arrythmia
alarm violation.This may apply to
arrythmia HR alarms if your
system is set up for long yellow
HR alarms.
Yellow technical alarm detected.
Arrythmia yellow alarm detected.
Not severe.
The waveform strip is automatically displayed on the screen for the event bar
selected and is updated when the event cursor is repositioned.
The total number of occurrences of alarms are calculated and displayed in 1, 4, 12,
and 24 hour time scales. Event storage is 24 hours standard with 48, 72 or 96
hours available as options. The waveform strip is 1 hour standard.
EASI 12-Lead Review (a method of deriving 12 ECG Leads using five electrodes)
permits you to view all available leads from the Patient Window. Details of EASI 12Lead ECG monitoring are provided in the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions
for Use.
Configuration
and Support
Configuration and Support has applications for clinical users, nurse managers, and
service personnel. Some of these applications are password protected to prevent
accidental system or network changes by unauthorized users.
Status Logs is available to all clinical users and is not password protected. This
function opens a Status Logs window that provides the operational status of all
devices connected to the network. This application can be used to quickly identify
and report device problems.
Unit Settings accesses unit-wide configuration controls.This function is password
protected and intended for nurse managers or persons responsible for setting unitwide patient monitoring configurations. This function must only be used by persons
responsible for setting patient monitoring unit-wide settings.
Service is password protected and permits access to Service Mode configuration.
For more information, refer to “Using Service Screen Menu Selections” on page 129.
Central Reports permits configuration, printing, and scheduling of Trend, Alarm,
Event, Wave, Summary and Bedside Reports.
Label Assignment is password protected and permits you to automatically or
manually assign equipment labels to patient monitors and manually assign
equipment labels to telemetry devices.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-25
Chapter 1: Introduction
Alert Data Integration
An alerting system is available (in limited geographies) for secondary notification of
patient alarms. Information Center systems with the Alert Data Integration option
acquire patient alarm data from the bedside or telemetry monitoring system and
automatically relay text alarm messages (by means of LAN connection) to a
receiving device. No waveform data is sent. The receiving device is configured
through Config Wizard. A clinician can assign beds to a paging device through All
Controls>Paging Controls. For more detail refer to the Information Center
Instructions for Use.
Warning Alert Data Integration is a secondary alarm notification system. It is not intended for
primary notification of alarms, physiological, or demographic data. Receipt by the
external software device of alarms is not confirmed and delivery to the end device is
not guaranteed. Clinicians using Alert Data Integration must remain within
monitoring distance of the primary alarm notification device.
The primary alarm notification device is either the bedside monitor (if present) or
the Information Center (for telemetry monitors).
The pager/phone format is configured in the Emergin system. When an alarm is
silenced, a cancel message is sent to the Alert Data Integration receiving device. If
that device has not yet sent out the alarm page, then the message is cancelled and
not sent out. If the message has been sent, the receiving device will clear the
message from the end device. If connection between the Information Center and
Alert Data Integration receiving device is lost for any reason no alarms are sent and
the message “Alarm paging not available” appears in the Information Center system
message area.
Data Reliability
The large Database Server utilizes RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks)
technology to assure fault tolerant data collection and storage in the event of disk
failure. Data are written to multiple disks simultaneously to provide data storage
redundancy. If the Server or Network fails for any reason, Information Centers revert
to local database operation so that patient monitoring data collection are
maintained. The small Database Server does not use RAID.
Remote Access
Error Logs, showing all events that occur in each device on the Network when it
starts and as it operates and giving device operational status, can be accessed
during patient monitoring by means of a modem (if supported) in the Server. This
permits efficient troubleshooting and problem identification without disruption to
patient care. Archive/Restore and Backup Error Log utilities are also available
remotely.
1-26
An Overview of PIIC Features and Functionality
IntelliVue Information Center Web Access
The IntelliVue Information Center (IIC) Web provides remote, read-only access to
physiologic patient data that is resident on a Database Server or M3150
Information Center. Patient Data Review applications can be accessed through the
hospital HIS intranet using standard web browsers, such as Internet Explorer and
Netscape. In a Large network system, up to 100 simultaneous users can view
stored waves, alarms, events, ST segments, trends, and viewable recording strip
data for each patient monitored by the M3150/M3169/M3154.
You can access data with a log-on procedure using the hostname of the M3150
Information Center/Database Server or the IP Address of the Web LAN card as the
URL. The Information Center WEBTM Login screen is represented in Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10: IntelliVue Information Center Web Login
The URL can also be the Server hostname if the hospital LAN DNS (Domain Name
Server) is properly configured. If there are multiple Servers on the Network, each
Server hostname must be unique.
A user-selected Password is required to access the Select Patient screen
(Figure 1-11) from which you can choose a listed patient and the type of stored data
you want to view.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-27
Chapter 1: Introduction
Figure 1-11: Select Patient Screen Accessed via the Web
Note Part of the Web configuration procedure permits specifying the hospital intranet
PCs that can access the Server and review patient data.
All Philips Patient Monitoring products that operate in a LAN environment undergo
industry-standard virus checking as part of the product manufacturing process. If
installed as specified, the Information Center will not introduce a virus onto the
hospital LAN. In order to allow the level of access desired by users while ensuring
that viruses do not affect the operation of the Information Center product, it is
imperative that hospitals are vigilant in maintaining a virus-free intranet. This is the
responsibility of the hospital, not Philips Healthcare.
Configuring the IntelliVue Information Center
Config Wizard, a configuration application that runs at product installation, permits
configuration of the IntelliVue Information Center system hardware and software
(including the Network and many of the Network device parameters). You can
access Config Wizard directly from the Service screen Configuration menu if you
must reconfigure specific parameters after initial software installation.
Warning When Config Wizard runs on the Database Server, all Information Centers and
Clients on the Network will restart and open in local database mode. No patient
data is stored by the Server during this time.
1-28
Configuring the IntelliVue Information Center
Using Service Screen Menu Selections
Access to the Service screen requires a Service Password. An initial Service
Password is provided, which should be used by assigned service personnel who are
properly trained.
Warning Service menu selections with an exclamation point (!) only run when the IntelliVue
Information Center or Client is in non-monitoring mode, during which time no
patient monitoring can occur.
All Service tools are available in English only. The Service screen menu includes:
• Support Logs - access log files providing operational history and Philips device
and network condition.
• Diagnostics - use tools for troubleshooting Philips system problems for Philips
and Windows applications.
• Configuration - access applications for configuration of network and connected
devices (after initial software installation),
• Security - permit or restrict user access to system functions.
• Other Services - access Windows configuration tools and remote access
capability,
• Shutdown - Permits controlled shutdown of Philips application software and
access to the Windows desktop.
• Maintenance - Run applications for troubleshooting the network and connected
devices.
Note If a service application screen appears over the IntelliVue Information Center Main
Screen, use the mouse to move the screen. If a service application is open but not
shown, press Alt + Tab simultaneously to select the application and bring it forward.
The Read Only Config Wizard selection on the Configuration drop-down menu
provides read-only access to network and device settings while all devices are in
monitoring mode.
Configuring Patient Monitoring Applications
Configuration of patient monitoring applications can be done by setting unit-wide
default settings or patient-specific settings. Unit-wide default settings provide
clinical configuration settings as the default values for all patients on the unit. You
can override these default values, however, to tailor monitoring applications to the
needs of a specific patient.
• Unit Wide Default Settings - Unit wide default settings are made in the Unit
Settings function of the Configuration and Support menu of the All Controls
window. This window provides for setting unit wide default values for alarms,
patient data review, output devices (recorder, display, sound volume), and
telemetry frequencies. As noted earlier, unit wide configuration controls are
protected by a Unit Settings Password. Descriptions of unit wide configurations
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-29
Chapter 1: Introduction
and patient specific configurations are described in the Information Center
Instructions for Use.
• Patient Specific Configurations - Unit wide default settings and some system
configurations can be changed by the clinician to meet the needs of a specific
patient using the patient monitoring applications accessed from the All Controls
window. Changes in alarm settings, trend groups, stored waves, patient sector
displays, equipment assignment, and so on, can be made in these applications.
Note All patient-specific settings return to unit-wide default settings when a patient is
discharged.
Archiving and Restoring System Settings
Configuration settings for system and patient monitoring applications can be saved
to archive media so they are available if you need to reconfigure the system after
software upgrades. These archiving and restoration features are available from the
Configuration menu of the Service screen.
Getting Help
On-line Help screens provide additional descriptions of each application. The types
of Help information available include:
• Clinical User Help - access by clicking the Help button in the upper right of each
clinical application.
• Service Help - access from Service applications to provide application
descriptions and configuration procedures.
A Help button appears in the upper right corner of each application window.
Help information from this location is for Philips applications only.
• Windows Help - is a standard part of the Windows operating system for
Microsoft applications that are not part of Philips software.
You can access Windows Help by clicking the Start button from the Windows
desktop and then clicking the Help and Support selection on the Start menu.
1-30
An Overview of the PIIC Patient Monitoring Capabilities
An Overview of the PIIC Patient Monitoring Capabilities
The IntelliVue Information Center is a patient monitoring central station that
provides a wide variety of clinical monitoring applications. The primary application is
the central display of physiological waveforms and parameters from patients
connected to networked bedside and telemetry monitors. Information Center
applications derived from these measured data include alarm annunciation,
arrhythmia analysis, ST segment analysis (for telemetry monitors), and extensive
patient data history review capability.
IntelliVue Information Center application software provides the display of
physiologic waves and parameters for up to 16 patients from bedside and telemetry
monitors connected to the Information Center.
Working with Patient Monitor Plug In Modules
Plug-in modules (Figure 1-12 and Table 1-10) are available for various Philips’
bedside monitoring systems to produce data from connected patient-care devices
that can be viewed at the IntelliVue Information Center. For more information on
these modules and their use, refer to the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions
for Use.
Figure 1-12: Typical Plug-in Modules Used with Philips Patient Monitors
There are three VueLink module options, each interfacing with a specific patientcare device group:
• Stand-alone parameter devices
• Ventilators
• Gas analyzers
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-31
Chapter 1: Introduction
Several external patient-care devices are supported within each device group.
Table 1-10: Typical Philips Plug-in Modules
Philips Model Number
1
Module Name
Abbreviation
M1001B1
Electrocardiogram
ECG
M1002B1
Electrocardiogram/Respiration
M1006B
Invasive Pressure
M1008B1
Noninvasive Blood Pressure
M1012A
Cardiac Output
CO
M1015A
Sidestream Carbon Dioxide
CO2
M1016A
Carbon Dioxide
CO2
M1017A
Fractional Inspired Oxygen
FIO2
M1018A
Transcutaneous Partial Pressure of Oxygen
and Carbon Dioxide
M1020B
Oxygen Saturation/Plethysmography
M1021A
Mixed Venous Oxygen Saturation
M1029A
Temperature
M1032A
VueLink
M1027A
Electroencephalograph
EEG
M1034A
Bispectral Index
BIS
M1014A
Spirometry
M3001A1
Multi-Measurement Server
MMS
M3012A1
Hemodynamic Measurement Server
Extension
HMSE
M3015A1
Microstream Carbon Dioxide
M3016A1
Mainstream Carbon Dioxide
M3014A1
Mainstream Capnography
ECG/Resp
P
NPB
tcpO2/tcpCO2
SpO2/Pleth
SvO2
T
AWF/AWV/AWP
CO2
Compatible with IntelliVue Patient Monitors only.
Displaying Waves and Parameters on the PIIC
Table 1-11 summarizes IntelliVue Information Center patient monitoring
capabilities. The Philips Module column lists the Plug-In Module data source.
1-32
An Overview of the PIIC Patient Monitoring Capabilities
Table 1-11: Information Center Patient Monitoring Capability
Philips
Module
ECG
Waves
ECG
Electrocardiogram
Parameters
HR
Heart Rate
HR-Pls
Difference between HR and Pls rate
PVC
Premature Ventricular Contraction
ST
ST segment values for up to 12 leads
QT
QT interval
QT-HR
Heart rate based on current QT interval
QTc
QT corrected value
dQTc
delta between QT baseline and current
corrected QT value
ECG/Resp
RESP
Respiration
RESP (or RR)
Respiration Rate
P
ABP
Arterial Blood Pressure
ABP1
Arterial Blood Pressure
ART
Arterial Pressure
ART1
Arterial Pressure
PAP
Pulmonary Artery
Pressure
PAP1
Pulmonary Artery Pressure
PAWP
Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure
AO
Aortic Pressure
AO1
Aortic Pressure
LAP
Left Atrial Pressure
LAP
Left Atrial Pressure
RAP
Right Atrial Pressure
RAP
Right Atrial Pressure
CVP
Central Venous Pressure
CVP
Central Venous Pressure
P, P1, P2,
P3, P4
Non-specific Pressure
P1, P11, P21, P31,
P41
Non-specific Pressure
UAP
Umbilical Arterial
Pressure
UAP1
Umbilical Arterial Pressure
BAP
Brachial Arterial
Pressure
BAP1
Brachial Arterial Pressure
FAP
Femoral Arterial
Pressure
FAP1
Femoral Arterial Pressure
UVP
Umbilical Venous
Pressure
UVP
Umbilical Venous Pressure
ICP
Intercranial Pressure
ICP
Intercranial Pressure
IC1, IC2
Alternate Intercranial Pressure
CPP
Cerebral Perfusion Pressure
NBP1
Non-invasive Blood Pressure
PlsNBP
Pulse from NBP
NBP
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-33
Chapter 1: Introduction
Table 1-11: Information Center Patient Monitoring Capability
Philips
Module
Waves
CO
Parameters
CO
Cardiac Output
CI
Cardiac Index
Tblood
Blood Temperature
SVR
Systemic Vascular Resistance
SVRI
Systemic Vascular Resistance Index
CCO
Continuous Cardiac Output
CCI
Continuous Cardiac Index
AWRR
Airway Respiration Rate
EtCO2
End tidal Carbon Dioxide
ImCO2
Inspired Minimum Carbon Dioxide
FIO2
FIO2
Fractional Inspired oxygen
tcpO2/
tcpCO2
tcp O2
Transcutaneous partial press. - O2
tcp CO2
Transcutaneous partial press.- CO2
CO2
SpO2/Pleth
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
SpO2
Arterial oxygen
saturation
SpO2
Arterial oxygen saturation
PLETH
Plethysmogram
PULSE
Pulse Rate
dSpO2
delta between SpO2 measurements
SvO2
SvO2
Mixed venous oxygen saturation
T2
T1, T22 T3, T4
Temperature
DiffT
Temperature difference
SEF
Spectral Edge Frequency
MDF
Mean Dominant Frequency
PPF
Peak Power Frequency
TP
Total Power
BIS
Bispectral Index
EMG
Electromyographic Activity
SEF
Spectral Edge Frequency
TP
Total Power
Bursts
EEG Bursts
EEG
BIS
1-34
EEG1
EEG2
EEG
Electroencephalograph
Electroencephalograph
An Overview of the PIIC Patient Monitoring Capabilities
Table 1-11: Information Center Patient Monitoring Capability
Philips
Module
Spirometry
Predictive
Temperature
1
2
Waves
AWF
AWP
Airway flow
Airway pressure
Parameters
AWF
Airway Flow
AWP
Airway Pressure
AWV
Airway Volume
PIP
Peak Inspiratory Pressure
TV
Tidal Volume
pTOral
pTRect
pTAxil
Predictive Temperature (oral)
Predictive Temperature (rectal)
Predictive Temperature (axillary)
Parameters can be Systolic (SYS), Diastolic (DIAS), and Mean (MEAN).
Temperature labels can include Tart (arterial), Tblood (blood), Tcore (core), Tesoph (esophageal), Trect (rectal),
Tskin (skin), Tven (venous), Tnaso (nasopharyngeal), Tamb (ambiant), Tcereb (cerebral), Tymp (tympanic),
and Tvesic (vesical).
Telemetry Monitoring Overview
The IntelliVue Information Center can display patient data from the ITS4840A/
ITS4850A IntelliVue Smart-hopping Telemetry System.
The Philips ITS4840A/ITS4850A IntelliVue Smart-hopping Telemetry System
provides ambulatory and bedside monitoring of ECG and SpO2 parameters of adult
and pediatric patients in health care facilities. The ITS4840A uses the FCCallocated WMTS spectrums 1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1432 MHz. The ITS4850A
uses the ISM 2.4 MHz spectrum.
For both systems, this bi-directional RF link permits clinically significant data and
control information to be received from and sent to the patient-worn transceivers
and patient-worn monitors (i.e., the MX40 monitor).
PIIC Alarm Annunciation Capabilities
IntelliVue Information Center software provides extensive alarm annunciation
capability and flexibility. Alarm events are detected by comparing physiological data
against pre-configured limit values. Alarms detected by Information Center software
include:
• Arrhythmia alarms (for data from both bedside and telemetry monitors)
• ST Segment alarms (for data from telemetry monitors only)
The Information Center displays alarm events that it detects as well as those
generated by networked monitors.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-35
Chapter 1: Introduction
Alarm
Prioritization
Alarm
Annunciation
Information Center software prioritizes alarms into the following levels of severity:
• Red
***
life threatening (e.g., Asystole).
• Yellow **
alarm limit exceeded (e.g., high heart rate).
• Cyan
INOP condition (e.g., patient leads off).
Alarms are announced by the following indicators at the PIIC:
• Patient Sector turns blue (Red and Yellow alarms only).
• Alarm Tone indicates the alarm severity (no sound for soft INOPs).
• Alarm message appears in Patient Sector and Patient Window of the same color
as the alarm.
For rate alarms, the message indicates a parameter in alarm, the maximum or
minimum value of that parameter, and the alarm limit that was violated (e.g.,
HR 134 > 120).
For event alarms, the message indicates the event that caused the alarm (e.g.,
Asystole).
• ECG recording generates for preset periods preceding and following the alarm
event (Red and Yellow alarms only).
See Figure 1-8 for a sample Main Screen showing two patients in alarm. Note that
Patient Sector CCU2 has the alarm message ***TACHY 160 > 140. Patient Sectors
in alarm are backlighted in blue for easy identification, and the alarm message
window is backlighted in the color of the alarm severity. For example, the CCU2
message shows a red alarm (***) message.
Table 1-12 summarizes the various alarms that can occur, including the
corresponding alarm sound, alarm message location, ECG recording generation,
and alarm meaning. Alarm messages are described in detail in the IntelliVue
Information Center Instructions for Use.
Table 1-12: Information Center Alarm Priorities
Alarm
1-36
Sound
Message
Recording
Meaning
Red (***)
Traditional sound:
continuous, high-pitch
rapid tone
IEC/ISO sound:
repeated bursts of five
rapid high-pitch beeps
On Display
with ***
Yes
Life threatening, e.g.
AYSTOLE
Yellow (**)
Long Yellow
Traditional sound:
continuous, mediumpitch tone
IEC/ISO sound:
repeated bursts of
three rapid low-pitch
beeps
On Display
with **
Yes
Non-arrhythmia alarm limit
violation. Note this may
apply to arrhythmia HR
alarms if your system is
set up for long yellow HR
alarms.
An Overview of the PIIC Patient Monitoring Capabilities
Table 1-12: Information Center Alarm Priorities
Alarm
Sound
Message
Recording
Meaning
Yellow (*)
Arrhythmia
Traditional sound:
noncontinuous,
medium pitch tone
(~10s)
IEC/ISO sound: two
rapid low-pitch beeps
On Display
with *
Yes
Arrhythmia yellow alarm
detected
Yellow (**)
Nurse Call on
Telemetry
Traditional sound:
noncontinuous,
medium pitch tone
(~8s)
IEC/ISO sound: two
rapid low-pitch beeps
On Display
with **
Yes
Nurse Call button on
telemetry transmitter
depressed and system
configured to alarm
Yellow (!!)
Technical
Alarms
Traditional sound:
noncontinuous,
medium pitch tone
(~8s)
IEC/ISO sound:
Repeated bursts of
three rapid low-pitch
beeps
On Display
with !!
Yes
Yellow technical alarm
detected.
Hard INOP (*)
Traditional sound:
continuous, slow lowpitch tone
IEC/ISO sound:
repeated bursts of two
slow low-pitch beeps
On Display
with no *
No
Inoperative condition that
prevents monitoring, e.g.
LEADS OFF, or has direct
effect on the patient, e.g.
NBP CUFF OVERPRESS
Soft INOP (*)
none
On Display
with no *
No
Inoperative condition that
prevents signal
processing, e.g., NOISY
ECG. Monitoring continues
during this INOP condition.
Monitoring Arrhythmia
In addition to patient monitoring, the IntelliVue Information Center system provides
arrhythmia monitoring for both bedside and telemetry monitored patients. The
multi-lead arrhythmia monitoring algorithm is designed for adult, pediatric, and
neonatal patient ECG waveforms for heart rate and ventricular arrhythmia. Multilead arrhythmia monitoring is performed on the user-selected primary ECG lead and
the secondary ECG lead.
The following arrhythmia monitoring functionality is provided for both standard
models of the Information Center system. For both models, beat annotation and
rhythm and ectopic status messages are provided in the Patient Window.
Basic
Arrhythmia
Basic Arrhythmia functionality includes the basic cardiotach functions of heart rate,
PVC rate, beat-to-beat heart rate, and the detection of the following alarms:
• Asystole
• Ventricular fibrillation
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-37
Chapter 1: Introduction
• Ventricular tachycardia
• Extreme bradycardia
• Extreme tachycardia
• Pacer not capturing
• Pacer not pacing
• PVC/min
• High heart rate
• Low heart rate
Enhanced
Arrhythmia
Enhanced Arrhythmia adds the following alarms to Basic Arrhythmia functionality.
• Irregular heart rate
• Nonsustained V-Tach
• Supraventricular Tach
• Ventricular Rhythm
• Run PVCs
• Pair PVCs
• R-on-T PVC
• Multiform PVCs
• Pause
• Ventricular bigeminy
• Ventricular trigeminy
Details of the arrhythmia alarms and user interfaces are provided in the IntelliVue
Information Center Instructions for Use. Details of the arrhythmia algorithm are
described in the Arrhythmia Monitoring Application Note provided in the system
Documentation CD.
ST Segment Monitoring
The Information Center system provides ST segment analysis for adult patients
monitored through telemetry. ST segments can be analyzed for up to six leads of
ECG monitoring (depending on the type of telemetry monitor and patient cable) for
both non-paced and atrially paced patients, but not ventricularly paced patients.
ST segment analysis for patients monitored by bedside monitors is performed at the
bedside monitor and is not available on the IntelliVue Information Center.
Details of displayed ST data, ST alarms, and user interfaces are provided in the
IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use; details of the ST Segment
algorithm are described in the ST Segment Monitoring Application Note provided on
the PIIC User Documentation CD.
1-38
Supported Applications
Supported Applications
Table 1-13 shows the export applications supported in each PIIC system
configuration.
Table 1-13: Supported Applications
M3140
IntelliVue
Information
Center
M3150
IntelliVue
Information
Center
M3150
IntelliVue
Information
Center with
Second NIC
M3169
Small
Database
Server
M3155
IntelliVue
Information
Center
M3154
Database
Server
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Holter Export
x
x
x
x
Research Data
Export
x
x
x
x
Web Access
(IIC Apps on Web)
x
x
x
Application
Description
12-lead Export by
means of network
12-Lead Export by
means of
Removable Media
x
Browser access on
Information Center
x
x
Manual Lab Data
Entry
x
x
M3170
Patient
Link
x
x
x
x
Transfer Patient
Data across DB
servers
x
Access to Patient
Data across DBSs
via Web
x
HL7 Export
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Alert Data
Integration
x
x
x
x
Admit (in-bound)
from Hospital ADT
x
x
x
x
Wave Strip Export
x
x
x
x
Device Location
Alert Data Export
x
xa,b
x
xa
Supported in Release E.01 only
a. Requires a second NIC.
b. M3140 with second NIC is no longer Plug and Play.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
1-39
Chapter 1: Introduction
1-40
2
Hardware Description
This chapter provides an overview the hardware components comprising
the PIIC system and includes:
• PIIC Hardware Components
• PIIC PC/Workstation Platforms
• Database Server Hardware
• PIIC Displays
• Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch
• 2-Channel USB Recorder
• Printer Support
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
• Power Distribution Module
• Network Cables and Connectors
• Specifications
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-1
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
PIIC Hardware Components
As described in Chapter 1, a PIIC system consists of medical software running on a
standard PC or server with a Windows Operating System (OS). The specific
workstation, display, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), and optional printer
shipped with each system may vary depending on the date of purchase.
Displays are sold separately. Philips cannot guarantee compliance with the EMC
Directive of any display not supplied by Philips and will not install those displays.
Throughout this document, only general descriptions of devices are provided. For
more detailed information on a particular device, refer to the appropriate
manufacturer documentation. Figure 2-1 represents typical basic PIIC system
components.







Figure 2-1: PIIC System Basic Components
Reference
Description

PC/Workstation

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

2-channel USB Recorder

Display

Keyboard

Mouse (or trackball)

External Speaker
Hardware components of IntelliVue Information Center systems are typically
industry standard equipment tailored to IntelliVue Information Center patient
monitoring applications.
Hardware components change as newer models with improved performance
features become available. Therefore, this document describes general hardware
features and illustrates typical units supplied at the document printing date.
2-2
PIIC PC/Workstation Platforms
All shipped hardware includes documentation specific to the equipment. Refer to
the IIC Service Documentation included in your media kit for additional PC
workstation and printer documentation.
Warning Hardware and software products (including PCs, servers, peripheral devices, and
network infrastructure components) that are not supplied by Philips as part of an
IntelliVue Information Center system are not approved or supported by Philips for
use with IntelliVue Information Center and Clinical Network/Database Server
systems.
Use of hardware and software that has not been approved by Philips for use with
the Information Center and Clinical Network/Database Server can result in the loss
of central monitoring—including alarm annunciation—or in degradation of
monitoring performance.
This section describes basic and supplementary PIIC system hardware components
including:
• PIIC PC or Server Platform - At the time of publication for this document, the
supported hardware platforms for Release N.01 of the Philips IntelliVue
Information Center are:
-
Hewlett Packard (HP) rp5800 PC, HP rp5700, and HP rp5700 Turbo for
IntelliVue Information Center models: M3140, M3150, M3145/M3155,
M3151 Client,M3169, M3170, and M3177.
-
HP ML350 G6, DL380 G6, HP DL380 G7 and HP DL380 G8 Server for PIIC
Large Database Server model M3154.
• Display
• Keyboard-Video-Mouse (KVM) Switch
• Philips 2-channel Waveform USB Recorder
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
PIIC PC/Workstation Platforms
IntelliVue Information Center software is designed to operate on PC workstations
specifically tailored for Philips applications. Release N.01 of the IntelliVue
Information Center, Client, and Small Database Server uses the HP rp5800,
rp5700, and rp5700 Turbo PC.
This section describes the PIIC PC hardware and includes:
• rp5800 Controls and Connectors
• rp5700 and rp5700 Turbo Controls and Connectors
rp5800 Controls and Connectors
Prior to installing and configuring the HP rp5800 PC, familiarize yourself with the
controls and connectors illustrated in Figure 2-2.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-3
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Slot Slot
1
2
Figure 2-2: HP rp5800 Controls and Connectors
Table 2-1: Descriptions of HP rp5800 Controls and Connectors
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
DVD/CD-ROM Drive
12
Line-out Audio (not used)
2
DVD/CD Eject Button
13
PS/2 Keyboard Connector
3
Power LED
14
PS/2 Mouse Connector
4
Power Button
15
VGA Port (Secondary for PIIC N.01)
5
Hard Drive Activity LED
16
RS-232 Serial Port (1)
6
NIC Activity Indicator LED
17
USB Ports (5)
Use two left ports for 2-channel USB Recorders.
7
NIC Link Indicator LED
18
RJ-45 LAN Connector (Primary NIC)
8
USB Ports with sliding door (2)
(Use top port for USB media)
19
RS-232 Serial Port (2)
9
Horizontal Slots (2)
Top Slot: Audio Amplifier Card
Bottom Slot: Optional Secondary NIC
20
Display Port
(Primary for PIIC N.01 via Display Port-to-VGA Converter)
10
Power Cord Connector
21
24-Volt USB + Power Port (not used)
11
Line-in Audio (not used)
22
Vertical Slots (2)
2-4
PIIC PC/Workstation Platforms
HP rp5800
Adapter Cards
Table 2-2 lists the PC adapter cards that may be installed in the HP rp5800 PC.
Note that the Audio Amplifier Card is shipped with all M3150, M3155/M3145,
M3151, and M3140 PIIC systems. The NIC is installed when ordered as part of the
PIIC system.
Table 2-2: PC Adapter Cards for the HP rp5800 PC
Adapter Card Location
Philips
System
M3150
Vertical Slot 1
Low Profile
Open
Vertical Slot 2
Low Profile
Open
Horizontal Upper
Full Height
Audio Amplifier Card
4535 642 58521
Audio Input Cable
4535 642 59361
M3155/M3145
Audio Amplifier Card
4535 642 58521
M3151
Horizontal Lower
Full Height
Network Interface Card
(NIC)
4535 642 93731
Options C02, C14, C17,
C23, C67, C74, C76
Open
Open
Audio Input Cable
4535 642 59361
M3177
Open
Open
Open
Open
M3140
Open
Open
Audio Amplifier Card
4535 642 58521
Network Interface Card
(NIC)
4535 642 93731
Audio Input Cable
4535 642 59361
M3170
Open
Open
Open
Network Interface Card
(NIC)
4535 642 93731
Options C02, C14
M3169
Open
Open
Open
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
Network Interface Card
(NIC)
4535 642 93731
2-5
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
rp5800 Audio
Amplifier Card
The Audio Amplifier Card (P/N: 453564258521) is a PCI-Express® (PCIe®) adapter
card installed in the HP rp5800 PC that provides new audio capabilities for your PIIC
system.
The Audio Amplifier Card is equipped with two amplifiers and two D-Connector
outputs so that two speakers may be driven simultaneously. Both outputs emit the
same PIIC Alarm and PC Diagnostic sounds. Outputs #1 and #2 on the Audio
Amplifier Card each support either a directly connected speaker or a Philips Remote
IIC Speaker Kit (P/N: 865053).
Previously, the Audio Amplifier Card was shipped with two connecting cables, but it
is now shipped with only a single connecting cable as illustrated in Figure 2-3.
With this single cable, Jumper J11 must be in its default position (across pins 1&2)
PC Beeps Only. With Jumper J11 in its default setting, the internal PC speaker is
connected to the main PC board and will annunciate PC-boot-diagnostic beeps only.
Current Connecting Cable
Configuration
4535 642 59361
Previous Connecting Cable
Configuration
4535 642 62701
(Y-cable No Longer Shipped)
4535 642 59361
Figure 2-3: Audio Amplifier Card is Now Shipped with a Single Connecting Cable
Warning If the HP rp5800 PC internal speaker is connected to the Audio Amplifier Card using
a Y-cable, the amplifier will be overloaded and could potentially result in audio
issues including: alerts distortion, thermal shutdown, and premature failures.
2-6
PIIC PC/Workstation Platforms
Connecting
Video Displays
to the rp5800
PC
Note the following guidelines when connecting one or two video displays to the
rp5800 PC:
• Single-display Systems: Connect the display directly into the VGA Port Connector
(refer to Connector 15 in Figure 2-2) located on the rp5800 PC rear panel.
• Dual-display Systems: Connect the secondary display directly into the VGA Port
(refer to Connector 15 in Figure 2-2) located on the rp5800 PC rear panel.
Connect the primary display to a Display Port-to-VGA Converter (Philips P/N
4535 642 93721) as shown in Figure 2-4 and then connect the Display Port-toVGA Converter to the Display Port (refer to Connector 20 in Figure 2-2) located
on the rp5800 rear panel.
Connect to
Display Port on
Back of rp5800 PC
Connect VGA
Cable from
Secondary
Display Here
Figure 2-4: Display Port-to-VGA Converter
Caution All Video Graphics Array (VGA) cables should have connector pins 9, 12, and 15
wired to avoid video resolution issues. The use of a blue insulator between the pins
generally, but not always, indicates that pins 9, 12, and 15 are wired.
Video
Resolution
As part of the PIIC installation process, the initial gray Configuration Wizard screen
will appear. If the Microsoft Windows resolution is not automatically set the same as
the native resolution of the connected display, the initial Configuration Wizard
screen will appear too large. In this case, follow these steps to correct the display
resolution issue:
1. Open Screen Resolution by clicking the Start button, clicking Control Panel, and
then, under Appearance and Personalization, clicking Adjust screen resolution.
2. Click the drop-down list next to Resolution, move the slider to set the resolution
to 1280 x 1024, and then click Apply.
3. Click Keep to use the new resolution.
4. Click OK to exit the Screen Resolution Window.
Note the following information about this procedure:
• If it ever becomes necessary to adjust the display resolution after initial
setup, follow steps 1 through 3 from the procedure listed above.
• For Support Users using a single display to install or service a remote,
dual-display PIIC; the Adjust screen resolution window may appear on the
“other” display. In this case: press Alt-spacebar, then release these keys.
Now press and release the m key (for Move). Finally, use the left or right
arrow key to move the Display Properties window onto the Support User
display.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-7
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
rp5700 and rp5700 Turbo Controls and Connectors
Prior to installing and configuring the HP rp5700 PC, familiarize yourself with the
controls and connectors illustrated in Figure 2-5 and described in Table 2-3.
Note The rp5700 and rp5700 Turbo hardware platforms are identical except for the
processor.
.
Figure 2-5: HP rp5700 Controls and Connectors
2-8
PIIC PC/Workstation Platforms
Table 2-3: HP rp5700 Controls and Connectors
1
DVD/CD-ROM Drive
11
PS/2 Keyboard Connector
2
DVD/CD Drive Activity LED
12
UPS Connector
3
DVD/CD Eject Button
13
Parallel Connector
4
Hard Drive Activity LED
14
Main Display Connector
5
Power Button
15
Not Used
6
Power LED
16
USB Ports (4)
Use top (2) and bottom left ports for 2-Channel
Recorder; use bottom right for first Touch Screen.
7
USB Ports (2)
Use top port for Memory Stick; use bottom
port for second Touch Screen.
17
Clinical Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
8
Horizontal Upper Slot, Audio Card Connector
for speaker. The external speaker
connection must be secure so it cannot be
accidentally disconnected.
18
Horizontal Lower Slot, Optional Hospital LAN NIC
Connector
9
Power Cord Connector
19
Not Used
10
PS/2 Mouse Connector
20
Vertical Slot 1, Second Display Connector for Dual
Display systems
HP rp5700
Display
Connectors
HP rp5700
Adapter Cards
For Single Display systems, plug the Main Display into the PC 15-pin Main Display
connector.
For Dual Display systems, plug the Main Display into the Main Display connector,
then plug the Second Display into the Second Video Card connector.
Table 2-4 lists the PC adapter cards that may be installed in the HP rp5700 PC.
Note that the Audio Amplifier Card is shipped with all M3150, M3155/M3145,
M3151, and M3140 PIIC systems. The NIC is installed when ordered as part of the
PIIC system.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-9
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Table 2-4: HP rp5700 Adapter Cards
Card Location
System
4535 640 67761
(M3150)
Vertical Slot 1
Low Profile
Second Video
4535 640 78921
Vertical Slot 2
Low Profile
Open
Horizontal Upper
Full Height
Audio Card
4535 634 88821
(M3180-60030)
Option C01
Horizontal Lower
Full Height
Network Interface
Card (NIC)
4535 640 26281
(M1381-66407)
(4535 640 67281 cable)
Options C02, C14,
C17, C23, C67, C74,
C76
4535 640 67761
(M3155/M3145)
Audio Card
4535 634 88821
(M3180-60030)
4535 640 67761
(M3151)
4535 640 67761
(M3177)
Open
Open
(4535 640 67281 cable)
Second Video
4535 640 78921
Open
Open
Open
Open
Audio Card
4535 634 88821
(M3180-60030)
NIC
4535 640 26281
(M1381-66407)
Option C01
4535 640 67761
(M3140)
Open
(4535 640 67281 cable)
4535 640 67761
(M3170)
Open
Open
Open
NIC
4535 640 26281
(M1381-66407)
Options C02, C14
4535 640 67761
(M3169)
2-10
Open
Open
Open
NIC
4535 640 26281
(M1381-66407)
Database Server Hardware
Database Server Hardware
With Release N.01, the IntelliVue Information Center Large Database Server runs on
the HP Proliant ML350 G6 Tower Server, DL380 G6 Rack Server, and DL380 G7
Rack Server. This section describes the PIIC DBS hardware and includes:
• HP ML350 G6 Tower Server Controls and Connectors
• HP DL380 G6 Rack Server Controls and Connectors
• HP DL380 G7 Database Server Controls and Connectors
• HP DL380 G8 Database Server Controls and Connectors
HP ML350 G6 Tower Server Controls and Connectors
HP ML350 G6
Server Front
Figure 2-6: HP ML350 G6 Front Controls and Connectors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DVD Drive
DVD Drive LED
DVD Drive Eject Button
Hot Swap Drive Bays
Access Panel
Front Bezel
USB Connectors
UID Button
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
UID LED
Network Activity (NIC) 2 LED
Network Activity (NIC) 1 LED
External Health LED
Internal Health LED
Power On LED
Power On/Standby Button
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-11
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
HP ML350 G6
Server Rear
Figure 2-7: HP ML350 G6 Rear Controls and Connectors
2-12
1
Power Cord Connector
6
Video Connector
2
LAN Connector 2
Hospital LAN (Optional)
7
PS/2 Keyboard Connector
3
LAN Connector 1
Monitoring LAN
8
PS/2 Mouse Connector
4
USB Ports (2)
9
Serial UPS Connector
5
iLO2 Connector
Database Server Hardware
HP DL380 G6 Rack Server Controls and Connectors
Figure 2-8: HP DL380G6 Rack Server Controls and Connectors
1
Quick Release Levers (2)
2
Systems Insight Display
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hard Drive Bays
DVD Drive
USB Ports (2)
Video Connector
PCI Slot 5
PCI Slot 4
PCI Slot 1
HP Smart Array P400 Controller
10 USB Ports (2)
11 Video Connector
12 NIC1 Connector
Optional Hospital LAN NIC Connector
13 NIC2 Connector
Clinical Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
14 PS/2 Mouse Connector
15 PS/2 Keyboard Connector
16 Serial Connector
17 PCI Slot 3
18 iLO 2 Connector
19 NIC3 Connector
20 NIC4 Connector
21 PCI Slot 2
22 PCI Slot 6
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-13
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
HP DL380 G7 Database Server Controls and Connectors
Figure 2-9: HP G7 Server Controls and Connectors
1
Quick Release Levers (2)
2
Systems Insight Display
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Hard Drive Bays
DVD Drive
USB Ports (2)
Video Connector
PCI Slot 5
PCI Slot 4
PCI Slot 1
HP Smart Array P400 Controller
10 USB Ports (2)
11 Video Connector
2-14
12 NIC1 Connector
Optional Clinical LAN NIC Connector
13 NIC2 Connector
Hospital Network (Monitoring LAN) Connector
14 PS/2 Mouse Connector
15 PS/2 Keyboard Connector
16 Serial Connector
17 PCI Slot 3
18 iLO Connector
19 NIC3 Connector - Not Used
20 NIC4 Connector - Not Used
21 PCI Slot 2
22 PCI Slot 6
Database Server Hardware
HP DL380 G8 Database Server Controls and Connectors
#4
#1
Figure 2-10: HP DL380e Gen8 Server Controls and Connectors
Table 2-5: HP DL380e Gen8 Server Controls and Connectors
1
Video Connector
12
Power Supply LED
2
Optical Drive
13
Power Supply Bay 2 (Shown Populated)
3
SFF Drives
14
UID LED
4
Health LED
15
NIC Connectors - The NIC Connectors are labeled
1 to 4 from right to left. PIIC N.01 supports use of NIC
Connectors 1 and 2 only.
5
NIC Status LED
16
Serial Connector
6
Power On/Standby Button
17
Video Connector
7
UID Button/LED
18
USB Ports
8
USB Ports
19
iLO Connector (not used)
9
PCIe Slot 1
20
USB Ports
10
PCIe Slot 4
21
PCIe Slot 2
11
Power Supply Bay 1
22
PCIe Slot 3
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-15
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
PIIC Displays
This section presents an overview of the video display options for the PIIC system.
Flat Panel Displays
Color Flat Panel Displays (Figure 2-11) are available as purchased products. The
Color Flat Panel Display has a screen resolution of 1280 x 1024.
Video In
On/Off
Switch
AC Power In
Figure 2-11: Flat Panel Display Front and Rear Panel Controls/Connectors
Color Flat Panel Touch Screens (Figure 2-12) are also available for purchase for use
with the PIIC system.
Video Cable
Power
Figure 2-12: Flat Panel Display Front and Rear Panel
2-16
USB Cable
PIIC Displays
Table 2-6 lists display resolution, layout, and patient capacity.
Table 2-6: Display Resolution, Layout, and Patient Capacity
Columns x
Rows
Patients
1280 x 1024
2x8
16
1920 x 1080
3x8
24
2560 x 1440
4x8
32
2560 x 1600
4x8
32
2560 x 1440
With the Application Window
docked left/right
2x8
16
2560 x 1600
With the Application Window
docked left/right
2x8
16
Display Resolution
Dual Display Option
The Dual Display Option (available for IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients)
permits expanding the viewing area to two Displays. With two Displays, the Patient
Sectors of the Main Screen appear on the first Display, and patient data review
applications and control screens appear on the second Display. The second Display
must be ordered separately.
Video Resolution
Caution All Video Graphics Array (VGA) cables should have connector pins 9, 12, and 15
wired to avoid video resolution issues. The use of a blue insulator between the pins
generally, but not always, indicates that pins 9, 12, and 15 are wired.
As part of the PIIC installation process, the initial gray Configuration Wizard screen
will appear. If the Microsoft Windows resolution is not automatically set the same as
the native resolution of the connected display, the initial Configuration Wizard
screen will appear too large. In this case, follow these steps to correct the display
resolution issue:
1. Open Screen Resolution by clicking the Start button, clicking Control Panel, and
then, under Appearance and Personalization, clicking Adjust screen resolution.
2. Click the drop-down list next to Resolution, move the slider to set the resolution
to 1280 x 1024, and then click Apply.
3. Click Keep to use the new resolution.
4. Click OK to exit the Screen Resolution Window.
Note the following information about this procedure:
• If it ever becomes necessary to adjust the display resolution after initial
setup, follow steps 1 through 3 from the procedure listed above.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-17
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
• For Support Users using a single display to install or service a remote,
dual-display PIIC; the Adjust screen resolution window may appear on the
“other” display. In this case: press Alt-spacebar, then release these keys.
Now press and release the m key (for Move). Finally, use the left or right
arrow key to move the Display Properties window onto the Support User
display.
Remote Slave Displays
The Remote Slave Display Option permits viewing IntelliVue Information Center data
at remote locations. Remote Display cable lengths may be up to 90 m (300 ft) in
length. Up to six Remote Slave Displays can be connected to an IntelliVue
Information Center system. Remote Displays must be ordered separately.
The Remote Slave Display Option requires use of a Video Splitter (Figure 2-13). The
6-way Video Splitter uses AC power. The video output of the PC connects to 5 BNC
Video Splitter inputs; the remote Displays connect to the 5 BNC Video Splitter
outputs.
Input
(RGBHV)
AC Power Input
Outputs
(RGBHV)
Figure 2-13: Six-way Video Splitter for Use with Remote Displays
Customer-supplied Displays
Table 2-7 lists specifications for displays and video cables connected to IntelliVue
Information Centers and Clients.
General Display
Specifications
Note the following guidelines for displays and video cables not supplied by Philips
as part of an Information Center system:
• The support user is responsible for all aspects of Display selection, purchase,
installation, repair, and disposal
• Philips cannot assure system compatibility
• Philips cannot assure compliance with the ECG aspect ratio and 25 mm/s
+10% sweep speed specification of Information Center software, which
complies with the ANSI/AAMI EC-13 Standard for Cardiac Monitors, Heart-Rate
Meters, and Alarms.
2-18
PIIC Displays
Table 2-7: Specifications for Customer-supplied Displays for PIIC
Specification
Value
Screen Resolution
1280 x 1024
Vertical Refresh Rate
60 Hz
Viewable width of 1280 dots
This value is the Visible Display Width that is entered in
the Config Wizard Device Setup and Support
Information Screen. The valid range is 267 to 1188 mm.
Red, Green, & Blue Video Inputs
~ 0.7 V p-p
Vertical & Horizontal Multi-Sync Inputs
5 VTTL
Video Cable Connector
HD 15-pin Male
Color Depth
24-bit (or greater) True Color
Note The ECG aspect ratio and 25 mm/s + 10% specifications are likely to be met with a
high quality display and video cable that satisfies the specifications recommended
in Table 2-7.
Some displays have visible and/or protruding menu keys that can interfere with the
operation of the Application software. Verify when installing customer supplied
displays that these buttons are protected from the possibility of interference.
Flat Panel
Specifications
A small number of missing pixels is normal for flat panel (LCD) displays and is not an
indication that the display is not meeting specifications and needs to be replaced.
The following specifications for a typical flat panel display are listed here:
Monitor Backlight (Brightness)
Working Conditions:
-
Ambient temperature: 25 +/- 5 degrees C
-
Brightness control (Vvr4): 0V
Definition of defect:
-
Brightness falls under 50% of the minimum brightness value of the flat panel
display (Minimum brightness 210 cd/m2)
-
The lamp does not turn on
-
The lamp starts flashing
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-19
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Inspection Specifications for Pixel Drop Out
Area to be inspected:
-
Inside display dot area (345.6 x 276.48 mm) - display dot area is the “active
area”
-
One pixel consists of 3 dots (red, green and blue)
Bright pixels definition:
Bright pixels are classified as follows (based on luminance samples)
-
L>0, 75Lx+0, 25Ln (according to ISO 13406-2:2001)
-
L is the measured luminance of the pixel
-
Lx is the average pixel response to a maximum luminance command (e.g.
white)
-
Ln is the average pixel response to a minimum luminance command (e.g.,
black)
Number of bright pixels standard
-
Bright pixels: 15 or less
-
Number of two bright pixels connections: 4 or fewer
Note Display should be all black when bright spots are counted. Distance between
defects is 5 mm or more. Distance to the third defect should be 20 mm or more.
Dark pixels definition
Dark pixels are classified as follows (based on luminance samples)
-
L < 0, 75 Ln + 0, 25 Lx (according to ISO 13406-2:2001)
-
L is the measured luminance of the pixel
-
Lx is the average pixel response to a maximum luminance command (e.g.,
white)
-
Ln is the average pixel response to a minimum luminance command (e.g.,
black)
Number of dark pixels standard
-
Number of defects: 16 or less
-
Number of two dark pixels connections: 5 or less
Note Display should be all white when dark spots are counted. Distance between defects
is 5 mm or more. Distance to the third defect should be 20 mm or more.
2-20
Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch
Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch
A Keyboard-Video-Mouse (KVM) Switch (Figure 2-14) permits control of up to four
IntelliVue Information Centers with one keyboard and mouse. This permits
managing 64 patients with one set of controls. It also permits a Single Display to
serve as the Second Display for all IntelliVue Information Centers.
Caution A Touch Screen connected to a KVM Switch cannot be used as the second Display.
The USB keyboard shipped with PIIC N.01 (starting November, 2013) is
incompatible with the 4-port KVM Switch with PS/2-style connectors
(P/N M3150-60025).
The KVM Switch front panel SELECT button selects which Information Center the
keyboard and mouse will control, and LEDs indicate selected PC and which PCs
have power turned on. Rear panel USER PORTs connect to the single keyboard,
mouse, and second display, and other ports connect to corresponding ports on the
rear of Information Center workstations. The KVM Switch can be used with only a
keyboard, only a keyboard and mouse, or a keyboard, mouse, and second display
(can not be used with dual resting display option) Complete installation instructions
are included in the KVM Switch Installation Note that comes with the device.
SELECT PC Button
GREEN LED
Illuminated = Attached PC
is turned ON
AMBER LED
Illuminated = Selected PC
USER Ports
Figure 2-14: Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch
2-Channel USB Recorder
The 2-Channel USB Recorder (Figure 2-15) is a 50mm wide thermal array recorder
that provides high-resolution, high -quality waveforms. The grid and waveforms are
printed simultaneously to assure accurate registration. The recorder has the
capability for up to two waveforms with multiple lines of annotation including:
• Patient name (as in the Admit window)
• Patient Medical Record number (as in the Admit window)
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-21
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
• Bed label
• Date and time of the first printed waveform
• Alarm/INOP message of the highest priority, most recent event
• Patient parameters available at the time of recording
• Recorder speed
The following parts are bundled into the 862120 USB Recorder System:
• USB Recorder Device
• Universal Power Supply
• 5 meter DC Power Cable
• DC Power Y-cable (included when A02 option (dual recorders) is ordered)
• 5 meter USB Cable
• Combiner Bracket (included when A02 option (dual recorders) is ordered)
• Speaker Mount
• Localized Power Cord
If you are connecting more than one recorder together, use the appropriate
connector cable to connect the recorders to the Universal Power Module.
Figure 2-15: 2-Channel USB Recorder
Table 2-8: 2-Channel USB Recorder Controls and Connectors
2-22
1
Run/Cont key - prints a continuous recording
4
2
Stop key - stops the currently printing
recording
5
3
Power - connect to Universal Power Module
6
USB Connector - Connect to PC
Strain Relief Clip
LED
2-Channel USB Recorder
Table 2-9 lists status LED descriptions for the 2-Channel USB Recorder.
Table 2-9: 2-Channel USB Recorder Status LEDs
LED State
Description
Blinking Green
Continuous Record Mode
Blinking Yellow
After recorder powers up but before communication is
established with the host Information Center
Communication is lost
“Paper Out” condition is detected
“Door Open” condition is detected
Green On
Normal Record Mode - either printing or in standby
LEDs Off
No power
Table 2-10 provides troubleshooting information that you may use to troubleshoot
issues with the 2-Channel USB Recorder.
Table 2-10: Troubleshooting Information for the 2-Channel USB Recorder
LED
Behavior
Indication
Action
Off
“USB 2-Channel Recorder Not Ready”
Power supply has failed or has been disconnected
Verify AC power connection to power adapter and
power cable connection to recorder. If power
adapter LED is off, replace power.
Blinking
Yellow
“USB 2-Channel Recorder Not Ready”
Communication with the Information Center is lost
Verify the Information Center is running normally.
Check all recorder cabling. If LED is still blinking,
disconnect the power cable from the Recorder
and wait 20 seconds. Reconnect power to the
Recorder device.
Blinking
Yellow
“USB 2-Channel Recorder hardware fault”
Recorder device has malfunctioned
Disconnect power cable from the Recorder and
wait 20 seconds. Reconnect power. If LED is still
blinking, replace the recorder device.
Blinking
Yellow
“USB 2 -Channel Recorder out of paper”
Recorder is out of paper
Install new paper: M4816/M4817A.
Blinking
Yellow
“USB 2 -Channel Recorder door is open”
Recorder door is open
Check paper supply and close door.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-23
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Printer Support
PIIC Release N.01 supports printers that use the Hewlett Packard Universal Printing
PCL 5 driver (Refer to the HP website for a complete list of compatible printers).
Printers may be located on the Monitoring or Hospital LAN, and are configured using
the Windows Print Manager Service. If you want to use a printer on the Hospital
LAN, you must first configure it at the DBS and then share it with other devices in
the domain.
Note If you will be printing reports from the bedside, the maximum number of characters
allowed for a printer name is 24.
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Philips requires that each IntelliVue Information Center and Database Server be
connected to an Uninterruptible Power Suppply (UPS) so that the PIIC system
component may execute a graceful shutdown in the event that source power is
interrupted or lost.
UPSs that may be used with PIIC system components include:
• UPS with Hardware Watchdog
• DBS Rack-mount UPS
Note This section presents only an overview of some of the UPS models available for use
with PIIC components. Refer to the supplied UPS vendor documentation for
complete installation, configuration, troubleshooting, and use procedures for the
UPS supplied with your PIIC system.
UPS with Hardware Watchdog
The UPS with Hardware Watchdog Timer is used with IntelliVue Information Center
Models M3140, M3150, M3145, M3155, M3151, M3169, M3170, and M3177 to
restart the IntelliVue Information Center in response to a detected PC and Operating
System (OS) lockup conditions as caused by a power interruption or loss.
Figure 2-16: UPS with Hardware Watchdog
Presently, Philips is shipping a TrippLite SmartPro UPS (Figure 2-16) as the UPS with
Hardware Watchdog component that includes the following bundled parts:
• SmartPro Rack Mount 500VA Watchdog UPS (120V (US) or 230V (Europe))
• Rack Mounting Bracket
2-24
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
• Upright Tower Mounting Bracket
• Owners Manual
• Localized AC Power Cord
DBS Rack-mount UPS
Presently, Philips supplies these rack-mount model UPSs for use with PIIC DBSs:
• APC® Rack Mount 1000VA 120V UPS (P/N: 453564332421) - This model UPS
is to be used with US, 120 V, 50/60 Hz power systems and non-US 100-127 V,
50/60 Hz power systems.
• APC Rack Mount 1000VA 230V UPS (P/N: 453564332441) - This model UPS is
to be used with European and international, 230 V, 50/60 Hz power systems.
• APC Rack Mount 1500VA 100V UPS (P/N: 453564332431) - This model UPS is
to be used with Japanese, 100 V 50/60 Hz power systems.
Caution The PIIC N.01 server does not support the serial interface to an Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS). If there is a serial cable connecting a Philips-supplied or
customer-supplied UPS to a PIIC server, you must disconnect the cable prior to
upgrading the server to PIIC N.01.
Figure 2-17: Rack-mount UPS for PIIC DBSs
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-25
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Power Distribution Module
A Power Distribution Module (M3166A) is provided with all Japanese orders to
comply with Japanese regulatory requirements. It is designed to accept selectable
input voltages from 100V to 240V (at 50-60 Hz) and produce selectable low output
voltages of 100-127 V and selectable high output voltages of 200-254V.
Its input rating is 1440 VA and its output rating is 1400VA. AC output voltages are
electrically isolated from AC input voltages. The Power Distribution Module rear
panel is shown in Figure 2-18. The front panel contains the On/Off switch.
High Output Voltage
Low Output Voltage
Input Voltage
J2 700 VA
J1 1400 VA
J4
100/120-127/200/220-240V
50-60 Hz
1440 VA
120/120-127/120/110-120 V
240/240-254/240/220-240 V
J3
P1
J5
J6
Positive
Earth
Terminal
Output Voltage
(all high or low)
Equipotential
Terminal
!
240/240-254/
240/220-240 V
1400 VA
S3
120/120-127/
120/110-120 V
700 VA
S2
S1
S2 S1
100 V
120-127 V
200 V
220-240 V
Voltage
Switches
Figure 2-18: Power Distribution Module
A description of the PMD front panel controls and outputs follows.
• J1 is a high output voltage receptacle.
• J2 is a low output voltage receptacle.
• J3-J6 are additional output receptacles that are either high or low voltage
depending on the position of switch S3.
• S3 sets voltage output of J3-J6 high if set to 240/240-254/240/220-240 V~
• S3 sets voltage output of J3-J6 low if set to 120/120-127/120/110-120 V~
• S1 and S2 should be set to match the input voltage on receptacle P1 according
to the following table.
2-26
Network Cables and Connectors
Table 2-11: Input and Output Voltages for S1 & S2 Switch Settings
if
P1
Input Voltage
set
S2
set
S1
then1
J1 & J3-J6
Output Voltage HIgh
or2
J2 & J3-J6
Output Voltage Low
100 V
240 V
120 V
120 - 127 V
240 - 254 V
120 - 127 V
200 V
240 V
120 V
220 - 240 V
220 - 240 V
110 - 120 V
1
If S3 set to 240/240-254/240/220-240 VAC
2
If S3 set to 120/120-127/240/110120 VAC
Note The Input Voltage (P1) for Japanese installations is typically 100V.
Network Cables and Connectors
Passive hardware components for the IntelliVue Clinical Network (ICN) standard
Ethernet include:
Passive hardware components for the IntelliVue Clinical Network (ICN) standard
Ethernet include:
• Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cables
• Fiber Optic Cables
• SFP Modules
• RJ-45 Wall Boxes
• 24-port Patch Panels
These components are described in the sections that follow.
Note Third-party personnel who install the cable plant used for the Philips IntelliVue
Clinical Network must be certified to install Category 5 (or greater) Unshielded
Twisted Pair and/or fiber cabling. Upon completion of the cable plant installation,
the cable installation personnel must provide Philips (and the customer, i.e. the
hospital IT staff) with documented segment-by-segment test results that
demonstrate the quality and reliability of the cable plant installation.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-27
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
UTP Cables
Network signals are transmitted primarily on Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
Category 5 (CAT5) or greater cable. UTP CAT5 cable is regulated by the Computer
Communication Industry Association (CCIA) according to standards developed by
the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) and the Telecommunication Industries
Association (TIA). These standards, EIA/TIA 568A, were first published in 1991 and
their purpose is to specify generic telecommunication cabling systems to support a
multiproduct, multi-vendor environment and provide direction for commercial
telecommunication product design.
Category 5 is one of the EIA/TIA 568A standards and limits cable runs to less than
100 meters (328 ft.) from a telecommunication closet patch panel to the outlet wall
box. Category 5 UTP cable can handle data transmission rates up to 100 Mbps and
has an impedance of approximately 100 ohms.
Philips supplies orange-colored UTP cables to distinguish its equipment from nonpatient monitoring network equipment.
Category 5 UTP cable consists of four pairs of unshielded, 24 AWG solid copper
wires with Polyolefin or Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (FEP) jackets contained in a
plenum rated PVC sheath. The four pairs of wires are color coded as shown in Figure
1 with a major color (blue, orange, green, brown) paired with white as PRIMARY
colors and stripes. The pairs are also numbered—1, 2, 3, 4—as shown in
Figure 2-19.
PVC Sheath
WHITE/blue
BLUE
2
WHITE/orange
ORANGE
3
WHITE/green
4
GREEN
24AWG Solid
Copper Wires
WHITE/brown
BROWN
Jacket
1
PRIMARY
COLOR
stripe
color
Pair #
Figure 2-19: UTP Category 5 Cable Showing Wire Pairing
CAT5 cable is compatible with either the 568A or 568B wiring standards for RJ-45
connectors and jacks. Figure 2 shows the pairing scheme and signal assignments
used by UTP cable on the IntelliVue Clinical Network.
Pair 2 of the UTP cable (ORANGE and WHITE-orange wires) receives the Network
data. Pair 2 is connected to pins 3 and 6 of the 568A version and pins 1 and 2 of
the 568B versions.
Pair 3 of the UTP cable (GREEN and WHITE-green wires) transmits the Network
data. Pair 3 is connected to pins 1 and 2 of the 568A version and pins 3 and 6 of
the 568B versions.
2-28
Network Cables and Connectors
Figure 2-20 shows end views of both versions of RJ-45 connectors and jacks.
568A Version
Pair2
Pair4 Pair1 Pair3
Pair 2: Receive
Pair 3: Transmit
RJ-45
Connectors
568B Version
Pair3
Pair4 Pair1 Pair2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BR W-br O W-bl BL W-o G W-g
BR W-br G W-bl BL W-g O W-o
Pair3
Pair2
RJ-45
Jacks
Pair3 Pair1 Pair4
Pair2 Pair1 Pair4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
W-g G W-o BL W-bl O W-br BR
W-o O W-g BL W-bl G
W-br BR
Figure 2-20: UTP Category 5 Connectors and Jacks
Note Direct connect patch cables and in-wall wiring use the 568A version on both ends.
Cross over cables use a 568A version on one end and a 568B version on the other.
Therefore, they invert the transmission and reception wires. When purchased from
Philips, cross over cables have black boots on cable ends for identification.
Fiber Optic Cables
For noise immunity or extended distance cabling, single- or multi-mode fiber optic
cable is used on the IntelliVue Clinical Network.
Multimode fiber optic cable consists of a 2-cord pair with each cord having a 50 or
62.5 micron fiber optic element core. Each cord is then surrounded by a
thermoplastic buffer layer, a Kevlar jacket, and a PVC sheath. One fiber strand is
used for TX (transmit) and the other for RX (receive). See Figure 2-21.
PVC Sheath
Kevlar Jacket
50 or 62.5 micron Fiber Optic Element
Thermoplastic Buffer Layer
Cladding
TX (transmit)
RX (receive)
Figure 2-21: Multi-mode Fiber Optic Cable Cross Section
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-29
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Fiber optic cable is designed for minimal signal attenuation at wavelengths of 850,
1300, and 1550 nanometers. IntelliVue Clinical Network applications uses 1300
nm. A media translator is required when converting between UTP and fiber optic
cables.
Note Single, continuous-length fiber optic cables are limited to 1000 meters (3281 ft.).
You must use 100 Mbps, full-duplex connections on fiber optic runs. 100/half
connections are not supported over fiber.
Fiber optic cables use four different types of connectors, SC, ST, MT-RJ, or LC as
shown in Figure 2-22.
SC Connector
MT-RJ Connector
ST Connector
LC Connector
Figure 2-22: Fiber Optic Cable Connectors
SC connectors have a square cross section and are used with a Network Switch.
ST connectors have a round cross section and are used with the 10 Mbps Media
Translator.
MT-RJ connectors are small form-factor fiber optic connectors that resemble the
RJ-45 connectors used in Ethernet networks.
LC connectors look just like SC connectors, but they are half the size with a 1.25mm
ferrule instead of 2.5mm.
SFP Modules
Philips supports use of Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Modules for installation
in uplink ports to interconnect network switches and routers. Refer to the ICN
Installation Guidelines and Topologies Guide for a complete list of supported SFPs.
Wall Boxes
RJ-45 wall boxes for UTP cable connectors are available from Philips for connecting
Patient Monitors, Information Centers, Clients, and the Database Server to the
IntelliVue Clinical Network. Both dual-port (Option M3199AI #A10) and quad-port
(Option M3199AI #A12) wall boxes are available for US installations.
2-30
Network Cables and Connectors
Surface mount kits for mounting dual-port wall boxes (Option M3199AI #A11) and
quad-port wall boxes (Option M3199AI #A13) are also available. Single port wall
boxes and surface mount kits are also available for certain countries. See your
Philips Representative for specific part numbers.
A dual-port RJ-45 wall box is shown in Figure 2-23. Each wall box includes places for
labeling UTP cables connecting to each port. A typical label would include the patch
panel number and port number the cable connects to. For example, a label 2-14
would indicate that the connecting UTP cable came from patch panel 2 - port 14.
UTP wire connections for each pin of port jacks are the 568A Version shown in
Figure 2-20. Wiring of UTP cables to internal connectors of wall boxes must be
performed by a certified CAT5 cable plant installer. They should be wired as shown
in Figure 2-23.
Port A Label
RJ-45 Port A
Wall Box
RJ-45 Port B
Port B Label
BR
OR
BL
UE
GR
AN
GE
EE
N
OW
RJ-45 Wiring Connections
N
PRIMARY COLOR/stripe color
8
BROWN
7
WHITE/brown
6
GREEN
5
WHITE/green
4
ORANGE
3
WHITE/orange
2
BLUE
1
WHITE/blue
Figure 2-23: RJ-45 Wall Box and Wire Connections for UTP Cable
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-31
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Patch Panels
The IntelliVue Clinical Network contains many interconnecting cables and wires. To
assure a robust, reliable, and accessible network, each wire connection must be
secure, and identification of wires and cables must be clear. To assist this process,
24-Port Patch Panels are available from Philips (Option M3199AI #A01). For large
systems with many wires, it is recommended that patch panels be mounted in a
floor standing rack designed for that purpose. However, Philips also provides a
Patch Panel Wall Mount Kit (M3199AI #A05) for mounting the patch panel on a
vertical wall.
The 24-port patch panel from Philips is shown in Figure 2-24. The Front Panel has
24, RJ-45 ports for connecting 24 UTP CAT5 RJ-45 connectors. Each front panel port
should be labeled for cable identification. Places for port labeling are provided.
Snap-in Philips labels are also included for each port.
The Rear Panel has 24 sections for connecting the 8 individual wires from 24
different UTP CAT5 cables. Wiring of UTP cables to the rear of the Patch Panel must
be performed by a certified CAT5 cable plant installer. They should be wired as
shown in Figure 2-24.
Front Panel
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
8
9
11
10
12
13
15
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
AMP
Category 5
RJ-45 Ports
Port Labels
Rear Panel
22
24
21
23
20
18
19
17
16
15
14
12
10
8
6
13
11
9
7
5
4
3
Rear Panel Wiring Connections
WHITE/blue
BLUE
WHITE/orange
ORANGE
WHITE/green
GREEN
WHITE/brown
BROWN
BLUE ORANGE GREEN BROWN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
color marks on connector block
/stripe color
PRIMARY COLOR
cable stripped back
no more than 5 cm (2 in)
wires untwisted no more
than 1.3 cm (0.5 in.)
Figure 2-24: 24-Port Patch Panel and Wiring Connections
2-32
2
1
Specifications
Specifications
This section provides physical, environmental, and electrical specifications for PIIC
system components.
Note The following specifications are for PIIC system components shipped at the time of
document publication. Components shipped with later systems may vary, with
newer models substituted as they become available.
Physical Specifications
Table 2-12 lists physical specifications for PIIC system components.
Table 2-12: Physical Specifications
Product
Part #
Height
cm (in.)
Width
cm (in.)
Depth
cm (in.)
Weight
kg (lbs.)
HP rp5800 PC
4535 644 50621
10 (3.95)
34 (13.3)
38 (14.9)
6.84 (15.08)
HP rp5700 PC
4535 640 67761
10 (3.95)
34 (13.3)
38 (14.9)
6.84 (15.08)
HP rp5700 Turbo PC
4535 642 13931
10 (3.95)
34 (13.3)
38 (14.9)
6.84 (15.08)
HP ML350 G6
Tower Server
4535 642 13941
47 (18.5)
21.8 (8.59)l
59.6 (23.46)
31.8 (70)a
HP DL380 G6 Rack Server
4535 641 63221
8.59 (3.38)
44.55 (17.54)
69.22 (27.26)
27.27 (60)a
HP DL380 G7 Rack Server
4535 642 39671
8.59 (3.38)
44.55 (17.54)
69.22 (27.26)
27.27 (60)a
HP DL380 G8 Rack Server
4535 643 83431
8.73 (3.44)
44.55 (17.54)
69.85 (27.5)
27.66 (61)a
19” Non-Touch Display
862058
45.5 (17.9)
45.0 (17.7)
24.5 (9.6)
13.6 (29.9)
19” Touch Display
862059
45.5 (17.9)
45.0 (17.7)
24.5 (9.6)
9.8 (21.5)
24” Non-Touch Display
866125
41.7 (16.42)b
60.8 (23.94)
19.4 (7.64)2
13.6 (29.9)
24” Touch Display
866126
41.7 (16.42)b
60.8 (23.94)
19.4 (7.64)2
13.6 (29.9)
6-Way Video Splitter
862211
4.3 (1.75)
44 (17.5)
21.6 (8.5)
1.7 (3.9)
Keyboard (English) USB
4535 644 51381
4.6 (1.8)
46.0 (18.1)
18.9 (7.5)
1.1 (2.4)
Keyboard-Video-Mouse
Switch
4535 642 99471
5.5 (2.2)
8.7 (3.4)
21 (8.3)
0.77 (1.7)
2-Channel USB Recorder
862120
11.2 (4.4)
14.3 (5.6)
14.5 (5.7)
0.19 (.42)
UPS Tripp Lite SmartPro
Rack Mount
SMART500RT1U
4535 602 98591
UPS Tripp Lite SmartPro
with Hardware Watchdog
SMX500RT1U
4535 642 98601
UPS Tripp Lite SmartPro
with Hardware Watchdog
SMART1050SLT
4535 642 98581
PIIC Component
8.0 (17.6)
4.45 (1.75)
44.5 (17.5)
29.8 (11.75)
26.04 (10.25)
17.15 (6.75)
33.7 (13.25)
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
8.5 (18.8)
8.2 (18.0)
2-33
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Table 2-12: Physical Specifications
Product
Part #
Height
cm (in.)
Width
cm (in.)
Depth
cm (in.)
Weight
kg (lbs.)
UPS APC Rack Mount
1000VA 120V
SMT1000RM2U
4535 643 32421
8.9 (3.5)
43.2 (17.0)
45.7 (18)
28.18 (62.13)
UPS APC Rack Mount
1500VA 100V
SMT1500RMJ2UB
4535 643 32431
8.9 (3.5)
43.2 (17.0)
45.7 (18)
28.64 (63)
UPS APC Rack Mount
1000VA 230V
SMT1000RMI2U
4535 643 32441
8.9 (3.5)
43.2 (17.0)
45.7 (18)
31.45 (69.2)
PIIC Component
a - Weight includes installed hard drives, power supplies, and processors.
b - Includes stand.
Environmental Specifications
Table 2-13 lists environmental specifications for PIIC system components.
Table 2-13: Environmental Specifications
Part Number
PIIC System
Temperature
Relative Humidity
(Non-condensing)
15 - 30 oC
59 - 86 oF
20 - 80% @
30oC (86 oF)
Operating:a 10 to 35oC
50 to 95oF
Storage: -30 to 60oC
-22 to 140oF
Operating:
20- 85%
Operating:a 10 to 40oC
(50 to 104oF)
Storage: -30 to 60oC
-22 to 140oF
Operating:
0- 85%
PIIC System Components
2-34
Large DBS
HP ML350 G6 Tower Server
HP DL380 G6 Rack Server
HP DL380 G7 Server
HP DL380 G8 Server
4535 642 13941
4535 641 63221
4535 642 39671
4535 643 83431
PC and Small DBS
HP rp5800 PC
HP rp 5700 PC
HP rp5700 Turbo PC
4535 644 50621
4535 640 67761
4535 642 13931
19” Standard Display
862058
10 - 40 oC
50 - 104 oF
0 - 80%
19” Touch Display
862059
50 - 104 oF
10 - 40 oC
0 - 80%
24” Standard Display
866125
Operating: 20 - 80%
24” Touch Display
866126
Operating: 0 to 35oC
(32 to 95oF)
Storage: -20 to 60oC
-4 to 140oF
6-way Video Splitter
862211
-40 - 70 oC
15 - 158 oF
5 - 95%
Storage:
5 - 90%
Storage:
5 - 90%
Storage: 10 - 90%
Specifications
Table 2-13: Environmental Specifications
Part Number
Temperature
Relative Humidity
(Non-condensing)
2-Channel USB Recorder
862120
0 to 50 oC
32 to 122 oF
10 - 95%
Tripp Lite SmartPro UPS with
Hardware Watchdog
SMART500RT1U
4535 642 98591
0 - 40 oC
32 - 104 oF
0 - 95%
SMX500RT1U
4535 642 98601
15 - 30 oC
59 - 86 oF
20 - 80%
SMART1050SLT
4535 642 98581
15 - 30 oC
59 - 86 oF
20 - 80%
SMT1000RM2U
4535 643 32421
-15 - -45 oC
5 - 113 oF
0 - 95%
SMT1500RMJ2UB
4535 643 32431
Operating 0 - 40 oC
32 - 104 oF
Storage -15 - 45 oC
5 - 113 oF
0 - 95%
SMT1000RMI2U
4535 643 32441
Operating 0 - 40 oC
32 - 104 oF
Storage -15 - 45 oC
5 - 113 oF
0 - 95%
APC Rack-mount UPS
a. Operating temperature is de-rated 1.0oC per 305 m (1000 ft) to 3050 m (10,000 ft) above sea
level, no direct sustained sunlight. Maximum change rate is 10 oC/Hr (18oF/Hr). System performance may be reduced if operating with fan fault above 30oC (86oF).
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
2-35
Chapter 2: Hardware Description
Electrical Specifications
Table 2-14 lists electrical specifications for PIIC system components.
Table 2-14: Electrical Specifications
PIIC Component
Large DBS
HP ML350 G6 Tower Server
HP DL380 G6 Rack Server
HP DL380 G7 Server
HP DL380 G8 Server
4535 642 13941
4535 641 63221
4535 642 39671
4535 643 83431
PC and Small DBS
HP rp5800 PC
HP rp 5700 PC
HP rp5700 Turbo PC
4535 644 50621
4535 640 67761
4535 642 13931
19” Non Touch Display
Input
Voltage
(VAC)
Manual
Switching
Required?
Input
Frequency
100 - 240
No
50 - 60
90 - 264
No
50 - 60
862058
81 - 264
No
48 - 62
19” Touch Display
862059
100 - 240
No
50 - 60
24” Non-Touch Display
866125
100 - 240
No
50 - 60
24” Touch Display
866126
100 - 240
No
50 - 60
6-Way Video Splitter
862211
100 - 240
No
50/60
Tripp Lite SmartPro UPS with
Hardware Watchdog
SMART500RT1U
4535 642 98591
93 - 133
60 + 2
SMX500RT1U
4535 642 98601
193 - 258
50/60 + 2
SMART1050SLT
4535 642 98581
108 - 132
50/60 + 3
SMT1000RM2U
4535 643 32421
82 - 144
SMT1500RMJ2UB
4535 643 32431
74 - 123
SMT1000RMI2U
4535 643 32441
160 - 286
APC Rackmount UPS
2-36
Product
No
50/60 + 3
50/60 + 3
No
50/60 + 3
3
PIIC Software Description
This chapter provides an overview the software components comprising
the PIIC system and includes:
• Overview
• PC Workstation Platform
• Windows Operating System
• IntelliVue Information Center Application Software
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
3-1
Chapter 3: PIIC Software Description
Overview
The IntelliVue Information Center medical application software is the heart of the
PIIC System. It operates on a PC workstation and uses the Windows Operating
System software to provide the full range of central monitoring functionality.
The system application software is described in the following sections:
• PC Workstation Platform - provides a brief description of the PC Workstation and
peripheral hardware required for proper software operation.
• Windows Operating System - describes the Windows Operating System software
required by the Information Center system. Because this is a standard product
for which extensive documentation is available, only a brief overview is
provided.
• IntelliVue Information Center Application Software - describes the Information
Center applications software, including its features and architecture.
• Services - describes embedded management services (EMS) tools available to
service personnel for managing and maintaining Information Center systems
Figure 3-1 shows the relationship between the major PIIC system hardware and
software components.
Application Software
Windows Operating System
PC Workstation Platform
Figure 3-1: PIIC System Software Components
PC Workstation Platform
The PC provides the hardware platform for the IntelliVue Information Center system.
It works in cooperation with a variety of peripheral devices to provide Information
Center functionality.
The IntelliVue Information Center is a PC specifically configured for proper operation
of the PIIC application software. The PCs supplied by Philips have been configured,
tested, and validated to meet the specific medical device requirements for
operating the application software. Therefore, they are the only hardware approved
for use with IntelliVue Information Center systems.
3-2
Windows Operating System
Warning Hardware products not supplied by Philips for IntelliVue Information Center systems
are not approved or supported by Philips for use with the IntelliVue Information
Center.
Use of hardware and software that has not been approved by Philips for use with
the IntelliVue Information Center and Clinical Network/Database Server can result
in the loss of central monitoring - including alarm annunciation - or in degradation of
monitoring performance.
In addition to the PC, the IntelliVue Information Center hardware platform includes a
variety of peripheral devices (Figure 3-2) that are compatible with and work in
conjunction with the PC to achieve the desired performance.
These peripheral devices include input devices (keyboard and mouse), output
devices (displays, speaker, recorder and printer), and supporting hardware such as
the UPS and Power Distribution Module (PDM).
Input Devices
Keyboard
Mouse
Output Devices
Displays
Speakers
Recorders
Printers
Support Devices
UPS
PDM
Figure 3-2: PIIC System Peripheral Devices
Windows Operating System
The IntelliVue Information Center software uses the Microsoft Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2 Operating Systems (the operating system used depends
on the PIIC model). The Windows OS provides an operating system for the IntelliVue
Information Center, which requires a true multi-tasking environment to run multiple
application capability simultaneously.
Other features of the Windows Operating System that make it suitable for the
IntelliVue Information Center are integrated networking, a modular architecture that
makes integration easy, open, and expandable, and built-in security capability.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
3-3
Chapter 3: PIIC Software Description
Supported Operating Systems
The Operating System (OS) for the PC Workstation is Microsoft Windows 7. The
Operating System (OS) for the M3154 Database Server is Microsoft Windows Server
2008. These Operating Systems are used in a wide variety of products. Their
adequacy and reliability for use with the IntelliVue Information Center software has
been validated by Philips in extensive system and safety tests.
The IntelliVue Information Center software interacts with OS software only through
standard Application Programming Interfaces (APIs). The Operating System and its
APIs are described in detail in Microsoft Windows documentation but only briefly
here. Philips support personnel are encouraged to gain knowledge of these
subjects through the variety of OS documentation and training programs available.
Application Programming Interfaces
Examples of Operating System API services used by IntelliVue Information Center
application software are the following:
• Windows graphical user interface
• Windows Print Manager
• Access to hardware device drivers
• Performance monitoring
• Event Viewer for storage of system and application error information
A function of the Windows operating system is to hide inactive applications behind
active applications. If an application is open but is not visible, press Alt + Tab keys to
select the application and bring it to the forefront.
IntelliVue Information Center APIs have also been extensively documented and
exercised by Philips in unit tests to assure their reliability.
The operating system also provides software management functions for Information
Center software—File System and Registry (and peripheral hardware drivers).
File System
The File System (NTFS) is a high performance file system used by Windows for
storing data.
Registry
The Registry is a structured set of records stored in a single OS database. It
provides a secure, unified database of configuration data for the operating system
and Information Center application software.
It incorporates fault-tolerance which ensures that the Registry remains intact even if
a power failure occurs in the middle of an update.
The operating system uses the Registry to:
• store configuration data
• provide startup information,
3-4
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software
• pass and receive device driver configuration parameters, and
• store new configuration data.
The Registry is constructed from various components of the Windows OS. These
include:
• Hardware Data - When Windows starts, the Registry obtains volatile hardware
configuration data -- hardware information detected in the computer. On x86based computers, this is done by NTDETECT.COM.
• Windows Kernel - During startup, the kernel extracts information from the
Registry, including required device drivers and the order in which they should be
loaded. The kernel also provides information (e.g. version number).
• Setup Programs - Whenever the Windows Setup program or other setup
programs for applications or hardware run, Setup adds new configuration data
to the Registry.
• Device Drivers - Device drivers pass data to the Registry and receive load and
configuration parameters from the Registry. A device driver tells the Registry
what system resources it uses and can also report discovered configuration
data.
Warning Changing system configurations using the Registry Editor is not supported and
could result in patient injury or death.
The IntelliVue Information Center software uses the Registry to:
• Store clinical application configurations for the clinical unit and individual
patients
• Store system configurations for the clinical unit and the system
• Store configuration data during installation
Note how these important configuration settings are stored:
• Clinical Configuration Settings - All editable patient settings are stored in the MS
SQL Server Database. Many of these clinical unit configuration settings can also
be stored on the Archive media for reconfiguration.
• System Configuration Settings - Many of these configuration settings can also
be stored on the Archive media for reconfiguration.
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software
The IntelliVue Information Center Application Software media kit includes the
IntelliVue Information Center application software and Operating System software
installed on a USB flash drive. Philips also provides the latest BIOS for your PC.
The OS and PIIC application software come pre-installed on the PC platform. See
Chapter 6 for software update and re-installation instructions.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
3-5
Chapter 3: PIIC Software Description
Modes of Operation
PIIC application software operates in Monitoring Mode and Non-monitoring Mode.
These modes are defined as follows:
• Monitoring Mode - Monitoring Mode is the principal mode of operation during
which application software provides centralized monitoring, alarms, storage,
and review of patient information obtained from LAN-based bedsides and
telemetry monitors.
• Non-monitoring Mode - Non-monitoring Mode suspends patient monitoring and
provides functions for Information Center configuration, maintenance, and
troubleshooting. A service password is required for access to non-monitoring
mode functionality to prevent inadvertent change of operational parameters or
disruption of patient monitoring and data collection.
Architectural Design
Figure 3-3 represents the PIIC architecture, i.e., the relationship of the Application
Software, the Windows Operating System, and the PC Workstation Platform.
Applications
Monitoring Mode Applications are primarily clinical applications that provide
information about patients and are visible on the Philips display. Main Screen is the
primary clinical application and is always visible during Monitoring Mode. All other
clinical applications are visible in the Patient Window upon request.
Non-monitoring Mode Applications are primarily service tools to configure the
system, maintain system software, and troubleshoot system problems.
Warning During non-monitoring mode applications, no patients are monitored by the
IntelliVue Information Center system!
Services
Services includes collection and storage of patient data, distribution of data to
other applications and devices, recording and printing of data, and annunciation of
alarms. These operate in the background and are not visible on the Information
Center display.
Error Handling
Additional Error Handling software provides prevention, notification, and recovery of
operator, device, and software errors. The primary purpose of the error handling
features is to ensure the safety of monitored patients.
• Operator errors are addressed by internally-designed prevention mechanisms.
• Peripheral device errors are addressed by detection and notification messages
on the Main Screen.
• Internal software errors are detected by integrity self-checks built into
interfaces.
3-6
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software
IntelliVue Information Center System
Application Software
APPLICATIONS
Applications Library
Sound
Manager
Applications Manager
HIF
Manager
SERVICES
Database
Services
Alarm
Services
Physio
Data
Server
Measurement
Services
Documentation
Services
Recorder
Interface
Services
Windows Operating System
File
System
Registry
Audio
Driver
Display
Driver
Printer
Driver
Keyboard
Driver
Mouse
Driver
Network
Adapter
Driver
PC Platform
Figure 3-3: PIIC System Architecture
PIIC Applications
Philips IntelliVue Information Center Applications Software (Figure 3-4) consists of
an Applications Library that includes:
• Real-time Applications
• Control Applications
• Review Applications
• Support Applications
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
3-7
Chapter 3: PIIC Software Description
IntelliVue Information Center Applications
Applications Library
Real-time
Control
- Main Screen
- Patient Window
- Unit Settings
- Individual Patient Settings
Review
Support
-Trend
-Alarm
-Event
- Wave
-ST
- Support Logs
- Diagnostic Tools
- Configuration/Install.
Applications
- Remote Access
- Telemetry Services
- Option Utilities
Display
Driver
Applications Manager
Sound
Manager
Keyboard
Driver
HIF
Manager
Mouse
Driver
Audio
Driver
Physio
Data
Server
Figure 3-4: PIIC Applications
The software also contains Applications Managers for Philips input devices
(keyboard, mouse) and output devices (display, speaker):
• Applications Manager
• Sound Manager
• Human Interface (HIF) Manage
Real Time
Applications
Real Time Applications control the display of real time patient data from bedside
and telemetry monitors on the Main Screen and Patient Window (Figure 3-4).
The Main Screen application controls the display of real time physiological and
alarm information for each monitored patient on the Main Screen. This information
is obtained from the Physio Data Server and continuously displays in a Patient
Sector of the Main Screen. As patient data or alarm conditions change, the Physio
Data Server receives this information from the LAN and passes it to the Main
Screen.
The Patient Window application controls the display of real time physiological and
alarm information in the Patient Window. It has access to more real time patient
data from the Physio Data Server than are available for the Main Screen
application. As for the Main Screen, patient data and alarm information is
continuously updated in the Patient Window as it changes.
3-8
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software
Figure 3-5: Sample PIIC Main Screen and Patient Window
Control
Applications
Control Applications permit unit-wide patient monitoring behavior adjustments, as
well as overrides for individual patients. For detailed information about these
features, refer to the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use.
Control applications for unit settings provide functionality for the clinical unit setting
buttons in the Unit Settings window accessed from the All Controls screen
(Figure 3-6). Unit Settings is password protected and settings apply to all patients
unless overridden by the individual patient Control Application. When a patient is
discharged, the clinical unit settings automatically replace the individual patient’s
custom settings.
Figure 3-6: Sample Unit Settings Screen
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
3-9
Chapter 3: PIIC Software Description
Unit Settings include:
• Alarms and Arrhyth Alarms - set various parameters for the alarms or arrhythmia
alarms.
• ST configure parameters for the ST alarms and measurement.
• QT - configure various QT Unit Settings.
• Record/Store/Page - select the alarms you want recorded and stored.
• Trend Groups - set the contents of the trend groups.
• Event Groups - define the contents of the event groups.
• Stored Waves - select the patient waves that will be stored.
• Central Reports - select, configure, and schedule printed reports.
• General Setup - define general output unit settings.
• Volume Control - adjust the sound volume of the IntelliVue Information Center
internal and external speakers.
• Paging Devices - configure settings for paging devices (if applicable).
• Trend Display - configure various trend display settings.
• Telemetry Freq - set the telemetry frequencies for telemetry monitors assigned
to the unit.
• Telemetry Setup - configure telemetry devices assigned to the IntelliVue
Information Center.
Control Applications for individual patients provide functionality for the Patient
Management, Alarm Management, and Setup selections in the All Controls window.
These control applications include:
• Admit - admit a patient.
• Discharge - discharge or transfer a patient.
• Care Groups - assign individual patients to Care Groups.
• Sector Setup - change/modify the monitoring equipment associated with a bed.
• Stored Waves - define an individual patient’s stored waves.
• Standby - temporarily suspend monitoring for a patient and the display of
standby messages in the Patient Sector.
• Arrhythmia Alarm and ST Alarm - set limits that control conditions for triggering,
turning on, and turning off certain alarms for individual patients.
• Record/Store/Page - configure whether an individual patient’s alarms are
recorded, stored, or paged. This setting also affects Alarm Review, which
provides review recordings of stored alarms.
• ST Setup - enable/disable of ST segment measurement and setting the
measurement point for an individual patient.
• QT Setup - configure of QT monitoring settings.
• Telemetry Setup - set telemetry controls for an individual patient.
3-10
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software
Review
Applications
Review applications appear in the Patient Data Review section of the All Controls
screen. Review Applications include:
• Trend Review - view a history of groupings of physiological parameters plotted
over time.
• Alarm Review - view a history of alarms, including waves and alarm text.
• Event Review - view a history of events detected for a patient along with
waveforms stored at the time of the event.
• Wave Review - view a history of full disclosure waveform data that have been
continuously stored.
• ST Review - view a history of acquired and derived ST waveforms and segment
values for telemetry monitored patients.
• 12 Lead-Review - view the results of 12-Lead captures performed at an
IntelliVue Patient Monitor. It also displays continuous EASI derived ECG
waveforms.
Support
Applications
Support Applications are used for managing the installation, configuration, and
service aspects of the Information Center system. To access the support
applications, a Service Password is required.
Support software features include:
• Support Logs
• Diagnostic Tools
• Configuration Applications
• Remote Access
• Telemetry Services
• Option Utilities
For a more detailed description of these features, refer to “Services” on page 3-12.
Management Functions
Application
Manager
(SDProcess)
Application Manager (SDProcess) controls when an application is allowed to use the
display area and is responsible for initiation and termination of applications.
Applications are modular and do not interact directly with other applications. They
can only communicate with one another through the Applications Manager.
Sound Manager
Sound Manager is responsible for annunciating the highest level alarm sound for all
patients being monitored by the Information Center system. It has exclusive control
of the audio capability of the PC and there is no external volume control knob. Each
patient’s Alarm Manager provides the Sound Manager with the highest priority
alarm condition for its patient, and the Sound Manager causes the tone
corresponding to the most critical condition of all of the patients to be annunciated.
Human
Interface
Manager
Human Interface (HIF) Manager is responsible for directing the keyboard strokes
and mouse (or trackball) cursor movements on the display and for displaying the
keys (buttons or other display click area) for selecting applications.
HIF Manager also prevents the operator from accessing any software that is not
part of the Applications Library when in Monitoring Mode. The PC is dedicated to
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
3-11
Chapter 3: PIIC Software Description
Information Center software during Monitoring Mode and no other software is
allowed to run concurrently. HIF Manager intercepts and blocks operator attempts
to access the operating system directly.
HIF Manager also disables keyboard sequences such as Alt-Tab, Ctrl-Alt-Del, and
Ctrl-Esc. This prevents access to functions such as the Windows Program Manager
and Windows Explorer and makes it impossible to start other programs while
patients are being monitored.
Services
The Services portion of Monitoring Mode software manages data with the following
functionality.
Physio Data
Server
Patient
Database
Services
Physio Data Server (PDSService) is the communication hub of the Services
software, providing the common interface for receiving and distributing data among
Information Center Applications and other Services.
Patient Database Services (PDSStore) provide for patient data storage to and
retrieval from the processing unit disk.
Patient Database Services receive real time patient data from bedside and
telemetry monitors through the Physio Data Server and transmits them to the hard
disk for storage. Patient Database Services also retrieve the stored data on request
from the Physio Data Server for distribution to Information Center Applications and
other Services.
Patient Database Services interface with the OS File System through a Database
Interface, which directs data for storage to either a MS SQL Server Database or the
File System. Data stored are editable unit settings and patient data, such as name,
id, demographics, alarms, and configurations (about 1% of data). All other patient
data are stored in the NT File System in standard NTFS (flat file) and sequel
database format for later retrieval by applications. Up to 96 hours of waveform data
can be stored for each patient. As noted earlier, the Registry maintains
configuration data for the application software.
Note Only configuration data from the Registry and editable unit and patient data from
the MS SQL Server Database are archived on the Archive media.
Measurement
Services
Measurement Services contains the ST/AR algorithm as well as interfaces between
it and the Physio Data Server. The Physio Data Server delivers newly acquired
patient monitoring data for each patient to the ST/AR input interface for analysis.
After the ST/AR algorithm has completed its analysis, results for each patient are
available at the ST/AR output interface. Measurement Services makes this output
available to the Physio Data Server for distribution on request. Measurement
Services also provide the control interface to ST/AR that delivers the specific ST/AR
data requested by an Application.
Alarm Services
Alarm Services provides alarm monitoring for each patient. Each patient has a
separate Alarm Manager that receives its information from the Physio Data Server.
The Alarm Manager determines which events should be announced as alarms or
INOPs and announces them consistent with the bedside-determined priority. For
ST/AR alarms, each Alarm Manager merges ST/AR and bedside monitor alarms and
3-12
IntelliVue Information Center Application Software
INOPs, determines the overall priority, and provides the Sound Manager with its
highest priority alarm condition. The Sound Manager causes the tone
corresponding to the most critical condition of all of the patients to be annunciated.
For information on alarm prioritization, see the Information Center Instructions for
Use.
Recorder
Management
Services
Recorder Management Services (RecMgr) provide an interface between the Physio
Data Server and Documentation Services. For the Philips Recorders, Recorder
Interface Services both transmit data and documentation requests from the
processing unit and bedside monitors to the Recorder and receive status
information from the Recorder for distribution to the processing unit and bedside
monitors. Data communication for the 2-Channel Recorder is via the USB interface
in the processing unit.
Documentation
Status Services
Documentation Status Services (DocStatusService) provide documentation control
services to both the Philips Recorder and the printer. It receives data from Recorder
Management Services and provides output interfaces to both the Philips Recorder
and the printer through the Windows Print Manager. The data can be either realtime patient data from bedside or telemetry monitors or stored patient data from
Database Services. Documentation Status Services provide interfaces for data
transmission and to initiate and control printing and recording. A more detailed
description of Documentation Status Services for recording and printing is provided
in the following sections.
Recorder
Documentation
Services
Communication between the Applications Manager and the Philips Recorders can
either be requests to record or requests for recorder status. Requests to record
include the name of the patient, time of request, length of recording, and waveform
data. Requests for recorder status include recorder failure, out of paper, door open,
and no recorder connected.
Process components of Documentation Status Services for the Philips Recorder
follow:
• Documentation Status Services receive recorder requests from the Applications
Manager and pass them on to the Recorder Manager. If patient data are to be
sent to the Recorder, they are obtained from the Physio Data Server.
• Recorder Manager keeps track of the status and location of Recorder(s) in the
Recorder Rack and assigns recorder information to the next available Recorder.
• Shared Memory provides the recorder status messages from its RAM based on
status information received from the Recorder.
• Redirector adds a header message to the destination recorder.
Printer
Documentation
Services
Documentation Status Services manages the printing process for the Information
Center system through the Print Manager and Printer Driver of the OS. The Print
Manager uses a Graphical Data Interface (GDI), which is a common API for
applications that draw things, either on a display or a printer.
Documentation Status Services also keeps track of each application’s print
capability. If the application is configured for printing, it signals the Applications
Manager to activate the print button in the Patient Window. If the application is not
configured for printing, it signals the Applications Manager to disable the print
button so it appears dimmed.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
3-13
Chapter 3: PIIC Software Description
3-14
4
Site Planning and Preparation
This chapter provides site planning and preparation for the IntelliVue
Information Center system and includes.
• Overview
• Site Planning
• Network Design Considerations
• Patient Safety Considerations
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
4-1
Chapter 4: Site Planning and Preparation
Overview
The IntelliVue Information Center is the information hub of a clinical patient
monitoring environment. It displays patient monitoring information from fixed
bedside and mobile telemetry monitors and provides alarm annunciation,
arrhythmia and ST analysis, and patient data storage and review. As the information
hub, the Information Center system should be centrally located in the clinical
patient monitoring unit so that users can have ready and convenient access to both
Information Center patient information and patients being monitored.
Planning for the Information Center system is only part of site planning and
preparation for the total patient monitoring environment. Detailed descriptions of
site planning for the patient monitoring environment are provided in the Component
Monitoring System Site Preparation and Installation Manual. Site planning and
preparation for the Information Center system will focus principally on the unique
requirements of installing Information Center hardware as the central station
component.
The Database Server is one of the “hidden” components of the Philips IntelliVue
Clinical Network. The Database Server is generally located in out of the way
equipment rooms or wiring closets. It is rarely seen by clinicians or patients but
must be accessible to service personnel. Significant planning and careful network
design is required to assure low cost and effective network operation.
If you use the Remote PC solution the CPU becomes a “hidden” component that has
extended cable lengths (up to 300 ft) with connection to as many peripheral devices
as practical.
Site Planning
This section describes the how the IntelliVue Information Center installation should
be planned in advance and includes:
• Site Planning Considerations
• Site Planning and Preparation Responsibilities
• Equipment Location Requirements
Site Planning Considerations
Elements of site planning that should be considered in preparing for a IntelliVue
Information Center and IntelliVue Database Server installation include the following:
• Design - Select appropriate components that best meet the monitoring needs of
the clinical environment.
• Location - Select locations for IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients,
display(s), keyboard, mouse, processing unit, UPS, recorders, printers, and the
network components and Server.
• Network - Ensure that proper network cabling, conduit, wall boxes, and
faceplates are provided for connecting devices to the IntelliVue Clinical Network.
• Cabling - Select proper type and length equipment cabling to interconnect
system components.
4-2
Site Planning
• Web Access - Provide hospital intranet connection to Server Web Access LAN
card.
• Environment - Ensure that the installation site meets the environmental
specifications recommended for each IntelliVue Clinical Network component.
• Electrical - Verify that electrical outlets with proper grounding, electrical
isolation, voltage, current, and frequency are available to power the system and
components.
• Mounting - Select the appropriate hardware for mounting system components in
their designated locations.
• Safety - Ensure that all medical safety requirements are met.
For a detailed description of the design of the system, including location of PIIC
system components and network considerations, refer to Designing the Network.
Site Planning and Preparation Responsibilities
Planning and preparing the site for an installation is a joint responsibility between
the Customer and Philips. To ensure that the system is properly designed and that
all necessary preparations are completed when the system is delivered, the
Customer should contact a Philips Sales and Support Representative and develop a
schedule for consultation, delivery, and installation.
Customer
Responsibilities
The customer must perform the following site preparation:
• Ensure that the site complies with all structural, environmental, network,
electrical, cabling, and safety requirements.
• Install all wall channels required for wall-mounted devices.
• Install all required IntelliVue Clinical Network and Network cables
• Provide a properly configured hospital intranet connection.
• Remove old equipment.
• Manage radio frequencies at the site.
Note If there are any concerns about the structural, environmental, network, electrical,
RF, cabling, or safety requirements for the installation, the Customer should contact
an independent consulting engineer or the Philips Response Center.
The Customer is also expected to assist the Service Provider during the installation
process by providing personnel with knowledge of the hospital environment and its
facilities, resources, polices, and procedures.
Philips
Responsibilities
Philips is responsible for assuring shipment of a fully configured product.
• All ordered system hardware, network components, and peripheral equipment
are fully tested and ready for installation.
• Windows operating systems and Philips application software are pre-loaded
with customer purchased options and factory default configurations.
• LAN cards are pre-installed in the Server.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
4-3
Chapter 4: Site Planning and Preparation
• All ordered mounting hardware and equipment cabling is included as well as
Philips support and service documentation and shipment inventory Packing
List.
The Service Provider is responsible for installation of the PIIC system at the
Customer site, including the following tasks:
• Remove the products from their shipment containers.
• Install the products in their designated locations, including any required
mounting hardware.
• Connect the Information Centers, Clients, Printers, and Server to the Network
and to all peripheral equipment
• Connect electrical power to IntelliVue Information Centers, Clients, Printers,
Server, and all Network components
• Install all purchased and upgrade options.
• Start up the Philips system and configure it to Customer specifications.
• Verify system operation and testing system performance using recommended
Product Assurance Testing procedures.
• Ensure Customer satisfaction and acceptance of the installation.
• Remove packaging materials (if necessary).
Equipment Location Requirements
The location of the PIIC Database Server is a critical step in site planning and
network design. In general, Servers should be located so that they are not
accessible to patients and clinicians but convenient to service and support
personnel. Typically this location is a wiring closet or specifically-designed room for
Server equipment. Issues that should be considered when selecting and planning
locations for the Database Server are:
• Wiring Closet Planning
• Network Switch Location
• Server and UPS Location
Wiring Closet
Planning
Locked wiring closets or equipment rooms are recommended locations for all active
Network components (except access points) because they can be made secure
from unauthorized access and required electrical and environmental conditions can
be maintained.
Caution When planning wiring closets, carefully consider the availability of properly
grounded electrical outlets of the correct voltage and frequency for each device and
the environmental control of temperature and humidity. The high density of devices
in a small room can lead to large heat loads in a small space that must be
controlled.
4-4
Site Planning
Network Switch
Location
PIIC DBS
Location
UPS Location
Network switches are the central communication hubs of the IntelliVue Clinical
Network. Therefore, they should be located at a point central to the IntelliVue
Information Centers, Clients, and Server. When selecting switch locations,
consideration should be given to the cabling distances between devices because
cabling is a key cost and limitation of Network design. In general, switches should
be in wiring closets centrally located on the Network.
The PIIC Database Server is the network device most accessed by service
personnel. Software installation, system and device configuration, network
maintenance and troubleshooting all take place at the Server. Therefore, it should
be located in a closet or room convenient to service personnel and include typical
workstation amenities -- chair, work surface, bookshelf, equipment storage, lighting.
Active Clinical Network components must be on a UPS (Uninterruptible Power
Supply) to assure network operation during short power interruptions.
Caution The IntelliVue Information Center Database Server must be connected to a UPS.
Do not connect devices other than those approved by Philips to the BATTERY
BACKUP outlets on a Philips-provided UPS. If you connect devices other than what is
listed in this section equipment can fail and possibly interrupt patient monitoring.
The PIIC N.01 server does not support the serial interface to an Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS). If there is a serial cable connecting a Philips-supplied or
customer-supplied UPS to a PIIC server, you must disconnect the cable prior to
upgrading the server to PIIC N.01
Connect the following devices to the BATTERY BACKUP outlets of a UPS.
• Core and Edge Network Switches
• IntelliVue Information centers and Database Servers
• 2-Channel USB Recorders
Up to three IntelliVue Clinical Network components (switches or repeaters, for
example) may be connected to a single UPS. It is recommended that Access Points
(unless on POE) and Repeaters also be connected to a UPS.
The Printer must not be connected to a UPS Outlet. Other components and displays
may be connected to the non battery-backed ACCESSORY outlets of a Philipsprovided UPS or to a separate non-UPS electrical outlet with the same ground in
compliance with devices ratings. Consider the following when selecting UPS
locations:
• Be sure all devices are far enough away from electrical equipment that may
produce strong electromagnetic fields which can affect data transmission,
• Devices are protected from exposure to water or excessive moisture, lint, dust,
or dirt,
• All devices are easily accessible to service personnel,
• There is at least 5 cm (2 in.) clearance around each device for adequate air
circulation, and
• All device ventilation holes are not obstructed
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
4-5
Chapter 4: Site Planning and Preparation
Network Design Considerations
This section describes considerations for designing a IntelliVue Clinical Network
(ICN) for a specific clinical environment.
Reviewing Clinical Requirements
Designing an ICN requires a full understanding of the monitoring requirements of
the clinical unit(s) it will serve. Key elements to consider include:
• Number of Units and Beds
• Patient Monitoring Level
• Patient Monitor Type
• Central Monitoring Locations
• Type of Patient Data Access
• Future Requirements
• Number of Units and Beds
The number of beds determines the number of patient monitors, PIIC Systems and
Servers required. The number of Clinical Units and their locations determines how
the PIIC System should be networked to provide efficient and convenient access to
patient monitoring data.
Patient
Monitoring
Level
The level of monitoring required for patients determines which PIIC Model can serve
each clinical unit and its level of clinical application software. The more intensive
the monitoring requirements, the more capability is required of PIIC hardware and
software. Since hardware and software cost increases with capability, it is
important to understand the exact patient monitoring requirements for each clinical
unit, both present and future.
Patient Monitor
Type
Another system design consideration is the type of patient monitor that will be used
wired IntelliVue Patient Monitors or wireless IntelliVue Patient Monitors.
For installations dealing with acute patient care where patients remain in their beds
wired bedside monitors, are generally required. For less acute care installations
that have ambulatory patients, Patient-worn Monitors (PWMs) are generally
required. For installations that have patients who may change from bed-restricted to
ambulatory, both IntelliVue Patient Monitors and PWMs should be available. And for
installations where patient monitors may be frequently moved from bed to bed,
wireless monitors may be preferred. The software can accommodate all of these
types of installations, providing continuous collection of monitoring data as patients
change beds or from bed restricted to ambulatory. Patient Monitors can be:
• Wired IntelliVue Patient Monitors (IPMs) that connect directly to a Network
switch.
• Wireless IPMs that transmit patient monitoring data to a Wireless Network.
Central
Monitoring
Locations
4-6
Central Monitoring locations should generally be in clinical units where patient beds
are located. While the IntelliVue Network provides extensive access to patient
monitoring data both within and across clinical units and at multiple distant
locations, there are limitations on the length of cable runs for each network
Network Design Considerations
interconnection. Cable length limitations must be carefully reviewed in selecting
patient data review locations.
Type of Patient
Data Access
Future
Requirements
The type of access to patient data and monitoring controls at each monitoring
location should be considered when designing the system. For example, does the
clinician need to view both real-time and stored patient data from a clinical unit
and/or other clinical units? Will it be necessary to silence alarms or change
monitoring control settings? The answers to these types of questions are critical to
the selection of monitoring hardware and network design. And they have great
impact on the effectiveness of the PIIC System in meeting the needs of clinicians,
as well as system cost.
When designing an ICN both present and future requirements should be
considered. Consideration should be given to possible future growth or
requirements in system design.
Designing the System
Note This document does not describe the design and implementation of PIIC Systems in
detail because each clinical environment requires careful analysis by an
experienced network designer. Philips Service Providers are trained to assist
customers in reviewing their clinical requirements and designing a Server system
that meets those requirements and will be supported by Philips Healthcare.
The general concepts and capabilities of PIIC System components described should
only be used as a reference for understanding the final design. Consult a Philips
Service Provider for system design advice.
Philips recommends that customers consult with a Philips representative when
designing an ICN for their clinical environment to assure optimum selection of
equipment and system performance.
Once the patient monitoring requirements of the clinical unit are determined, the
ICN can be optimally designed.
Some key elements to consider in system design follow.
• Select the hardware components that will satisfy the clinical requirements,
• Determine which PIIC feature options you require,
• Determine the switch requirements-- the number of switches required and the
devices (IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients, IntelliVue patient monitors,
Access Points) that will be connected to each switch port.
• Determine the Cable Plant requirements -- cabling types/lengths and
components (wall boxes, repeaters, media translators) necessary to
interconnect network devices.
Once you determine your hardware and software requirements, Philips suggests
that you sketch your Network including all required devices, components, and
cabling. The final design should show all relevant information (Device Names,
Locations, Cable Types, Cable Lengths, and so on).
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
4-7
Chapter 4: Site Planning and Preparation
The Philips IntelliVue Clinical Network documentation provides examples, details
and connection type diagrams that can assist in the connection planning.
Network Connection Considerations
Because the IntelliVue Information Centers obtain information from patient
monitors connected to the Network, the network connection wall box must be
installed near the PIIC location.
Clinical Network cabling, wall boxes, and faceplate installation are generally the
responsibility of a certified cabling professional. Network design should give careful
consideration to the locations of cabling wall boxes, both for the clinical equipment
and for the active Network components that require them. Distances between wall
boxes and connected devices depends on cable lengths.
PIIC TCP/IP
Settings
The following features of the IntelliVue Information Center software require a
second Network Interface Card (NIC).
• 12-Lead Export
• Holter Export
• HL7 Export
• Web Access
• Patient Data Transfer
The settings required for this NIC are for connection to the hospital network and are
site-specific. These settings will be added during hardware installation. Physical
network connections including cable runs and wall boxes must also be considered.
Connection to the Hospital LAN requires a 100 Mbit connection.
The following settings must be determined before installation:
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Default Gateway
• DNS IP Address
(search order)
• WINS IP Address
-
primary
-
secondary
Settings for the second NIC are site-specific. These settings should be clearly
documented and available in case you must re-install the Operating System.
Equipment
Cabling
4-8
When selecting locations for system components, consider the lengths of cables
required for interconnections. Standard length interconnection cables are provided
with each component, but other cable lengths are available as options.
Patient Safety Considerations
Patient Safety Considerations
Medical Device Standards
All medical devices must comply with international safety requirements for medical
electrical equipment (IEC 60601-1 Medical electrical equipment -- Part 1: General
requirements for basic safety).
When connecting medical or non-medical equipment to a medical device (bedside
monitor) a medical electrical system is created. Medical electrical systems must
comply with IEC 60601-1-1 Medical electrical equipment – Part 1-1: Collateral
Standard – Safety requirements for medical electrical systems. When forming a
medical electrical system, all equipment used within the patient environment
(within 1.5 m from the patient and up to 2.5 m from the floor) must have its touch
(enclosure) leakage current and patient leakage current measured. Measurements
can be made using nominal mains voltage. Touch leakage current should be less
than 100 µA in normal condition. Touch leakage current should be less than 500 µA
(300 µA United States) when any one equipment, in-turn, of the medical electrical
system, has an open earth ground (Class I, at the wall plug). Medical electrical
equipment of the medical electrical system must have its patient leakage current
measured. Type B and Type BF patient applied parts are limited to 100 µA in normal
condition. Type CF patient applied parts are limited to 10 µA in normal condition.
Note Leakage current measurements referred to are to be measured at the patient
monitor.
If in doubt, consult the Technical Services Department or your local representative.
Philips Device Location Requirements
PIIC Systems, Servers, Displays, Printers, and active Network components may be
connected to bedside monitors through the ICN provided that they are located
outside the Patient Environment.
Patient Environment
None of the PIIC system equipment is intended for use within the patient
environment. Figure 4-1 shows acceptable distances from the patient environment.
Warning IntelliVue Information Centers, IntelliVue Information Center Clients, IntelliVue
Database Servers, displays, recorders, Printers, and ICN components are not
intended for placement within the patient environment -- any area within 1.5 meters
(4.9 ft.) horizontally and 2.5 m (8.2 ft.) vertically above the floor from any patient
care location in which medical diagnosis, monitoring, or treatment of the patient is
carried out.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
4-9
Chapter 4: Site Planning and Preparation
Figure 4-1: Required Minimum Equipment Location Distances from Patient
4-10
5
Installing PIIC Hardware
This chapter describes installation of PIIC system hardware components
and includes:
• Cable Plant Installation
• Unpacking and Inspection PIIC System Components
• Inspecting System Components
• Installing System Components
• Providing Electrical Power
• Assigning IP Addresses and Network Names
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-1
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Cable Plant Installation
Philips requires that a customer contracts with a certified CAT 5 (and greater) cable
installer for cable plant installation and that the installer provides test
documentation proving that the cable plant meets required specifications.
Note The hospital cable plant should be completely installed and tested before Philips
Representatives and Information Center and Server equipment arrive.
Installation Materials
Philips supplies a variety of UTP Category 5 (and greater) cable and installation
materials, including bulk UTP cable [in 305 m (1000 ft.) rolls], UTP patch panels,
UTP and fiber optic patch cables, and UTP wall boxes. Available options are
described in the IntelliVue Clinical Network documentation.
Note Philips does not supply bulk fiber optic cable.
Noise Immunity
UTP CAT 5 (and greater) cable has excellent immunity from noise when installed
correctly. To achieve this quality you must keep all UTP cables and active network
components as far away as possible from all sources of electrical noise. These
sources include all RF sources and AC powered devices and their power cables.
Data signals on UTP cables that receive excessive electrical noise (e.g. line power
surges or spikes) can become corrupt and may produce unpredictable results on
the networks they support.
During cable plant installation all UTP cables, patch panels, wall boxes, and active
network components should not be:
• in wiring closets where RF transmission sources are used, and
• within 1 m (3 ft.) of any AC device or AC power cord except where necessary to
connect them to workstations or the server.
Fiber optic cable should be used for any 10 Mbit/s cable-runs over 100 m for which
RF or electrical noise is a potential problem.
UTP Cable Plant Installation
Figure 5-1 illustrates a typical cable plant installation for UTP CAT 5 (and greater)
cables for IntelliVue Information Centers, Clients, and Clinical Network/Database
Server components.
The UTP cable plant must adhere to the following criteria.
• Patch panels for all switches should be in the wiring closets where the switches
will be installed.
• RJ45 wall plates or patch panels for repeaters and extension switches should
be in closets where they will be installed. Repeaters and Extension Switches
should not be located above a ceiling.
5-2
Cable Plant Installation
Figure 5-1: Typical UTP Cable Plant Installation
• RJ45 Wall plates for IntelliVue Information Centers, Clients, Printers, and Server,
should be within patch cable lengths of their devices.
• Cables, patch panels, switches, repeaters, and media translators should be
more than 1 m (3 ft.) from all powered devices (Server, UPS, etc.).
• Labels on all UTP cables and terminations should identify the cable, patch
panel, port number, and wall box termination.
• Test Documentation should demonstrate that the UTP cable plant meets
appropriate standards for NEXT, attenuation, wiremap, and length.
Caution UTP and fiber optic in-wall cables must be terminated at a patch panel or wall plate
and not directly at an active Network device.
RJ45 Connections
RJ45 connectors should be securely seated in their sockets. You must slide back
the rubber boot over the end of the connector to insure that the connector locks into
place. After the connector locks into place slide the rubber boot over the connector.
Tug lightly on the RJ45 connection to verify that the connector is engaged.
Rubber Boot
Figure 5-2: RJ45 Connector
Fiber Optic Cable Plant Installation
Fiber optic cable installation, testing procedures, and requirements are similar to
those for UTP CAT 5.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-3
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Unpacking and Inspection PIIC System Components
After the cable plant installation is complete, Information Center and Server
hardware and software can be installed. Unpack system components from their
shipment containers and thoroughly inspect them. An inventory Packing List is
provided with the shipment so you can verify that all ordered components have
been received.
Hardware components, except for the Philips Recorders, are manufactured by
equipment manufacturers other than the Philips Cardiac and Monitoring Solutions
Group. With the exception of the PC workstation processing units, these products
are received by Philips from their manufacturers and reshipped, unopened.
Unopened IntelliVue Information Center hardware components include:
• Display(s)
• 2-Channel Recorder
• UPS
• Printer (optional)
• Video Splitter (optional)
PCs are opened at the Philips factory. Interface cards, operating systems, and
application software is installed and tested. The PCs are then repackaged for
shipment to customers along with other IntelliVue Information Center hardware.
An Accessories Box is included in the shipment that contains the following IntelliVue
Information Center system accessories.
• Keyboard
• Mouse (or optional Trackball)
• Recorder
• Cables
• Information Center Service Documentation Kit
• Software Media Kit
Caution The IntelliVue Information Center Media Kit contains Operating System and
Application software. Be sure to carefully unpack and store it in a secure place in
case re-installation is necessary.
Unpacking System Components
When the shipment is received, it should be moved to the installation area but
remain unopened. The Philips Service Provider assigned to the installation will
remove the components from their packaging and assure the integrity of the
shipment. The Philips Service Provider will also remove shipment packaging
materials from the customer site if it is requested.
Checking
Inventory
5-4
An inventory Packing List is included with the shipment. Each shipped item should
be carefully checked against the Packing List. If an item on the Packing List is not
Inspecting System Components
included in the shipment, call the Response Center and report the missing item. It
will be shipped immediately to the customer site.
System Serial
Number
Each PC workstation has a System Serial Number label (Figure 5-3). Verify that this
information correctly matches the system ordered.
Model #
System Serial #
Hardware
Platform Model #
PC Serial #
Purchased
Options
Date of Manufacture
Figure 5-3: PIIC System Serial Number Label
Inspecting System Components
The Information Center system has been carefully packaged at the Philips factory so
that no damage occurs in shipment. However, Philips has no control over shipping
and handling damage. A thorough inspection of Philips components during removal
from packaging is an essential step to ensuring that no damage has occurred.
Note It may be necessary to document possible shipment damage in case hidden
damage becomes apparent during testing and operation.
Packaging
Before removing the components from their packaging, the shipment container
should be inspected for damage. External damage to shipping containers may
indicate damage to its contents. Open the shipping containers and check the
cushioning material. Note any signs of stress for indications of rough handling in
transit. Document any damage conditions.
Hardware
Components
Unpack each component from its shipping material. Examine all parts of each
component for visible damage -- broken connectors or controls, dents or scratches
on instrument surfaces, or any other unusual appearance. Document any damage
conditions.
Electrical
Components
No detailed internal or electrical inspection is required. The equipment has
undergone extensive electrical testing and configuration prior to shipment and all
PC boards and operating software have been pre-installed.
If physical damage is evident during unpacking or if, during initial testing and
operation, the Philips system fails to meet performance specifications in any way,
immediately notify the shipment carrier and the nearest Philips Sales/Support
Office. Philips will arrange for immediate repair or replacement of the equipment
without waiting for any claims to be settled.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-5
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Repackaging
Components for
Shipment
If you have to ship your system to a Philips Sales/Support Office, use the original
Philips packaging materials, if possible, to provide proper protection during
shipping. If the original packaging is not available or re-usable, contact the Philips
Sales/Support Office.
Securely attach a label to the equipment being returned that includes:
• Owner name and address
• Instrument model and serial number
• Detailed description of damage, repair required, or symptoms of faults
Installing System Components
This section describes proper installation of the components of the Information
Center system in their intended locations, including the assembly and installation of
mounting hardware. The procedure for a particular installation depends on the
planned locations of individual components developed during site planning and
preparation in Chapter 4. Hence, this section will only give general procedures for
locating individual components and must be adapted for each installation.
Setting up Components
Put all IntelliVue Information Center components to be located on the work surface
of the clinical work station in their intended locations. At a minimum, these
components include the primary display(s), keyboard, and mouse (or trackball), but
may also include recorders, speaker, printer, processing unit, and UPS.
Typical Installations
Units placed on the work surface should be positioned in the way that is most
convenient and useful to clinicians. Figure 5-4 shows a typical work surface
installation of the Information Center with dual display, speaker, optional printer,
and 2-Channel Recorder.
18.5
Figure 5-4: Typical IntelliVue Information Center Installation
5-6
Installing System Components
Two work surface installation options are available for the computer keyboard—a
table top garage (M3180A #A09) and an under table drawer (M3180A #A08). These
options permit putting the keyboard out of the way when not being used to provide
additional work surface area. Procedures for installing these units are described in
installation notes that come with the units.
Mounting Components
A variety of wall mount hardware is available for mounting Information Center
devices not located on the central monitoring work surface -- remote displays,
processing units, UPS, power distribution module. Mounting locations and hardware
should be identified during site planning so that mounting brackets and hardware
can be ordered as part of the Information Center system purchase.
Note Philips is responsible for assembling the mounting hardware, attaching it to the
display, and mounting the system to the ceiling or wall mount bracket.
Display Mounts
Wall and ceiling mounts are available that permit locating displays on walls or
ceilings where they can be more easily viewed by clinical users. Ceiling and wall
mounts are particularly useful for locating remote displays.
Caution Careful consideration should be given to assure that a surface, wall, or ceiling
structure can hold the weight of the item being mounted. See “Physical
Specifications” on page 2-33.
The Philips Field Service Engineer is responsible for assembling the mounting
hardware, securing it to the surface, wall, or ceiling mounts, and attaching the
Information Center component to the mounting hardware.
Installing Wall
Brackets
Installation of wall mount hardware (Figure 5-5) to ceilings and walls requires the
secure attachment of a wall bracket to a building structural member. This ensures
that the installation can safely and securely support the weight of the mounted
hardware.
Figure 5-5: Installing a Wall Mount Bracket
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-7
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Caution The customer is responsible for installing ceiling and wall brackets that hold
mounting hardware and for ensuring that the bracket installation can safely support
the device weight. Philips assumes no responsibility for this part of the installation.
CPU and UPS
Mounts
A wall mount can be attached to a vertical surface under or near the IIC workstation.
Figure 5-6 shows the wall mount option for the PC workstation (M3180A #A18) and
the UPS (M3180A #A11) in vertical and horizontal mounting options.
Figure 5-6: Wall Mount Brackets for PC Workstation and UPS
Installation Notes are included with the following mounts:
• M3180A #A11 UPS Wall Mount Kit
• M3180A #A18 Desktop PC Wall Mount Kit
Caution There should be no obstructions between wall mount enclosures and the wall that
can reduce air flow around mounted components. Inadequate air flow can lead to
overheating and failure of the Information Center components.
5-8
Installing System Components
PDM Mount
An additional wall mount option (Figure 5-7) is available for the Power Distribution
Module (PDM) which is required for Japanese installations.The PDM is usually
mounted next to the UPS and PC. Installation procedures for the wall mount are
described in the Power Distribution Module Installation Note supplied with the PDM:
Figure 5-7: Power Distribution Module Wall Mount
IntelliVue Information Center Installation
Securing Rear
Panel Cables
Rear panel cables should be secured firmly so they do not accidentally unplug.
Figure 5-8 illustrates the use of strain relief loops and cable ties to secure cables
without screw-connected plugs to cables with screw-connected plugs.
Warning Cables with plugs not firmly attached by screw connections must be secured to
prevent accidental unplugging. Be sure that the external speaker connection cannot
be accidentally pulled out. Use the Strain Relief Kit provided and secure the speaker
cable to another cable that has a screw connection. When securing all cables, be
sure to provide strain relief loops and cinch cable ties securely. See Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8: Example of Rear Panel Cable Strain Relief Method
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-9
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Proper PIIC/UPS
Connections
Install the UPS with the proper voltage for the IntelliVue Information Center PC as
follows:
1. Verify UPS batteries are connected and turn on the UPS. Wait for the Battery
LED to change from Amber to Green.
2. Connect the appropriate serial communication cable to the PC to the
appropriate port (APC UPS - Philips gray cable; UPS with Hardware Watchdog cable shipped with UPS).
Caution The PIIC N.01 server does not support the serial interface to an Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS). If there is a serial cable connecting a Philips-supplied or
customer-supplied UPS to a PIIC server, you must disconnect the cable prior to
upgrading the server to PIIC N.01
Small Database Server Installation
The M3169 Small Database Server and its display, keyboard, and mouse should be
installed in the intended location. The display, keyboard, and mouse are intended
for a work surface.
1. After you put the Small Database Server components in their intended location,
Install the 650 VA UPS with the proper voltage for the Server as follows:
2. Turn Off the UPS On/Off switches and connect the battery wire of the 650 VA
UPS.
3. Connect the UPS input power cord to a properly grounded electrical output.
4. Verify PC Voltage select switch setting and connect the PC power cord to a UPS
battery backup outlet.
Large Database Server Installation
The Large Database Server should be installed in its intended location. This
includes the Server, display, keyboard, and, mouse. The display, keyboard, and
mouse are intended for a work surface.
After you put the Database Server components in their intended locations, install
the 1000 VA UPS with the proper voltage for the Net Server as follows:
1. Turn Off the UPS On/Off switches.
2. Connect the battery wire of the 1000 VA UPS.
3. Connect the UPS input power cord to a properly grounded electrical output
4. Connect the Server power cord to a UPS battery backup outlet.
5-10
Installing System Components
Connecting the DBS to Hospital Intranet
If the IntelliVue Information Center Web is included with your system, connect the
Database Server to the Hospital intranet using proper cabling. This is a 100 Mbit/s
connection.
Installing Printers
PIIC Release N.01 uses the Windows Operating System Print Service to
accommodate printer installation. Refer to page 6-39 to add a BootP Networked
printer with Config Wizard, page 7-76 to add printers that are on the Hospital LAN to
the DBS, and page 6-93 to add monitoring LAN and local printers at the IIC.
Table 5-1: Printer Support for PIIC Systems
Device
Maximum # of
Printers
M3150 Information Center
(local database);
M3170 Patient Link
2
M3154 Database Server system
(connection to M3155 Information
Centers)
8
Large Network M3154 Database
System
80
M3169 Small Database Server
System
4
Note Use the vendor-supplied documentation for printer unpacking, setup, and
configuration procedures.
Interconnecting the PIIC System Components
Once the IntelliVue Information Center system components have been positioned in
their locations, they can be interconnected using proper equipment cables.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-11
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Setting Up a Touch Display
The following procedures must be completed to install and set up a touch display.
Note When touch screens are used in a Dual Display configuration, you may use only one
stylus and holder on the right display. Use of a stylus and holder on the left display
is not supported.
Cable
Connections
The rear panel of the touch display has connections for the Power cord, the Video
cable, and for the USB Cable (Figure 5-9). After the connections are made, the
cables can be threaded through the display stand.
Video Cable
Power
USB Cable
Figure 5-9: Touch Display Cable Connections
Mounting the
Touch Display
Stylus
The touch display comes with a stylus that can be secured to the display.
1. Secure the stylus cord to the display as illustrated in Figure 5-16.
Video Cable Connector
Figure 5-10: Securing the Stylus Cord
2. Clean the area below the Control Buttons with alcohol. When the surface is dry,
remove the backing from the stylus holder and attach it to the display. Be sure
that the larger opening of the holder is facing up as shown in Figure 5-11.
5-12
Installing System Components
Figure 5-11: Mounting the Stylus Holder
3. Place the stylus in the stylus holder.
Calibrating the
Touch Display
To calibrate an ELO Touchscreen display:
1. From the Windows desktop, open Control Panel and double-click the ELO icon.
The ELO Touchscreen Properties dialog appears.
Figure 5-12: ELO Touchscreen Properties Dialog
2. Press the Video Alignment button
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Test the touch alignment.
If touch is ok, press the Green Check icon.
If touch is not ok, press the Arrow icon to re-calibrate.
5. Select the Sound tab, and verify that there is no check in the Beep on touch
checkbox.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-13
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Figure 5-13: ELO Touchscreen Sound Settings
6. Press OK to close the ELO Touchscreen Properties dialog.
Disabling the
Touch Display
Controls
The touch display has five On-Screen Display (OSD) Control Buttons on the side
panel, which must be disabled.
Menu
Displays/Exits the OSD menus
Brightness/Plus/Clockwise
Mute/Minus/Counter-Clockwise
Select
Select item
Power
To disable the five On-Screen Display (OSD) Control Buttons:
1. Press and hold the Menu and Brightness buttons simultaneously until the
message OSD IS LOCKED appears. (If you press the buttons simultaneously
again, the OSD unlocks.)
2. Press the Menu button to confirm that Menus are disabled.
3. Press and hold the Menu and Mute buttons simultaneously until the message
POWER IS LOCKED appears on the screen. (If you press the buttons
simultaneously again, power becomes unlocked).
4. Press the Menu button to confirm that POWER button is disabled.
You can enable these controls for troubleshooting purposes, but you must be sure
to disable them when troubleshooting is complete.
5-14
Installing System Components
Setting Up a Remote Display
If the remote display is located in a different area than the CPU, extended length
coax cabling may be required (Figure 5-14). This is described in detail in the
Installation Note that ships with the remote display option.
Note The maximum length coax cable supported is 90 m (300 ft.).
Image quality diminishes when cable length is increased.
Coax cable lengths must be cut from the same spool of cable and be equal within
+ 1 m (3 ft.).
Figure 5-14: Remote Display Cable Connections
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-15
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Setting up a KVM Switch
A Keyboard-Video-Mouse (KVM) Switch permits controlling up to four IntelliVue
Information Centers with a single keyboard and mouse. The KVM switch also
permits a single display to serve as the second (Applications) display for all
IntelliVue Information Centers.
Figure 5-15: KVM Switch Cable Connections
Caution A Touch Screen connected to a KVM Switch cannot be used as the second Display.
The USB keyboard shipped with PIIC N.01 (starting November, 2013) is
incompatible with the 4-port KVM Switch with PS/2-style connectors
(P/N M3150-60025).
Installing and Configuring KaVoom Software
Philips KM Software accommodates keyboard and mouse operation for up to four I
ICs using a single keyboard and mouse. You can group up to four M3145/M3155
Information Centers, M3177 Trend Displays, and M3151 Information Center Clients
Dual display IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients are supported. Switchedsecond-display configurations and Touch screen displays are not supported.
5-16
Installing System Components
Note It is required that a hardware keyboard-video-mouse (KVM) switch is installed. This
reduces the risk if the PC (where the KM switch is connected) or connection to the
IntelliVue Clinical Network is lost.
4 x 1 Layout
2 x 2 Layout
3 > 1 Layout
1 > 3 Layout
1 x 4 Layout
Figure 5-16: Supported Display Layouts Using KM Software
KM Software Installation Procedure
Install KM software on every IntelliVue Information Center and IntelliVue Information
Center Client PC that is participating in the use model after you install the IIC
software. Before installing the KM Software on each device, verify that each host
name is correct.
The KM Software must be installed on IICs and Clients after the IIC software is
installed. Although a shortcut appears on the desktop it is not active until after the
KM Software executable runs.
KM Installation
Procedure
To install the KM software:
1. Run Windows Explorer from the PIIC desktop.
2. Locate the following file in the IIC C:\Stardate folder, and double-click it:
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-17
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Stardate/bin/KaVoomKM for Phillips_Setup.exe.
The file populates the Open textbox in the Run dialog.
3. Click OK in the Run dialog.
4. Progress through the installation screens by clicking the Next > button until you
reach the final screen and then click Finish.
5. On the desktop, double-click the SW KM Switch icon.
6. Click Change.
The Other Computers list is blank on the first device. Leave this window open
and repeat steps 1-4 on the other devices connected to the KM Software.
7. As other devices are configured, the Other Computers list populates with the
appropriate hostnames. When all desired hostnames appear in the Change
Configuration screen, click Next > on one of the devices.
8. On the selected device, drag and drop the monitor icons (with their computer
names showing) to the correct location. Click Finish.
9. Restart ALL devices and verify that they resume monitoring.
10. Select the Hide key to close the configuration screens.
Note Dual Display Information Centers and Clients appear as a single icon.
The Database Server/IntelliVue Information Center archive does not include
configuration settings for the KM Software Switch. If the Operating System or
Application software is ever upgraded or reinstalled, the KM Software must be reinstalled and configured.
When re-installing or upgrading KM Software, older version files are automatically
overwritten. You do not have to restart the PC.
Removing the
KM Software
To remove the installed KM software:
1. On one of the devices in the group that includes the device you want to disable,
open the KM Software Change Configuration screen.
2. Select the hostname(s) of each device you want to disable, then click Remove.
If disabling multiple devices, repeat this process for each device.
Providing Electrical Power
The following IntelliVue Information Center components are provided with 3-wire,
grounded power cables.
• Display(s)
• Processing Unit
• UPS with Hardware Watchdog
• Power Supply for 2-Channel USB Recorder
• Printer
• 6-Way Video Splitter
5-18
Assigning IP Addresses and Network Names
Each three-wire, power cable must be separately connected to the appropriate
three-wire, grounded electrical receptacle.
Caution Before connecting power cables to electrical outlets:
1. Verify that all components of the Information Center system that can be turned
off are turned OFF!
2. Review Safety in Chapter 4 to assure proper electrical grounding and isolation.
3. If applicable, set the input voltage selection switch on the rear of the PC
workstation to the proper line voltage.
4. If connected to an APC UPS, set 120V UPS rear panel switch settings to those
shown in Chapter 2.
5. Set Power Distribution Module input and output voltage switch settings to their
proper values.
PC workstation, 60V 2-Channel Recorder Power Supply, 2-Channel USB Recorder, or
Power Distribution Module connect to the BATTERY BACKUP outlets on the UPS.
Displays and video splitters may be connected to ACCESSORY outlets of the UPS or
to a separate non-UPS outlet.
Printers should not be connected to a UPS.
Warning IntelliVue Information Center system components may not be located within the
Patient Environment (see page 4-9 for details).
Assigning IP Addresses and Network Names
When all devices have been installed, interconnected, and turned on, you must
identify their names and locations on the Network. The names and addresses for
each Network device -- Switch, Information Center, Client, and Printer -- must be
unique so the equipment can be properly located by the Database Server and other
Network devices.
IP Addresses
The IP Address is a 32-bit binary number that uniquely identifies the device on the
Network. Part of the IP Address identifies the network and part identifies the device.
A range of IP addresses (Table 5-2) has been set for each type of Network device.
Warning IP Addresses outside the ranges in Table 5-2 have not been tested by Philips and
are not supported by Philips software.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-19
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Table 5-2: IP Address Range for Network Devices
Device
IP Address Range
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
Routed Systems
M3/M4/IntelliVue Patient
Monitors
172.31.(n+4).0 172.31.(n+4).255
255.255.248.0
2.4 GHz Access Point
Controllers
172.31.(n+1).0 172.31.(n+1).63
172.31.n.1
255.255.248.0
Information Centers
172.31.(n+3).32 172.31.(n+3).63
172.31.n.1
255.255.248.0
Information Center Clients
172.31.(n+3).64 172.31.(n+3).95
172.31.n.1
255.255.248.0
Database Servers (Monitoring
LAN)
172.31.(n+3).0 172.31.(n+3).15
(blank)
255.255.248.0
IntelliVue Clinical Network
Switches
172.31.(n).10 172.31.(n).102
172.31.n.1
255.255.248.0
Monitoring LAN Printers
172.31.(n+3).96 172.31.(n+3).127
IntelliVue Telemetry System
Infrastructure Switches
172.31.240.10 172.31.240.20
172.31.240.1
255.255.240.0
Reserved for Service PC
172.31.240.4 172.31.240.9
172.31.240.1
255.255.240.0
Reserved for Future
172.31.240.21 172.31.240.255
1.4 GHz Access Point
Controllers
172.31.241.0 172.31.241.127
172.31.240.1
255.255.240.0
1.4 GHz Wireless Access
Points
172.31.242.0 172.31.244.127
172.31.240.1
255.255.240.0
255.255.248.0
Non-routed Systems
5-20
M3/M4/IntelliVue Patient
Monitors
172.31.(n+4).0 172.31.(n+4).255
255.255.248.0
1.4 and 2.4 GHz Access Point
Controllers
172.31.(n+1).0 172.31.(n+1).63
IP Address of DBS
or M3150 PIIC
255.255.248.0
Information Centers
172.31.(n+3).32 172.31.(n+3).63
IP Address of DBS
or M3150 PIIC
255.255.248.0
Information Center Clients
172.31.(n+3).64 172.31.(n+3).95
IP Address of DBS
or M3150 PIIC
255.255.248.0
Database Servers (Monitoring
LAN)
172.31.(n+3).0 172.31.(n+3).15
(blank)
255.255.248.0
IntelliVue Clinical Network
Switches
172.31.(n).10 172.31.(n).102
IP Address of DBS
or M3150 PIIC
255.255.248.0
Assigning IP Addresses and Network Names
Table 5-2: IP Address Range for Network Devices
Device
IP Address Range
Monitoring LAN Printers
172.31.(n+3).96 172.31.(n+3).127
1.4 GHz Wireless Access
Points
172.31.(n+2).0 172.31.(n+2).255
Default Gateway
Subnet Mask
255.255.248.0
IP Address of DBS
or M3150 PIIC
255.255.248.0
a - “n” represents the network number and starts at 0 for single Clinical Network systems. It
increments by 8 from there for additional IntelliVue Clinical Networks. See the “Worksheets” on page A-1 for examples of network addresses.
b - Route statements are generated (in instances with a Router and without) at the
completion of the Config Wizard.
c - A Route statement must be run if connectivity to devices on the other side of the router is
desired.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
MAC Address
Host Name
Device Name
Almost all IP Address handling applications require the specification of a Subnet
Mask. The Subnet Mask default value of 255.255.248.0 can be used for all
Network-connected devices and will appear in Windows configuration applications.
It is not necessary to know the masked IP Address of a Philips device, although it
does appear in the Network category of the Status Log. In all other applications, the
real IP Address for the networked device is shown.
A Default Gateway must be specified in many IP Addressing applications. Its
configuration depends on the type of network that devices are connecting to.
Media Access Control (MAC) Address is a fixed, unique 12 digit HEX number that
identifies a device. Part of the number identifies the device manufacturer. It is hard
coded into the device network interface card and cannot be changed.
Host Name is an alphanumeric name assigned to each workstation -- Information
Centers, Clients, Database Server. Philips assigns a Host Name to each PC before
shipment; but it should be changed to a name that identifies its function,
associated unit, and physical location.
Device Name is an identification name assigned to an IntelliVue Information Center,
Client, Server, or Switch when it is configured on the network. Device Name is
generally the same as the Host Name.
To view the Host Name for a device:
1. Navigate to Start > Control Panel > System.
The System Information window opens.
2. Click Change Settings.
The System Properties dialog opens.
3. Select the Computer Name tab.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-21
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Figure 5-17: Computer Name Setting
The Computer Name is the Host Name.
Display IP
Address Setting
To view the IP Address for a device:
1. Navigate to Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center.
The System Properties dialog opens.
2. Click the Monitoring LAN link, and then click Properties from the Local Area
Connection Status dialog.
3. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the LAN Properties dialog and
click Properties.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog opens. The IP
Address tab shows the IP address of the device. You can also enter or change
an IP Address if necessary. The Subnet mask and Default gateway address for
the device are also shown.
5-22
Assigning IP Addresses and Network Names
Figure 5-18: IP Address Settings
Setting Host Names and IP Addresses
After all Network devices are installed, you must assign Host Names and IP
Addresses for the device—IntelliVue Information Centers, Clients, Database Server,
Switches, Printers—before you can install and configure Philips software.
Device Naming
Rules
When assigning a Host Name to a device on the network, be sure that the name:
• is unique so the Server can identify it,
• contains no more than 15 characters,
• uses alpha-numeric characters only, as no other characters are acceptable (no
spaces, hyphens, underscores, etc.),
• does not begin with a number, and
• is different from factory settings assigned during device installation.
Note IP Addresses for M3/M4/IntelliVue Patient Monitors are automatically assigned by
Philips software.
Appendix A includes worksheets that you can copy and use to record Host Names,
Device Names, hospital Locations, and IP Addresses. Be sure to complete Network
Installation Worksheets for all devices on the Network.
To set Host Names and IP Addresses for IntelliVue Information Centers, Clients,
Small Database Servers, and Large Database Servers:
1. Navigate to Start > Control Panel > System.
The System Information window opens.
2. Click Change Settings.
The System Properties dialog opens.
3. Select the Computer Name tab.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-23
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
4. Change the Computer Name for the device to a Host Name associated with its
location in the hospital (e.g., ICU or CCU).
Note When selecting a device Host Name, refer to Device Naming Rules on page 5-23.
5. Navigate to Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center.
The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
6. Click the Monitoring LAN link, and then click Properties from the Local Area
Connection Status dialog.
7. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the LAN Properties dialog and
click Properties.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) dialog opens.
8. Enter an IP address for the device using one of the recommended IP addresses
for the device type (see Table 5-2, “IP Address Range for Network Devices,” on
page 5-20).
9. Enter a Default gateway for this device:
For IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients in non-routed topologies with no
IntelliVue Telemetry devices, use the Server IP address.
For IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients in routed topologies with
IntelliVue Telemetry devices, use the router IP address.
For a Server in non-routed topologies, leave blank (0.0.0.0), and for a Server in
routed topologies with IntelliVue Telemetry devices on the connected
Information Centers/Clients, use the router IP address.
10. Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog.
11. Close the Network and Control Panel windows to return to the Desktop.
12. Shutdown and Restart the device.
Note After all Host Names are changed, you must re-initialize the Database Server and all
connected IntelliVue Information Center/Client software. Refer to Application
Software Re-initialization and Re-installation, page 6-2.
Verifying NIC
Settings
After you set Host Names and IP Addresses, verify Network Interface Card (NIC)
configurations as follows:
1. Navigate to Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center.
The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
2. Click the Monitoring LAN link, and then click Properties from the Local Area
Connection Status dialog.
3. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the LAN Properties dialog and
click Properties.
4. The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog opens. Click
Configure, and select the Advanced tab.
5. Verify the Link Speed & Duplex property setting.
5-24
Assigning IP Addresses and Network Names
Figure 5-19: Monitoring LAN Speed/Duplex Setting
6. Click OK to close the dialog and return to the Network Connections dialog and
then close the Network Connections dialog and Control Panel window.
Testing Network Connectivity
After you set the IP Addresses of the Database Server, IntelliVue Information
Centers, Clients, Switches, Access Points, and Printers, you must test the Network
to assure the integrity of each connection and to be sure that each device can be
identified by the Server. This must be done at the DataBase Server.
To verify network connectivity from the IntelliVue Database Server:
1. Open the Start menu and then enter run in the search box.
2. Click the returned link to the Run program.
3. Type cmd in the Open: box, and click OK.
The command window opens.
4. Type Ping hostname (or Ping IP address) using the hostname or IP address of
one of the Network-connected devices, and press Enter.
If connection to the device is successful (i.e., the network connection is
complete and the Host Name is resolved), a reply with the device IP address
displays.
If no connection/resolution can be made a failure message appears. If the
command fails, you must identify the problem, correct it, and repeat Steps 1 - 3.
5. Repeat Step 4 for each IntelliVue Information Center, Client, Switch, Access
Point, and Printer on the Network.
6. Close the Command window, and restart the Server.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-25
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Note After the Host Name is changed, Philips software must be re-initialized. Refer to
Application Software Re-initialization and Re-installation on page 6-2.
Configuring Settings for the Optional Second NIC
If you are using a second NIC (Network Interface Card) on your system, it must be
configured before you begin to configure software.
Network settings are site-specific and required for the NIC to connect to the hospital
network. The factory default of the second NIC IP address is DHCP.
TCP/IP Settings
Use the settings listed in “PIIC TCP/IP Settings” on page 4-8 to perform the
following:
1. Navigate to Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center.
The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
2. Click the Hospital LAN link, and then click Properties from the Local Area
Connection Status dialog.
3. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the LAN Properties dialog and
click Properties.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog opens.
4. Enter the TCP/IP Properties/settings, including the IP address, Subnet mask,
Default gateway and DNS server information.
Figure 5-20: TCP/IP Property Settings
5-26
Assigning IP Addresses and Network Names
5. Click Advanced to open the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog, and select the
DNS and/or WINS tabs to enter in the required settings.
Figure 5-21: TCP/IP Property Settings
6. Click OK to close the TCP/IP Settings dialogs.
Checking the
Node Type
When the second NIC properties are configured on the Database Server and
IntelliVue Information Center systems, the node configuration type can be Hybrid or
Unknown. In most cases when DHCP is used, the Hospital DHCP service returns
Hybrid as the node type. If the Hospital DHCP service returns Peer or Unknown as
the node type, you can request that the Hospital IT Staff change the node type to
Hybrid. If the hospital will not change the node type from Peer to Hybrid, consult the
Philips Customer Response Center.
If the hospital uses static IPs and WINS (NetBios) is configured properly, node type
will be set to Hybrid automatically. If WINS is not configured and static IPs are being
used, the node type Unknown is valid and supported.
You must check the network node configuration during installation to be sure of
accurate network communication in the system. If the node configuration type is not
properly set, network problems can occur.
Application problems from a network node type setting of Peer or Unknown could
include:
• Failure of Patient Data Transfers across Database Servers
• Delay in presentation of IntelliVue Information Center Review Applications
• Connection problems between Information Center and Database Server (e.g.
You cannot ping by host name but you can ping by IP address.)
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
5-27
Chapter 5: Installing PIIC Hardware
Verify network node type setting for the second NIC as follows:
1. Navigate to Start > Run to open the Run window.
2. Type cmd in the Open: box, and click OK.
The command window opens.
3. Type ipconfig /all.
The Windows IP Configuration displays.
Figure 5-22: Windows IP Configuration Settings
4. If the hospital is using DHCP to resolve the second NIC, request that the hospital
IT professional change the Node Type to Hybrid.
5. If the hospital is not using DHCP to resolve the second NIC, verify proper WINS
configuration then verify that the Node Type is Hybrid according to Step 2.
If WINS is not configured and static IPs are being used, the node type Unknown
is valid and supported.
5-28
6
Software Installation and Configuration
This chapter provides procedures to re-install the OS and PIIC application
on an IntelliVue Information Center or Database Server and includes:
• Re-installing the PIIC Software
• Using the Config Wizard Configuration Tool
• Completing the Config Wizard Screens
• Viewing and Printing the Report Configuration File
• Using MininConfig
• Assigning Equipment Labels
• Activating the Database Server
• Activating the Network/Server System
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-1
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Re-installing the PIIC Software
Philips systems are shipped with all system software properly installed. If software
functionality is lost, however, either by an unexpected electrical condition or a
system failure, it can be re-installed. This section describes the procedure for
installing or reinstalling Operating System and Application software. The procedures
apply to the Server and the IntelliVue Information Center workstations.
Caution On an initial installation on a Database Server be sure to close all programs and
applications before running the Application setup program. Failure to close
programs and applications can cause the setup process to abort. If this happens
you will have to restart the setup process.
Software Re-installation Prerequisites
Note these important pre-requisites prior to re-installing the PIIC software:
• Complete an Installation Worksheet - Before you begin installing System
Software, copy an Installation Worksheet in Appendix A and use it to record
information required during System installation.
• Create a Current Archive - Before you start the software re-installation, create
an Archive of the current device (page 6-96). With Release N.01, your printer
configuration will not be archived, so be sure to save and restore your local
printer configuration using the Microsoft Windows Printer Migration Wizard or
equivalent.
• Connect Dual Displays - If an IntelliVue Information Center or Client has dual
displays, be sure to physically connect both displays before Installing the
Operating System. If both displays are not connected prior to installation, the
Purchased Options screen # of Displays setting will be disabled and set to 1.
• Stop the EWS Service - If you are re-configuring or upgrading a Database Server
that is connected to an Enhanced Web Server (EWS) client or server, the EWS
Service must be stopped and the EWS device must be restarted after the
configuration changes are made.
• Ensure Version Compatibility - All IntelliVue Information Center devices must be
running the same software revision.
PIIC Software Distribution Media
The PIIC N.01 software is distributed on USB Flash Drive (UFD) media kits as
summarized in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1: PIIC N.01 Release Media Kits
Philips P/N
453564468331
N.01 Media Kit Description
PIC M3140 N.01.XX Media Kit USB
These part numbers include the OS and PIIC application files. The part number for
the PIIC N.01 application is 453564366801.
6-2
Re-installing the PIIC Software
The PIIC installation no longer includes a separate Installation Support Tool (IST)
CD-ROM. The IST functionality is incorporated on the N.01 installation USB drive.
PIIC Software Re-installation Procedure
The full PIIC software installation takes about 45 minutes to complete and occurs in
three phases:
• Phase One - The Operating System is installed.
• Phase Two - You are prompted to enter basic identifiers for the platform
including Computer Name and IP Address.
• Phase Three - The PIIC application is installed and Configuration Wizard runs.
Note The procedure below describes a full PIIC software installation including the OS and
the PIIC application. If you need to re-install only the PIIC application, then simply
run: app/install32\setup.exe directly from the USB installation media.
If a software licensing dialog appears during the PIIC software installation warning
that “This copy of Windows is not genuine,” it usually indicates that the target
platform has the incorrect BIOS version installed. Review the BIOS version for the
target PIIC host platform listed in “Updating the BIOS” on page 7-79 and then
update the BIOS as required.
The installation program validates the required RAM and hard drive space on the
target computer as listed in Table 1-1. If either does not meet the minimum
requirements, the installation program will post an error message and abort the
installation.
To re-install the OS and the PIIC application software:
1. Load the PIIC N.01 USB drive into the appropriate PC/Server USB port
2. Re-start the PC/Server.
3. After the HP banner appears, press F9 to open the Boot Menu on a PC or F11 to
open the Boot Menu on a Large DBS Server.
4. Use the keyboard up/down arrows to select USB Device, and then press Enter.
The installation runs and the Philips banner (Figure 6-1) appears.
Figure 6-1: Philips Software Installation Banner
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-3
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
5. Select Continue, and press Enter.
The OS is installed. The PC/Server may re-boot multiple times during the OS
installation.
Upon completion of the OS installation, the Philips IntelliVue Information Center
banner (Figure 6-2) appears.
Figure 6-2: Philips IntelliVue Information Center Banner
You are then prompted to begin the Stardate System Setup as shown in
Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3: Stardate System Setup System: Information Screen
6. Complete the Stardate System Setup Screen as follows:
a) Click Change... and enter a Computer Name for the PC/Server.
The entered name should be a meaningful Hostname for the PC/Server on
the Monitoring LAN and is limited to a maximum of 15 characters.
Note If you inadvertently enter the wrong Computer Name for a networked PIIC, you will
see an error message when you get to the Configuration Wizard portion of the
installation. You can correct this by changing the name of the PC/Server directly
using the Windows Control Panel/System applet, and then running the PIIC
application installation (and not the OS installation) directly from the installation
USB under: app/install32\setup.exe.
6-4
Re-installing the PIIC Software
b) Click Change... and enter the IP Address of the PC/Server.
The Setting IP Address screen (Figure 6-4) appears.
Figure 6-4: Setting IP Address Screen
c) Enter all required information, and then click Apply followed by Exit.
You are returned to the Stardate System Setup Screen (Figure 6-3).
7. Click Next to continue the installation.
8. The Language Selection Screen (Figure 6-5) appears.
Figure 6-5: Stardate System Setup: Language Selection Screen
9. Complete the Language Selection Screen as follows:
a) Select the appropriate language for the PIIC device from the Select Country
and Region Code drop-down menu.
a) Select the appropriate Uninterruptible Power Supply option for the PIIC
device from the Select UPS Option drop-down menu.
b) Mark the radio button corresponding to the appropriate Model Type for this
PIIC device.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-5
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
c) Click Next.
The Security Policy Screen (Figure 6-6) appears.
Figure 6-6: Stardate System Setup: Security Policy Screen
a) Click Verify to verify the Security Policy settings.
b) If a Security Policy setting is flagged as being in error, select the setting and
then click Correct to repair the error.
c) Click Next when all settings have been verified.
The Account Screen (Figure 6-7) appears.
Figure 6-7: Stardate System Setup: Account Screen
a) Click Verify to verify the User Account settings.
b) If a User Account setting is flagged as being in error, select the setting and
then click Correct to repair the error.
c) Click Next when all settings have been verified.
6-6
Re-installing the PIIC Software
The Network Screen (Figure 6-8) appears.
Figure 6-8: Stardate System Setup: Network Screen
a) Click Verify to verify the Network settings.
b) If a Network setting is flagged as being in error, select the setting and then
click Correct to repair the error.
c) Click Next when all settings have been verified.
The Environment Screen (Figure 6-9) appears.
Figure 6-9: Stardate System Setup: Environment Screen
a) Click Verify to verify the Environment settings.
b) If an Environment setting is flagged as being in error, select the setting and
then click Correct to repair the error.
c) Click Next when all settings have been verified.
10. Click Finish to complete the Stardate System Setup portion of the installation.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-7
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
The PIIC application installation wizard (Figure 6-10) appears.
Figure 6-10: The PIIC Application Installation Wizard
11. Click Next to continue with installation of the PIIC application.
The Language screen (Figure 6-11) appears.
Figure 6-11: The PIIC Application Installation Wizard: Language Screen
12. Select the appropriate language for the PIIC application, and the click Next.
The selected language should match the language you selected on the Stardate
System Setup Screen.
6-8
Re-installing the PIIC Software
The Install Type screen (Figure 6-12) appears.
Figure 6-12: The PIIC Application Installation Wizard: Install Type Screen
13. Specify the appropriate Installation Type, and then click Next.
Installation Type options are:
• Re-install - Use this selection for devices on which installed software is
suspected of being corrupt.
• Re-initialize Only - Use this selection for new devices from Philips for which
the Host Name and IP Address have been changed. If the Database Server
is re-initialized, all devices must be re-initialized.
When a device Host Name or IP Address is changed the device must be reinitialized so that it can communicate with the DataBase Server during the
Purchased Options and Support Information (page 6-19) configuration.
If you select the Re-install option, you are prompted to select a Model Type
(Figure 6-13) for the PIIC installation.
Figure 6-13: The PIIC Application Installation Wizard: Model Type Screen
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-9
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
The selected model type should match the model you selected on the Stardate
System Setup Screen.
You are prompted to install Demo Mode and Simulator files (Figure 6-14) on the
target computer.
Figure 6-14: The PIIC Application Installation Wizard: Install Demo Mode Screen
14. Click Yes or No as appropriate for your installation and then click Next.
15. Click Next when the Installing Philips Software screen (Figure 6-15) appears.
Figure 6-15: The PIIC Application Installation Wizard: Installing Philips Software
Screen
The PIIC application files are now installed.
16. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the PIIC application software
installation.
On PIIC devices connecting to a Database Server, the Connect to Database
Server dialog appears. Verify that the Database Server is in Monitoring mode
and enter the Database Server name in the dialog box. Click Ok in the dialog
box to continue.
6-10
Using the Config Wizard Configuration Tool
17. At completion of the PIIC application installation, the PIIC desktop appears with
the Config Wizard configuration tool (Figure 6-16) open and running.
Figure 6-16: Philips Configuration Wizard Tool
18. Use the Config Wizard to configure the PIIC device for your network as described
in the next section.
19. After you have completed the Config Wizard screens, you are returned to the
PIIC application installation wizard. Click Finish to close the PIIC Application
Installation Wizard and complete the installation.
Using the Config Wizard Configuration Tool
Use the Config Wizard tool the configure the PIIC device for use on the Monitoring
LAN as described in this section.
Running Config Wizard
The Config Wizard configuration tools runs automatically as part of a PIIC software
installation.
Caution Philips does not support running Config Wizard on both the IntelliVue Information
Center and Database Server simultaneously.
From the
Desktop
To run Config Wizard from the desktop, double-click the Config Wizard icon
(Figure 6-17) displayed on your SC 50 Device Interfacing Engine host computer
desktop.
Figure 6-17: The Config Wizard Desktop Icon
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-11
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
From the
Configuration
Menu
Open the Configuration menu from the PIIC Service Screen to access these Config
Wizard options:
• !Config Wizard - Run the Config Wizard configuration tool.
When you launch Config Wizard from the Configuration menu, the following
warning appears.
Figure 6-18: Local Database Mode Warning
If you click Yes, all Network IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients restart
and go into local database mode before Config Wizard begins.
• !MiniConfig Wizard - Run the MiniConfig Wizard configuration tool. MiniConfig is
used only with the M3140 Low Acuity Model PIIC and permits a single screen
configuration.
• Read Only Config Wizard - Enables you to step through read-only versions the
Config Wizard screens without making any configuration changes.
Config Wizard Screens
Config Wizard presents a series of configuration screens depending on PIIC model
type as summarized in Table 6-2.
6-12
Using the Config Wizard Configuration Tool
Table 6-2: Config Wizard Screen Sequence
Config Wizard
Screen
Sequence
M3140
M3150
(Local DB)
M3154 Large
M3169 Small
DB Server
M3145/3155
Central DB
M3177
Trend
Display
M3151
Client
M3170
Patient
Link
√
Backup Logs
Restore From Archive
√
√
√
√
Software Versions
and Security Updates
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Purchased Options
and Support
Information
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Database Server
General
Configuration
Local General
Configuration
√
Network
Configuration
√
Unit Paging Settings
√
√
Equipment Setup
√
√
Bed Config
√
√
√
Report and
Recording
Destination
√
Security Access
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Display Setup
Report Settings
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√α
√
√
√
√
Date and Time Setup
√
√
√
√
Creating an Archive
√
√
√
√
a. At Installation only
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-13
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Navigating the Config Wizard
The Config Wizard Graphical User Interface (GUI) consists of a series of
configuration screens.
Click Next to proceed to the next configuration screen.
Click Back to return to the previous configuration screen.
Click Exit to save all entries made on the current configuration screen and then exit
the Config Wizard tool.
Click Help to display an online help window that provides information about each SC
50 configuration screen and how it may be completed.
Click Finish to complete the SC 50 configuration process and then close the Config
Wizard tool. The Finish button appears only on the last Cfg Wizard screen, the
Archive screen (Figure 3-20).
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
This section describes the configuration screens you must complete when using the
Config Wizard to define the PIIC device configuration.
Backup Logs
The Backup Logs screen (Figure 6-19) is only available on the M3170 Patient Link
device. It permits copying all operating system and IntelliVue Information Center
logs to a compressed file so you can review them later.
Figure 6-19: Config Wizard: Backup Logs Screen
You can select the IntelliVue Information Centers/Clients from which to obtain logs
and the destination location. Two files are created, hostname.zip, which contains
operating system event logs and all the IntelliVue Information Center log files, and
hostnamejunk.zip, which contains a password-protected alarm.log file.
To create backup logs:
1. Select the host name of the device(s) you want to obtain logs from.
2. Verify the Backup Log Path destination. You can use the Browse button if you
want to save the files to a specific location.
6-14
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
3. Click Backup Logs.
4. Click Next > to save changes and continue to the next screen.
Restore from Archive
Restore From Archive (Figure 6-20) restores configuration settings for a device from
archive media. All clinical Unit Settings, Configuration settings, and Purchased
Options are restored. Patient Admit, Discharge, and Transfer (ADT) settings at the
time of the archive can also be restored.
Figure 6-20: Config Wizard: Restore from Archive Screen
When a device is being configured for the first time there are no stored
configuration settings for that device, so you can go to the next Config Wizard
screen.
Caution In a large network system, verify that you use the Master Database Server archive
for the Master Database Server. If the Master Database Server archive is restored
on a non-master Database Server, will be two master database servers.
With Release N.01, your printer configuration will not be archived, so be sure to
save and restore your local printer configuration using the Microsoft Windows
Printer Migration Wizard or equivalent.
When restoring from an earlier PIIC software release archive, you may see a
message describing a discrepancy between the archive subnet mask and the
current configuration. If you acknowledge the message, the archive continues, but
some IP addresses may be blank. If necessary, you can re-enter the required IP
Addresses of the devices in the Network Configuration screen. When the Config
Wizard is complete, the device will restart. You will have to manually enter the IP
addresses for each device before continuing.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-15
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Also, when restoring from an earlier PIIC software release archive, a dialog box may
open requesting confirmation of the IP Address migration. Click OK if you want to
migrate the configuration.
• Be sure to physically change the IP address at each connected device (including
IntelliVue Information Centers, Clients, Switches, etc.) so connection can occur.
• For networked bedsides (IPMs), restart the bedside monitor or disconnect/
reconnect its LAN cable.
To restore a configuration from an archive file:
1. Insert the archive media into the appropriate drive/port.
2. Enter the correct configuration file name in the Archive path: text box.
Alternatively, click Browse to open a Browse window and select the archive file
on the archive media. PIIC archive files have a .ARC file extension.
If no files display when you click Browse, type the drive letter or *.* into the text
box, and click Browse. Select the correct file name from the list, and click OK.
3. Optional. Mark the Restore Patient ADT Settings checkbox if you want to restore
the patients’ ADT settings.
Patient ADT settings that are restored for each patient on the Network are:
• Patient Name
• Medical Record Number
• Admit State
• Paced Status
• Patient Type
Note Restored ADT settings for alarms can be either the last known settings for that
patient or the unit settings if the patient was not on the IntelliVue Information
Center when it was shut down.
4. Click Start Restoring to begin the archive restore process. A dialog box opens
with the archive details.
If the archive data for the device is correct, click Yes to continue. If the archive
data for the device is incorrect, click No and enter the correct file name. If the
archive data was not archived from the device, the warning, Incompatible setup:
different model! Operation aborted, appears. If you see the warning enter the
correct file name and repeat the process.
If you selected Restore Patient ADT Settings, a caution describes the
consequences of restoring old ADT data. You must click Yes in the dialog to
continue. If you do not want to restore patient ADT settings, click No.
When the process is complete the message, Restore program has completed,
appears.
5. Remove the archive media and store it in safe place. Then click Next > to
advance to the next Config Wizard screen.
6-16
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
After restoration is complete, you must run Config Wizard until all settings are
verified in each screen. Restoration of the settings from earlier releases may not
populate all the settings that are available in Release N.01.
Note If the message, Restore from Archive failed. Error: Error performing inpage
operation, appears, restart the device and try the process again. If error continues,
the archive media may be corrupt. Use a different copy of the archive and retry.
Software Versions and Security Updates
The Software Versions and Security Updates screen (Figure 6-21) shows read-only
information about the application software, operating system revisions, and
installed security updates.
Figure 6-21: Config Wizard: Software Versions and Security Updates Screen
On a new, factory-configured PIIC system the Security Platform Tool has been run.
But on future releases of PIIC N.01, if you install new software or upgrade your
system, you must run the Security Platform Tool on each upgraded system before
Config Wizard permits progress to the next configuration screen.
If you try to progress to the next screen without running the Security Platform Tool
when required, a dialog (Figure 6-22) opens prompting you to run the tool. You must
press OK to dismiss the dialog.
Figure 6-22: Security Platform Tool Dialog
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-17
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
To run the Security Platform Tool:
1. Click Run Security Platform tool from the Software Versions and Security
Updates screen.
The Open dialog appears.
2. Put the IIC Security Platform Tool media in the appropriate drive.
3. Browse the media for Philips Security.exe, then double-click the file to run it.
The Software Update Installation Wizard opens, then the Certification Dialog
reviews possible security vulnerabilities on the current IIC/DBS System.
Figure 6-23: IIC Security Platform Tool Certification Dialog
4. When the Certification Dialog completes, an IIC Security Platform entry appears
in the Software Version section of the Software Versions and Security Updates
screen.
Figure 6-24: IIC Security Platform Entry
6-18
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
5. Click Next > to advance to the next Config Wizard screen.
Purchased Options and Support Information
Purchased Options and Support Information (Figure 6-25) shows information
identifying hardware, software, and purchased options. This screen also permits
entry of support contact information. With Release N.01, all purchased options are
enabled in the factory prior to shipment. A Philips-provided purchased option
password may be required for upgrades, depending on how the upgrade was
ordered.
Figure 6-25: Config Wizard: Purchased Options and Support Information Screen
Selections and settings are slightly different depending on the IntelliVue Information
Center model type. Table 6-3 describes all possible settings on the Purchased
Options and Support Information screen.
Device Name and Monitoring LAN IP Address fields require entries. Settings that
have an asterisk (*) are optional information and do not require an entry.
Table 6-3: Purchased Options and Support Information Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Server Host Name
Shows read-only Database Server host name (or its own name if the device is a
server)
This Device
Shows read-only device description
• M3150 Information Center Local Database
• M3155 Information Center Network Database
• M3151 Information Center Client
• M3154 Large Database Server
• M3169 Small Database Server
• M3170 Patient Link
• M3177 Trend Display
• M3140 Information Center
Host Name
Shows read-only Host Name of the device (assigned at installation)
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-19
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-3: Purchased Options and Support Information Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Device Name
Shows clinical name for the device (12 character limit)
Generally, Device Name is the same as Host Name.
If the Restore From Archive data has a Device Name exceeding 12 characters, an
error message appears. You must fix the Device Name to continue.
Monitoring LAN IP Address
Shows the IP Address for the LAN connection set for the device when it was
installed or a selection drop-down list of IP Addresses. You must select an IP
Address to continue. For a server that has more than one LAN card installed (e.g.
for Web Access), select the IP Address for the LAN connection rather than the
Hospital LAN connection.
Each device must have a unique IP Address.
• Click the down-arrow to show the list of available IP addresses and click the
desired selection.
*System Serial Number
Permits entry of the Server System serial number, which is on the label on top of
the Server
*Device Serial Number
Permits entry of the Server Product serial number, which is on the label on the top
of the Server
Software Release
Shows read-only identifier of the installed software revision
*Contact
Permits entry of Service contact information for users
(e.g. name and contact numbers of assigned support person or contractor, service
contract number, etc.)
• Enter contact information in the text box (255 character limit).
Purchased Options
Note
Changes in Purchased Options can only be made by an authorized Philips Representative.
# of Displays
Shows the number of displays or permits selection of 1 or 2 system displays
If configuring a Dual Display system, both displays must be physically connected
during Operating System installation in order to select 2 in this field.
If a display is disconnected or fails on a system configured for dual display, the
resting display comes up in an unusable state. If this happens and a second
display replacement is not available, you must change the number of displays to 1
for the system to work properly.
Possible selections for devices:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Networked Information Center: 1 (default) or 2 (Option C01)
Trend Display: 1 (default) or 2 (Option C01)
Database Server: 1 (read-only)
Local Database Information Center: 1 (default) or 2 (Option C01)
Information Center Client: 1 (default) or 2 (Option C01)
Patient Link: disabled
You must have two displays to support 24 or 32 patients.
This selection interacts with the Trend Display purchased option (TRD) and the
Dual Display Options selection on the BedConfig screen.
Visible Display Width
Shows the size of the display
This setting is initialized to 306 mm (17 in). The minimum is 270 mm (15 in); the
maximum is 1188 mm (27 in).
6-20
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-3: Purchased Options and Support Information Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
# of ICs
Sets number of Information Centers that can be connected to the device
• Networked Information Center: not applicable
• M3154 Database Server: 2 (Option A02), 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), or 8
(Option A08)
• M3169 Database Server: 1 (Option A01), 2 (Option A02), or 3 (Option A03)
• M3150 Local Database Information Center: not applicable
• Information Center Client: not applicable
• Patient Link: not applicable
This setting is configurable on the Server only. It is not initialized and must be
selected to continue. The default setting is 1.
# of Patients
Shows number of patients whose data can be stored by the device
• M3154 Database Server: Number is not displayed; it is determined by # of
ICs selected.
• M3140: 16 (Option A16)
• Networked Information Center: 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), 8 (Option
A08), 12 (Option A12), or 16 (Option A16)
• Information Center Client: 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), 8 (Option A08), 12
(Option A12), or 16 (Option A16)
• M3150 Local Database Information Center: 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), 8
(Option A08), 12 (Option A12), 16 (Option A16), 24 (Option A24), or 32
(Option A32)
• M3170 Patient Link: 4 (Option A04), 6 (Option A06), 8 (Option A08), 12
(Option A12), or 16 (Option A16), 24 (Option A24), 32 (Option A32), or 64
(Option A64)
Wave Storage
Sets hours of patient waves stored by the Server
This setting is configurable on the Server and standalone devices only. It is readonly on Information Centers and Clients.
• Networked Information Center: not applicable
• Database Server: 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, or 96 hours
• Local Database Information Center: 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, or 96
hours
• M3140: hard coded 24
Alarm Storage
Sets number of 30 second alarm events stored by the Server
•
•
•
•
•
•
EASI Wave Storage (E01)
Networked Information Center: not applicable
Database Server: 150
Local Database Information Center: 50 or 150 (Option C03)
Information Center Client: not applicable
Patient Link: not applicable
M3140: hard coded 50
Enables/disables EASI Wave storage (Disable is the default.)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Networked Information Center: not applicable
Database Server: Enable or Disable
Local Database Information Center: Enable or Disable
Information Center Client: not applicable
Patient Link: not applicable
M3140: Disable
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-21
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-3: Purchased Options and Support Information Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Web Serving (C70, C74)
Enables/disables access to patient data through the hospital web (Disable is the
default.)
This option is only visible on an M3150 or M3169 Database Server that has the
second Network Interface Card
(Option C70 on M3169; C74 on M3150)
Web Serving/Patient Data
Transfer (C71)
Enables/disables ability to transfer patients across monitoring domains
(Disable is the default.)
This option is only available on an M3154 Large Database Server that has the
second Network Interface Card and installed Web software.
Alert Data Integration (C67)
Enables/disables ability to interface with the external paging system
(Disable is the default.)
This option is only visible on an M3150, M3145, or M3155 that has the second
Network Interface Card.
When upgrading from an earlier release, the Alert Data Integration Client must be
restarted to refresh connection status.
Master Server
Permits entry of Master Server name
This setting is always enabled and used to support Device Pooling.
If the Patient Data Transfer/Web options are enabled on the Database Server, the
Master Server name must be provided.
The Master Server must be installed and configured first. If a non-master server is
in Config Wizard and the Master Server is down, Config Wizard cannot enable the
Patient Data Transfer/Web option and enter the Master server name. In this case
you can enter the host name of the non-master server and continue Config
Wizard.
When the Master Server comes back online, (both Servers remain in monitoring
mode):
1. On the non-master server, open the Service screen.
2. Go to Configuration > Add/Remove Database Server.
3. Select the host name of the non-master server (that was previously entered
as the master) and click Remove. (The Patient Data Transfer/Web option is
still enabled.)
4. On the Master Server, open the Service screen.
5. Go to Configuration > Server Config.
6. Enter the non-master host name that was removed and click Add.
7. Follow the screen prompts and verify that language and software
compatibility are correct.
If any Database Server is in Configuration Mode, off-line, or has failed, it can take
up to 30 seconds per Database Server for the session to time out and for the
configuration process to continue.
12-Lead Analysis/Export (C17)
Enables/disables diagnostic 12-lead export capability
The default is Disable.
•
•
•
•
•
6-22
Networked Information Center: Enable or Disable
Database Server: not applicable
Local Database Information Center: Enable or Disable
Information Center Client: Enable or Disable
Patient Link: not applicable
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-3: Purchased Options and Support Information Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
HL7 Export (C14)
Enables/disables HL7 export capability
The default is Disable.
•
•
•
•
•
Networked Information Center: Enable or Disable
Database Server: not applicable
Local Database Information Center: Enable or Disable
Information Center Client: not applicable
Patient Link: Enable or Disable
If you disable the HL7 Export option you must also remove the HL7 Export
Interface from the List of Network Devices on the Network Configuration page.
Holter Export (C23)
Enables/disables data export of ECG waveforms to a Zymed Holter Scanner for
Windows. The default is Disable.
It is available on an M3150 with a second NIC, M3145, or M3155.
•
•
•
•
•
Networked Information Center: Enable or Disable
Database Server: not applicable
Local Database Information Center: Enable or Disable
Information Center Client: Enable or Disable
Patient Link: not applicable
Research Data Export (C76)
Enables/disables export of waveform, parameter, and alarm data from the
Information Center to one or more hospital-supplied research PCs
The default is Disable.
It is enabled on an M3150, M3145, and M3155 on systems where DBS has a
second NIC.
• Networked Information Center: Enable or Disable
• Database Server: not applicable
• Local Database Information Center: Enable or Disable
• Information Center Client: not applicable
• Patient Link: not applicable
Up to ten RDE Viewer clients can be configured.
Trend Display (TRD)
Enables/disables Trend Display capability
• Networked Information Center: Enable or Disable
• Database Server: not applicable
• Local Database Information Center: Enable or Disable
• Information Center Client: Enable or Disable
• Patient Link: not applicable
It is active on M3150, M3145, M3151 and M3155 and requires dual display. It is
disabled, but checked for an M3177.
This selection is described in further detail in Table 6-4, “Interaction of Number of
Displays, Trend Review Station, and BedConfig Dual Display,” on page 6-24.
MP40/MP50 Compatibility (MP1)
MP60/MP70 Compatibility (MP2)
MP80/MP90 Compatibility (MP3)
(includes Mx800 series)
Enables/disables Low Acuity bed support for selected monitors.
These are active on the M3140.
Device Location (WLD)
Allows you to remotely locate IntelliVue Telemetry devices (TRx and TRx+)
• Networked Information Center: Enable or Disable
•
•
•
•
Database Server: not applicable
Local Database Information Center: Enable or Disable
Information Center Client: not applicable
Patient Link: not applicable
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-23
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-4 lists Trend Display options based on Model and option settings.
Table 6-4: Interaction of Number of Displays, Trend Review Station, and BedConfig Dual Display
Model Type
M3150, M3155, M3151,
M3145
Trend
Number of
Display
Displays
Option
1
M3150, M3155, M3151,
M3145
2
Available,
but not
checked
M3150, M3155, M3151,
M3145
2
Enabled
M3177
M3177
1
2
BedConfig Dual Display
Option
• Single Resting
• Single Resting
(default)
• Dual Resting
• Single Trend Display
(default)
• Single Trend Display
• Single Trend Display
(default)
• Dual Trend Display
(Selection is enabled for
12 or 16 patients).
Behavior
Trend Display is not an option.
Information Centers with a single
display can only be configured to
have Single Resting display.
Dual Resting display if selected, or
you can have a dedicated Patient
Window in second display
When Trend Display option is
enabled the Dual Resting display is
disabled
Single Resting Display
Depends on the selection
• Single Trend Display, or
• Dual Trend Display
Database Server General Configuration
Database Server General Configuration (Figure 6-26) permits setting several
Domain-Wide clinical configuration settings that apply to Database Servers and
M3150 IntelliVue Information Centers (local databases).
Figure 6-26: Config Wizard: Database Server General Configuration Screen
Table 6-5 describes the Database Server General Configuration screen settings.
6-24
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-5: Database Server General Configuration Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Multi-lead ECG Layout
Permits selection of ECG format
• International
• Cabrera
Layout
Permits selection for display layout of the 12-lead waveforms
• 3 X 4 - 3 rows by 4 columns
• 6 X 6 - 6 rows by 2 columns
• 12 X 1 - 12 rows by 1 column
Speed
Permits selection of chart speed used in presenting the waveforms
• 25 mm/sec
• 50 mm/sec
Web
Patient Name in Overview
• check - The patient name for all overviewed beds displays in the alarm reflector,
overview bed list, overview window, and alarm overview window.
• clear - Patient name does not display.
This setting is for IntelliVue patient monitors monitored by the IntelliVue Information
Centers connected to this Database Server/M3150 Information Center.
Allow patient navigation for
Web
Enabled only if the Patient Data/Transfer parameter is enabled in the Purchased
Options screen.
This option must be disabled if you are using automated web access.
Web Overview Port
Identifies port of the TCP/IP socket connection for web access
Default is 9000.
Audit On
• check - Enable IIC Web audit data feature.
• clear - Disable IIC Web audit data feature.
This option is disabled by default.
Wave Strip Export
Number of Waves in Strip
Warning
The height, weight, and gas units of measure configured on the Information Center must
match the units of measure at the bedside. Inaccuracies may result in incorrect
hemodynamic calculations in patient documentation.
Hemodynamic Pressures
Gas Pressures
Weight Units
Defines the number of waves in the strip to be exported
• None
• 1
• 2
• 3
• 4
• mmHg (millimeters mercury)
• kPa (kilo Pascals)
• Lbs (pounds)
• Kg (kilograms)
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-25
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-5: Database Server General Configuration Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Height Units
• inches
• cm (centimeters)
Temp
•
•
Institution Name
°C
°F
Permits entry of Institution Name
(227 character max).
Institution Name appears in the footer of some printed reports, and is also sent as
Facility ID in the outbound HL7 data if the receiving client is adequately configured.
12-Lead Export
Language
Read-Only display of the language used in the display text
Language is selected during Windows Operating System installation. To change the
language, the Operating System must be re-installed and the desired language must be
selected during the re-installation.
Institution id
(Only required for 12-Lead
export)
This setting is required for systems with 12-Lead ECG Management export configured.
This is a 32 character alpha-numeric string that represents the Institution ID.
If the 12-Lead ECG Management option is not configured, you must use the default
value of 000.
TraceMaster supports Institution ID: 001-998.
Reasons for 12-Lead Order
Shows a configurable list of default Reasons for 12-Lead Order
Load Defaults
Permits selection of a default list of Reasons for 12-Lead Order
Click Load Defaults to use the default list.
Load Custom
To customize the Reasons for 12-Lead Order list on the screen:
1. Click a category or item in the list box.
2. Right-click and select the appropriate action (Add Category, Add Reason, Delete,
Rename).
3. Make the necessary edits.
To change the configuration by editing the source xml page:
1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Browse to Stardate\bin\ECGTestReasons.xml. Then copy the file to removable
media, which you can open and edit at another PC.
3. Remove the media and insert it into another PC. Open the file and update the file
as desired. Be sure the content follows the proper syntax; if formatting is not
correct, the list will not load successfully.
4. When editing is complete, save the file to removable media. Insert the media into
the appropriate Database Server drive, and rerun Config Wizard to the Database
Server General Configuration screen.
5. Click Load Custom and open the file.
12-Lead Analysis
12-Lead Brady Setting
6-26
This setting defines where the 12-lead algorithm identifies sinus Brady. 50 is the
default.
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-5: Database Server General Configuration Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Algorithm
Select desired algorithm for 12-lead analysis:
• PH090A - original Pyramid algorithm to be used with IIC systems running Release
M or below.
• PH100B - new Sedici algorithm available for use with IIC systems running Release
N or higher.
Note—You must select the desired algorithm at the time of initial installation. After
initial installation, the options become disabled (grayed out). To change the algorithm
after initial installation, you must do so by running Config Wizard from the desktop.
If you select the PH100B algorithm you must ensure all DB Servers have this option
selected. If DB Server algorithms do not match, loss of 12-leads on a patient data
transfer occurs; causing the 12-lead transfer to fail. The following note displays in the
System Status.
In addition to the failed status note shown above, if the DB Server algorithms do not
match, the IIC system targeted to receive the patient transfer displays the following
message during patient re-admit.
Local General Configuration
The Local General Configuration Settings screen (Figure 6-27) is applicable to
M3140, Ml3145, M3150, M3151, and M3155 Information Centers and clients. The
settings are only applicable to the particular device. HL7 Export Configuration
settings are applicable only to IntelliVue Information Centers.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-27
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 6-27: Config Wizard: Local General Configuration Settings Screen
Table 6-6 describes the Local General Configuration Settings screen settings.
Table 6-6: Local General Configuration Settings Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Patient Type
Permits selection of the monitored patient type default setting
• Adult
• Pediatric
• Neonate (not supported for telemetry patients)
Patient Type can be changed for specific patients in the Admit screen.
All Arrhythmia Alarms Off
(Tele Only)
Permits enabling/disabling arrhythmia alarms from telemetry monitors in the Arrhythmia
Alarms Setup menu
• Enabled - telemetry arrhythmia alarms can be turned off at the bed
• Disabled - telemetry arrhythmia alarms cannot be turned off at the bed
No Data From Bed INOP
- alerting
Permits enabling/disabling of INOP alert tone when there is a NoDataFromBed INOP
Arrhythmia Capability
(For ITS only)
Permits selection of arrhythmia monitoring mode
(Always Basic for M3140)
• No Sound - disables alert tone
• Sound - enables alert tone
• Enhanced - 22 arrhythmia alarms
• Basic - 10 arrhythmia alarms
Note
Screen Notes
6-28
The Arrhythmia Capability selection (Enhanced or Basic) must be the same as the
equivalent setting at the Patient Monitor (if arrhythmia is on).
Permits enabling/disabling Main Screen display of Screen Notes made in the patient Admit
screen
• Yes - Screen Notes appear
• No - Screen Notes do not appear
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-6: Local General Configuration Settings Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Alarm Sounds
Permits selection of alarm sound type
• CareNet (default)
• IEC
IEC alarm sounds are only supported on IntelliVue and TeleMon Patient Monitors. V24 and
CMS monitors only support CareNet alarm sounds. If the Information Center has a mix of
these monitor types, configure the Information Center to use CareNet so that the stent
alarm sounds are consistent. Verify that all the patient monitor Alarm Sounds setting is
CareNet.
Alarm Text
Sets compliance format of alarm text, softkeys, and icons
• CareNet (default)
• IEC
Record Button
Permits selection of waveform Record/Store buttons that will appear on the Main Screen
• Record - displays button for recording waveforms
• Store - displays button for storing waveforms
• Both - displays buttons for recording and storing waveforms
Silence Bed at Central
Enables/disables Patient Sector display of bedside monitor alarms silencing button
• Yes - silencing button appears in Patient Sectors (default)
• No - silencing button does not appear in Patient Sectors and alarms can only be
silenced at the bedside monitor
Standby Messages
Permits creation of up to 12 Standby Messages that can be selected in the Patient Window
when monitoring is in Standby
Each message that you type into a text box has a 15 character limit.
Factory Defaults:
• Cathlab
• Hemodialysis
• Orthopedics
• Pulmonary
• X-Ray
• Other
Laboratory Data
Permits selection of Lab Data entry at IIC
Data Export Settings
Determines if standard or EASI leads are exported with Research Data Export
Export Standard Leads (default)
Export EASI Leads - enabled if EASI storage is enabled in the domain.
If you export data to Research Data Export you must select Export Standard Leads.
Click Sector for
Recording
If checked (selected), activates the ability to generate a delayed recording when you leftclick the mouse anywhere in the Patient Sector (other than over the Patient Window button).
It is recommended that you deselect this feature on touch screen systems.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-29
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-6: Local General Configuration Settings Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
HL7 Export Configuration
Permits selection of HL7 output type
Selection is active if HL7 Export option is enabled on Purchased Options and Support
Information.
When selected, the HL7 Configuration dialog opens with the settings:
• LAN Based Monitors Only: Data originating from LAN monitors (IntelliVue Patient
Monitors) is HL7 output.
• Send Alert Messages: Alert, INOP, and parameter data is HL7 output.
• Send Aperiodic Data: Aperiodic measurements (e.g. noninvasive blood pressure) is
included in HL7 output.
• Send Patient Name: Patient Name is included in the HL7 output. Be sure that hospital
policy permits this feature.
• Target: Database Server host name
SRR Channel
Configuration
Opens dialog that permits setting Short Range Radio (SRR) Channel preference
Available Channels for SRR are Channel 11 through Channel 26. Available settings are:
• Off
• Low
• Medium
• High
The following applies to Revision D.00 (or greater) telemetry transceivers using the SRR to
communicate with IntelliVue Cableless Measurements.
An internal algorithm permits the telemetry transceiver to select the SRR channel on which
it will perform best. Philips recommends that you select four clean (-80 dBM or lower) SRR
channels, set them to High, and set the remaining channels to Off. If you leave all SRR
channels active, the discovery time between telemetry and the device it is trying to
communicate with increases. Philips does not recommend this practice. Medium or Low
settings are currently not used by the algorithm, and should not be selected.
It is recommended that you select the same channels on the IIC as those configured at the
bedside.
Warnings
Do not select Date of Birth as the only required selection. You must have one other required
selection in addition to Date of Birth.
Lifetime Id Label and Encounter Id Label must be consistent across the entire enterprise.
Admit Required Fields
Permits selection of required ADT information for an admitted patient
Last Name (default) - can only be clear if you check another selection
Lifetime Id
Encounter Id
Date of Birth
Admit Demographic
Labelsa
Permits selection of Label type
Lifetime Id Label
Possible settings are MRN (default), Record Id, Lifetime Id, Patient Id, Serial Number,
SSN, Not Used.
lEncounter Id Label
Possible settings are Encounter Id (default), Account Number, Charge Number, Visit Id,
Case ID, Subject Number, Not Used.
If you select the setting, Not Used, no output for the label is sent by HL7.
Use Alternative Id
Permits selection of alternative patient identification
a. Although these labels are English in service mode, the language-specific translation appears in the application.
6-30
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Unit Paging Settings
The Unit Paging Settings screen (Figure 6-28) configures paging options for the
selected device. It is only available on M3145, M3155, and M3150 IntelliVue
Information Centers that have the Alert Data Integration feature enabled.
Figure 6-28: Config Wizard: Unit Paging Settings Screen
Table 6-7 describes the Unit Paging Settings configuration screen settings.
Table 6-7: Unit Paging Settings Configuration Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Enable Philips Paging
Assignments
Permits enabling/disabling of Information Center paging assignment applications -Paging Setup, Paging View, Unit-Device Assignments, Manual Page, and Unassign
Paging checkbox on the Discharge screen.
• Click the Enable Philips Paging Assignments checkbox to enable.
The default is enabled (checked). If the checkbox is clear, you must use
Emergin Staff Assignments to configure paging devices to receive alarms.
Include Patient Name in Paging
Permits enabling/disabling patient name display with the page alarm text
Red Alarm Paging Lockout
• Click the adjacent checkbox to enable.
The default is disabled (no check). If the checkbox is checked, the Page
column for Red Alarms is disabled in the Information Center Record/Store/
Page screen (All Controls), which prevents users from deselecting Red Alarm
pages.
Auto Alarm Paging
Enable Auto Alarm Paging
Permits enabling/disabling of automatic transmission of alarm pages
Unsilenced Alarms/Inops
reminder time interval
Permits selection of the time interval for un-silenced alarm reminders
The range is 15 - 120 seconds; the default is 60 seconds.
Soft Inops do not send reminders. Refer to specific device documentation for
information about Soft Inops.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-31
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-7: Unit Paging Settings Configuration Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Image Resolution
Warning
If you have both Low and High Resolution devices on your system, you must set Image
Resolution to Low Resolution.
High Resolution
Permits sending a high resolution alert image in a graphics-enabled device to the
alert interface.
Low Resolution
Permits sending a low resolution alert image to the alert interface.
If you use both low and high resolution paging devices, you must select Low
Resolution for the Waveform Resolution setting. An example of the page image on a
high resolution device with this setting follows.
Image Event Focus
Pre Event/Post Event (seconds)
6-32
The paging settings page in config wizard hosts this control. It affects the pager
controls that display waveforms. The up down control for Pre-Event time sets the
number of seconds of waveform data to display before the event time. Values
extend from 1 to 5. Post-Event time is 6-precontext time. Post-Event time is
displayed in a read-only control. Add logic in alert pager class to use these values.
The initial default values are the current hardwired values and may vary depending
on upgrade path.
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-7: Unit Paging Settings Configuration Screen Descriptions
Setting/Selection
Description
Inops
Send All Inops
Permits selection of sending all Inops to paging devices
Send Inops for the following
Permits selection of INOP categories for pages
If any Inop within the category occurs, the specific Inop text is paged.
See Paging INOP Messages for possible alarm messages associated with selected
Inop categories.
Inop Delay
Permits selection of time (in seconds) that an Inop condition must persist before a
page is generated
The range is 0 - 300 seconds; the default is 30 seconds.
Table 6-8 lists the possible alarm messages corresponding to INOP messages
selected in the Unit Paging Settings screen.
Table 6-8: Alarm Messages Corresponding to Selected INOP Messages
If you select. . .
Battery Weak
Cannot Analyze ECG
Device Location
ECG Alarms Off
ECG Leads Off
Possible alarm messages are . . .
BATT LO
BATTERY LOW T
BATT1 LOW
BATT2 LOW
VENT LOW BATTERY
FIO2 BATTERY
CANNOT ANALYZE ECG
CANNOT ANALYZE QT
OUT OF AREA
ALL ARRH ALARMS OFF
ALL ECG ALARMS OFF
SOME ECG ALARMS OFF
!! ECG/AR ALARM OFF
PULSE NO ALARMING
ECG LEADS OFF
ECG LEAD OFF
LEADS OFF
PADS OFF
PADDLES OFF
POOR PADS CONTACT
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-33
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-8: Alarm Messages Corresponding to Selected INOP Messages
If you select. . .
ECG Leads Off (IND)
6-34
Possible alarm messages are . . .
ECG LEADS OFF I
ECG LEADS OFF II
ECG LEADS OFF III
ECG LEADS OFF AVR
ECG LEADS OFF AVF
ECG LEADS OFF AVL
ECG LEADS OFF V
ECG LEADS OFF MCL
C LEADS OFF
LL LEADS OFF
LA LEADS OFF
RA LEADS OFF
RL LEADS OFF
A LEADS OFF
I LEADS OFF
E LEADS OFF
S LEADS OFF
V1 LEADS OFF
V2 LEADS OFF
V3 LEADS OFF
V4 LEADS OFF
V5 LEADS OFF
V6 LEADS OFF
V7 LEADS OFF
V8 LEADS OFF
V9 LEADS OFF
V3R LEADS OFF
V4R LEADS OFF
V5R LEADS OFF
C1 LEADS OFF
C2 LEADS OFF
C3 LEADS OFF
C4 LEADS OFF
C5 LEADS OFF
C6 LEADS OFF
C7 LEADS OFF
C8 LEADS OFF
C9 LEADS OFF
C3R LEADS OFF
C4R LEADS OFF
C5R LEADS OFF
LEADS OFF EI.A
LEADS OFF EI.I
LEADS OFF EI.S
LEADS OFF EI.E
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-8: Alarm Messages Corresponding to Selected INOP Messages
If you select. . .
ECG Leads Off (IND)
(Continued)
Possible alarm messages are . . .
INVALID LEADSET
!! C LEAD OFF
!!! C LEAD OFF
!! RA LEAD OFF
!!! RA LEAD OFF
!! LA LEAD OFF
!!! LA LEAD OFF
!! LL LEAD OFF
!!! LL LEAD OFF
!! RL LEAD OFF
!!! RL LEAD OFF
!! C1 LEAD OFF (V1)
!!! C1 LEAD OFF (V1)
!! C2 LEAD OFF (V2)
!!! C2 LEAD OFF (V2)
!! C3 LEAD OFF (V3)
!!! C3 LEAD OFF (V3)
!! C4 LEAD OFF (V4)
!!! C4 LEAD OFF (V4)
!! C5 LEAD OFF (V5)
!!! C5 LEAD OFF (V5)
!! C6 LEAD OFF (V6)
!!! C6 LEAD OFF (V6)
!! A LEAD OFF
!!! A LEAD OFF
!! S LEAD OFF
!!! S LEAD OFF
!! I LEAD OFF
!!! I LEAD OFF
!! E LEAD OFF
!!! E LEAD OFF
ECG Leads Unplugged
LEADSET UNPLUGGED
ECG Pairing
NO ECG SOURCE
CHECK ECG SOURCE
CHECK PAIRING
CHECK ECG SETTINGS
CHK SPO2T SETTINGS
TELE DISCONNECT
NO CENTRAL MONIT.
CENTRAL TELE ONLY
!! TELE DISCONNECT
!!! TELE DISCONNECT
NO ECG AT CENTRAL
TAAP DISABLED
TELE INCOMPATIBLE
SRR INTERFERENCE
SRR INVALID CHAN
SRR MALFUNCTION
cl NBP Disconnect
cl NBP Batt Low
cl NBP Batt Empty
cl NBP Serv Batt
cl NBP Check Batt
cl NBP Batt Incomp
cl NBP Batt Malf
cl NBP Batt Temp
cl NBP No Cradle
cl NBP Remove
cl SpO2 Disconnect
cl SpO2 Batt Low
cl SpO2 Batt Empty
cl SpO2 Serv Batt
cl SpO2 Check Batt
cl SpO2 Batt Incomp
cl SpO2 Batt Malf
cl SpO2 Batt Temp
cl SpO2 Remove
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-35
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-8: Alarm Messages Corresponding to Selected INOP Messages
If you select. . .
Equipment Disconnect
Equipment Malfunction
6-36
Possible alarm messages are . . .
VENTILATOR DISCONNECT
ABP XDUCR DISCONN
CO2 DISCONNECT
UVP DISCONNECT
UAP DISCONNECT
BIS SENSOR DISCONN
ICP XDUCR DISCONN
BIS ENGINE DISCONNECT
BIS DSC DISCONN
SpO2 XDUCR DISCONN
P1 XDUCR DISCONN
ART XDUCR DISCONN
AORT XDUCR DISCONN
PAP XDUCR DISCONN
CVP XDUCR DISCONN
RAP XDUCR DISCONN
LAP XDUCR DISCONN
UAP XDUCR DISCONN
UVP XDUCR DISCONN
P1 DISCONNECT
P2 DISCONNECT
P3 DISCONNECT
P4 DISCONNECT
CVP DISCONNECT
RAP DISCONNECT
LAP DISCONNECT
PAP DISCONNECT
ICP DISCONNECT
IUP DISCONNECT
NBP DISCONNECT
ART DISCONNECT
AOP DISCONNECT
P5 DISCONNECT
ABP DISCONNECT
BAP DISCONNECT
FAP DISCONNECT
VENTILATOR FAILURE
FIO2 EQUIP MAL
PLETH EQUIP MAL
CO EQUIP MAL
CO2 SIDESTRM MALF
P1 MALF
SVR MALF
SPO2 EQUIP MALF
SPO2 SENSOR MALF
NBP EQUIP MALF
TEMP1 MALF
TRECT MALF
TCORE MALF
TESOPH MALF
TNASO MALF
TART MALF
P1 XDUCR MALF
ABP MALF
ART MALF
ART XDUCR MALF
AORT MALF
AORT XDUCR MALF
PAP MALF
PAP XDUCR MALF
CVP MALF
CVP XDUCR MALF
RAP MALF
RAP XDUCR MALF
LAP MALF
LAP XDUCR MALF
TSKIN MALF
UAP MALF
UAP XDUCR MALF
UVP MALF
UVP XDUCR MALF
CO2 OCCLUSION
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-8: Alarm Messages Corresponding to Selected INOP Messages
If you select. . .
Equipment Malfunction
(Continued)
IntelliBridge
HeartStart MRx
More Bed Alarms
NBP
No Data From Bed
Possible alarm messages are . . .
CO2 EQUIP MALF
SVO2 EQUIP MALF
TC EQUIP MALF
VUELNK X EQU MALF
ICP XDUCR MALF
BIS EQUIP MALF
BIS ENGINE MALF
BIS DSC MALF
BIS SENSOR MALF
ICP MALF
ABP XDUCR MALF
ECG EQUIP MAL I
ECG EQUIP MAL II
ECG EQUIP MAL III
ECG EQUIP MAL AVR
ECG EQUIP MAL AVF
ECG EQUIP MAL AVL
ECG EQUIP MAL V
ECG EQUIP MAL MCL
EQUIP MALFUNCTION
SPK MALF
CHG MALF
VENT COMMUNIC FAIL
VENT COMMUNIC LOST
VENT EQUIP MALF
CO2 CHK EXHAUST
CO2 SVC REQ
DEFIB MAL
ECG CABLE MAL
PADS CABLE MAL
PADDLES CABLE MAL
PADS ECG MAL
NBP CALIB REQ
NBP SVC REQ
CHECK DEVICE
CPR SENSOR MALF
INCOMPAT RADIO BD
MMS EXT MALF
!! CO2 OCCLUSION
!!! CO2 OCCLUSION
DEVICE CHECK SETUP
DEVICE CHECK CONF.
X EQUIP MALF
NO DEVICE DATA
!! NO DEVICE DATA
!!! NO DEVICE DATA
X UNPLUGGED
DEVICE UNSUPPORTED
DEFIB SHUTDOWN
PACING STOP
PACE ON BATT
PADS ECG MAL
PADDLES CABLE MAL
PADS CABLE MAL
DEFIB MAL
CHECK SETTINGS
!!PACER OUTPUT LOW
!!!MORE BED ALARMS
!!MORE BED ALARMS
MORE BED ALARMS
NBP CUFF OVER PRESSURE
NBP CUFF NOT DEFLATED
NBP MEAS FAILED
NO DATA FROM BED
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-37
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-8: Alarm Messages Corresponding to Selected INOP Messages
If you select. . .
No Signal
Pressure Non-Pulsatile
Protocol Watch
Replace Battery
SpO2
Standby
Transmitter Off
6-38
Possible alarm messages are . . .
NO SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER MALF
NO RECEIVER
RECEIVER MALF
P1 NON PULSATILE
ABP NON PULSATILE
ART NON PULSATILE
AORT NON PULSATILE
PAP NON PULSATILE
CVP NON PULSATILE
RAP NON PULSATILE
LAP NON PULSATILE
UAP NON PULSATILE
UVP NON PULSATILE
ICP NON PULSATILE
P NON PULSATILE
BAP NON PULSATILE
FAP NON PULSATILE
P2 NON PULSATILE
P3 NON PULSATILE
P4 NON PULSATILE
!!PW:ACTION REQD
PW:ACTION REQUIRED
!!!INSERT BATTERY
REPLACE BATTERY
BATT MALF
BATT EMPTY
BATT1 MALF
BATT1 EMPTY
BATT2 MALF
BATT2 EMPTY
REPLACE BATTERY T
BATT1 MISSING
BATT2 MISSING
SPO2 LOW PERF
SPO2 NON PULSATILE
NO PULSE SOURCE
PLETH NON PULSATILE
SPO2 POOR SIGNAL
SPO2 MSMT INTERF
SPOT SIG NOISY
SPO2 SENSOR OFF
MONITOR STANDBY
TELE STANDBY
TRANSMITTER OFF
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Network Configuration
The Network Configuration screen (Figure 6-29) helps the Server identify devices on
the LAN.
Figure 6-29: Config Wizard: Network Configuration Screen
Screen Layout
The Network Configuration screen is divided into sections.
• Clinical Units - Permits adding and editing Clinical Unit Name and Monitoring
mode or removing a Clinical Unit from the list
For a description of the buttons in this section see Table 6-9.
• List of networked centrals and hallways - Lists the names of the Information
Centers and Clients (with an identifying icon) on the Network of the Server.
For a a more detailed description of this section see page page 6-41.
• List of networked devices - lists the network devices connected to the system.
This section is accessed by Network Statistics to provide status information on
network switches and access points.
For a more detailed description of this section see page page 6-44.
Configuring
Clinical Units
Table 6-9 lists the options available for configuring Clinical Units.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-39
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-9: Network Configuration Screen: Configuring Clinical Units Options
Button/
Selection
Description
New
Adds a Clinical Unit to the list
Action/Steps
1. Click New to open the Add/Edit Unit screen.
The maximum number of Clinical Units is 8.
There is no default Clinical Unit created at
installation.
2. Enter the Clinical Unit name in the Type new name or
label text box (12 character limit).
3. Select the monitoring mode in the Monitoring
section. Fixed monitoring is for systems where
dynamic movement of equipment is not expected
(e.g. Patient Link). Flex monitoring allows you to
make appropriate equipment changes in a unit that
has Telemetry equipment, IPMs, or M3/M4 bedsides.
An M3170 Patient Link device must be configured for
Fixed monitoring.
4. Add a Department Id (only required for systems with
12-Lead ECG Management configured). The
Department Id must match the ID configured in the
ECG Management system (32 character limit). The
default Department Id is 00.
5. Click OK.
Warning
An M3170 Patient Link device must be configured for Fixed monitoring.
Patient Link/M3177 (PL) does not have a display and does not lend itself to configuration after
initial installation. Any subsequent movement of monitors and their connections to the PL could
result in the mismatch of patient data, especially upon export to EMR.
Note
6-40
Large network systems do not automatically check for duplicate clinical unit names or
duplicate bed labels. If you are configuring a large network, be sure not to enter any
duplicate names. When transferring patient data across database servers the clinical units
are not listed under their database server. If duplicate bed labels exist, you will not know
which database server the bed is associated with.
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-9: Network Configuration Screen: Configuring Clinical Units Options
Button/
Selection
Description
Action/Steps
Edit
Changes the name of a Clinical Units in the
list
1. Click the Clinical Unit name that you want to change.
2. Click Edit to open the Add/Edit Unit window.
3. Edit/change the Clinical Unit name in the Type new
name or label text box (12 character limit).
4. Change the Monitoring mode for the unit in the
monitoring field if needed.
If IPM beds are already assigned and the monitoring
mode is changed, all Monitors and beds assigned to that
unit must be deleted before the monitoring mode can be
changed.
5. Click OK.
Remove
Removes a name from the Clinical Units
list
1. Click the Clinical Unit you want to delete.
2. Click Remove.
If beds are mapped to the unit, those associations must
be removed so you can remove the Clinical Unit.
At least one Clinical Unit must be
entered in the field. A new name must
be added before an unwanted name
can be removed.
Configuring the
List of
Networked
Centrals and
Hallways
The List of networked centrals and hallways section of the Network Configuration
screen displays a table that lists the Information Centers and Clients (with
identifying icons) on the Network of this Server. Description of the columns in the
List of network centrals and hallways section follows.
• Device Name - Lists the names of the IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients
(with an identifying icon) on the Network of this Server.
New device names are added to this list when you add them to the network by
means of the Add to network domain screen.
On the M3170 Patient Link, only the Patient Link device can be configured.
• Model # - Model Number of the device -- M3155 Information Center, M3151
Information Center Client, or M3177 Trend Display.
• Host Name - Name given to the device when it was installed
Generally, Host Name is the same as Device Name. The Host Name for each
device must be unique so that the Server can properly identify it.
• IP Address - IP Address that identifies the device on the Network
It is read from the device when it connects to the Server for the first time. If no
IP Address appears, the device has not connected to the Server.
• Unit - Clinical Unit in the Clinical Units list served by the device
• Location - Optional field for identifying the location of the device
• Monitoring - Monitoring mode of the Clinical Unit, either Fixed or Flex
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-41
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-10 describes the options for configuring the List of Networked Centrals and
Hallway options.
Table 6-10: Options for Configuring List of Networked Centrals and Hallways
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
New
Permits adding a new Information Center or Client on the Network to the Server
• Click New to open the Add to network domain screen (Table 6-11, “Add to Network Domain
Configuration Options,” on page 6-44).
Note
If the number of Information Centers selected on the Purchased Options and Support Information
screen are installed, you cannot add a new Information Center.
Edit
Changes the information for a device in the List of networked centrals and hallways
Edit is allowed on standalone systems.
1. Click the device name you want to change.
2. Click Edit to open the Add to network domain screen (Table 6-11, “Add to Network Domain
Configuration Options,” on page 6-44).
3. Edit/change the device information.
4. Change the Monitoring mode for the device in the monitoring field if needed.
If IntelliVue Patient Monitors beds are already assigned and the monitoring mode is changed, all
IntelliVue Patient Monitors and beds assigned to that unit must be deleted before the monitoring
mode can be changed.
5. Click OK.
Remove
Removes a device from the List of networked centrals and hallways
1. Click the device you want to delete.
2. Click Remove.
If beds are mapped to the unit, those associations must be removed so you can remove the
device.
Remove All
Removes all devices from the List of networked centrals and hallways
• Click Remove All.
CSCN Routed Bed
Permits selection of configuration option for a Philips Bedside monitor that is on a Customer
Supplied Clinical Network (CSCN)
A Routed Bedside Monitor (RBM) will synchronize its time setting to that of its associated ICN by
listening for and receiving timecast messages sent from the ICN DBS/Standalone IIC across the
multicast-enabled network. Therefore, each ICN DBS/Standalone IIC requires a unique Timecast
Address setting. To ensure consistent time settings across your clinical network, make sure that
you configure each master DBS and each standalone IIC on your network to receive its time
setting from an external Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) time source.
• Click CSCN Routed Bed checkbox.
6-42
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-10: Options for Configuring List of Networked Centrals and Hallways
Setting/Selection
Warning
Description/Action
All monitor equipment labels must be unique on the network. All ICN Database Domain (DBSD)
multicast address ranges must be unique on the network. Failure to create unique equipment
labels for patient monitoring devices or assign unique multicast address ranges to ICN DBSDs
may cause invalid network communications resulting in the delay, corruption, or loss of critical
patient data or alarms without warning, which can delay diagnosis or treatment and result in
patient death.
CSCN Routed Bed
Configuration
Permits configuration of CSCN RBM
Refer to the Customer Supplied Clinical Network Specification for Topology information and
supported Philips devices.
1. Click the CSCN Routed Bed Configuration button. The CSCN Routed Bed Configuration dialog
box opens.
2. Configure the Timecast Address.
The default Timecast Address is 224.0.23.61. You must configure a unique Timecast Address for
each DBS or standalone IIC on your network. The entered Timecast Address cannot be in the
range of IP addresses specified for the Multicast Address Start and Multicast Address End.
Caution Do not set the Timecast Address to 224.0.23.63; this address is reserved for
monitor Connection Indication (CI) messages.
3. Enter the first multicast IP address for the range of addresses associated with the ICN DBSD
in the Multicast Address Start text box. Refer to Table 6-12, “Designated ICN DBSD IP
Multicast Address Range,” on page 6-45 for designated IP address ranges.
Multicast Address End box automatically populates.
4. In a CSCN network, there is often a DHCP or BOOTp server that is routed into the monitoring
network. If this checkbox is not selected, the Bootp Service is operational. In this situation, a
bedside monitor can receive an IP address from the CGS server or the hospital server.
Selecting this checkbox disables the Bootp Service.
5. Click OK.
After completing all Configuration Wizard pages you must manually add a route statement for the
remote RBM subnet(s) to the DBS/Standalone IIC (page 6-48)
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-43
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Configuring the
List of
Networked
Devices
This section describes the options and procedures for configuring the List of
Networked Devices on the Network Configuration screen.
• Editing or Adding New IICs or Clients on the Network to the Server
• Configuring the Philips ICN DBS/Standalone IIC to Support RBM
• List of Network Devices Descriptors
• Adding Network Devices
• Enabling the Prior Unit Data Feature
Editing or Adding New IICs or Clients on the Network to the Server
The Add to network domain screen opens when you click New or Edit buttons in the
List of networked centrals and hallways section of the Network Configuration
screen.
Table 6-11: Add to Network Domain Configuration Options
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
Device Identification
Model #
Permits selection of a network device model number
1. Click the down arrow next to the text box.
A drop-down list of selectable model numbers appears.
2. Click the desired Model # to select it.
Host Name
Permits text entry of device Host Name
• Enter the name assigned to the device when it was installed.
Note
When you enter a Host Name in this screen, it will appear as read-only in Purchased Options
and Support Information of the device being added.
Host Name and Device Name must be identical to the names in the Purchased Options and
Support Information screen for accurate Server identification.
Device Name
Permits text entry of Device Name
• Enter a name for the device.
Generally, the Host Name and Device Name are the same. Device names are case sensitive.
Location
Identifies hospital location for the network device being added
• Enter the hospital location text. (optional)
6-44
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-11: Add to Network Domain Configuration Options
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
Associations
Specifies the Clinical Unit for the device being added
Belongs to unit
Displays the list of Clinical Units for assigning to the device
• Click the Clinical Unit that the device being added is associated with.
Recorders
2-Channela
Attached
1. Click the check box if a 2-Channel Recorder is connected to the device.
2. Click the option button that identifies the 2-Channel Recorder type.
• USB Recorder(s)
• Click Ok in the Add to network domain screen to store/save entered information; or click Cancel to close the Add to
network domain screen with no changes.
a. A maximum of two 2-channel USB recorders can be connected to the same M3150, M3145, or M3155.
Configuring the Philips ICN DBS/Standalone IIC to Support RBM
To support the use of Routed Bedside Monitors (RBM), your network infrastructure
must be properly configured to support Multicasting; Refer to the Philips Customer
Supplied Clinical Network Specification for details about the use of RBM.
Once the DBS/Standalone IIC configuration as required for your installation is
complete you must manually add a route statement for the remote RBM subnet(s)
to the DBS/Standalone IIC. Table 6-12 lists the Multicast Address ranges
designated for ICN Database Domains (DBSDs).
Table 6-12: Designated ICN DBSD IP Multicast Address Range
ICN DBSD
VLAN ID
IP Multicast Address Range
ICN 1
101
239.255.101.0 - 239.255.101.255
ICN 2
102
239.255.102.0 - 239.255.102.255
ICN 3
103
239.255.103.0 - 239.255.103 255
ICN 4
104
239.255.104.0 - 239.255.104.255
ICN 5
105
239.255.105.0 - 239.255.105.255
ICN 6
106
239.255.106.0 - 239.255.106.255
ICN 7
107
239.255.107.0 - 239.255.107.255
ICN 8
108
239.255.108.0 - 239.255.108.255
ICN 9
109
239.255.109.0 - 239.255.109.255
ICN 10
110
239.255.110.0 - 239.255.110.255
ICN yy
1yy
239.255.1yy.0 - 239.255.1yy.255
ICN 22
122
239.255.122.0 - 239.255.122.255
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-45
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Follow this high-level procedure to configure the Philips ICN DBS/Standalone IIC to
Support RBM:
1. To add a manual route statement to the RBM subnet, open a command window
on the DBS/Standalone IIC. Then enter a persistent route statement at the
prompt in the format of the examples shown.
Examples:
For the DBS on ICN 9 (Table 6-12), you may enter the following manual route
statements to reach Routed Bedside Monitors residing on the 10.0.201.0,
10.0.202.0, 10.0.203.0, and 10.0.204.0 remote subnets:
route
route
route
route
add
add
add
add
-p
-p
-p
-p
10.0.201.0
10.0.202.0
10.0.203.0
10.0.204.0
mask
mask
mask
mask
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
172.31.64.1
172.31.64.1
172.31.64.1
172.31.64.1
2. At the command prompt, enter Route Print to verify that Persistent Routes
section has accurate information that you entered in the route statement.
3. If the route is not correct or you need to change this information you can delete
it by entering the following command and include the actual IP of the route you
want to delete.
Route Delete xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
4. Close the command window.
Caution If you re-install the ICN DBS or Standalone IIC, you must manually re-enter the route
statements for the remote RBM subnet(s) to the DBS/Standalone IIC.
List of Network Devices Descriptors
The List of network devices section of the Network Configuration screen permits
configuration of the network devices connected to the PIIC system. This information
is accessed by Network Statistics to provide status information on applicable
network devices.
The column headings for the list of network devices are described as follows:
• Device Name - lists the names given to supported devices on the Server
network. There are unique icons associated with each device type.
Device Names appear on the List of network devices section of the Network
Configuration screen when the device is added to the network.
• Host Name - Host name of device being added.
A Host Name is required for Holter,12-Lead ECG Management, SNTP Time
Source, Hospital ADT Interface, Alert Data Integration Client, and HL7 Interface.
The SNTP Time Source must be a separate host name from the other configured
host names.
6-46
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
• Device Type - Type of device being added.
12-Lead ECG Management, 802.11 Access Point, 802.11 Wireless Switch,
Access Point Controller, Alert Data Integration Client, BootP for Networked
Printer, HL7 Export Interface, Holter, Hospital ADT Interface, Network Switch,
Research Data Export, Router, Smart Hopping Access Point, or SNTP Time
Source.
• IP Address - IP Address of the device that identifies its location on the Network
IP Addresses for switches and wireless access points must be entered so that
Network Statistics can identify their performance.
• Printer MAC Address - The Printer Media Access Control (MAC) Address is the 12
digit HEX number that uniquely identifies the printer. This number must be
obtained from a printout of the printer’s configuration.
To find the MAC Address for a BootP Monitoring LAN printer:
a) Verify that the printer is disconnected from the Monitoring LAN and turn on
the Printer.
b) Generate a Configuration Page at the Printer.
c) Record the Hardware Address from the JetDirect section of the
Configuration Pages. Hardware Address is the MAC Address.
d) Reconnect the printer to the Monitoring LAN.
• Port Number - Identifies the port number
• Unit - Identifies the unit
• Remote Subnet - Identifies the remote subnet
• Remote Mask - Identifies the remote mask
• Boundary Limit - Identifies the access point designated as a boundary for
associated ITS devices
• Filter before Export - Applies to 12-Lead ECG Management) Shows status of
feature (enabled/disabled)
• Primary - (Applies to Alert Data Integration Client) Identifies Primary ADI client(s)
Adding Network Devices
Table 6-13 describes the List of Network Devices configuration options. In addition
to adding the network devices to the Database Server/IntelliVue Information Center
system, the network devices must also be configured to communicate with the
system.
Note If no switches are entered, the Equipment Setup screen will not allow any of the
Mx/IntelliVue Patient Monitor installation options.
IntelliVue Telemetry System (ITS) network devices can be added through Config
Wizard to more than one Database Server in a large network system so that
statistics can be viewed. However, only one server can be configured to receive
alerts from these components (configured as part of the IntelliVue Telemetry
System).
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-47
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Adding Devices to the IIC Configuration Wizard for a Star Topology
If you are using a Star Topology with PIIC Release L and later, you must continue to
add Core Switches/Routers to the List of Network Devices manually, and you must
manually add each network switch. Refer to IntelliVue Clinical Network Installation
Guidelines and Topologies for more information about the supported network
topologies of the IntelliVue Information Center.
After manually adding Core Switches/Routers and physically installing the ITS
devices, you can use Scan Device to locate and identify the ITS devices on a Star
Topology. But, because the IIC does not recognize the Network Switch Management
VLAN IP addresses in the Star Topology Management VLAN, IIC System Validation
will fail unless you manually add a route statement for the Management VLAN.
Adding a Manual Route Statement for the Management VLAN
To add a manual route statement for the Management VLAN:
1. Open a command prompt.
2. Enter the following command.
Route add -p 172.31.200.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.31.n.1 metric 3
3. Enter the following command to check the accuracy of the entry.
Route Print
The Persistent Routes section will show the new route information.
4. If the route is not correct or you need to change this information you can delete
it by entering the following command and include the actual IP of the route you
want to delete.
Route Delete xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
With PIIC Release L, and later when you run System Validation a warning will appear
in the log stating that the IP Addresses of Star Topology devices are not in the ITS or
ICN range. No action is required when you see this warning.
Table 6-13: List of Network Devices Configuration Options
Button/
Selection
Description
Action/Steps
New
Adds a new network device to the list by
means of the Network Devices screen.
• Click New to open the Network Devices screen
(Table 6-15, “Network Device Screen Configuration
Options,” on page 6-53).
Edit
Changes the information for a device in the
List of network devices section of the
Network Configuration screen
1. Select the device name you want to change in the
List of Network Devices.
2. Click Edit to open the device type Network Devices
screen (Table 6-15, “Network Device Screen
Configuration Options,” on page 6-53).
3. Edit/change the required information, then click OK.
6-48
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-13: List of Network Devices Configuration Options
Button/
Selection
Remove
Description
Removes a device from the List of network
devices section of the Network
Configuration screen
Action/Steps
1. Click the device name you want to remove.
2. Click Remove.
3. Click OK.
If you try to remove a network printer that
has configured reports to be printed, a
warning message appears. The reports
must be removed before you can remove
the printer.
If you try to remove a device that is
mapped to a bed label a warning appears
and removal fails.
Scan
Devicea
Not
applicable
for routers
You must
enter all
Routers
manually.
Generates an automatic search for
network devices that respond to an SNMP
identification request or a specific http
request
All devices must be turned on and properly
connected to the network.
See Table 6-13 for compatible devices.
Devices can always be added manually to
the configuration. All network devices in a
Star Topology must be entered manually
(page 6-48).
1. Click Scan Device.
A dialog box opens and requests the Access Point
Controller (APC) IP Address.
2. Enter the APC IP Address and click OK.
Once the APC is found, a Network Devices Scanned
screen lists all responsive network devices.
3. If you do not want to associate the devices with
clinical units click one or more of the desired
wireless Access Points (APs) and click Add Selected.
4. If you do want to associate the device with a
clinical unit select the desired device in the list
and click Associate Unit.
A Unit popup lists all currently defined clinical
units.
5. Select a unit from the Associate with Unit list and
click OK in the Assign Unit popup.
The unit association for all chosen access points
displays in the Network Devices Scanned screen.
6. If you want to set an AP as a boundary access point
select the desired device in the list and click Set
Boundary.
If selected this AP is designated as a boundary
access point; any Smart-hopping ITS devices that are
associated with this AP are considered out-ofbounds.
Note
Caution
If a device does not have a unique name and IP address a message appears, and you must
correct the duplication.
The Scan Device function is not applicable to Star Topology Network devices. All devices for Star
Topology must be entered manually. Refer to IntelliVue Clinical Network Installation and
Service Guide for applicable IP addresses of Star Topology network devices.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-49
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-13: List of Network Devices Configuration Options
Button/
Selection
Description
Monitor IP
Address
Range
Permits review and edit of the acceptable
range of IP Addresses that can be used by
IPMs (IntelliVue Patient Monitors)
Action/Steps
1. Click Monitor IP Address Range to open the IP
Address Range for Mx screen
2. Verify that the IP Address range is sufficient, and
increase the range if necessary.
Acceptable range is 172.31.4.0 - 172.31.4.255
(see Appendix A).
• IP Address Range Starting Value - Enter or edit the
first IP Address in the range of IP Addresses that can be
assigned to Mx/IntelliVue patient monitors.
• IP Address Range Ending Value - Enter or edit the last
IP Address in the range of IP Addresses that can be
assigned to Mx/IntelliVue patient monitors.
• Last IP Address Used
3. Click OK to save the changes and close the screen.
PIICiX Portal
Configure a Web Portal Host so that the
Prior Unit Data feature may be enabled.
1. Click PIIC iX Portal.
The PIIC iX Route Settings dialog appears.
2. Enter the IP address of the PIIC iX Web Server, and
click OK.
a. The Scan Device function is not applicable to Star Topology equipment.
Table 6-14: Requirements for Networked Devices
Device Type
Systems Supported on
Requirements
12-Lead ECG Management
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
The Database Server/Information Center must be
configured with the 12-Lead ECG Management system
host name. The ECG Management system must be
configured to receive Information Center data
(PMDExport folder must be created). User name
(Table 6-16, “User Names for Export Devices,” on
page 6-55) and Password are required for client
devices.
802.11 Access Point
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
Device name is required. A unique IP Address must be
defined for each 802.11 Access Point.
801.11 Wireless Switch
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
The Device Name and IP address are required.
Access Point Controller
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
Device name is required. A unique IP Address must be
defined for each APC. All configured units are listed in
Associated with Unit, but it is an optional field. If only
one APC is configured, enter the IP address for the
device. If more than one device is configured at once,
enter the IP address for the first APC. The IP addresses
of the rest of the devices are assigned incrementally.
6-50
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-14: Requirements for Networked Devices
Device Type
Systems Supported on
Requirements
Alert Data Integration Client
Database Servers
M3145, M3150, M3155
Information Centers
Device Name, IP Address/Host Name, and Port
Number are required. It is recommended that you use
the IP Address for IP Address/Host Name. This
reduces the number of NetBIOS name resolution
broadcasts, which could degrade performance.
Default Port Number is 5260.
HL7 Export Interface
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
Up to six HL7 Interface target client devices can be
configured. Configuration is described in Equipment
Setup HL7 client Device Name and IP Address/Host
Name are required.
If you disable the HL7 Export purchased option you
must also remove the HL7 Export Interface from the
List of Network Devices
Holter
Note
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
Device name and host name of Holter device is
required. Holter device must be configured to receive
Information Center data. (PMDExport folder must be
created). Only one Holter device is supported per
system. Settings are not restored from earlier
releases. Username and Password are needed for
each device.
Only one Holter device is allowed. An additional device will not appear if there is already one Holter
device configured.
Hospital ADT Interface
Database Server
Hostname, Device Name, Port Number, User Name
and Password are required to add the Hospital ADT
Interface device. Only one per Database Server system
is permitted. Default Port Number is 8051.
Network Switch
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
The Device Name and IP address are required. The
switch must be configured using the Network Config
Tool. On Database Server systems, a 24 Port
Switch configuration is required before you can
continue to the next configuration screen.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-51
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-14: Requirements for Networked Devices
Device Type
Systems Supported on
Requirements
BootP for Networked Printer
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
Enter the MAC Address for a Monitoring LAN printer
that needs to acquire an IP Address. You do not have
to create an entry if you can manually enter the IP at
the printer. IP Addresses for BootP Monitoring LAN
Printers are:
172.31.3.961
172.31.3.97
172.31.3.98
172.31.3.99
172.31.3.100
172.31.3.101
172.31.3.102
172.31.3.103
1 This
IP Address range is applicable for ICN #1.
The IP Addresses increment on each Network.
See Appendix A for details.
Research Data Export
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
Up to ten Research Data export devices can be
configured. Device Name, User Name, Password, and
Host Name\ Folder are required.
(For example, remoteMachineName\folderName,
where folderName is the actual folder name that data
is being sent to, must be shared and Read/Write
enabled.)
Philips provides a Research Data Export Viewer
application. For detailed information about use the
RDE Viewer software, refer to the Research Data
Export Viewer User Guide.
Router
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
Remote Client: Device Name and IP address are
required. (Requires manual route statements)
Wireless Subnet Router: the Primary Router IP address
is 172.31.n.2 and the Secondary Router IP address is
172.31.n.3. The Remote Subnet is 172.31.240.0 and
the Remote Subnet Mask is 255.255.240.0
Important
If you have Bedside Monitors that are configured to send reports to a particular Printer Name, be sure that you use that
name for your newly configured printers, or change/update your bedside monitors’ destination printer name.
Smart-hopping Access Point
(1.4 or 2.4 GHz)
6-52
Database Servers
M3150 Information Center
Device name is required. A unique IP Address must be
defined for each Smart-hopping Access Point. To
configure more than one Access Point IP address,
enter an IP address for the first Access Point. The IP
addresses of the rest of the Access Points are
assigned incrementally.
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-14: Requirements for Networked Devices
Device Type
Systems Supported on
Requirements
SNTP Time Source
Master Database Server
M3150 Information Center
SNTP Time source must be provided by the hospital,
and must not be part of the IntelliVue Clinical Network.
It is defined as a separate PC and must be an SNTP
Master Time Server that is running the W32TIME
service as defined for Windows NT/2003/XP/ME. The
host name can either be a DNS hostname, URL, or IP
Address. The time source can reside geographically in
any time zone without any requirements for
“Automatically adjusting clock for Daylight saving
changes”. If the time source is behind the hospital
firewall, the hospital must open the appropriate port
(123) for the NTP protocol.
The Network Devices screen opens when you add a new network device and
includes selections that are applicable to the chosen device. All possible selections
are described in Table 6-15.
Note The Network Devices screen only supports adding or removing BootP Printers on
the Monitoring LAN.
On a DBS you must use the Windows Control Panel to add and share Printers that
are not on the Monitoring LAN (page 7-76).
Table 6-15: Network Device Screen Configuration Options
Button/Selection
Description/Action
Device Type
Permits selecting a device
• Click the arrow to see the available selections.
• Click the desired device type (Table 6-14, “Requirements for Networked Devices,” on page 650).
Device Name
Permits entering (or selecting) a Device Name
• Enter (15 character limit) or select a device name.
For APs use a name that describes the AP location, because if you are using Device
Location the AP name appears in the Patient Window, Patient Sector, Fast Alarm Review,
Telemetry Setup, and in the alarm text sent to the paging device (if Paging is enabled).
IP Address
Permits entering or selecting the device IP Address
• Enter or select the IP Address of the new device.
You must enter IP Addresses for switches and access points in this screen in order to view their
performance status in Network Statistics.
If no switches are entered, then the Equipment Setup screen will not allow any of the Mx
installation options.
IP Address/
Hostname
Permits entering or selecting the added device IP Address or Hostname
• Enter the IP Address of the device being added, or
• Enter a DNS hostname, URL, or IP Address for an SNTP Time Source.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-53
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-15: Network Device Screen Configuration Options
Button/Selection
Description/Action
Number of Ports
Permits entry of number of ports for switches
• Enter the number of ports.
24 (default)
User Name
Permits entering a valid User Name
• Enter User Name in the text box.
Password
Permits entering a valid Password
• Enter Password in the text box.
Confirm Password
Note
Establish authentication on the target export device
Clients for 12-Lead ECG Management, Research Data Export, and Holter require a User Name and Password.
User Name and Password are site-defined, and must be correctly assigned at the Information Center and at
the external system PC or Server. User Name must be a fully qualified name (TargetHost\UserName,
for example, depending on the share settings at the target device).
MAC Address
Permits entering the 12 digit HEX MAC Address of the device to be added
• Enter the MAC Address of the BootP printer on the Monitoring LAN that you want to add.
This selection is available if BootP for Networked Printer is selected as the Device Type.
See page 6-46 for instructions to obtain your printer MAC Address.
Number of
devices
Allows assignment of multiple devices in sequential order from the starting IP address
• Click the desired selection.
Applies to Access Point Controllers and Smart-Hopping Access Points only
Start with
Permits selection of a starting IP Address for devices that allow incremental IP addresses to be
configured
• Enter the IP Address that you want to assign to the first device being added.
If the last octet of an assigned or incriminated IP Address exceeds 255, an error message appears
and the operation fails.
Associated with
Unit
Permits association of Access Point Controllers and Smart-Hopping Access Points with a Clinical
Unit
• Click the desired selection.
If an access point controller or access point is associated with a clinical unit, then any alert
conditions detected for the device appears in the system message area of the Information Centers
assigned to that unit. Otherwise the alert condition displays on all Information Centers.
Boundary Limit
Permits designation of a boundary Access Point
• Click the checkbox to select the device as the Boundary AP.
This selection is applicable to Smart-Hopping Access Points. If selected this AP is designated as a
boundary access point. Any ITS devices associated with it are considered out-of-bounds.
Remote
Antenna 1 /
Remote
Antenna 2
Permits configuration of Remote Antenna when you are configuring Multiple Smart Hopping APs.
1. Click the checkbox to select Remote Antenna 1 (port 1) or Remote Antenna 2 (port 2).
The Remote Antenna Name displays in the text box.
2. Click Boundary Limit 1 or Boundary Limit 2 checkbox to select antenna as a boundary.
Remote Antennas inherit cluster AP unit association.
Remote Antennas do not display in the List of Network Devices once configured; they appear in the
Network Devices section of the Configuration Report.
6-54
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-15: Network Device Screen Configuration Options
Button/Selection
Description/Action
Primary
Permits assignment of Primary Alert Data Integration Client when more than one ADI client is
present
• Click the option button next to Primary for the Alert Data Integration Client that you want to be
the Primary.
Any other ADI client in the system is a secondary ADI client. Up to two ADI clients can be
configured.
Filter Before
Export
Determines if filter is applied to 12-lead data at time of export
(Applies to 12-Lead ECG Management)
It is recommended that this setting is No if exporting to TraceMasterVue.
Default: No
• Click the checkbox.
• Click Ok in the Network Devices screen to store/save changes, or Cancel to close the screen with no changes.
Table 6-16: User Names for Export Devices
Release
Export
User Name
Share
N.01
Holter
User Configurable
PMDExport
12-Lead
User Configurable
PMDExport
HL7
Hospital ADT
User Configurable
Wave Snippet
PMDExport
PMDExport
Data Export
User Configurable
User Configurable
ADI
User Configurable
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-55
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-17: Configuration Options for List of Network Devices
Device category
Specific devices covered
Automatically identified
Routers
Cisco 3550
No
Managed switches supported in
IntelliVue Clinical Network
Cisco 2950
Cisco 2960
Cisco 3560
Cisco 3570
HP 2524
HP 2510
Yes
Additional switches/routers supported
in customer VLAN configurations
Cisco 2955
Cisco 2970
Cisco 3512
Cisco 3524
Cisco 4500
Cisco WS-C6509
No
Access Point Controllers (APCs)
Philips Smart-hopping
Yes
After you enter one device
manually, the rest can be found
automatically.
Access Points (AP)
Philips Smart-hopping
Yes, once APC IP address is
entered
Cluster AP
Philips Smart-hopping
Yes, once APC IP address is
entered
Access Points (AP)
Proxim RangeLAN2
No
Access Points (AP)
Symbol Harmony
No
Access Points (AP)
Symbol 802.11
No
External devices
12-lead ECG Management, Holter,
Research Data Export, SNTP Time
Source, Alert Data, Hospital ADT,
HL7
No
6-56
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Enabling the Prior Unit Data Feature
The Prior Unit Data feature is a browser-based view of retrospective data for a
patient who was previously monitored on another PIIC or PIIC iX system.
Compatibility
The Prior Unit Data feature is supported for the following PIIC iX/PIIC releases:
• PIIC iX Release A.01 (or greater)
• PIIC Release N.00.19 (or greater)
Prior Unit Data Feature Overview
The Prior Unit Data feature is available once a web portal host has been configured
from the Network Configuration screen in Config Wizard running on an M3154
Large Database Server and IP forwarding has been properly configured for the
Large Database Server as well.
When a retrospective application is accessed in PIIC and the current patient has a
medical record number (or MRN), a query is made to all the configured portal hosts
that searches for any previous data for the current patient. If a match is found, then
an icon for the viewer is displayed in the application title bar as shown in
Figure 6-30.
If previous data does not exist for the current patient, the icon will not display. In the
event that there are multiple matching MRNs, a dialog will pop up showing a list of
patients to chose from and then show the retrospective data once the desired prior
unit has been selected.
Prior Unit Data Icon
Figure 6-30: The Prior Unit Data Indicator Icon
When a user clicks on the icon, the Prior Unit Data application launches.
Figure 6-31 shows Prior Unit Data received for a patient from a PIIC system.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-57
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 6-31: The Prior Unit Data Application Displaying Data Received from a PIIC
Figure 6-32 shows Prior Unit Data received for a patient from a PIIC iX system.
Figure 6-32: The Prior Unit Data Application Displaying Data Received from a PIIC iX
The Prior Unit Data application presents a web page showing the data that was
saved when the patient was discharged from the PIIC or PIIC iX system. The web
page is hosted within the Patient Window frame.
Configuring Support for the Prior Unit Data Feature
To enable use of the Prior Unit Data feature, you must first configure a PIIC iX Web
Portal Host from the Network Configuration screen in Config Wizard running on an
M3154 Large Database Server:
1. Click PIIC iX Portal.
The PIIC iX Route Settings dialog appears.
Figure 6-33: PIIC iX Route Settings Dialog
6-58
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
2. Enter the IP address of the PIIC iX Web Server, and click OK.
Figure 6-34: PIIC iX Route Settings Dialog
3. Verify network connectivity between the PIIC Large DBS and the PIIC iX Web
Portal by pinging the IP address you entered in step 2 from the PIIC DBS.
4. Configure IP forwarding on the PIIC DBS:
a) Open Server Manager from the Windows desktop.
b) Click Roles in the left navigation pane to access the Roles screen.
Figure 6-35: The Server Manager Roles Screen
c) Click Add Roles on the Roles screen.
The Add Roles Wizard appears.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-59
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 6-36: The Add Roles Wizard
d) Mark the Network Policy and Access Services checkbox, and then click
Next, and click Next on the screen that follows to advance to the screen
shown in Figure 6-37.
Figure 6-37: Adding Role Services
Select the Roles Services to install for the Network Policy and Access
Services role.
e) Mark the Routing and Remote Services checkbox and then click Next.
f)
Click Install from the Add Roles Wizard to add the role.
g) After the Network Policy and Access Services Role has been added, open
the Server Manager window.
6-60
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
h) In the left navigation pane, expand the Roles and the Network Policy and
Access Services entries.
Figure 6-38: Configuring Routing and Remote Access
i)
Right-click on Routing and Remote Access, and then click Configure and
Enable Routing and Remote Access from the context menu that appears.
The Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard appears.
Figure 6-39: Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard
j)
Click Next to proceed.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-61
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 6-40: Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard
k) Mark the Mark the Network address translation (NAT) radio button, and
then click Next.
l)
Click Next and accept the default settings repeatedly to complete the
Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard.
m) Reboot the DBS.
IP forwarding is now configured on the PIIC DBS.
5. After you have configured IP forwarding on the PIIC DBS, you should verify that
IP forwarding is working on each associated PIIC:
a) Once the PIIC has restarted, open a Command Prompt, and enter the
command route print.
b) Verify that you see the IP address of the configured PIIC iX web portal listed.
c) Ping the PIIC iX web portal from the PIIC.
Accessing the Prior Unit Data Feature
For systems with a PIIC iX Web Portal Host host configured, the IntelliVue
Information Center allows you to access a browser-based view of a patient’s
retrospective data for patients discharged with Save Data with Discharge from
another IntelliVue Information Center Release N or higher or for patients discharged
from an IntelliVue Information Center iX.
When you access a review window for a patient the system searches to see if any
previous data exists for patients with a matching medical record number. If a match
is found an icon (
) displays in review window header that you can click to view
the previous data.
To access patient data from a prior unit:
1. Click the
icon from the review window header. If there are multiple patients
matching the current patient's medical record number a Patient Matches dialog
box displays.
2. Select the correct patient then click OK. A web-based view of the selected
patient’s retrospective data for the current review application displays.
6-62
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
The amount of data available depends on where the patient data is stored;
either the IntelliVue Information Center or Information Center iX. See your
appropriate Instructions For Use for information on how data is saved on
Discharge.
If you are accessing data for a patient discharged from another IntelliVue
Information Center then the web-based review window that displays matches
the review window you have open when you select the
icon.
If you are accessing data for a patient discharged from an IntelliVue Information
Release iX, the web review application that initially displays depends on which
PIIC Review application is active when you click the Prior Unit Data
icon as
summarized below:
If the following PIIC application is
active when the user clicks the
Prior Unit Data icon…
... then Following PIIC iX
Web Application Displays
Alarm Review
Alarm Review
12 Lead Review
12 Lead Capture Review
ST Review
Cardiac Review
Event, Trend or Wave Review
General Review
3. When you are done reviewing the previous unit data, click the X button in the
review window title bar to return the currently open review window.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-63
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Device Pooling Configuration
Device Pool Configuration (Figure 6-41) is used to define equipment pools. The list
of units provided for sharing the equipment includes all units across the entire large
monitoring network. This information is replicated to all database servers
participating in the pool. The configuration can be performed from any database
server, but requires that all database servers participating in the equipment pool
are configured and in monitoring mode.
The Device Pool Configuration screen is also available from the Service Menus of
the Large and Small Database Servers.
Figure 6-41: Config Wizard: Device Pooling Screen
Note Device Pooling is only permitted on IntelliVue Telemetry System (ITS) devices.
If Device Pooling is to be used with multiple Database Server systems, configure the
Device Pool on the last Database Server configured (when all other Database
Servers are in monitoring mode). This enables the replication of the Clinical Unit
names across all participating Database Servers.
The Device Pool Configuration screen includes the following:
• Device Pool Name - Name of device pool.
• Pool/Units - List of valid pool names and clinical units from the database
servers in this large network.
• Available Units - List of all valid clinical units from all database servers in the
large network that are not assigned to a pool.
Table 6-18 describes buttons in the Device Pool Configuration screen.
6-64
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-18: Device Pool Configuration Screen Buttons
Button
Description
Add
Permits adding a new Pool and clinical unit assignments
A device pool name must be unique within the network and can not be duplicated with any clinical unit or
other device pool name on any server in the network.
Make sure that the name you choose does not exist on another server that is not running.
Delete
Permits deletion of the selected Pool and all of its clinical unit assignments
All units assigned to a device pool must be unassigned before a device pool can be deleted.
Rename
Permits renaming the selected Pool
1. Click the name of the pool you want to change.
A popup displays.
2. Enter the new device pool name in the popup.
3. Click OK.
The name change is automatically replicated.
Device Pools
Assign
To assign a Unit to a Pool:
1. Select a pool name from the Pool/Units list.
2. Select a Unit (configured as Flex) from the Available Units list.
Fixed units may be listed as available but are not supported in Device Pooling.
3. Click Assign to move the Unit to the Pool.
• A Unit can participate in only one Pool. All ITS devices within the Unit will be assigned to the Pool.
• A Unit that already has ITS labels configured cannot be assigned to a pool.
• A Unit cannot be renamed once it is assigned to a pool.
Unassign
To remove a Pool or Unit assignment from the list:
1. Select a Pool or Unit from the list.
• You can only unassign a unit from a pool if it's server is accessible and there is no shared ITS
equipment mapped on the server. If the server of the unit is not accessible, a message appears.
• Unassignment from a pool should occur only in the initial configuration if a mistake was made. This is
a hospital structural configuration and should not change.
• When you unassign the last unit in a pool for a server, the pool and pool/unit configuration and ITS
labels in the pool are removed on that server. A warning appears which requires confirmation.
Replicate
• Assignment and unassignment are replicated automatically to all database servers in the Config
Wizard when you click Next, Back, or Exit, or manually when you click the Replicate button in the
Service Menu. Replication includes the pools list and ITS equipment labels within those pools.
• If the automatic replication fails, or if configuration changes are made, you can do the replication
manually.
• Replicate is available only in Service mode (unavailable in Config Wizard).
• Click to push device pool and associated pool labels from the server to other pooling servers.
When you access the Device Pool Configuration screen from the Service Menu of a
Database Server that is in Monitoring Mode:
• Add, Rename, Assign, and Replicate buttons are enabled.
• Delete and Unassign buttons are disabled.
• Changes made during monitoring mode must be replicated to other server(s).
-
Add a device pool and Assign a unit to device pool. Replicate changes
manually to take effect on other server(s).
-
Rename a device pool. Changes are replicated automatically across servers;
there is no need to manually Replicate.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-65
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Display Setup
Use the Display Setup screen (Figure 6-42) to configure the display of patient data
on the Main Screen and in the Patient Sectors.
Figure 6-42: Config Wizard: Display Setup Screen
Table 6-19, “Display Setup Screen Selections,” on page 6-66 describes the Display
Setup screen selections.
Table 6-19: Display Setup Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Patient Name
Description
• Click the check box next to Display Patient Name to display the Patient Name in the
Patient Sector. Uncheck the box if you do not want to show the Patient Name.
• Click the down-arrow next to the text box to show the option list for displaying the
Patient Name. Click the preferred option to select it.
Sweep Speed, mm/sec
Permits selection of sweep speed for displayed waveforms
• Click the option button next to the desired waveform sweep speed - 25 mm/sec or
12.5 mm/sec.
Second Lead ECG
Permits selection of a second ECG lead for display
On EASI CMS and V24 bedsides, if Second Lead ECG is enabled, the secondary wave on the
Information Center is always the second channel of ECG regardless of the secondary wave
selected at the CMS or V24 bedside.
Color Scheme
Provides color options for patient data. Click the option button next to the desired option to
select it.
• Standard sets all data parameters to white on a black background.
• By Parameter permits setting data parameters to different colors.
Physiological Waves
Lists physiological waves that can be displayed for each patient on the Main Screen
The number of waves can be 3 for up to 4 Patient Sectors, 2 for 5 - 12 Patient Sectors, and
1 for 16 Patient Sectors.
6-66
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-19: Display Setup Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description
Physiological
Parameters
Lists physiological parameters that can be displayed for each patient on the Main Screen.
Each Wave and Parameter has an adjacent color box indicating its color on the Main
Screen.
Scroll bars next to each list permit viewing the entire list.
MOVE
Permits changing the priority order of the display Parameter
1. Click the parameter to be changed.
2. Click UP or DOWN MOVE to change the parameter’s list position.
or
1. Click and hold on the parameter to be changed.
2. Drag the parameter to its new location in the list.
UP
DOWN
Choose New Color
Permits changing the color of Waves and Parameters
1. Click the Wave or Parameter to be changed.
2. Click the desired color for the Wave or Parameter from the options in the Choose New
Color field. Changing the color of a Wave automatically changes the color of its
Parameter.
3. View the changed color in the Preview field.
Warning If the correct primary display is not selected, the display sweep speed will not be
correct and Philips application software will not meet its specifications.
Note The number of waves on the Main Screen can be 3 for 4-Patient Sectors, 2 for
5-Patient through 12-Patient Sectors, and 2 for 16-Patient Sectors.
The order of the Waves or Parameters specifies their priority for display. The priority
order of Waves is fixed, but the order of Parameters can be changed.
Equipment Setup
The Equipment Setup screen is used to select the patient monitors and telemetry
devices that will be available to each Information Center for patient monitoring.
Note For Database Server systems Equipment Setup runs on the Database Server; for
M3150 Information Centers Equipment Setup runs on the device.
The Equipment Setup screen (Figure 6-18) permits creating labels for beds,
telemetry equipment, and bedside monitors and associating each label with a
specific Clinical Unit. Once a label is assigned to a device, the device can be
assigned to a bed and Information Center that will receive the bed's monitoring
data.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-67
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 6-43: Config Wizard: Equipment Setup Screen
Table 6-20: Equipment Setup Screen Regions
1
When the Equipment Setup screen opens the top-most device is highlighted. On the Database Server, all the units
added to the domain in the Network Configuration screen appear; on a Standalone device there is one unit.
• Click the desired unit to select it.
2
Icons available for mapping bed labels to equipment
The icons that display depend on the Monitoring Type of the Unit selected and types of devices.
3
Equipment list section
The list is unique to the equipment type.
Monitor Labels (page 6-72), ITS (page 6-76), or Switch (page 6-78).
4
Buttons to configure monitors/telemetry devices in the equipment list
Monitor Labels (Table 6-25), ITS (page 6-76), Selected Switch (page 6-78)
5
Permits configuration of HL7 Settings (Table 6-30, “HL7 Configuration Screen Selections,” on page 6-79) and
802.11 Wireless Profiles (Table 6-31, “Configuring 802.11 Wireless Network Profiles,” on page 6-82)
6
Permits selection of label types
The list is unique to the label selection (Table 6-21, “Label Types,” on page 6-69)
Table 6-21 describes the Label Types of the Equipment Setup screen.
6-68
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-21: Label Types
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
Label Type
Permits selection of monitoring device type
Each selection displays a list specific to the monitoring device.
Bed - permits adding monitoring location label.
Telemetry - permits adding Telemetry equipment label.
Monitor - permits adding Monitor equipment label.
Bed
Telemetry
Monitor
1. Click the Bed option.
A table that permits adding and removing Bed labels appears. The headings include Bed
Label and Unit.
2. To remove a label, select it from the list and click Remove.
3. To add a label, click Add.
The Add Bed Label(s) screen opens (Table 6-22, “Adding Bed Labels,” on page 6-70).
1. Click the Telemetry option
A table that permits adding and removing telemetry Equipment Labels appears. The headings
include Equipment Label, Type, Unit, and Access Code.
2. To remove an equipment label, select it from the list and click Remove.
3. To add an equipment label, click Add.
The Add Equipment Label(s) screen opens (Table 6-23, “Adding Telemetry Equipment,” on
page 6-71).
If you want to Pair an MP5 or X2 IntelliVue Patient Monitor it must have a Telemetry Equipment
Label and monitoring must be in flex mode.
1. Click the Monitor option.
A table that permits adding and removing Monitor labels appears. The headings include
Monitor, Access Code, and 802.11 Profile.
2. To remove an equipment label, select it from the list and click Remove.
3. To add an equipment label, click Add.
The Add Monitor Label(s) screen opens (Table 6-24, “Adding Monitor Labels,” on page 6-72).
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-69
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-22: Adding Bed Labels
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
The Add Bed Label(s) screen permits adding a Bed Label to the list.
When assigning a bed label, be sure that the name:
•
•
•
•
Prefix
is unique so the Server can identify it,
contains no more than 6 characters,
uses alpha-numeric characters only (no other characters are acceptable-spaces, hyphens, underscores, for example), and
does not begin with a number.
• Enter a prefix (up to 4 characters) for the label.
For example, you could use the prefix SDU for Step Down Unit or CCU for Coronary
Care Unit. The illustration example uses the prefix, BED. Be consistent with your
prefix case so that labels sort properly.
It is mandatory that you add a numeric value in the Start with Index field and that the value
has no leading zeroes. As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100 devices for Number of Labels.
Start with Index
• Type the first number in the list (1, for example).
You must enter a numeric value in this field, and this value cannot have leading
zeros. Software will permit an incorrect entry in this field, so be sure to enter correct
data.
Number of Labels
• Type the number of labels for the specified Prefix.
As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100 devices for the Number of Labels
of each selected Prefix. For example, if you use:
Prefix
Start with Index
Number of Labels
CCU
1
100
Labels will be CCU1 through CCU100.
Associated with Unit
Permits association of the equipment with the Clinical Unit where it is located
• Click the desired association in the list.
• Click Ok to store/save changes, or click Cancel to close the Add Bed Label(s) screen with no changes.
6-70
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-23: Adding Telemetry Equipment
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
The Add Equipment Label(s) screen permits adding a Telemetry Equipment Label to the
list.
Equipment Type
• ITS (default)
Prefix
• Type a label prefix with up to 4 characters.
For example, you could use the prefix TELE for Telemetry devices. Be consistent with
your prefix case so that labels sort properly.
It is mandatory that you add a numeric value in the Start with Index field and
that the value has no leading zeroes. As a Philips preferred practice do not
exceed 100 devices for Number of Labels.
Start with Index
Note
• Type the first number in the list (1, for example).
You must enter a numeric value in this field, and this value cannot have leading
zeroes. The software will permit an incorrect entry, so be careful to enter correct
data.
Do not exceed 16 characters for an equipment label. If the equipment label has more than 16
characters, a warning appears:
One or more equipment labels exceed 16 characters.
Number of Labels
• Type the number of labels for the selected Prefix.
As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100 devices for the Number of Labels
of each selected Prefix. For example, if you use:
Prefix
Start with Index
Number of Labels
Tele
1
100
Equipment Labels will be Tele1 through Tele100.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-71
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-23: Adding Telemetry Equipment
RF Access Code
For ITS devices only
Specifies which RF Access code domain the device is associated with
Range: 1 - 255; Default: 1.
Once an RF access code is configured for the unit ITS labels, all subsequent new ITS
equipment labels must have the same code. If you select a different access code, an
error message displays and the operation fails. The equipment list includes unit and
access code information.
• Click the desired RF Access code in the list.
Associate unit/pool
Permits associating equipment with a clinical Unit (or pooled units)
If a Clinical Unit within a DBS does not wish to share equipment with other units, its
owned equipment and Clinical Unit name should be associated so that during flexible
monitoring operations the Sector setup application will only list equipment belonging to
that unit.
Units that wish to share equipment with other units (cockpit model) should use
Equipment Pool configuration.
• Click the desired association in the list.
• Click Ok to store/save changes; or click Cancel to close the Add Equipment Label(s) screen with no changes.
Table 6-24: Adding Monitor Labels
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
The Add Monitor Label(s) screen permits adding a Monitor Equipment Label to the list.
When assigning a monitor label to a device, be sure that the name:
•
•
•
•
6-72
is unique so the Server can identify it,
contains no more than 16 characters,
uses alpha-numeric characters only (no other characters are acceptable spaces, hyphens, underscores, and so on)
does not begin with a number.
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-24: Adding Monitor Labels
Prefix
• Enter a prefix for the label.
For example, you could use the prefix MON for IntelliVue Patient Monitors or XMON
for X2 Monitors. Be consistent with your prefix case so that labels sort properly.
It is mandatory that you add a numeric value in the Start with Index field and
that the value has no leading zeroes. As a Philips preferred practice do not
exceed 100 devices for Number of Labels.
Start with Index
Note
• Type the first number in the list (1, for example).
You must enter a numeric value for this field, and this value cannot have leading
zeroes. The software will permit an incorrect entry, so be careful to enter data
correctly.
The total number of characters for an equipment label can not exceed 16. If the label has
more than 16 characters, a warning appears.
Number of Labels
• Type the number of labels for the selected Prefix.
As a Philips preferred practice do not exceed 100 devices for the Number of Labels
of each selected Prefix. For example, if you use:
Prefix
Start with Index
Number of Labels
MON
1
100
Equipment Labels will be MON1 through MON100.
Association
• Click the option button next to the desired association.
– None
– RF Access Code (For ITS Devices only - Range: 1 - 255; Default: 1)
– 802.11 Profile (Permits association with 802.11 Wireless Network Profile, enabling
the Equipment Label Assignment function for 802.11 IntelliVue wireless bedsides)
If you configure this setting Equipment Label, RF Access Code, 802.11 Profile, and height/
weight units are copied into each 802.11 wireless IntelliVue bedside.
• Click Ok to store/save changes, or click Cancel to close the Add Monitor Label(s) screen with no changes.
Note A message displays if you try to Add a duplicate label:
One or more new labels are already in use. Cannot create duplicate labels.
If you try to Remove a device that is currently configured to a Label, a message
displays:
• For Bed Labels: Cannot remove the beds selected (or selected labels) because
equipment is connected to some or all of them.
• For other Labels: Cannot remove the selected labels because beds are mapped
to some or all of them.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-73
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Setting Up
Equipment
Icons in the Equipment List section of the Equipment Setup screen identify and
permit setup of specific types of equipment.
The Monitor Label equipment list permits mapping bed labels to IntelliVue Patient
Monitors in a unit using flex Monitoring, where the bedside monitors have been
configured with a Monitor Label. To assign a monitor label to a bedside monitor
refer to the monitor Instructions for Use.
The ITS equipment list permits mapping a telemetry device to a bed label.
The Switch equipment list permits mapping bed labels to MRx/IntelliVue Patient
Monitors in a unit using fixed Monitoring where the MRx/IntelliVue is mapped to a
specific port in the switch.
Figure 6-44 illustrates an example equipment list for selected IPM labels.
Figure 6-44: Sample Equipment List for IPM
Table 6-25: IntelliVue Patient Monitor Label Configuration Options
Setting/Selection
Description
Column Headings
Label #
Identifies the order of the IntelliVue Patient Monitors in the list
Monitor Label
Shows the Label assigned to the IntelliVue Patient Monitor Label
Bed Label
Shows the Bed Label of the bed that the IntelliVue Patient Monitor Label is assigned to
If an entry has a Monitor Label but no Bed Label, it can be assigned to an Information Center and a
specific sector with Sector Setup.
Monitored by
Identifies the Host Name of the Information Center that displays patient data from the IntelliVue
Patient Monitor.
# of Clients
Shows the number of Information Center Clients that have selected the Monitored by Information
Center for overviewing patient data
6-74
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-25: IntelliVue Patient Monitor Label Configuration Options
Buttons
Setup
Assigns IntelliVue Patient Monitors to patient beds for monitoring
1. Click a Label # to select it for assignment.
The Information Center displaying patient data from the selected Monitor Labels icon appears
in the Monitored by column.
2. Click the Setup button.
The Map Monitor to Monitor label # screen displays (Table 6-26, “Map Monitor to Monitor
Label #x Selections,” on page 6-75).
Remove
Removes IntelliVue Patient Monitors from patient beds
1. Click a label in the Label # column to select the associated equipment for removal.
2. Click Remove.
Monitoring equipment for the selected Label # is removed from the list.
If the equipment is mapped, a message displays, This will remove all selected beds. Are you sure?
You must confirm before the equipment is removed.
Table 6-26: Map Monitor to Monitor Label #x Selections
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
Equipment Type
Disabled for IntelliVue Patient monitors
Equipment Label
Permits selecting a Monitor Label to assign to a Bed Label
Because a telemetry monitor is not associated with a specific bed, its Equipment Label
should be different from its Bed Label. This field is disabled for Hardwired equipment.
• Select an Equipment Label from the drop-down list.
Setup equipment only
Permits assigning IntelliVue Patient monitoring equipment without giving it a Bed Label
This allows an IntelliVue Patient monitor with no Bed Label or Patient Sector assignment
to be available in Sector Setup. When this option is selected, the Located at bed field is
disabled.
• Click the checkbox to select it.
Located at bed
Permits assignment of Bed Label to the monitoring equipment
• Click the desired Bed Label in the list to assign it to the monitoring equipment.
Only the labels that are associated with the selected Unit are on the list.
• Click Ok to store/save changes or click Cancel to close the Map Monitor to Monitor Label #x screen with no
changes.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-75
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 6-45 illustrates an example Equipment List for ITS equipment. It permits
assignment of Telemetry Labels to ITS monitoring equipment and X2/MP5 patient
monitors to be paired with other patient monitors.
Figure 6-45: Sample Equipment List for ITS
Table 6-27: ITS Equipment List Configuration Options
Setting/Selection
Description
Column Headings
Label #
Identifies the order of the ITS equipment in the list
Bed Label
Shows the Bed Label of the bed for the monitoring equipment attached to that the Label #
Entries have a Monitor Label but no Bed Label when the Setup equipment only option is checked
during setup. This allows a telemetry monitor with no Bed Label or Patient Sector assignment to be
available in Sector Setup.
Telemetry Label
Shows Telemetry Label assigned to the monitoring equipment attached to that Label #
The Telemetry Label must match that of the respective ITS transceiver through the
ITS Configuration Tool.
Monitored by
Identifies the Host Name of the Information Center that displays patient data from the equipment
connected to the ITS device
# of Clients
Shows the number of Information Center Clients that have selected the Monitored by Information
Center for overviewing patient data
Paired Equipment
Permits pairing a bedside monitor (IntelliVue only) with a telemetry device (ITS telemetry) so that
both pieces of equipment are monitoring the same patient
Pairing is not supported in Fixed monitoring mode.
Buttons
Setup
6-76
Assigns equipment on each Label # to a Telemetry Label
1. Click a Label # to select it for assignment.
2. Click the Setup button.
The Map Monitor to Telemetry Label # screen opens (Table 6-26).
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-27: ITS Equipment List Configuration Options
Remove
Removes monitoring equipment from an ITS Label #
1. Click a label in the Label # column to select the associated equipment for removal.
2. Click Remove.
Setting/Selection
Description
Pair
Permits coupling of IntelliVue Telemetry beds to IntelliVue Patient Monitors for using Own Bed
Overview
1. Verify Unit is configured for Flex mode.
IntelliVue beds must be configured without mapping a bed label - use Setup only.
IntelliVue Telemetry beds must be configured with a bed label and appropriate Telemetry
Equipment label.
2. Select an IntelliVue Telemetry Label and click Pair.
The Couple Equipment dialog box opens.
3. Select an Equipment Label from the list and click Ok.
To pair equipment that is being monitored you must unassign the equipment from the sector, then
return to this screen.
UnPair
Permits upairing the selection
1. Click the desired device in the equipment list to select it.
2. Click the Unpair button.
A confirmation appears. If you click Remove in the message dialog box, the equipment is unpaired
and then removed.
HL7 Settings
Permits configuration of message format that is sent to an external HL7-compliant receiver
• Click HL7 Settings.
The HL7 Configuration screen opens (Table 6-30, “HL7 Configuration Screen Selections,” on
page 6-79HL7 Configuration Screen Selections).
Figure 6-46 illustrates an example equipment list when assigning IntelliVue Patient
monitors to a port of the Switch.
Figure 6-46: Sample Equipment List for Network Switches
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-77
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-28: Equipment List Configuration Options for Network Switches
Setting/Selection
Description
Column Headings
Port
Identifies the port of the selected switch
Bed Label
Shows the Bed Label of the bed that the/IntelliVue Patient Monitor label is assigned to
Monitored by
Identifies the Host Name of the Information Center that displays patient data from the IntelliVue
Patient monitor
# of Clients
Shows the number of Information Center Clients that have selected the Monitored by Information
Center for overviewing patient data
Buttons
Setup
Assigns monitoring equipment on each Switch Port number to an Information Center for monitoring
1. Click an Port to select it for assignment.
2. Click the Setup button.
The Map Monitor to Port # screen displays (Table 6-29, “Map Monitor to Switch Port # Screen
Selections,” on page 6-78).
Remove
Removes IntelliVue Patient monitors from patient beds
1. Click a label in the Port column to select the associated equipment for removal.
2. Click Remove.
Monitoring equipment for the selected Port is removed from the list.
HL7 Settings
Permits configuration of message format that is sent to an external HL7-compliant receiver
• Click HL7 Settings button.
The HL7 Configuration screen opens (Table 6-30, “HL7 Configuration Screen Selections,” on
page 6-79HL7 Configuration Screen Selections).
Table 6-29: Map Monitor to Switch Port # Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
.
Located at bed
Permits assignment of Bed Label to the monitoring equipment
• Click the desired Bed Label in the list to assign it to the monitoring equipment.
Only the labels that are associated with the selected Unit are on the list.
• Click Ok to store/save changes, or click Cancel to close the Map Monitor to Port #x screen with no changes.
6-78
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Figure 6-47: HL7 Configuration Screen
Configuring HL7
Options
Table 6-30: HL7 Configuration Screen Selections
HL7 Target Client
Permits selection of the target client from a drop-down list
Sending Options
Periodic Parameter Type
Message Type
• Current - sends the last actual parameter value received from the monitor.
• Averaged - sends the average of measurement since the last data time values were
sent.
Depending on the option, a numeric code is shown for parameter identification. Not all
IntelliVue Clinical Network numerics are supported with EMFC encoding.
• EMFC Coding (Default) - Extended Medical Function Codes
• MDIL Coding - Medical Device Interface Language
PDS Compatible - Permits selection of Patient Data Server compatible output
• Click the check box to select the option.
VistA Compatible - Permits selection of Vista-compatible output
• Click the check box to select the option.
When you select VistA Compatible, Middle Name and MDIL Coding are automatically
selected.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-79
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-30: HL7 Configuration Screen Selections
Enhanced Fields
Processing ID
• Production
• Debugging
• Test
Middle Name - Permits including patient middle name in message
Encounter Number - Permits including encounter number in message
Alternative ID - Permits selecting alternative patient identification
Send Time Messages
Specifies whether a Network Management (NMD) message with the current date/time
should be sent periodically every 60 seconds
When the connection is established, the message is sent to the client.
• Click the check box to select the option.
Send Facility ID
Specifies whether the Facility ID should be sent with the data
• Click the check box to select the option.
Post HL7 Disconnect
Message
Determines if the HL7 Disconnect message appears on the Resting Display
• Click the check box to show the HL7 Disconnect message on the Resting Display; clear
the check box to suppress the message.
Unsolicited
Auto Unsolicited
Launches an HL7 Auto Unsolicited Setting dialog box which permits automatic sending of
HL7 unsolicited data without a request from the client
Off (Default)
You must notify appropriate Hospital IT staff before you enable this setting.
Sending Interval
Permits selection of the interval that triggers the HL7 unsolicited data export for periodic
parameter
• Click the drop down arrow to show the available settings and click the desired
selection.
5, 10, 30 (Default), 60
IP Port for Unsolicited
Specifies the socket port number through which clients connect to the HL7 unsolicited
message interface
This is the port the client connects to that determines whether it will be treated as an
unsolicited or a query client.
1 to 65536
8000 (Default)
Solicited
IP Port for Query
6-80
Specifies the socket port number through which clients connect to the HL7 polling message
interface
1 to 65536
9010 (Default)
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-30: HL7 Configuration Screen Selections
Bed Assignment
Determines the Available Bed - Target Client host name association
Only clients whose host names are found in the list are allowed to connect to the HL7 export
interface.
Up to 6 clients of either unsolicited or query types can be associated with a bed label. If a
bed is associated with more than one client, the same bed information will be sent to each
client.
Target Client
Lists possible host names
If the Target Client is a CareVue server in duplex mode configuration, use the secondary
server name as the target client.
• Click a bed in the Target Client(s) list to select it.
Available Beds
Lists available beds
• Click a bed label in the Available Beds list to select it.
Assign
Unassign
1. Select the host name from the Target Client(s) list.
2. Select the beds from the Available Beds list.
3. Click Assign (or Unassign) button to associate (or disassociate) the client to the bed
label.
• Click Apply in the HL7 Configuration screen to save changes without exiting the screen.
• Click OK in the HL7 Configuration screen to save changes and open the next screen, or Cancel.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-81
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Adding Profile
Settings for
802.11 Network
Infrastructure
Table 6-31: Configuring 802.11 Wireless Network Profiles
Setting/Selection
Description/Action
When you select 802.11 Profiles from the Equipment Setup Screen, the Wireless Network Profiles Screen displays.
Buttons
Remove
• Select Remove to delete profile settings for the 802.11 network infrastructure.
Edit
• Select an item from the list, then click Edit to modify profile settings for the 802.11
network infrastructure.
Close
• Select Close to return to the Equipment Setup screen.
Add
• When you select Add, the 802.11 Wireless Network Profiles Setting screen displays.
Settings
Display Name
System name - desired name of infrastructure system
Default = WS2000
SSID
Service Set Identifier - security setting that must be changed from default of SSID to a site
defined value
(32 character max)
IEEE Mode
RF Protocol - radio modality (A = 802.11a, G = 802.11g)
802.11a is recommended.
Password
WPA/AWSCI Passphrase - security setting, must be changed from the default to a
user-defined value (8 character max)
• Click Ok to store/save changes; or click Cancel to close the screen with no changes.
6-82
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Bed Config
Bed Config (Figure 6-48) permits formatting patient sectors and assigning patient
monitors to Patient Sectors on the IntelliVue Information Center Main Screen.
Figure 6-48: Config Wizard: Bed Config Screen
Table 6-32 describes the Bed Config screen fields and settings.
Table 6-32: Bed Config Screen Configuration Options
Setting/Selection
Description
Fast Alarm Display
Permits configuring Fast Alarm strip display in the Patient Window when an alarm is silenced
• Click the option button next to the desired option to select it.
Disabled
Fast alarm strip will not display in the Patient Window when an alarm is silenced.
Red and Yellow
Fast alarm strip will display for Red and Yellow alarms.
Red Only
Fast alarm strip will display only for Red alarms.
Sector Setup Layout
Permits formatting Patient Sectors on the Main Screen.
# Sectors
Sets the number of Patient Sectors displayed on the Main Screen of the device
• Click the down arrow to show the list of available settings and click the desired selection.
4, 6, 8, 12, or 16.
The selected setting cannot exceed the value in # of Patients on the Purchased Options and
Support Information screen.
1 Column
Sets the number of Patient Sector columns on the Main Screen
• Click the option button next to the desired option to select it.
2 Column
You can only select 1 Column for 8 patients or less.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-83
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-32: Bed Config Screen Configuration Options
Setting/Selection
Description
Sector Setup Layout (continued)
Waves per Sector
Sets the number of monitoring waveforms that appear in Patient Sectors
• Click the down arrow to show the list of available settings and click the desired selection.
3 for 4 Patient Sectors
2 for 6 to 12 Patient Sectors
1 for 16 Patient Sectors on a single display
2 for 16 Patient Sectors with Dual Resting Display enabled
Show Alarm Limits
Enables/disables display of Heart Rate Alarm Limits (set in Alarm Management and Setup) in
Patient Sectors
• Click the check box to select the option.
Display Options
Single Resting
Display
Determines if patient sectors are displayed on the primary display only
Dual Resting
Display
Permits display of patient sectors on two displays
Single Trend Display
Determines if the device is used for Trend Display on a single display
(For M3177 with one display or IIC with dual display and TRD Option)
Dual Trend Display
Permits viewing the Trend Display is on both displays (M3177 only)
Associations
Monitoring
Identifies monitoring mode
Fixed - Assignment of a patient monitor (bedside or telemetry) to a Bed Label is fixed and cannot
be changed by the user. (Default)
Flex - Patient monitors (bedside and telemetry) can be assigned to different Bed Labels by the
user; these re-assignments are made in Sector Setup.
Unit
Identifies the name of the clinical Unit where the patient monitors for the device selected in
Central Station are located (Read Only)
Monitor/Overview Beds
Bed Label
Label assigned to the patient bed where the monitoring equipment is located. An icon to the left
of the number indicates whether the monitor is a hardwired, telemetry or wireless unit.
Unit
Name of the clinical Unit where the patient monitor is located.
Equipment /Monitor
Label
Label assigned to the monitoring equipment
Notes
6-84
For hardwired monitors, Bed Label and Equipment Label are the same.
For telemetry monitors, Bed Label and Equipment Label are different.
For IntelliVue Patient monitors, Bed Label and Monitor Label are different.
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-32: Bed Config Screen Configuration Options
Setting/Selection
Description
Monitor/Overview Beds (continued
Equipment Type
Specifies the monitoring equipment type
• Telemetry monitor that can be assigned to patients from different beds
• IntelliVue patient monitor
Monitored by
Identifies the Information Center that is monitoring the device
Sector
Number of the Patient Sector on the Main Screen where the patient monitoring data is displayed.
Warning
If the number of Sectors is decreased while beds are assigned to them, a ? appears in the
Sector column for the displaced beds. A warning states that the displaced beds will not be
monitored or overviewed unless you re-assign them to valid Patient Sectors.
Paired Equipment
Shows paired equipment
Assign
Permits assignment of Bed to Information Center Patient Sector
• Click the Assign button.
The Resting Display screen appears (Figure ).
Unassign
Permits removal of Bed assignment from Information Center Patient Sector
1. Click the desired Bed Label in the Monitor/Overview Beds section of the screen.
2. Click the Unassign button.
Note Show Alarm Limit checkbox is automatically cleared if you select 8 rows and 1
Column. Show Alarm Limits checkbox is automatically cleared if you select 8 rows
and more than 1 Wave per Sector because there is not sufficient display space for
Heart Rate alarm limits.
Show Alarm Limits is disabled for M3/M4 patient monitors because these monitors
do not display alarm limits.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-85
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Assigning Beds
to Patient
Sectors
The Resting Display screen (Figure 6-49) permits assignment of beds to the
Information Center Patient Sectors. When you click the Assign button on the Bed
Config screen, the Resting Display screen opens.
Figure 6-49: Resting Display Screen
Table 6-33: Resting Display Screen Settings
Setting/Selection
Note
Description
If the Dual Resting Display option is selected, the Resting Display screen shows the Patient
Sectors for Display 1 and Display 2.
Display 1 Patient Sectors are green.
Display 2 Patient Sectors are magenta.
Available beds
Lists the Beds and clinical Units that are associated with patient monitors, but are not
assigned to a Patient Sector.
• For IntelliVue Information Centers that monitor M3/M4/IntelliVue bedsides, Available
beds are those associated with these monitors in Equipment Setup, but that are not
presently monitored by any Information Center.
• For IntelliVue Information Centers that monitor M3/M4/IntelliVue bedsides, Available
beds are those associated with both X2/MP5/M3/M4/IntelliVue bedsides in
Equipment Setup, but that are not being monitored by any Information Center.
• For Clients, Available beds are those being monitored by an Information Center but are
not assigned to a Patient Sector on this Client.
6-86
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-33: Resting Display Screen Settings
Setting/Selection
Description
• For Patient Link: If there are 12 or less beds configured, only one default CareGroup
(#1 Olive) is created, and all Available beds are assigned to this CareGroup. If there are
16 beds configured, two CareGroups (#1 Olive and #2 Teal) are created. In this
configuration, beds assigned to sectors 1 - 8 are assigned to CareGroup #1 and beds
assigned to sectors
9 - 16 are assigned to CareGroup #2. The default attributes of the CareGroup(s) are
auto-alarm notification = Red Alarms and Overview prompt sound = enabled.
Notes
If you try to change a sector assignment when all Patient Sectors are assigned, a message
displays:
There are no unassigned sectors left. Please increase the number of sectors if possible, or
unassign a sector.
When you move the cursor over a Patient Sector with no bed assigned, the cursor displays
as a single bed icon. When you move the cursor over a Patient Sector with a bed already
assigned, the cursor displays as a 2-bed icon.
If a Bed label is replaced it will re-appear in the Available beds list.
To assign a bed to a Patient Sector:
1. Click a Bed label in the Available beds list.
2. Move the cursor to the desired Patient Sector and click.
The Bed label will display in that Sector.
To remove a bed from a Patient Sector:
1. Click the Unassign icon.
2. Move the cursor to the Patient Sector where the Bed is to be removed and click.
The Bed label is removed from the Patient Sector and appears in the Available beds
list.
When the Unassign cursor moves over a Patient Sector with no bed, it shows a circle with a
slash. When the Unassign cursor moves over a Patient Sector with a bed assigned to it,
the Unassign icon displays.
OK
When you click OK in the Resting Display screen, bed assignment changes are stored and
the Bed Config screen shows the new Sector assignments in the Monitor/Overview Beds
section.
Cancel
When you click Cancel, the Bed Config screen returns with no changes.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-87
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Report Settings
The Report Settings screen (Figure 6-50) permits configuring printed report layout.
Figure 6-50: Config Wizard: Report Settings Screen
Table 6-34: Report Settings Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description
General Settings
Hospital Logo
Permits defining the location of the bitmap (.bmp) file that identifies the hospital and can appear
on reports.
Enter Location (*.bmp only):
Browse
Addressograph
Permits defining the dimensions of the bitmap. There are no maximum/minimum limits; the
typical size of an addressograph is 30 mm x 70 mm.
Height: (mm)
Width: (mm)
Report Settings
Report Type
Lists the names of each of the report types
You can uniquely configure each report type. The report types are:
• Alarm Report
• Custom Report
• Event Report
• Event Summary Report
• Fast Alarm Report
• ST Report
• Trend Report
• Twelve Lead Report
• Unit Report
• Wave Report
Defaults
Assigns default values to settings
6-88
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Table 6-34: Report Settings Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description
Customize Fields
Permits defining additional customized text fields that can be printed in the Report header or
footer
When you click Configure, the Field Setup screen opens.
• New Field opens Field Properties dialog that permits entering Field Name and Field Entry.
• Delete Field permits removing a field.
• Edit Field permits changing the field properties.
• Close
Page Layout
• Portrait
• Landscape
Adjust Margins
Permits setting Top, Bottom, Left, and Right margins
There are no maximum or minimum limits. The margins are measured from the printer defined
area, not the paper edges. The printer defined area is printed on the test page.
If you are using 3-hole punched paper, use 25 mm for the Left margin.
Header
Permits selecting the information that is printed in the Report header and footer.
• -None• Addressograph
• Bitmap
• Patient Name (header default)a
• Lifetime Id
• Bed Label (header default)
• Page Number (footer default)
• Unit Name (footer default)
• Hospital Name (footer default, 30 character max)
• Report Name
• Print Date & Time
• Encounter Id
• Alternative Id
Footer
Store Settings
Permits storing configured settings
Test Print
Permits printing a test page if a default printer is configured
a. Patient Name format is Last Name, First Name, Middle Name.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-89
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Security Access
The Security Access screen (Figure 6-51) permits setting read/write access to
patient data and control settings on IntelliVue Information Centers by other
IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients on the network.
Figure 6-51: Config Wizard: Security Access Screen
Table 6-35: Security Access Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description
View access rights to the patient data and patient
settings of:
Permits selecting the device you want to see the access right of
from the drop-down list
• Click the arrow, then select a device from the list.
Local Device Name
Identifies the Information Center that is being viewed
Set Access To
No Access
Prevents other Information Centers or Clients from viewing or
changing patient data or monitoring settings.
Read Only
Permits other Information Centers or Clients to view patient data
but not change monitoring settings
(Default for Information Centers in different unit)
Full Control
Permits another Information Center or Client to view patient
data, change monitoring settings, and silence alarms
(Default for Information Centers in same unit)
Note
Caution
6-90
Access rights to patient data and control settings can be changed only on the Information Center that
monitors the patient.
Any IntelliVue Information Center or Client whose Security Access rights have been changed
must be restarted in order for the new access rights to take effect.
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Report and Recording Destination
The Report and Recording Destination screen (Figure 6-52) permits a networked
IntelliVue Information Center or Client to configure a set of reports to be printed at a
selected printer. It also permits connection with an IIC-attached 2-Channel
Recorder. You can access the Report and Recording Destination screen through the
Service menu.
Figure 6-52: Config Wizard: Report and Recording Destination Screen
Note Sharing of recorders is only available for IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients
on the IntelliVue Clinical Network. Four Information Centers or Clients (maximum)
can use the same Recorder.
If you will be printing reports from the bedside, the maximum number of characters
allowed for a printer name is 24.
Table 6-36: Report and Recording Destination Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description
Report Destination
Report Type
Lists the possible report types that can be assigned to a printer
• Click a report in the list to select it.
Print Manager
Opens Windows Print Manager dialog and permits adding and configuring local, shared, or
network printers.
Note: If you will be printing reports from the bedside, the maximum number of characters allowed
for a printer name is 24.
Print Manager uses the Windows Print Service to accommodate adding and sharing monitoring
network and locally connected printers (page 6-93).
Refresh Printers
Updates Printer list
Printer
Permits selection of the configured and shared printers
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-91
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-36: Report and Recording Destination Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description
Default
Permits selecting a default printer
• To set a printer as the default, select it from the Printer list and click the Default check box.
Add All =>
Permits adding all the reports listed in the Report Type section to the list that will print out at the
selected printer
The button is dimmed if there are no reports to be configured.
Add->
Permits adding the reports selected in the Report Type section to the list that will print out at the
selected printer
The button is dimmed if there are no reports to be configured.
<-Remove
Permits removing reports selected from the list that will print at the selected printer
The button is dimmed if there are no reports in the printer list.
<=Remove All
Permits removing all reports listed
The button is dimmed if there are no reports in the list.
Recording Destination
2-Channel Recorder
Recorder
Attacheda,b
Permits selecting a local 2-Channel Recorder
The recorder destination will only clear if the destination is set to the current device.
The recorder destination is not changed if set to another device. If no destination is selected, the
default destination is the current device.
Destination
Permits selecting the Information Center that the recorder is attached to from a list
Recorder Speed
(mm/s)
Permits selecting the recorder speed
6.25
25 (Default)
50
Pre-Event (seconds)
Specifies how many seconds of wave data to print before the recording is initiated
4 - 20 (Default is 10)
Post-Event
(seconds)
Specifies how many seconds of wave data to print after the recording is initiated
2 - 20 (Default is 2)
a. If you attempt to change the type of Recorder Attached and other Information Centers/Clients have
this system selected as the recording destination, a warning appears. These systems must select
another recording destination before you can make the change.
b. This setting is only active on the Config Wizard Report and Recording Destination page.
Note If you want to change the 2-Channel recording destination in a network
environment, click the Recorder Attached check box next to the desired selection.
You must also select a new Destination IntelliVue Information Center.
6-92
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Adding
Monitoring LAN
Printers at the
IIC
To add monitoring LAN printers at the PIIC:
1. On the IntelliVue Information Center Config Wizard Report and Recording
Destination screen, click the Print manager button to open the Devices and
Printers window.
2. Double-click Add a printer at the top of the window.
The Add Printer dialog appears.
3. Select Add a local printer, and click Next >.
4. In the Choose a printer port screen select, the Create a new port option, and
select Standard TCP/IP Port in the Type of port drop-down list. Then click Next >.
Before you enter the Printer Name or IP Address, the desired printer must be
connected to the network switch and configured with a TCP/IP Address for the
Monitoring LAN. If necessary refer to Printer Manufacturer documentation for
setting an IP Address at the printer.
5. Enter the printer IP Address in the Host Name or IP Address text box. The Port
Name text box automatically populates.
Un-check the Query the printer and automatically select the driver to use
checkbox.
Then Click Next >.
If you see the Additional Port Information Required screen, the printer is offline
or not configured correctly.
6. In the Install Printer Software screen, select HP as the printer Manufacturer,
and HP Universal Printing PCL 5 on the Printers list. Then click Next >.
All Philips-supplied printers are compatible with the HP Universal Printing PCL 5
Driver.
7. In the Use Existing Driver screen, do not select Replace Existing Driver. Then
click Next >.
8. In the Name Your Printer screen, enter the desired name in the text box. Then
select the desired option (Yes or No) for the Do you want to use this printer as
the default printer setting. Click Next > to continue.
Note If you will be printing reports from the bedside, the maximum number of characters
allowed for a printer name is 24.
9. In the Printer Sharing screen, do not share the printer. Then click Next > to
continue.
10. In the Location and Comment screen, enter descriptive information in the
Location and Comment text boxes. Then click Next >.
11. In the Print Test Page screen, click Yes if you want to print a test page. Then click
Next >.
12. Review the printer information in the Completing the Add Printer Wizard screen
and click Finish.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-93
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
If you chose to print a test page, a dialog opens. If the page printed correctly,
click Yes in the dialog. If the page did not print correctly, click Troubleshoot.
13. Refer to Setting Printer Attributes to configure printer settings.
Adding a Local
Printer
Attached to a
IIC
The most common way to install a printer is to connect it directly to your PIIC
computer. This is known as a local printer.
If your printer is a universal serial bus (USB) model, Windows should automatically
detect it and begin installation when you plug it in.
To add a local printer attached to a IIC:
1. While printer power is off, connect the printer USB cable to the appropriate port
on your IIC. Then turn on the printer.
Be sure to use the correct PIIC USB Ports for your hardware (see Chapter 2).
2. On the IntelliVue Information Center Config Wizard Report and Recording
Destination page, click the Refresh Printers button.
The new local printer appears in the Printer list.
3. Click the Print manager button to open the Devices and Printers window.
The local printer icon appears in the window.
Setting Printer
Attributes
To set printer attributes:
1. On the IntelliVue Information Center Config Wizard Report and Recording
Destination screen, click the Print manager button to open the Devices and
Printers window.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Properties from the list.
3. In the Properties dialog, select the Advanced tab and check the following
settings.
a) Be sure the that HP Universal Printing PCL 5 driver appears in the Driver text
box.
b) Select the Start printer after last page is spooled option.
4. If desired, change the printer name by opening the General tab and entering the
new name in the text box. Then click OK.
5. Go to the Properties sheet Sharing tab to share the printer.
Select the Share this printer option then enter the desired name in the Share
name text box.
6. In the Properties dialog, open the Device Settings tab. In the Installable Options
section be sure that the Printer Status Notification setting is Disabled. Click
Apply, then click OK.
7. Click OK to close the Properties sheet.
8. Close the devices and Printers window.
9. Click Next > on the Report and Recording Destination screen, then click Finish
on the final Config Wizard screen.
6-94
Completing the Config Wizard Screens
Date and Time Setup
Figure 6-53 shows an example of the Date and Time Setup screen.
Figure 6-53: Config Wizard: Report and Recording Destination Screen
Table 6-37 describes the Date and Time Setup screen selections.
Table 6-37: Time and Date Setup Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description
Date: (MDY)
Sets the current Month, Date, and Year
• Click the selection box click the arrows to increase or decrease the value.
Time:(H:mm)
Sets the current Hour (HH) and minute (mm)
• Click the selection box click the arrows to increase or decrease the value.
Time Zone Information
Time Zone
Permits setting the correct Time Zone for the system location
• Click the down arrow to show the list of Time Zones.
• Select the desired Time Zone from the list.
Automatically Adjust For
Daylight Savings Time
Determines if time will automatically adjust for changes to or from Daylight Savings
• Click the check box to activate automatic Daylight Savings Time change.
Store Settings
Activated only if the Date and Time Setup screen is accessed from the Service screen
Configuration menu (Set Time/Date)
When you open the Date and Time Setup screen from the Service screen
Configuration menu, you must click the Store Settings button to store the new
settings.
Note In some languages, Time Zone will not automatically adjust for daylight savings
correctly. If this is the case you can manually reset the Time Zone.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-95
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Creating an Archive
The Archive screen permits saving an archive file to removable media.
Figure 6-54: Config Wizard: Archive Screen
Note With Release N.01, your printer configuration will not be archived, so be sure to
save and restore your local printer configuration using the Microsoft Windows
Printer Migration Wizard or equivalent.
To create an archive of the PIIC configuration settings:
1. Put the archive media in the appropriate PIIC device drive/port.
2. Click the Browse button to open a file window, then select the location to which
you want to save the archive.
3. Click Start Archiving.
4. Store the Archive in a safe place
Finishing Config Wizard
The last Config Wizard screen for the IntelliVue Information Center type includes a
Finish button.
When the final Config Wizard screen appears, click Finish.
The following message appears:
Important!
Always run System Validation tool after configuring the system to verify system
operation. Navigate to Service Menu and select Other Services > System
Validation.
Set up and configuration of the IntelliVue Information or Center or Client additionally
requires that you conduct Overview procedures in Network-connected and local
mode.
6-96
Viewing and Printing the Report Configuration File
Viewing and Printing the Report Configuration File
When Config Wizard is complete, the current configuration is saved in an html file in
the \Logs directory. For Database Server systems, the file is saved on the Database
Server only. The name of file is begins with server's host name on a network system
or with the standalone system host name, e.g. DBSICUConfiguration.html. The
Database server’s configuration displays first and is followed by each Information
Center and Information Center Client configuration. The Report Configuration File
function is disabled in Local Mode.
You can view and print the configuration file with Windows Explorer or Internet
Explorer; you can also save it to another location.
If you want to view and print the configuration file from the IntelliVue Information
Center Service screen, go to Configuration > Save/View Configuration. All service
settings are included; Unit Settings are not included.
Using MininConfig
The M3140 IntelliVue Information Center is shipped with the necessary Operating
System and Application software installed and configured. At start up the system
presents the IntelliVue Information Center Resting Display.
MiniConfig permits on-site configuration of items that cannot be automatically set
with plug and play. MiniConfig uses known system information to populate required
fields. It is password protected (requiring Biomed Password or Philips Service User
Password) and runs in Non-monitoring mode only.
To access the MiniConfig screen, select Configuration > !MiniConfig from the
Service screen. The MiniConfig screen appears as show in Figure 6-55.
Figure 6-55: Config Wizard: Report and Recording Destination Screen
Table 6-53 describes the MiniConfig screen settings.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-97
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-38: MiniConfig Screen Selections
Button/Selection
Permitted Setting
Default
Display Size
270 - 1188 mm
(15 - 27 in)
306 mm
Institution Name
Permits text entry of
Hospital name
(30 character max)
Blank
Clinical Unit
Permits text entry of Clinical
Unit
Clinical Unit
Bed Label
• Add
• Remove
Action/Notes
• Enter the desired setting.
• Enter the desired text.
bed1 - bed50
To remove a Bed Label:
1. Select the desired Bed Label
from the list.
2. Click the Remove button.
The bed label disappears from
the list.
To add a Bed Label:
1. Click the Add button.
The Add Bed Label(s) dialog box
opens.
2. Enter the new Prefix, Start with
Index, Number of Labels, and
click OK.
The new Bed labels appear in the
list. There is a 50-bed maximum.
6-98
Using MininConfig
Table 6-38: MiniConfig Screen Selections
Button/Selection
Permitted Setting
Default
Hemodynamic Pressure
• mmHg
• KpA
mmHg
Gas Pressures
• mmHg
• KpA
mmHg
Weight Units
• Kg
• Lbs
Kg
Height Units
• Cm
• Ins
Cm
Patient Type
• Adult
• Pediatric
• Neonate
Adult
Alarm Sounds
• Carenet
• IEC
Carenet
Display Patient Name
Enable/Disable
Enabled
Patient Name
Permits entering /not entering patient name
• Last Name, First Name
• Blank
Action/Notes
• Click the option button next to
the desired selection.
Sector Design
• Click the checkbox to enable.
• To disable, click the checkbox
again to remove the check.
• Click the down arrow next to the
text box to show the patient
name display formats and select
the desired format.
802.11 Wireless
IEEE Mode
• A (5 GHz)
• G (2.4 GHz)
A
• Click the down arrow next to the
text box to display the selections.
• Click the desired selection.
Changes to this selection require the
Wireless Password.
Password
Permits entering password
• Enter the Wireless Password.
• Click Save Changes and Exit to accept the changes or Cancel.
Figure 6-39 shows the default settings that populate the Config Wizard pages for
the M3140.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-99
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-39: M3140 Config Wizard Screen Settings
CONFIG WIZARD Screen/Settings
Default
Notes /Selections
Restore From Archive
Permits restoration of Archive data
Software Versions and Security Updates
Screen also available in Service mode
Purchased Options
HostName
PC machine name
Device Name
Default name PhillipsIIC
assigned in Manufacturing
LAN IP address
172.31.3.0
Subnet Mask
255.255.248.0
Gateway
172.31.0.1
System Serial Number
Pre-assigned
Unique factory -assigned
number
# of Displays
1
Supports single display only
Visible Display Width
306 mm
270 - 1188 mm
(15 - 27 in)
# of ICs
1
# of Patients
16
Wave Storage
72
Alarm Storage
50
EASI Wave Storage
Unavailable
Web Serving, ADI, 12-Lead, Holter, Device
Location
Unavailable
HL-7
Disabled
Device Serial Number
Database General Configuration Settings
Multi Lead ECG Layout
International
Layout
3x4
Speed
25 mm/sec
Web Section
Unavailable
Wave Strip Export
Unavailable
6-100
16 maximum (can be less)
50 maximum supported
If HL7 is required, enable Purchased Option and configure
HL7 in Config Wizard.
Using MininConfig
Table 6-39: M3140 Config Wizard Screen Settings
CONFIG WIZARD Screen/Settings
Hemodynamic Pressure
Default
Notes /Selections
mmHg
• mmHg
• KpA
Weight Units
Kg
• Kg
• Lbs
Height Units
Cm
• Cm
• Ins
12 Lead Export Section
Unavailable
Gas Pressures
Local General Config Settings
Patient Type
Adult
All Arrhythmia Alarms Off (Tele Only)
Disabled
No Data From Bed Inop - Alerting
No Sound
Arrhythmia Capability (ITS Only)
Basic
Screen Notes
Yes
• Yes
• No
Record Button
Record
• Record
• Save
• Both
Alarm Sounds / Alarm Text
Carenet
• Carenet
• IEC
Silence Bed At Central
Yes
• Yes
• No
Standby Messages
Click Sector For Recording
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cathlab
Hemodialysis
Orthopedics
Pulmonary
X-Ray
Other
• Adult
• Pediatric
• Neonate
Enhanced not supported
Default List
Enabled
Network Configuration
Clinical Units
Clinical Unit
List of Networked Centrals and Clients
Unavailable
Does not support clients
Single IntelliVue 802.11 thick AP
172.31.1.128
Fixed IP Address
Network Scan Tool
Smart-hopping 1.4 or 2.4GHz AP
172.31.2.128 through
172.31.2.255
Configurable on site
List of network Devices
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-101
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Table 6-39: M3140 Config Wizard Screen Settings
CONFIG WIZARD Screen/Settings
Default
AP1, AP2, AP3, AP4, AP5 IP Addresses
Notes /Selections
Network Scan Tool supports
DHCP assignment of IP
Addresses.
APC (Single)
172.31.1.1
Specify default IP Address.
M3140 does not limit to a
single APC.
RF Access Code
1
Configured in the APC as
Default
HL-7
Requires enabling of HL7 Purchased Option and configuration of second NIC TCP/IP
setting
Network Switch
172.31.0.10
SNTP Time Source
Yes
Requires configuration of
SNTP Host Name and
second NIC TCP/IP setting
Monitor IP Address Range
Start 172.31.4.0
End: 172.31.4.255
Sequential assignment
Display Setup
Display Patient Name
Enabled
Sweep Speed
25
Color Schema List Controls
As defaulted
Sector Layout (Dual Column)
16 beds = 8 x 2
12 beds = 6 x 2
8 beds = 8 x 1
6 beds = 6 x 1
4 beds = 4 x 1
Layout depends on number
of beds purchased
Bed Labels
bed1 - bed50
Default text can be edited
with Mini config Wizard or
Config wizard.
Monitor Labels
101 - 116
Defaults can only be edited
with Config Wizard.
Tele Labels
01 - 16
Defaults can only be edited
with Config Wizard.
HL-7 Button
Selectable
HL-7 ready
In order to be operational,
added services must be
purchased.
Pairing / Un-pairing
Unavailable
Equipment Setup
6-102
Assigning Equipment Labels
Table 6-39: M3140 Config Wizard Screen Settings
CONFIG WIZARD Screen/Settings
Default
Notes /Selections
Bed Config
Fast Alarm Display
Disabled
#Sectors
16 Max
Show Alarm Limits
Enabled
Monitored Beds list control
Derived from Purchase
Options
Derived from Purchase
Options
Report and Recording Destination
Printer Selection Pull-down
Lists shared printers
Report Destination Section
Disabled
2-Channel Recorders
USB
Report Types not supported
Archive
Permits auto archive before exiting configuration
Assigning Equipment Labels
The Label Assignment feature is password protected. It permits you to automatically
or manually assign equipment labels to patient monitors and manually assign
equipment labels to telemetry devices.
The network switch must be installed and operating in order to use the Label
Assignment feature. The Label Assignment feature is available in all IntelliVue
Information Center models. For details about using the Label Assignment feature
with an M3140 Information Center, refer to the M3140 IIC IntelliVue Clinical
Network Quick Installation Guide.
To access the Label Assignment screen:
1. From the Resting Display click the Patient Window button at the bottom of a
patient sector.
As you move the mouse cursor across the patient sector, the button appears.
2. Go to All Controls > Label Assignment.
The Label Assignment password dialog box opens prompting you for a
password.
3. Type the Label Assignment Password (tele) in the text entry box.
The Label Assignment screen (Figure 6-56) opens.
The Label Assignment controls are available in English only.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-103
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Figure 6-56: Label Assignment Screen
Note HeartStart MRx monitor/defibrillators do not support the Label Assignment feature
Re-assigning an
Assigned Label
Equipment labels already assigned to devices appear in the Label Assignment
screen Equipment Labels section under Assigned Labels. If a monitoring device is
removed from service for any reason, the equipment label can be re-assigned to a
new device. If you want to use a pre-assigned label for a new device, select the MAC
Address of the new device, then select an equipment label from the Assigned
Labels list.
Table 6-40: Label Assignment Screen Selections
Section/Selection
Description
New Devices
Lists MAC Addresses of new devices that are powered on
Equipment Labels
Lists Unassigned and Assigned Labels
Labeled Devices
Lists MAC Address and Equipment Label for Assigned Labels
Options
Permits selection of device type
•
•
6-104
Telemetry
Monitor
Refresh
Updates the screen
Assign Label
Permits assignment of Equipment Label to device
Reset Label
Permits removal of Equipment Label from device
Auto Assign
Permits automatic assignment of equipment labels to patient monitors
Status
Displays the status of the most recent operation
The status displays for 3 seconds.
Assigning Equipment Labels
Manually
Assigning a
Monitor
Equipment
Label
To assign an equipment label for a bedside monitor:
1. Power on the bedside monitor.
2. At the IntelliVue Information Center Resting Display, select Patient Window or
Sector Setup.
3. Select All Controls > Label Assignment.
The Label Assignment password dialog box opens.
4. Enter the password in the dialog box, and press Enter.
The Label Assignment screen displays.
5. Select Monitor in the Options section of the Label Assignment screen by clicking
the adjacent option button.
6. Select a device in the New Devices list, and click a label (that is Unassigned)
from the Equipment Labels list. Then select the MAC Address of the device in
the New Devices list
7. Click Assign Label to map the new Equipment Label to the device.
When the label assignment is complete, the assignment is verified in the Status
field and the device MAC Address and Equipment Label appears in the Labeled
Devices list.
Manually
Removing a
Monitor
Equipment
Label
To manually remove a monitor equipment label:
1. Power on the bedside monitor.
2. At the IntelliVue Information Center Resting Display, select Patient Window or
Sector Setup.
3. Select All Controls > Label Assignment.
The Label Assignment password dialog box opens.
4. Enter the password in the dialog box, and press Enter.
The Label Assignment screen displays.
5. Select Monitor in the Options section of the Label Assignment screen by clicking
the adjacent option button.
6. From the IntelliVue Information Center Resting Display, verify that the monitoring
device waveforms display in the appropriate Patient Sector.
7. If you want to clear the monitor label from an existing labeled bedside, select
the desired device in the Labeled Devices list and then click Reset Label.
The device is removed from the Labeled Devices list and its MAC Address
displays in the New Devices list.
If you try to clear the monitor label from a monitor that is currently being
monitored by an IntelliVue Information Center, a message reports it and
requests confirmation to continue.
If you want to rename the default bed label for a specific sector see details in
the Equipment Setup screen (page 6-67).
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-105
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
Manually
Assigning a
Telemetry
Equipment
Label
To assign an equipment label for a telemetry device:
1. Refer to Philips IntelliVue Telemetry System Installation and Service Manual for
detailed instructions about transceiver configuration.
2. At the IntelliVue Information Center Resting Display, select Patient Window or
Sector Setup.
3. Select All Controls > Label Assignment.
4. Enter the password in the Label Assignment password dialog, and press Enter.
5. Select Telemetry in the Options section of the Label Assignment screen by
clicking the adjacent option button.
6. Remove lead set from the telemetry device and insert batteries.
The device LEDs flash and the New Device sound beeps continuously.
7. When the MAC Address of the detected telemetry device displays in the New
Devices list, verify that it matches the address in the transceiver battery
compartment.
8. Select the MAC Address in the New Devices list, then click a label (that is
Unassigned) from the Equipment Labels list.
9. Click Assign Label to initiate programming of the Equipment Label into the
telemetry device. Then, within 10 seconds press the transceiver Check button.
The transceiver resets. When the label assignment is complete, the assignment
is verified in the Status field and the device MAC Address and Equipment Label
appear in the Labeled Devices list.
If more than 10 seconds pass before you press the transceiver Check button,
you must repeat the process.
Manually
Removing a
Telemetry
Equipment
Label
To manually remove a telemetry equipment label:
1. At the IntelliVue Information Center Resting Display, select Patient Window or
Sector Setup.
2. Select All Controls > Label Assignment.
The Label Assignment password dialog box opens.
3. Enter the password in the dialog, and press Enter.
The Label Assignment screen displays.
4. Select Telemetry in the Options section of the Label Assignment screen by
clicking the adjacent option button.
5. Remove lead set from the telemetry device and insert batteries.
6. The device LEDs flash and the New Device sound beeps continuously.
7. If you want to clear the equipment label from an existing labeled telemetry
device, be sure that the device is not assigned for monitoring. Then remove the
device lead set.
8. Select the desired device in the Labeled Devices list, and then click Reset
Label.
9. The device is removed from the Labeled Devices list and its MAC Address
displays in the New Devices list.
6-106
Activating the Database Server
If you try to clear the monitor label from a monitor that is being monitored by an
Information Center currently, a message reports it and requests confirmation to
continue.
Automatically
Assigning an
Equipment
Label
(Alternative)
If you want to control which sector a bedside monitor displays in, you must be sure
to shut off all the monitors before you begin the automatic label assignment
process, otherwise, labels will be assigned on a first come, first serve basis.
Telemetry bedsides are assigned first, followed by bedside monitors.
To automatically assign equipment labels:
1. Be sure the bedside monitors are powered off.
2. At the IntelliVue Information Center Resting Display, select Patient Window or
Sector Setup.
3. Select All Controls > Label Assignment.
The Label Assignment password dialog box opens.
4. Enter the password and press Enter.
The Label Assignment screen displays.
5. Click the option button next to Monitor in the Options section of the screen.
6. Click Auto Assign.
The bedside monitor is automatically assigned the first Unassigned Equipment
Label. The new label replaces the bedside monitor label in the upper right hand
corner of the bedside display.
7. Record the monitor label on all required hospital documentation.
8. Repeat Step 7 for each patient monitor in the order that you want the
equipment labels assigned.
9. From the IntelliVue Information Center Resting Display, verify that the monitoring
device waveforms display in the appropriate Patient Sector.
Activating the Database Server
When all Server configuration settings are complete you must shut down and
restart the Server.
Note The Server must be in Operating Mode in order to configure Network-connected
Information Centers and Clients.
To activate the Database Server:
1. From the Database Server Windows task bar go to Start > Shut Down to open
the Shut Down screen.
2. Select Restart the Computer from the list, and click Yes.
If the system has the Web Access option, hospital IT broadcast messages may
appear on the Server’s Main Screen. These messages do not affect system
operation.
3. When the Server restarts, the Service Password screen (Figure 6-57) appears.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-107
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
If the Service screen does not appear after two minutes and the IICs and clients
are in Monitoring Mode, go to Start > Run > Servershell from the Windows task
bar to manually open the Service Password screen.
Figure 6-57: Service Password Screen
4. Enter the Philips provided Service Password in the Enter Service Password text
box using the physical or on-screen keyboard.
You can change the password from the Service screen using Configuration >
Change Service User Password. Your service password should only be provided
to support personnel assigned to service the Philips system.
Table 6-41 describes the Database Server Service screen selections.
Table 6-41: Database Server Service Screen Selections
Setting/Selection
Description
Main Screen
Returns to the Service Password screen
Enter Config Mode
Opens a WARNING (page 6-12)
If you click Yes in the warning dialog box all Information Centers and Clients on the Network
restart and go into Local Mode and the Server stops storing patient data.
Network Information Centers and Clients - Status Indicators
OFF-LINE
Device is off, in Desktop, Start-up, or has a faulty network connection.
When the Server is being configured, all devices are shown as OFF-LINE
MONITORING
Device is connected to the Server and in Monitoring Mode.
SERVICE
Device is connected to the Server and in Service mode.
LOCAL MON
Device is in Monitoring Mode and storing a limited set of data locally, not on the Server.
LOCAL SVC
Device is not accessing the Server and is in Service mode.
6-108
Activating the Network/Server System
Activating the Network/Server System
When all IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients are configured, the complete
system can be activated.
To activate the network/server system:
1. Reconnect the Network cables of all Information Centers and Clients on the
Network.
2. Configure Unit Settings for all IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients on the
Network.
Unit Settings must be configured after the Network connection is made. If
clinical Unit Settings are configured when the IntelliVue Information Center or
Client is in Local Database Mode, they will be lost when the device reconnects
to the Network.
3. When Product Assurance Tests are complete, open the Database Server Service
screen.
4.
Go to Configuration > Archive and archive system configuration settings.
5. Return to the Service screen, and go to Configuration > Save/View
Configuration.
6.
Print the configuration settings for all devices on the Network.
When the Database Server restarts, the Network/Server system will be in
operating mode.
If three or more Database Servers are connected, each Database Server must
restart the IIS Service.
7. Open the Service screen, and go to Maintenance > Restart IIS Service.
8. If you choose to skip this step, patient data may not be visible across all
Database Servers using the Web Access feature.
or
If two or more Database Servers are connected and participating in the Device
Pool, replicate the equipment labels across all servers.
Open the Service screen, and go to Configuration > Device Pool Configuration >
Replicate.
After you enter and/or change configuration settings, run the System Validation
program (page 7-56) to ensure that all configuration parameters are set
properly.
Restart IIS Admin Service must be run after all Database Servers are configured
and in monitoring mode. Running this utility does not cause the Database Servers
and connected Information Centers and Clients to go into Local Database Mode.
Once the software installation and configuration process is complete the Network/
Server system can be used for patient monitoring by all patient monitors connected
to the Network. Patient data is stored on the Database Server and all patient data
review applications are fully operational.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
6-109
Chapter 6: Software Installation and Configuration
6-110
7
Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
This chapter describes maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair
procedures for the Philips IntelliVue Information Center system and
includes:
• Performing Preventive Maintenance
• Troubleshooting Procedures
• Troubleshooting Strategy
• Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
• Using HL7 Troubleshooting Tools
• LED Diagnostics
• Performing Corrective Actions
• Restoring Large DataBase Server RAID Configurations
• Updating the BIOS
• Configuring BIOS Settings
• Using the Japanese Keyboard
• Using Antivirus Software
• Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
• Replaceable Parts
Note
For the complete maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair procedures for
a particular PIIC system device, refer the service documentation supplied
by the device vendor.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-1
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Performing Preventive Maintenance
The PIIC system is designed to provide a robust and reliable central monitoring
network, needing minimal maintenance and having few failures requiring
troubleshooting or repair. As with all complex multi-device systems, problems can
occur. The failure of any one of the system’s components can cause down time and
disruption to patient monitoring.
The IntelliVue Information Center system equipment should be kept clean and dry,
and maintained within environmental specifications. There are also several routine
maintenance procedures that should be followed at regular intervals.
Surface Cleaning IntelliVue Information Center System Components
The exterior surfaces of IntelliVue Information Center system components should be
free of dust, lint, and dirt. To clean equipment surfaces, use a lint-free cloth or
sponge moistened with soap and water or dilute, non-caustic, detergent solution.
For comprehensive details about cleaning agents and their efficacy, refer to the
NIOSH Safety and Health Topic Page for Health Care Workers. It is available at:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/healthcare/
A searchable bibliographic database of occupational safety and health
publications, documents, abstracts, grant reports, and journal articles
supported in whole or in part by NIOSH is available at:
http://www2a.cdc.gov/nioshtic-2/3
Caution To avoid damage to the equipment:
Do NOT use abrasive material, such as steel wool or silver polish.
Do NOT use Povodine, Sagrotan, or Mucocit cleaning agents or strong solvents,
such as acetone.
Do NOT submerge any part of the equipment in water or other liquid.
Do NOT pour liquid onto the system during cleaning.
Do NOT allow liquid to enter the equipment case.
Do NOT allow any cleaner to remain on any of the equipment surfaces, wipe it off
immediately.
Cleaning the Touch Screen
If your system includes a touch screen display, clean the screen as follows.
1. From the Windows desktop, open Control Panel and double-click the ELO icon.
7-2
Performing Preventive Maintenance
The ELO Touchscreen Properties dialog appears.
Figure 7-1: ELO Touchscreen Properties Dialog
2. In the Elo Touchscreen Properties dialog, select the Properties 1 or Properties 2
tab and then click Advanced.
Figure 7-2: Disabling the ELO Touchscreen
3. In the Options section of the dialog, click the Disable touch check box and then
click Ok in the Elo Touchscreen Properties dialog.
Verify that touch is disabled by touching the screen.
4. After you clean the Display, repeat Step 1 through 2 and then clear the Disable
touch checkbox to turn on touch.
Verify that touch is enabled by touching the screen.
Performing Routine Maintenance
For most components, recommended maintenance is described in the vendor
Service Manuals provided with the equipment. Refer to those documents for
maintenance procedures and frequencies to assure reliable, trouble-free operation
of the equipment.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-3
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Note All Preventive Maintenance is the responsibility of the user.
Recommended frequency is every six months, or mor frequently in harsh
environments.
Clearing Air
Intakes
Replacing UPS
Batteries
Fans used to cool electronic devices can develop dust build-up in air intake areas.
This build-up must be removed to assure proper cooling and circuit operation.
Workstation and server air intakes should be checked regularly and dust buildup
removed.
The UPS contains no serviceable parts except the battery and should not be opened
by hospital personnel because it contains potentially hazardous voltages that can
be dangerous to unskilled persons.
Warning Do not attempt to disassemble the UPS. It contains no serviceable parts except the
battery, and interior voltages can be hazardous. Repair should be performed by
factory trained service personnel only.
To assure dependable UPS performance, regular replacement of UPS batteries is
recommended.
• For ambient temperature normally below 25oC (77oF), UPS batteries should be
replaced every three years.
• For ambient temperatures regularly above 25oC (77oF), UPS batteries should be
replaced every two years.
Purchase of spare batteries is Not Recommended since they need to be recharged
at least every six months to maintain their capacity. Instead, batteries should be
purchased a few weeks before they must be used.
You can purchase a spare, charged UPS if you need backup emergency power.
Order information and Philips Part Numbers are included in the Replaceable Parts
List included with the service documentation in the media kit.
For complete battery replacement instructions, refer to the UPS documentation.
Warning UPS batteries are lead-acid and must be handled carefully and disposed of properly.
Maintaining the
2-channel USB
Recorder
The USB 2-Channel Recorder has mechanical and optical components that require
regular cleaning for dependable operation. This includes cleaning of the paper roller
to prevent paper slippage and keep recordings clear and clean.
Cleaning the Philips Recorder Paper Roller Compartment
To clean the paper roller compartment:
1. Open the Philips Recorder door and remove the paper roll.
2. Lightly moisten a lint-free cloth with isopropyl alcohol and clean the paper roller.
3. Use compressed air to clean all dirt and debris from the recorder paper roller
compartment. Be sure that the surface of the paper roller is completely clean.
7-4
Performing Preventive Maintenance
Loading Recorder Paper
A message appears at the top of the screen when the recorder is out of paper. The
M3176C USB 2-channel recorder requires M4816/17A paper to operate properly.
Note The only paper that can be used with the USB 2-Channel Recorder is M4816/17A. If
the wrong paper installed, recordings will not print.
To load a new paper roll into the recorder:
1. Insert a new roll with paper feeding from the bottom.
Figure 7-3: Inserting Paper Into the 2-channel USB Recorder
2. Pull the paper so it extends beyond the edge of the door and then close the
recorder door.
Figure 7-4: Securing the Paper Roll in the 2-channel USB Recorder
You can test to see if the recorder paper is loaded correctly by selecting the Record
button in any Patient Sector that has waves. If no printing appears on the strip, the
paper is loaded backwards. If necessary, remove the paper roll and reload it
correctly.
When removing a printed recording from the recorder be sure to tear the paper in an
upward or downward motion. If you pull the paper forward aggressively and tear at
an angle the recorder may generate an ‘out of paper’ message at the IntelliVue
Information Center.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-5
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Checking Display Sweep Speed
To assure full compliance with Information Center specifications, the sweep speed
of the main display can be checked and adjusted to assure 25 mm/s +10%. The
procedure for verifying the sweep speed is described in “Verifying Display Sweep
Speed” on page 8-5.
Troubleshooting Procedures
This section provides the following troubleshooting information and procedures:
• Troubleshooting Strategy
• Troubleshooting Symptoms
• Troubleshooting Tables for applications
-
Alert Data Integration
-
Patient Data Transfer/Web Access
-
HL7 Export
-
Web Based Applications
-
12-Lead Export/Holter Export
-
KM Software
• First level support User Troubleshooting tools:
-
Error and Status Messages
-
Status Log
-
Purchased Options and Support Information
• More advanced resources available for Service Personnel Troubleshooting from
the Information Center Service screen.
-
Event Logs for identifying system events and errors
-
Service Logs for reviewing past service performed on the system
-
Status Logs (All Data Categories) for identifying the operational status of all
Philips hardware
-
Network Statistics for information about network switches
-
Telemetry Services for information from Telemetry Mainframes. Note that
this does not include the M484x IntelliVue Telemetry System devices.
-
!Diagnostics for troubleshooting Philips and OS devices
-
!Config Wizard tools to reconfigure the system
-
!Shutdown and restart for restarting system software.
• LED Diagnostics tables list symptoms displayed by LEDs on non-functioning
hardware, possible causes, and corrective actions that can be taken to restore
functionality.
7-6
Troubleshooting Procedures
Troubleshooting Symptoms
In the IntelliVue Information Center system, there can be more than one cause that
contributes to a problem. The following tables list possible symptoms, causes, and
actions that can possibly resolve the problem.
Troubleshooting Alert Data Integration
Table 7-1: Troubleshooting Alert Data Integration
Symptom
Alarm Paging not Available
displayed in Information
Center status text area
Possible Cause
Action
TCP/IP connection to
Alert Data Integration
device is no longer valid
Ping the hostname of the Alert Data
Integration device. Verify proper host
name and/or IP address in Network
Configuration screen of the Config
Wizard (Chapter 6).
Device is not configured
Configure correct host name and/or IP
address in Network Configuration
screen of the Config Wizard (Chapter 6).
Alerts not received by
Emergin® Wireless Office
Go to Paging.log in log directory
(page 7-32) and verify alerts are logged
with bed label, text information, and
time/date information.
If alerts are in paging.log file, alerts
have been sent to the Emergin Alarm
Wireless Office. Notify customer to
contact Emergin for further
troubleshooting within the Emergin
system, wireless infrastructure, and/or
end user devices
Alert Data Integration
interface is not running
Verify status of Alert Data Integration by
checking the Status Log and verify
status of Alert Data Integration
interface. Check paging.log for more
detailed information.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-7
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Troubleshooting Patient Data Transfer/IIC Web Access
Table 7-2: Troubleshooting Patient Data Transfer/IIC Web Access
Symptom
Action
Web Access Not Available
The Master Database
Server is off-line
Verify the Master Database Server is
online and working
Web Access is accessible
from the Information Center
but not from a PC Client on
the Hospital LAN
Network properties (for
second NIC) are not
configured correctly.
Verify the second NIC TCP/IP settings
include IP Address, subnet, default
gateway, DNS and/or WINS according
to hospital requirements (page 5-24).
Clinical Units cannot accept
patient transfer; units are not
on the clinical unit transfer
list
Database Server
associated with those
Units is off-line.
Verify the Database Server is online,
and click the Update button in the
Discharge screen.
Browser button is not
available on the Information
Center All Controls window.
Web Access Portal
configuration setting was
not enabled.
Enable the Web Access Portal
configuration parameter in the
Network Configuration screen of the
Config Wizard (Chapter 6).
Patient Data Transfer has
intermittent failures.
7-8
Possible Cause
• Check Export Log Files for
messages
• Hospital Bandwidth utilization may
be affecting transfers. This
utilization can be modified with the
tools provided. Refer to “Patient
Data Transfer - Bandwidth
Utilization” on page 7-53.
Decreasing the bandwidth utilization
for the hospital LAN increases the time
required to complete the transfer of
patient data.
Troubleshooting Procedures
Troubleshooting HL7 Export
Table 7-3: Troubleshooting HL7 Export
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
ICCA ADT interface fails to
return names or fails when
user clicks Retrieve
Network errors
A stale connection to CIE due to
restarting CIE services (for
example)
Restart DBServ on the monitoring DBS.
HL7 Output is not working
Configuration settings are not set
properly
Check configuration of network card,
switches, and TCP/IP settings. Verify the
Information Centers are configured with the
appropriate default gateway. (IP Address of
DBS when no IntelliVue Telemetry devices
connected, and IP Address of router when
IntelliVue Telemetry devices are connected).
No communication between
devices
Ping by IP and hostname the device from the
other device.
Network errors
Check the Network Statistics for network
errors
Check System Error logs on Information
Center and Database Server for indications
of unexpected network conditions or errors
Export errors
Check the Export log file on Information
Centers originating HL7 data and on the
Database Server. Pay careful attention to all
“Connection accepted from...” and
“Connection from... rejected” messages.
There should be one accepted message
each time an HL7 target system makes a
connection. A disconnect message with
error 0 means the HL7 target system
performed a normal close of its socket
connections. A rejected message means the
Database Server configuration is incorrect.
Socket errors other than 0 are abnormal,
meaning the connected system disappeared
without closing the socket connection.
Review these abnormal errors with a HL7
receiving system technical expert.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-9
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Troubleshooting 12-Lead Export/Holter Export
Table 7-4: Troubleshooting 12-Lead Export/Holter Export
Symptom
12-Lead Data/Holter export
data is not arriving at
destination device
7-10
Possible Cause
Action
Device IP address is not
assigned
Verify 12-Lead/Holter devices are
correctly configured by means of the
Network Configuration screen in Config
Wizard (Chapter 6).
System is offline
Ping the hostname of the 12-Lead or
Holter Export device
Shared folders on
receiving device are not
setup/shared properly
Verify the PMDExport folders on the 12Lead/Holter device are setup properly.
See Appendix D.
Second NIC on Database
Server/Information
Center is not configured
correctly.
Verify the Second NIC is configured with
the appropriate settings. See “Setting
Host Names and IP Addresses” on
page 5-23.
Hospital ID/Department
ID configuration settings
do not match those of
the receiving device
Verify the configurations settings in the
Purchased Options and Support
Information Page and the Equipment
Setup (clinical unit setup) window
match. See Purchased Options and
Support Information and Equipment
Setup in Chapter 6
Troubleshooting Procedures
Troubleshooting KM Software
Table 7-5: Troubleshooting KM Software
Symptom
Possible Cause
Action
Mouse does not switch over
to another computer
KaVoom! KM may not be
configured so that it can
connect to all PIICs.
Restart KaVoom! KM switching
software as follows:
1. Access the Windows Desktop.
2. Go to Start > Programs> KaVoom!
KM.
The KaVoom! KM for Philips dialog
displays.
3. If the dialog displays the message,
the computer is grouped with
[central-xx] and [central-yy], click
Hide.
KM switching software restarts.
Computer mouse and keyboard
are set to navigate across all
configured central stations.
4. If the dialog displays the
messages, The computer is
grouped with [central-xx] and
[central-yy]. Unable to connect to
[central-xx]. The software is not
running or is configured for a
different TCP/IP port., restart
KaVoom! KM software (Step 1 Step 3) at each listed central in the
grouping until the error
disappears.
5. Lock the desktop keyboard.
Keyboard cannot type upper
case characters
Reset and restart KaVoom! KM
switching software as follows:
1. Access the Windows Desktop.
2. Go to Start > Programs > KaVoom!
KM.
The KaVoom! KM for Philips dialog
opens.
3. Go to Application > Exit in the
KaVoom! KM for Philips dialog.
4. Restart KaVoom! KM for Philips.
5. Lock the desktop keyboard.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-11
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Troubleshooting Strategy
The flow of information in IntelliVue Information Center systems can be divided into
the following major connectivity components (Figure 7-5):
• Wireless connectivity - flow of real-time patient monitoring data from wireless
Patient monitors.
• Network connectivity - flow of real-time patient data from bedside monitors to
Network connected IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients for overviewing,
• Server connectivity - flow of stored patient monitoring data to the Database
Server for storage and out to IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients for
review.
Note The strategy for troubleshooting PIIC Server Connectivity is covered in this
document. Refer to the IntelliVue Clinical Network Service documentation for
wireless and network connectivity troubleshooting guidance.
Figure 7-5: PIIC Server/Network Connectivity
Be sure that patient monitoring data are correctly stored by the Database Server
and accessible from the Database Server by IntelliVue Information Centers and
Clients. Each DBS/device connection should be checked to determine if stored
patient monitoring data can be reviewed.
Table 7-8 provides investigation suggestions for identifying sources of PIIC DBS
connectivity problems.
7-12
Troubleshooting Strategy
Table 7-6: Troubleshooting PIIC DBS Connectivity
Assessment
Investigation
Are patient data (waveforms and
parameters) being received by the Server?
Check that Information Centers are not in
Local Database Mode.
Are patient data (waveforms and
parameters) being stored correctly by the
Server?
Check Review Applications for each
connected patient and verify that patient
data have been correctly stored.
Are all Network devices operational?
Check Status LEDs on each Network device switch, repeaters, media translators.
Are all devices connected?
Check Status Log.
Ping each device from the Server.
Check Link LEDs.
What is the current status of connected
devices?
Check the connected Information Centers/
Clients from the Service Menu.
• Black - monitoring
• Yellow - Local Mode, DBS not available
• Green - Local Mode, DBS available
Each connectivity component should be evaluated separately to identify the source
of a problem. Ask the questions:
• What devices and functions are working?
• What devices and functions are not working?
• What tools can be used to diagnose devices or functions not working?
• What troubleshooting actions will minimize intrusion on the user?
• What actions will be the quickest to implement?
Troubleshooting PIIC System Issues
Table 7-7, Table 7-8, and Table 7-9 provide symptoms, possible causes,
verifications, and corrective actions for issues identified with IntelliVue Information
Centers, Clients, and the PIIC Network/DBS System.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-13
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-7: Troubleshooting IntelliVue Information Center Issues
Symptom
IntelliVue Information
Center
• applications shut
down
• workstation goes to
desktop for 10-20
seconds
• restarts to local
database mode
• locks up
Possible Cause(s)
Verification
Corrective Action(s)
IntelliVue Information
Center has lost
connection to network or
Server due to:
• bad connection to
Switch, including
cabling
• failed component
between Information
Center and Switch
• loss of Server
connection to network
Determine if problem is on the
device or the network by
observing functionality.
Test UTP and fiber optic cable
connections
Re-establish Information Center
connection to the network
• Check whether Clients are
receiving data from
Information Center.
• Determine if other
Information Centers are in
local database mode.
• Look at Link LEDs on device
ports of Network interfaces.
If only Information Center is
affected, problem is likely its
network connection.
If other Information Centers or
Clients are affected, problem
is likely a network or Server
connection.
Review Event Log and
Application Log. An
“SDProcess” error message is
logged, i.e.
• Warning 3257 “System
restarted using the local
database mode because
the server is not available”
• Warning 4208 “Restarting
applications because the
database server connection
is unavailable. System will
come up in Local DB.”
7-14
Restart the Information Center
PC if necessary
When connection is reestablished, Information
Centers display “Press Restart
Network” at top of display. Use
Restart button to restart the
Information Center.
For network problems, see
Table 7-9.
Troubleshooting Strategy
Table 7-8: Troubleshooting M3151 IntelliVue Information Clients
Symptom
M3151 Client
- waveforms drop out
for 15-60 seconds
- applications shut
down
- PC goes to Desktop
for 10-20 seconds
- restarts to local
database mode
- displays patient
waveforms in sectors
where patients were
assigned
- locks up
Possible Cause(s)
Verification
Client has lost connection
to Server, but still has
active network connection
to Information Center
sourcing data to it.
Problem probably also
affects other devices on
the network.
Possible causes:
- bad connection between
Switch and Server--may
include in-wall and patch
cables
- failed component
between Server and
Switch
- Server down
- Server in Config mode
Isolate problem by observing
functionality on rest of network.
Determine if other Information
Centers can receive data from
Server
If Server’s network connection is
lost, then other devices
(Information Centers and Clients)
should not be able to retrieve
stored data and should be in
local database mode.
Review Event Viewer, and
Application Log. An
“SDProcess” error message is
logged, i.e.
- Warning 3257 “System
restarted using the local
database mode because the
server is not available” or
- Warning 4208 “Restarting
applications because the
database server connection is
unavailable. System will come up
in Local DB.”
Look at Link LEDs on device
ports of LAN interfaces to
identify the failed connection
Test UTP and fiber optic cable
connections
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
Corrective Action(s)
Reestablish Server
connection to network
Restart Clients if necessary
(Clients may restart
automatically once
connection to the Database
Server is restored)
7-15
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-8: Troubleshooting M3151 IntelliVue Information Clients
Symptom
Possible Cause(s)
Verification
M3151 Client
- waveforms dropout for
15-120 seconds
- applications shut
down
- PC goes to Desktop
for 10-20 seconds
- restarts to local
database mode
- displays “Monitoring
lost for this patient” in
sectors where patients
were assigned
Client has lost connection
to network due to:
- bad connection between
Client and Switch
including in-wall and
patch cables
- failed component
between Client and
Switch
- network Switch down
Isolate problem by observing
functionality present on rest of
network.
Determine if Information Centers
are operational and can receive
data from Server
Review Event Log, Application
Log. An “SDProcess” error
message is logged, either
- Warning 3257 “System
restarted using the local
database mode because the
server is not available” or
- Warning 4208 “Restarting
applications because the
database server connection is
unavailable. System will come up
in Local DB.”
If problem is isolated to Client
connection, then other devices
(ICs and Clients) should all be
operating normally
Look at Link LEDs on device
ports of LAN interfaces to
identify the failed connection
Test UTP and fiber optic cable
connections
Re-establish Client
connection to network
After coming out of
Config Wizard, the PIIC
was rebooted from the
DBServer, and once it
came back up there
was a message on top
of the desktop screen
indicating that the
display resolution was
incorrect (640 x 480).
Incorrect BIOS version or
incorrect BIOS settings.
Review BIOS version and BIOS
settings for PIIC host platform
listed in “Updating the BIOS” on
page 7-79 and “Configuring BIOS
Settings” on page 7-81.
Update BIOS or change BIOS
settings as appropriate.
7-16
Corrective Action(s)
Restart Client if necessary
(Client may restart
automatically once
connection to the Database
Server is restored)
Troubleshooting Strategy
Table 7-9: Troubleshooting the Network/Server System
Symptom
All M3145/M3155
Information Centers and
M3151 Clients restart and
go into local database
mode
Possible Cause(s)
Connection between
Switch and Server is
lost.
Switch down
Verification
Corrective Action(s)
All Information Centers and Clients
are in local database mode, and
Information Centers do not show
“Restart Network” message with
button.
Review Event Log and
Application Log on Information
Centers and Clients. An
“SDProcess” error message is
logged, i.e.
- Warning 3257 “System restarted
using the local database mode
because the server is not
available” or
- Warning 4208 “Restarting
applications because the
database server connection is
unavailable. System will come up
in Local DB.”
If Server connection is lost,
Information Centers and Clients
will still show Server “offline/idle”
in their Status Logs.
Ping connections between devices
and Server to test connectivity.
Identify failed link or device.
Inspect the Switch front panel
LEDs for indications of
- power loss,
- device failure, or
- Link LEDs off.
Review Event Log and
Application Log on Information
Centers and Clients. An
“SDProcess” error message is
logged, i.e.
- Warning 3257 “System restarted
using the local database mode
because the server is not
available” or
- Warning 4208 “Restarting
applications because the
database server connection is
unavailable. System will come up
in Local DB.”
Ping connections between devices
and Server to test connectivity.
Ping Switch by its IP Address.
Identify failed link or Switch
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
Correct failed link or device.
Reestablish Server
connection to Switch.
Restart Information Centers
and Clients if necessary.
(Clients may restart
automatically.)
Correct failed link or Switch
Reestablish Server
connection to Switch
Restart Information Centers
and Clients if necessary.
(Clients may restart
automatically.)
7-17
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-9: Troubleshooting the Network/Server System
Symptom
Possible Cause(s)
Verification
Corrective Action(s)
Clients start up to
operating mode but
display “Data Lost for this
Patient”
Information Centers
sourcing data is in Local
Database Mode
(common during system
startup)
Server connectivity must be
operational or Client will start up
to local database mode.
Complete all configurations of
data sourcing Information
Center.
Restart data sourcing
Information Center.
Client configuration
wrong on Server, e.g. it
could be looking for a
non-existent source
Review Client’s configuration in
Server’s Bed Configuration-Read
Only application to confirm.
Correct Client’s configuration
on Server.
Restart all Information
Centers and Clients.
Some or all Information
Centers and Clients
restart and return to
normal operating mode
Intermittent network
interruption
This condition is difficult to verify.
If the network problem is
transient, the problem may have
cleared after devices restart.
Call Philips Service
Representative or Response
Center.
Information Centers and
Clients have sluggish
Wave Review behavior
Device not connected
as 100 Mb FULL duplex
Inspect switch port speed and
duplex.
Check for CRC errors on switch
port.
Connect Information Center
and/or Client to 100 MB FULL
duplex port.
Troubleshooting PIIC User Issues
In many cases users can identify errors or potential problems in the Information
Center system without disrupting patient monitoring. Error and status messages
appear on the Main Screen to alert users to minor problems or status conditions,
while other problems can be reviewed in the Status Log. Once a problem has been
identified, the user can also access Support Information to determine who to
contact to resolve the problem.
Note Service support staff should periodically review User Troubleshooting tools with
users to assist them in self-diagnosing minor problems, to identify who to call when
unable to resolve a problem, and so they can provide useful information to service
personnel about a problem.
Error and Status
Messages
There are a number of system conditions that will be identified by Philips software
during routine system assessments. These conditions immediately show the
appropriate error and status message on the Main Screen.
Table 7-10 describes possible error and status Messages that can appear on the
Main Screen.
7-18
Troubleshooting Strategy
Table 7-10: Error and Status Messages on the PIIC Main Screen
Message
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action(s)
Recorder Error Messages
USB recorder out of paper
Recorder is out of paper
Replace paper roll
XXX recorder door is open
Recorder door is open
- Close Recorder door
- Replace Recorder
No recorder connected
- No Recorder is in Recorder Rack
- Recorder is in Recorder Rack
- Insert Recorder in Recorder Rack
- Reseat Recorder in Recorder Rack
- Replace Recorder or Rack
XXX recorder hardware fault
Recorder is inoperable
Replace Recorder.
Recorder Rack
Power Supply Fault
No Recorder
There is a fault in the Recorder
Rack or Recorder Rack Power
Supply
- Reseat Recorder in Recorder Rack
- Check Recorder Rack and Power
Supply
- print job is being sent to the
printer
- printer has received the job,
printing
is in process
- print job is spooled and waiting
for printer to become available
- print job has failed
- None
- None
Check printer for problems
- printer has a paper jam
- out of paper
- printer off line
- remove paper jam
- add paper to printer
- consult printer documentation
Printer is busy
Printer needs attention
- printer is presently printing
- printer problem exists
- None
- see steps above
No printer connected
System does not recognize any
connected printer
- check printer connection
- check printer configuration
Move mouse over blue sector to
silence alarms
No mouse movement within 30
seconds following an alarm
Use the mouse to silence the alarms
To Restore Normal Operation Press “Restart Network” in Patient
Window
Connectivity to Server has been
restored after a power failure
Press Restart Network in Patient
Window.
System restarts and monitoring will be
unavailable for about 5 minutes
Printer Status Messages
Appxx print job
- in progress
- sent to printer
- waiting for printer
- failed
where Appxx is the name of the
application (e.g. Trend Review)
- None, If problem persists, check
printer or printer spooler
- Resend print job
Other Messages
Operating in Local DB -- See User’s
Guide for Details; Check Patient
and Unit settings
System problem -- contact service.
Some functions disabled
Connectivity to Server has failed
Check User’s Guide to review limited
operations
Check Patient and Unit settings
Check Network/Server connectivity
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-19
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-10: Error and Status Messages on the PIIC Main Screen
Message
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action(s)
Patient Database Server Disk
Failure -- contact service
Server has detected a failure on
one of its disks
Replace failed disk
Alarm Paging not available
connectivity between an
Information Center and the
configured external alert data
paging device is not available
Re-establish connection to the external
alert data device
Excessive wireless data loss
Excessive occurrence of dropped
messages has occurred between
one or more wireless M3/M4
bedsides and an access point.
Excessive wireless interference
Excessive occurrence of dropped
messages and acknowledge errors
have occurred between one or
more wireless M3/M4 bedsides
and an access point.
Remove any potential causes of
interference (i.e. microwaves, etc.)
Router Failure - Call Service
Router is not functioning
Check Router LED and configuration.
Refer to the Router Installation and
Service Manual for details.
Wireless Monitoring loss
Intermittent disruption or failures
in communication between one or
more patient monitoring wireless
devices and the Information
Center.
Review the Wireless Status Log for
indication of error.
Reviewing the
Status Log
If the system does not seem to be operating properly or some unusual hardware or
software event occurs, users should access the Status Log to determine the
operational status of devices on the system. The Status Log can be accessed by
users from the All Controls window and is the first place users should look to identify
a problem with a Philips hardware device.
Users can quickly review the Status column of this Log to identify devices that are
not in proper operational condition, e.g. “Offline.” These device conditions can then
be reported to service personnel for corrective action.
Reviewing
Purchased
Options and
Support
Information
A Support Info button on the Service screen permits viewing a “Read Only”
Purchased Options and Support Information screen that has information that may
be useful to service personnel.
To review purchased options and support information:
1. Go to ALL Controls > Service from the Information Center Patient Window.
The Service screen (Figure 7-6) opens.
7-20
Troubleshooting Strategy
Figure 7-6: Service Password Screen
2. Click the Support Info button to open the read-only Config Wizard screen
(Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7: Sample Purchased Options and Support Information Screen
3. Click the Purchased Options and Support Information tab to select the screen.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-21
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
If you cannot resolve a problem notify service personnel. The service user can
access the extensive troubleshooting applications available in the Service menus as
summarized in Table 7-11.
Table 7-11: Service Menus
Menu Selection
M3154
M3169
M3155
M3145
M3150
M3151
M3177
M3140
Notes
Support Logs
Event Log
X
X
X
X
X
X
Service Log
(Edit, View)
X
X
X
X
X
X
Status Log
X
X
X
X
X
X
Network Statistics
X
X
X
X
X
X
Diagnostics
!Recorder Diagnostics
X
X
X
Recording/Printing
Diagnostics
X
X
X
X
System Diagnostics
X
X
X
X
X
X
Performance Monitor
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows Explorer
X
X
X
X
X
X
Command Prompt
X
X
X
X
X
X
Backup Error Logs
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
USB Recorder Logs
Redirect HL7
X
X
X
Available if either
2-Channel recorder is
configured
Available if USB
recorder is configured
X
Configurationa
!Config Wizard
X
X
X
X
X
X
M3140: Mini-Config
Read Only Config Wizard
X
X
X
X
X
X
M3140: Mini-Config
Archive
X
X
X
X
Set Time/Date
X
X
X
X
Report Configuration
X
X
X
Report/Recording
Destination
Add/Remove
Database Servers
7-22
X
X
X
If no external time
source configured
X
(Master Only)
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Table 7-11: Service Menus
Menu Selection
M3154
M3169
Patient Data Transfer Bandwidth Utilization
X
Equipment Label
Assignment
X
X
Save/View Configuration
X
X
M3155
M3145
M3150
M3151
M3177
M3140
Notes
Available if Patient
Transfer option is
enabled
X
X
X
X
Security
Change Clinical Units
Password
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change Service
Password
X
X
X
X
X
X
Research Export
Options
X
X
X
X
X
Remote Access Admin.
X
X
User Manager
X
X
X
EWS/Device Location
Compatibility
X
X
X
X
Available if Web option
is enabled
Other Services
Control Panel
X
X
X
X
X
X
!Services
X
X
X
X
X
X
Software Versions
X
X
X
X
X
X
Internet Service Manager
X
X
X
System Validation
X
X
X
Available if Web option
is enabled
Refer to the Windows
documentation for
more information
X
Shutdown
!Shutdown - Normal
X
X
X
X
X
X
!Desktop Tools
X
X
X
X
X
X
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-23
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-11: Service Menus
Menu Selection
M3154
M3169
M3155
M3145
M3150
M3151
M3177
M3140
Notes
Maintenance
Restart IIS Admin
Service
X
X
Restart DBServ
X
X
Restart NetworkService
X
X
Synchronize Large
Network Server List
X
Reset Database Log
X
X
Does not cause Information Centers to operate in local mode
X
Reset Recorder Logs
X
!Upgrade NLS Catalogs
X
X
WMTS Data Collection
X
X
X
X
X
Available if USB
recorder is configured
Available on DataBase
Servers only
X
X
a. For more information about the Configuration menu selections, refer to Chapter 6.
Reviewing Support Logs
Support Logs provide information on the operational condition of the Philips system
and devices connected to it. They are the following.
Note If using a remote PC to view the Logs, the specific Information Center PC platform
driver must be installed on that remote machine.
Event Log
The Event Log records all events and errors that occur in the Philips system when it
starts and as it operates. It uses the standard Windows Event Viewer application.
The Event Log is the first place service personnel should look for system problems.
It cannot be printed. An “event” is any significant occurrence in the system, security,
or applications for which users should be notified. Clicking on Event Log in the
Service menu brings up the following Event Viewer window.
Figure 7-8: Sample Event Viewer Screen
7-24
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Click on an Event Viewer category to display the Events recorded in that category.
• System records events logged by Windows system components, and services;
for example, the failure of a driver or other system component to load during
startup.
• Security records events related to system security.
The Security Log is not used in present Philips releases.
• Application records events in IntelliVue Information Center applications.
Each event includes:
• Date
• Time
• Source (the software that logged the event)
• Category (the type of event as defined by the source)
• Event (number assigned to the event for identification)
• User
• Computer (name of the computer where the logged event occurred)
• Type:
Error - Significant problem, such as a loss of data or loss of function; for
example, an application or Windows service was not loaded during startup.
Warning - Events that are not necessarily significant but indicate possible
future problems; for example, when disk space is low.
Information - Infrequent significant events that describe successful
operations of major server services; for example when a database program
loads successfully.
Success Audit - Audited security access attempts that were successful; for
example, a user’s successful attempt to log on to the system.
Failure Audit - Audited security access attempts that failed; for example, if
a user tried to access a network driver and failed.
Note Error coded events are the only type of events that relate to Philips applications and
are the only codes described in this document. For descriptions of other types of
events, refer to Windows documentation.
Event Log menu selections do the following:
• View provides features for filtering, ordering, and finding events.
• Options permits a low speed connection, saves settings on exit, and changes
character fonts.
• Help provides detailed descriptions of the Event Viewer features.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-25
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Note Windows Help screens may cover part of patient waveforms, but do not effect
monitoring or alarms. To see patient data, resize and move the Help screen
The Event Log cannot be printed.
Table 7-12 describes Application Events that can appear in the Event Log.
Application
Events
To access Application events designated Error and Warning:
1. Go to Support Logs > Event Logs from the Service screen.
The Even Viewer screen displays.
2. Select Application.
All application events display.
3. Go to View > Filter Events.
The Application Properties screen displays.
4. Click check boxes for Event types: Error and Warning.
5. Click the down arrow in the Event Source text box and select (All).
6. Click the down arrow in the Category text box and select (All).
7. Click the down arrow in the From text box and select First Event.
8. Click the down arrow in the To text box and select Last Event.
9. Click OK in the Application Properties screen.
The events display in the Event Viewer screen.
Note The error, WMIADapter Error (Open of Service Failed), may display, but has no effect
on the Information Center performance.
7-26
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Table 7-12: Application Events
Source
Dataserver
Description
(Event Code)
Explanation
Corrective Action
Error: 2004
Length of message block received
from Redirector does not equal the
first word of the buffer.
Contact Response Center
Error: 2007
HRC check failed.
Corrupt incoming data
Contact Response Center
Error: 200B
Virtual Terminal Protocol could not
connect to arrhythmia controls
object.
Contact Response Center.
Error: 200C
Virtual Terminal Protocol could not
connect to database alarms object.
Contact Response Center.
Error: 200D
Virtual Terminal Protocol error in
GetAlarmWave
Contact Response Center.
Error: 200E, 200F,
2010, 2011,
2106, 2017,
2018, 2019
Low level Data Control Protocol error
No action required.
Error: 201A
Data Acquisition Receive thread is
shutting down.
Not an error, no action required.
Error: 201B
Low level Data Control Protocol error
No action required.
dataserver
redirector
recmgr
sdprocess
pdsstore
docstatusserver
Error: Unhandled
Exception Filter is
kicking in
Fatal error
System will automatically restart to
clear error state
Restart system to clear. Contact
Response Center if error occurs often.
EMSMainMenu
Winsock connection failed.
Restart system. If error persists,
reinstall OS software.
Mode of operation could not be read from registry.
Therefore, the mode was defaulted to monitoring mode.
No action is required.
The user logon flag could not be read from the registry.
Therefore, the user logon was defaulted to the System
Manager account
Restart system.
Could not open the specified event to send to the Shell
application
Restart system.
Could not start application because Error = XX
Restart system. If error persists,
reinstall Philips software.
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry because
Error = XX
Restart system. If error persists,
reinstall OS and Philips software.
Could not write value to Registry because Error = XX
Restart system. If error persists,
reinstall Philips software.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-27
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-12: Application Events
Source
Install
Description
(Event Code)
Explanation
Corrective Action
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry because
Error = XX
Restart system.
Could not write value to Registry because Error = %d
Restart system. If error persists,
contact Response Center.
OpenProcessToken failed.
Contact Response Center.
AdjustTokenPrivileges enable failed.
Contact Response Center.
Auto Reboot failed.
Restart system or recycle power.
Auto Reboot failed.
Restart system, If error persists,
reinstall Philips software.
OpenProcessToken failed.
Restart system. If error persists,
reinstall Philips software.
AdjustTokenPriveleges enable failed.
Restart system. If error persists,
reinstall Philips software.
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry because
Error = XX
Restart system. If error persists,
reinstall OS and Philips software.
Could not write value to Registry because Error = XX
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software.
Could not read value from Registry because Error = %d
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software.
Could not write to Error File
No action is required.
OrbPlus
Error: all
No action is required.
ProductConfig
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry because
Error = XX
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS and Philips software
Could not write value to Registry because Error = XX
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Could not read value from Registry because Error = %d
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
WinSock connection failed
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
Could not read which configuration applications to run
from the Registry.
Reinstall Philips software
Could not start application because Error = XX
Restart system.
NetCfgLib
7-28
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Table 7-12: Application Events
Source
PswdScrDlg
RecMgr
Description
(Event Code)
Explanation
Corrective Action
Could not start EMS Main Menu application
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
... Application could not be started.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Logon User does not have the privilege to access EMS
applications. Need to update the access rights of the
SystemManager User.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
WinSock connection failed
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
System manager password entered
Verify proper user access
Philips Private password entered
Verify proper user access
Error: 2504, The default case on a switch was reached.
Report to Response Center and restart
system.
Error: 2510, No primary wave was found in the pds. Using
the first two waves.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software.
Error: 2511, No data was found in the pds. This could be a
temporary startup condition.
If this occurs around a patient
discharge or transfer or when a
bedside monitor module is pulled
out, no action required.
If occurs at other times, restart
system.
Error: 2512, A pds collector could not be created for the
specified patient.
If this occurs around a patient
discharge or transfer or when a
bedside monitor module is pulled
out, no action required.
If occurs at other times, restart
system.
Error: 2513, A patient could not be found from the
information supplied.
If this occurs around a patient
discharge or transfer or when a
bedside monitor module is pulled
out, no action required.
If occurs at other times, restart
system.
Error: 2514, This unmarshall routine does not support the
version of data that was marshalled.
Restart system. If problem persists,
reinstall Philips software. If problem
still exists, contact Response Center.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-29
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-12: Application Events
Source
RecMgr
Description
(Event Code)
Explanation
Corrective Action
Error: 2515, One of the waves needed for the recording is
no longer available.
If this occurs around a patient
discharge or transfer or when a
bedside monitor module is pulled
out, no action required.
If occurs at other times, restart
system.
Error: 2516, The requested memory could not be
allocated.
Restart system. If this persists, reload
Philips software.
Error: 2517, Data from the pds has not arrived yet.
Indicates a long time delay in retrieving data from the pds.
If this occurs around a patient
discharge or transfer or when a
bedside monitor module is pulled
out, no action required.
If occurs at other times, restart
system.
Error: 2518, One or more threads in this process failed to
start. Problem is likely due to a system wide failure and
may require a restart of the machine.
Restart system. If this persists, reload
Philips software.
Error 250C, The recorder corba id key was missing or could
not be read or written to.
Reinstall Philips software.
Error: 250D, A corba call failed
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Error: 250E, Programmer error. Please submit a bug report
with the text from this message.
Report text in Event Log to Response
Center.
Restart system.
sdprocess
Clinical password
entered
Verify proper user access
ServiceLog
EntryApp
Winsock connection failed
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
Could not initialize and/or update the application. The
application was terminated
Reinstall Philips software
Cannot connect to database. Application terminated.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
EMS Service Log Database is corrupt.
Shut down the Service Log and
Contact the Response Center
Application could not be started.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Winsock connection failed
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
Could not initialize and/or update the application. The
application was terminated
Reinstall Philips software
Cannot connect to database. Application terminated.
If this persists, reinstall Philips
software
ServiceLog
ViewerApp
7-30
Clinical password was used in Unit
Settings password screen
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Table 7-12: Application Events
Source
Stardateshell
Support Info
TimeSetApp
Description
(Event Code)
Explanation
Corrective Action
Started application c:\stardate\bin\SDProcess.exe
System restarted from a normal
restart or a crash. If normal startup, no
action required. If system crash,
contact Response Center.
Entering non-monitoring mode
No action required
Could not star-t- +application:....
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
The following service did not start:....
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Unable to run the Display Setup Application
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Unable to run the Product Configuration Application
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Keyboard filter is not running, or its state cannot be
verified. Exiting to operating system
Check keyboard connection, reinstall
Philips software
Unable to start all Stardate services, exiting to operating
system.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS and Philips software
Failed to set Video Mode
Access Display Setup, and set
number of displays to 1
Unable to start SDProcess, exiting to operating system.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Unable to shutdown BootService, exiting to operating
system
Restart system
The sound driver is not running or its state could not be
verified.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
Winsock connection failed
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry because
Error = XX
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS and Philips software
Could not read value from Registry because Error = %d
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Winsock connection failed
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
Could not open HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Registry because
Error = XX
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS and Philips software
Could not read value from Registry because Error = %d
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
Unable to set time on this device. It is not configured.
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall Philips software
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-31
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-12: Application Events
Source
TimeSetApp
System Error
Log Files
Description
(Event Code)
Explanation
Corrective Action
Unable to set time zone information!
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
Unable to set the local time!
Restart system. If this persists,
reinstall OS software
Some software errors that are significant to system operation (unexpected error
events), and can help the Response Center or factory personnel resolve problems,
are logged into System Error Log text files. Examples of these errors are Open failed,
socked bind failed, and registry read/write failed.
To access these files:
1. Go to Diagnostics > Windows Explorer from the Service screen.
2. Select c:\stardate\log.
The SystemErrors.log appears.
3. To print the file, go to File > Print.
or
To view the file, go to c:\stardate\bin and double-click LogViewer.exe.
The Log Viewer application opens.
4. Go to File > Open, and select the log files.
More than one log file can appear.
System Info Log
Files
Some software errors are not significant to system operation (unexpected cod/datalogic errors), are logged into System Error Log text files that are different from the
System Error Log. Examples of these errors are: shutdown, startup local mode, and
user went to service mode.
To access these files:
1. Go to Diagnostics > Windows Explorer from the Service screen.
2. Select c:\stardate\logs.
The
SystemInfo.log
appears.
3. To print the file, go to File > Print.
or
To view the file, go to c:\stardate\bin and double-click LogViewer.exe.
The Log Viewer application opens.
4. Go to File > Open, and select the log files.
More than one log file can appear.
Export Log Files
Software errors that are related to the export features (HL7, paging, 12-Lead ECG
Management, Holter, Patient Data Transfer) are logged into Export Log text files.
To access the Export Log text files:
1. Go to Diagnostics > Windows Explorer from the Service screen.
7-32
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
2. Select c:\stardate\logs.
The export.log appears.
3. To print the file, go to File > Print.
or
To view the file, go to c:\stardate\bin and double-click LogViewer.exe.
The Log Viewer application opens.
4. Go to File > Open, and select the log files.
More than one log file can appear.
Exception Error
Log Files
If the system crashes or “exceptions” occur, the state of the system when it crashed
is stored in special Exception Error Log files. These files can be useful to the
Response Center or factory personnel in determining the state of the system at the
time of the crash.
To access the Exception Error log files:
1. Go to Diagnostics > Windows Explorer from the Service screen.
2. Select the path c:\stardate\logs, and double-click drwtsn32.log to open the log
file.
3. To print the file go to File > Print.
The drwtsn32.log file can keep track of exceptions. When capacity is reached,
the original file is renamed drwtsn32_old.log, and a new drwtsn32.log file
begins.
Backup Error
Logs
The Backup Error Logs tool copies all Event Logs and Information Center logs from
selected host names to a compressed file on removable media or hard drive. The
logs are copied and compressed for one Information Center, Client, or Database
Server at a time.
To access the backup error logs:
1. Go to Diagnostics > Backup Error Logs.
2. Select the device host name.
3. Verify the location of the backup log path. If you want to choose another
location, use the Browse button to navigate.
4. Click Backup Logs.
Service Log
The Service Log permits logging of service performed on equipment connected to
the Network/Server system. Each time the system or a device is changed, moved,
repaired, or upgraded an entry should be made to the Service Log to track system
status and history. The Service Log can store up to 500 entries.
New entries are made in the Edit Service Log option of the Service Log. Equipment
status and history can be reviewed in the View Service Log option.
Editing the
Service Log
The Edit Service Log screen (Figure 7-9) permits adding information to the Service
Log on devices that have been serviced.
The following fields are used to Enter the device information.
• Device Name - enter the name of the device being serviced, e.g. Central1, Bed1.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-33
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Figure 7-9: Sample Edit Service Log Screen
• Service Person’s Name - enter the name of the person who made the change or
is entering the information.
• Description of the Repair/Upgrade - enter a brief description of the change that
was made. It has a 255 character limit.
• Date (MDY) - set the date (Month/Day/Year) the change was made using the
up/down buttons to change the values in the boxes.
• Time (h:mm) - set the time (hour:minutes) the change was made using the up/
down buttons to change the values in the boxes.
Note You must click the ADD button after entering information in order for the system to
record the information.
The Service Log can have up to 500 entries. When the log is nearly full (490 - 500
entries), a message to archive the Service Log appears. If you choose to archive the
Service Log, a Save As dialog appears. The Service Log displays the last 500 entries
even if it has been archived.
If you decide not to archive the Service Log, the system deletes the oldest entry
each time a new entry is added. Be sure to archive Service Log information regularly
since it may be lost if the drive crashes.
Note On Network/Server systems, Service Log information is stored on the Server. If
information is stored when a device is in Local Database mode, it will be lost when
the device reconnects to the Server.
Viewing the
Service Log
The View Service Log window (Figure 7-10) permits review of the system service
history.
The service history of individual devices can be viewed.
• Device Name, e.g. Central1, Bed1,...
• Date of the entry
• Time of the entry
• Service Person who performed the service
7-34
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Figure 7-10: Viewing the Service Log
• Description of Service that was performed
Note You can click on and hold the field separator lines to change the column widths.
Scroll bars are included to navigate through the logs.
Archiving the
Service Log
To archive the Service log:
1. Click Save in the View Service Log dialog. A message prompts you to insert
archive media.
2. Put the Archive disk/USB drive into the appropriate device drive, and click OK.
The Save As dialog opens.
3. Select the desired drive in the Save in: pull-down list.
4. Type in a Filename for the Service Log.
5. Click the Save as type pull-down arrow and select a file type.
Text Files (*.TXT) saves the data in ASCII type format for viewing applications,
such as Notepad.
dB Export file (*.DAT) saves the data to a disk for importing to a database for
operational applications, such as spreadsheets. The file consists of rows
corresponding to the data columns in the Service Log. Column items are
surrounded by quotes (“) and separated by commas (,).
6. Click Save.
When the archive is complete, an SDProcessed message appears.
7. Click OK to continue.
If a file overwrite is required, a Yes/No verification dialog appears.
8. Click Yes to overwrite the existing file.
If the file cannot be saved, an error message appears. Replace the Archive
media and repeat the process.
9. When the Save process is complete remove the Archive media and store it in a
safe place.
Service Log data for the first 200 entries are stored on the media. If the file was
saved as a dB Export file, the data can be imported to another data base.
Status Log
The Status Log provides information on the operational status of all devices
connected to the same Network as an Information Center or Client.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-35
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Note If the IntelliVue Information Center or Client is in Local Database Mode, data on
other Network connected devices will not be current and may be incorrect.
You can access the Quick Unit Status and All Data Categories logs using All Controls
or the Service menu.
Quick Unit
Status
The Quick Unit Status Log (Figure 7-11) provides summary information for
identification and reporting of problems with devices in a clinical unit.
Figure 7-11: Sample Quick Unit Status Log
The log contains:
• Domain Name is a read-only field that displays the Host Name of the Database
Server on the Network of the device. For local database Information Centers, it
is blank.
• Status Category has a pull down list for selecting the desired version of the
Status Log.
-
Quick Unit Status provides information on Devices only and is the version
accessed by users directly from the Configuration and Support menu of the
All Controls window.
-
All Data Categories is for service personnel and provides information on
Devices, Network, Hardware, Software, Product Options, and the Recorder
Destination for each Information Center and Client.
Details: includes the following:
• Device Name is the name assigned to the device when it was added to the
network in !Network Configuration.
• Device Category is the type of device.
• Model is the specific model or model number of the device (e.g. M3150, CMx
Bedside)
• Host Name/MAC Address is the Host Name or MAC Address of the Information
Center the device is connected to.
• IP Branch is the IP Address of the device (if applicable).
• Status is the operational status of the device (e.g. Online, Offline).
7-36
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
• Operating Mode is the device operating mode, if defined (e.g. Monitoring,
Demo, Unknown)
• Software Revision is the identifying number of the Philips software release (e.g.
L.xx.xx for current software)
• Central Assign. is the name of the central station(.i.e., IntelliVue Information
Center) to which the device is assigned (if applicable).
• CS#/Location is the number of the central station to which the device is
assigned (if applicable) or the Port location of the device.
• System Serial # is the serial number of the Information Center system.
• Device Serial # is the serial number of the Information Center to which the
device is connected.
• Firmware Addr. is the radio firmware revision of wireless monitors.
Note The column width of the Details field can be changed by clicking and holding on the
vertical line separating the field titles and moving the line left or right.
Arrows in the corners of the field scroll the field left/right and up/down.
The Status Log can only be accessed from Monitoring Mode.
• Print opens a dialog for printing the Status Log to the default printer.
• Save permits saving the log to removable media. The archive procedure is the
same as that used for the Service Log.
• Refresh gives an immediate update of recent events.
All Data
Categories
The All Data Categories Status Log (Figure 7-12) includes the same Device
information as the Quick Unit Status Log and includes Philips system information.
Figure 7-12: Sample All Data Categories Status Log
• Network: The following information is provided in the Status Log for each device
on the network.
-
Device Name: e.g. CCU1, Central1, etc.
-
IP Address #: e.g. 172.31.xxx.x
-
Subnet Mask: i.e. 255.255.248.0
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-37
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
-
MAC Address: of the device PC
• Hardware: Information on the following hardware components of each device on
the network is provided:
-
Processing Unit: Processor, System BIOS, Video BIOS
-
Hard Disk Drive: (information may only be model #)
-
CD-ROM drive:
-
Sound card: model type only
-
Serial Ports: COM1, COM2
-
Parallel Port:
-
Network Adapter:
-
Keyboard:
-
Pointer Device:
-
Printer:
The following information is provided for each of these hardware components, if
available:
• Device Name: Device Name given to the networked device (e.g. ICU1, Central1,
etc.)
• Hardware Name: name of the hardware component contained in the Device
(e.g. as listed in the previous Hardware component list)
• Hardware Model: (not available for all hardware components)
a) Version (of Firmware or driver): (not available for all hardware components)
a) Serial #: (not available for all hardware components)
• Software: The following information is provided for Information Center software
for each networked device:
-
Device Name: e.g. ICU1, Central1, etc.
-
Revision:
-
Network Version:
-
Product Version:
• Product Options: The following information is provided for the options that have
been purchased for each Philips system on the network:
7-38
-
Model Type: M3150 IIC Local DB, M3155 IIC Network DB, M3151 IIC Client,
M3154 Large DBS, M3169 Small DBS, M3170 Patient Link
-
Number of Patients: 4, 6, 8, 12, 16 for Information Centers and Clients; up to
48 for the M3169 Small Database Server; up to 128 for the M3154
Database Server
-
Number of Displays: 1 or 2
-
Host Name: Host Name given to the device when it was installed
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
• Recorder Destination: Identification of the recorder where each device’s
recordings are sent, as configured in !Set Recording Destination for each
device:
-
Device Name: Device Name for each Information Center or Client
-
Is Recorder Connected: whether a recorder is connected to the Device, Yes
or No
-
Recorder Destination Host Name: Host Name of the Device whose recorder
will print recordings from this Device
-
Recorder Destination Device Name: Device Name of the Device whose
recorder will print recordings from this Device
Wireless Status
The Wireless Status tab opens the Wireless Status log. Each log entry includes
Urgency, Time (dd/mm/yyyy), Condition, Flag, Scope, and Response.
Transfer Status
The Transfer Status log shows all transfer transactions indicating whether the
transactions completed successfully or not.
Lab Results
Status
Lab Results Status tab in Status Logs provides a chronological history log of labs
entered into the system. It is intended as a troubleshooting aid and is not a clinical
decision support application.
Figure 7-13: Sample Lab Results Status
Each log entry includes Bed Label, Lab Source, Lab Time, Code, Description, Value,
and Units. The log contains up to 1000 entries with the newest entry at the top of
the list.
Viewing Network Statistics
The Network Statistics tool provides access to operational information from
switches on the Clinical Network. This information allows service personnel to
determine if network switches are operating within normal bounds, troubleshoot
network component failures, and correlate observed application events to network
communication problems. Network Statistics runs in monitoring mode and is
available on the Server and all Network connected Information Centers and Clients.
Note If you purchased a new Database Server system, the Network Statistics screen is
the HP 2524 which is illustrated. If upgrading from an earlier release, the Cisco
Switch may be shown. For detailed information refer to Cisco Switch.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-39
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Warning Verify that clinical users are not using the Information Center Web when opening
Network statistics on the Database Server. When the Network Statistics web page
opens, the Information Center Web Access loses communication.
Do Not Load HP TopTools or any other network management software on the
system; it will adversely affect system performance and may result in loss of
monitoring.
To access the Network Statistics tool, navigate to Support Logs > Network Statistics
from the Service screen. The Network Statistics screen opens.
Viewing HP
2524 Switch
Data
When you select a configured switch from the Switches pull-down list of configured
switches, the Network Statistics screen shows the Status tab for the selected switch
(Figure 7-14).
Figure 7-14: Sample Network Statistics for the HP 2524 Switch
The Status tab screen provides:
• Status: severity level of the event generated.
• Alert: specific event identification.
• Date/Time: date and time event was received by the Web browser interface
Data appears in the format: DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
(for example, 19-04-01 09:15:26 AM).
• Description
For information on network traffic quality, go to the Status tab and select Port
Counters.
The Identity tab screen provides:
• System Name: name of the selected switch
• System Location: selected switch location
7-40
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
• System Contact: person to contact if the system experiences trouble
• System Up-Time: how long the system has been active
• Product: displays the Switch information
• Version: firmware version installed
• IP Address: IP Address assigned to switch
• Management Server: Web site URL to go to for help
Caution Do not use the Configuration screens to make modifications to the Switch
configuration. Use the Network Configuration Tool described in the Clinical Network
documentation to ensure that all parameters are set properly.
If you click Device View from the Configuration tab, you can get additional
information about the switch port status.
Figure 7-15: Sample Device View for the HP 2524 Switch
If you click System Info in the Configuration screen, you can view the switch location
and add a contact name to be added to the Identity screen. After you enter new
information click Apply Changes.
Figure 7-16: Sample System Info for the HP 2524 Switch
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-41
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Pinging Network
Devices
You can ping network devices from the Diagnostics tab as follows:
1. Select Ping/Link Test.
Figure 7-17: Sample Ping/Link Test for the HP 2524 Switch
2. Type the IP address of the target device in the text box.
3. Click Start.
Viewing the
Configuration
Report
If you want to see the switch configuration settings, click Configuration Report.
Table 7-13 compares the HP2524 default settings and Recommended (Configured)
switch settings.
Table 7-13: Configuration Parameters
Setting
Factory Default
Recommended (Configured)
System Name
HP ProCurve Switch 2524
Name given to switch
Inactivity Timeout (min)
0
10
Type
All set to 10/100TX
All set to 10/100TX
Enabled
All set to Yes
All set to Yes
Mode
All set to Auto
Ports configured to specific mode through the
ConfigTool. 10HDx for 10 Mbps Half Duplex devices or
100FDx for 100 Mbps Full Duplex devices
Port/Trunk settings (Ports 1-26)
Example: For a system with a Tier Switch, DBS and two
Information Centers, one port (24) must be set to
100FDx for switches, and 3 ports (21-23) must be set
to 100FDx for devices since the DBS and Information
Center/Client requires a 100 Mbit Full Duplex
connection.
Flow Ctrl
All set to Disable
IP Address
All set to Disable
IP Default 172.31.0.0 through 172.31.0.Subnet Mask
255.255.248.0
Console/Serial Link
Inbound Telnet Enabled
Yes
Yes
Web Agent Enabled
Yes
Yes
7-42
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Table 7-13: Configuration Parameters
Setting
Factory Default
Recommended (Configured)
Terminal Type
VT100
ANSI
Screen Refresh Interval (sec)
3
3
Displayed Events
All
All
Baud Rate
speed-sense
speed-sense
Flow Control
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF
Session Inactivity Time (min)
0
10
Spanning Tree Operation*
* - The Spanning Tree Operation values are not shown in this window. Follow the procedure
given in the next section to see the switch Spanning Tree values.
Viewing
Spanning Tree
Values
To see the HP 2524 Spanning Tree values, you must use a Hyper Terminal
connection.
The PC must meet the following requirements:
• MicroSoft Operating System software
• 200 MHz or faster
• RS 232 serial interface port
If you are running the HyperTerminal session from the Database Server on Port A,
the UPS connection to the DBS must be temporarily removed and disabled.
To view Spanning Tree values on the HP 2524 Switch:
1. Plug one end of the 9-pin D female - 9-pin D female cable into the RS 232
connector of the configuring PC.
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the CONSOLE port located on the front of
the HP ProCurve 2524 switch.
3. Turn On the PC and Switch.
If the Server’s UPS service detects that the UPS is not connected to Serial Port
A, a message indicating At least one service failed to initialize... may appear.
If the message appears click OK, and go to Step 4.
If the message does not appear temporarily disconnect the UPS as follows:
a) From the Windows Main Menu go to Start > Control Panel > Administrative
Tools and double-click the Services icon to open the Services window.
b) Highlight UPS in the Services list.
c) Click Stop to disable the UPS connection.
A confirmation message appears.
d) Click Yes in the message dialog.
An Attempting to stop... message appears briefly.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-43
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
e) When the UPS connection is disabled, close the Services window and
Control Panel.
4. Go to Start > Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal to open the New
Connection - HyperTerminal window.
If a Connection Description window appears, click Cancel to close it.
5. Establish a Hyperterminal session to the switch:
a) Click File in the New Connection - HyperTerminal window.
b) Click Properties to open the New Connection Properties window.
c) Click the Connect to tab.
d) Click the Connect Using pull-down arrow to display the ports list.
e) Click COM1.
f)
Click Configure to display the COM1 Properties window.
g) Configure the COM1 port to the following RS 232 settings:
Bits per second: 9600
Data bits:8
Parity: None
Stop bits:1
Flow control:Xon/Xoff
h) Press Enter twice to get to the command line. If the command line does not
appear, recycle power on the switch (disconnect and connect power cable).
i)
At the command line prompt, enter the following:
Type 2 for Switch Config.
Type 4 for Spanning Tree operation.
The first 8 ports are displayed. To view the other ports, go to Edit, and press
Enter. Use the down arrow navigate.
The ports configured for 10 Mb/s Half Duplex devices and 100 Mb/s Full
Duplex devices (e.g. Database Servers, Information Centers, etc.) should be
set to FAST mode, and the Auto and 100 Mb/s Full Duplex Switch/Router
ports should be set to NORM.
6. When done, press Enter, then Press Cancel.
Viewing Cisco
Switch Data
If you select Switch in the Network Statistics screen, the list of configured switches
(and IP Addresses) appears. When you select a Cisco switch in the list, a Switch
Manager screen similar to Table 7-18 opens. If a Username and Password is
required, enter the Console Password.
Caution Verify that clinical users are not using the Information Center Web when opening
Network Statistics on the DataBase Server. When the Network Statistics page
opens, the IntelliVue Information Center Web Access loses communication.
The Switch Manager screen provides the following information about the switch and
a switch image:
7-44
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Figure 7-18: Sample Network Statistics for a Cisco Switch
• Host Name of the Server the switch is connected to.
• Name of Switch: Device Name assigned to the switch in Network Configuration.
• Switch IP Address: IP Address of the switch on the network.
• Physical Location: location of the switch entered in Network Configuration
Help provides access to additional information. Help screens may cause temporary
color changes to Philips monitoring screens but do not otherwise effect patient
monitoring display or storage.
Caution This application allows the user to change switch settings. To ensure that all
parameters are set properly, switch settings should only be changed with the
Network Configuration Tool described in the IntelliVue Clinical Network service
documentation.
The Switch Manager also provides an image of the selected switch. If you click on a
port in the switch, a Ports Table opens which has statistical information about each
port on the switch. Figure 7-19 shows an example 100 BaseT Ports Table for ports
used by switch (0/26) and the Server (0/27).
Figure 7-19: Sample 100 Base T Ports Table for a Cisco Switch
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-45
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Click on Stats... in the Statistics column of a port to open a Detailed Port Statistics
Report for the port. Figure 7-20 illustrates the Detailed Port Statistics Report for
port FastEthernet 0/27. Report statistics are cumulative from the time the device
starts or from when the Report was last cleared.
Figure 7-20: Sample Detailed Port Statistics
Access Point
Controller
Access Points
Search by IP
Access Point Controller provides a list of the networked access point controllers
configured in Network Configuration; this is described in the IntelliVue Clinical
Network documentation.
Access Points provides a list of the networked access points configured in Network
Configuration; this is described in the IntelliVue Clinical Network documentation.
Search by IP opens a dialog that permits searching for a Switch by its IP Address:
1. Type the desired IP Address in the text box.
2. Click OK.
Stop
Stop terminates a search.
Print
Print opens the Print Manager dialog.
Using PIIC Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menu provides tools for determining status and diagnostic
information on networked printers, and recorders.
!Recorder
Diagnostics
The !Recorder Diagnostics tool tests the Philips USB Recorder. It runs in nonmonitoring mode, as indicated by the exclamation mark (!). Go to Diagnostics >
!Recorder to open the Recorder Diagnostics screen.
To run a recorder self test:
7-46
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Figure 7-21: Sample Recorder Diagnostics
1. Select the Recorder to be tested by clicking on its location in the rack -- Left
Recorder, Center Recorder, or Right Recorder.
2. Click Start Test.
The Recorder generates a print out of operational status codes. Description of
codes are provided in the Recorder Service Manual.
Stop Test stops the print test before completion.
Recorder Test Status reports the self-test status and the Recorder condition.
Recording/
Printing
Diagnostics
The Recording/Printing Diagnostics tool tests the connectivity of laser printers and
Philips Recorders connected to the IntelliVue Information Center or Client. It
requires a connected printer or recorder and a source of patient data. Clicking
Recording/Printing Diagnostics in the Diagnostics menu opens the Printer &
Recorder Diagnostics screen.
Figure 7-22: Sample Printer & Recorder Diagnostics
The Printer & Recorder Diagnostics screen includes:
Recording Test
Recording type provides the data source options -- Live (an actively monitored
patient) and Test (an internal test recording).
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-47
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
• Live activates the Available Beds field from which a live recording from a
specific bed can be selected. A 20 second delayed recording of the primary and
secondary waves from the patient in that bed serves as the recording test.
• Test selects internal test data for the recording test.
-
Start initiates the selected test recordings. The Recording Test output is sent
to one of the recorders in the Recorder Rack.
-
Stop terminates a test in process.
-
Continue produces a continuous recording.
-
Status from last job indicates the status of the test (e.g. active, done, error).
Note If there is more than one recorder in the Recorder Rack and the recording test fails,
repeat the test with only one recorder in the Rack at a time to determine which
recorder is failing the test.
Printing Test
Note these printing test options:
• Start initiates the test and sends a print test page to the default printer set in
Print Manager.
• Stop terminates a test in process.
• Status from last job indicates the status of the test.
Note Printer problem troubleshooting procedures for Philips-supplied printers is
described in the manufacturer service documentation.
System
Diagnostics
System Diagnostics provides access to tools that help determining status and
diagnostic information about the Windows Operating System, hardware, drivers,
and BIOS. They are available for both Information Centers and Clients and for the
Server. These tools are accessed from the Diagnostics application of the Service
menu.
Diagnostics tools can run on the Server while the Network is in Monitoring Mode.
More detailed descriptions of these tools are provided in Windows Help windows
accessed by clicking on Help in the menu bar of each application.
Note Although Windows Help screens may cover part of patient waveforms, they do not
effect Philips system monitoring or alarms. To see patient data, resize or move the
Help screen.
Performance
Monitor
7-48
Performance Monitor is a graphical tool for measuring the performance of the
computers on the network. See Windows documentation for more detailed
information.
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Warning The Windows Explorer and the Windows Command Prompt diagnostics provide
read/write access to all IntelliVue Information Center and Operating System files.
Windows
Explorer
Command
Prompt
Backup Error
Logs
USB Recorder
Logs
Redirect HL7
Windows Explorer is the standard Window tool for organizing and managing files
and directories.
MS DOS Command Prompt is a character-based interface to Windows and its
subsystems.
Backup Error Logs copies all Event Logs and Information Center logs from selected
host names to a compressed file.The logs are copied and compressed for one
IntelliVue Information Center, Client, or Database Server at a time.
USB Recorder Logs allows the entire recorder data stream to be captured for
advanced troubleshooting.
The Redirect HL7 allows for easier troubleshooting of HL7 data export problems.
This diagnostic tool redirects the HL7 target system output data configured for one
target system to a different host system and allows the Client.exe tool to run on the
Database Server. The original target system will not receive the HL7 data while this
tool is running.
This can be run while in Monitoring mode, however there is a possibility that a
restart may be required.
To redirect the HL7 output data:
1. From the Database Server service screen, go to Diagnostics > Redirect HL7.
Figure 7-23: Sample Redirect HL7 Dialog
2. Select the IP Address of the Target system you want the HL7 output data
redirected from that is in the From drop-down list.
3. Enter the IP Address of the Target system you want the HL7 output data
redirected to in the To text box.
4. Click Redirect.
If successful, a message confirms that the HL7 output has been redirected. If
not successful, a message displays.
5. After the data has been collected, the target system must be returned to the
original configuration. Follow steps 2 through 4, but swap the From and To IP
Addresses.
Note The Redirect HL7 menu must be used to return the target system setting to the
original configuration.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-49
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Service Portal
Support
The Diagnostics menu of the Database Server has a Service Portal Support
application that provides direct access to most of the Support Logs for all devices
on the network—IntelliVue Information Centers, Clients, Switches and Access Points.
Note The Event Log and its Application and System log files are not available when using
Service Portal Support.
To access Service Portal support:
1. Go to Diagnostics > Windows Explorer from the Service screen of the Database
Server.
2. In the Windows Explorer window go to Stardate > Logs and open
NetDeviceLink.html. The Link to Network Devices dialog opens
(Figure 7-24).
Note Service Portal Support capability is also available to a remote PC accessing the
Server through Remote Access Services. Refer to Appendix C for details.
Figure 7-24: Link to Network Devices Window
When you click the link next to each device, a menu of available Logs for that device
appears. For example, if you click the Link \\172.31.0.70\Logs next to the Device
Type M3155 Information Center, the Logs screen appears. Icons for each of the logs
available through Service Portal Support display.
When you click a Switch Link or Access Point Link the Network Statistics screens for
that device appear (page 7-39).
7-50
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
RAID Utilities
You can view RAID settings with the Array Configuration Utility. The utility is slightly
different for each hardware platform.
The Array Configuration Utility provides direct access to status and configuration
settings of the Server RAID software. The M3169 Database Server does not support
RAID. If you want to access the Utility setup:
1. Go to Shutdown > Desktop Tools from the Service screen.
Alternatively, from the Windows Task bar go to Start > Programs > HP System
Tools > Setup HP Array Configuration Utility.
The Array Configuration Utility Setup screen appears.
2. Select Local Application Mode or Remote Service Mode.
• Local Application Mode (Default) permits running the utility on the local
machine only.
• Remote Service Mode permits running the utility as a Windows service,
which automatically runs in the background at all times.
3. Click OK.
4. Select Start > Programs > HP System Tools > HP Array Configuration Utility.
The Array Configuration Utility screen displays (Figure 7-25).
Figure 7-25: Sample Array Configuration Utility
5. Select Show Physical View to view the Array Settings.
If the RAID configuration must be restored, refer to Restoring Large DataBase
Server RAID Configurations.
Using Configuration Tools
The Configuration menu selections provide tools for configuring Network devices,
the Server, IntelliVue Information Centers, and Clients. These tools are typically
used during initial configuration. If you want to view the device configuration
settings without putting the device into local database mode, you can use the Read
Only Config Wizard selection.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-51
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Figure 7-26: Configuration Tools
Config Wizard
The Config Wizard selection permits configuration of Information Centers, Clients,
Network Devices, and the Database Server (refer to Chapter 6). When you select
this option all connected Information Centers and Clients drop into Config Mode.
Read Only
Config Wizard
Read Only Config Wizard displays the current configuration settings. It does not
cause all devices to restart into local database mode. To select a configuration
page, click the associated tab.
Archive
Set Time/Date
Report
Configuration
Archive creates an archive of the existing configuration settings.
Set Time/Date sets and synchronizes the date and time on all devices on the
IntelliVue Clinical Network.
Report Configuration configures and creates the layout of the configured report
types. Settings include header and footer, print date/time stamp, Patient Name,
Medical Record Number, Bed label, page number, Unit name, and Hospital name.
Report/
Recording
Destination
Report/Recording Destination is used by Information Centers and Clients that have
no recorder connected to select another device with a recorder to print its
recordings. This is only available in non-monitoring mode. Adding a 2-Channel
recorder can only be changed by running the Config Wizard on a M3155 Information
Center/M3151 Client and updating the Report and Recording Destination page;
and on a M3150 Information Center/Database Server Network Configuration page.
Add/Remove
Database
Servers
Add/Remove Database Servers is used by the Master Database Server for adding
and removing non-master Database Servers. This list is used in the Web Access and
Patient Data Transfer options.
If a Master Database Server adds a non-master server to its list, verify that the nonmaster does not already have a Master Database Server associated with it. If the
non-master has another Master Database Server name configured, it will not accept
the new Master Database Server.
When the Web Access/Large Network system option is enabled, and a new Master/
non-master relationship is configured, note that all the clinician data (Usernames
7-52
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
and Passwords) on the non-master server will be lost. These must be re-entered
using the Web User Access Config Tool, as described in Appendix B.
Note If you want to remove a slave server, the slave Database Server must be in
monitoring mode and it must be network-connected to the other servers on the
Hospital LAN.
Patient Data
Transfer Bandwidth
Utilization
Patient Data Transfer has submenus for selecting Low, Medium and High
Bandwidth utilization. These settings control the hospital LAN bandwidth utilization
during patient data transfer. Medium is the factory default and provides the overall
best transfer duration. At the same time, it minimizes hospital LAN bandwidth
utilization for both 10 and 100 Mbit LANs.
Patient Data Transfer times vary depending on the number of network switches and
routers the connection must go through. Table 7-14 provides time estimates and
bandwidth utilizations that the Patient Data Transfer can use on these networks.
If transfer time is too long, adjust the Bandwidth Utilization setting to shorten the
transfer time. The change takes 3 to 5 seconds and can be done while monitoring.
When you decrease the data transfer time, however, the bandwidth utilization of the
hospital LAN will increase.
Table 7-14: Patient Data Transfer - Bandwidth Utilization
Hospital Infrastructure
Topology
Pure 100 Mbit Hospital LAN
Mixed 10/100 Mbit Hospital LAN
Peak Bandwidth
Utilization (Average)
Patient Data Transfer
Duration
Bandwidth Utilization
Setting
72 Mbps
32 Mbps (avg)
1-2 minutes
High
56 Mbps
30 Mbps (avg)
3-5 minutes
Medium
32 Mbps
8 Mbps (avg)
10-15 minutes
Low
8 Mbps
8 Mbps (avg)
6-8 minutes
High
8 Mbps
6 Mbps (avg)
10-12 minutes
Medium
8 Mbps
4 Mbps (avg)
15-20 minutes
Low
Note Patient Data Transfer durations are estimates. Actual time on a hospital network will
vary depending on the design of the network and the level of network bandwidth
that is available.
Equipment
Label
Assignment
Used by the Information Centers/Clients/Database Server to assign equipment
labels to IntelliVue Telemetry System transceivers (refer to the IntelliVue Telemetry
System documentation for details on the transceiver LEDs/functionality).
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-53
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
1. Insert the batteries into the telemetry device. The device responds with flashing
LEDs and continuous beeps.
2. When the new Device MAC address displays in the New Devices list, verify it
matches the MAC address found in the battery compartment of the transceiver.
If it matches, select the desired equipment label from the Unassigned labels.
3. Select Assign Label button to initiate the programming of the label into the
telemetry device, then select the Check button on the telemetry device within
10 seconds. The transceiver responds by resetting. A “Assignment Complete”
message appears on the Information Center, and moves that device to the
Assigned column.
4. To clear a monitor label from an existing labeled transceiver, select the Reset
key, and the device is now listed in the New Device list.
Device Pool
Configuration
The Device Pool Configuration tool is used to define and edit equipment pools. The
list of units provided for sharing the equipment encompasses all units across the
entire large monitoring network. This information is replicated to all database
servers participating in the pool. Refer to Device Pooling Configuration for details.
When the Device Pool window is accessed from the Service Menus (server in
monitoring mode) on a database server, the following operating conditions apply:
• Add, Rename, Assign, and Replicate buttons are enabled.
• Delete and Unassign buttons are disabled.
• Changes made during monitoring mode must be replicated to other server(s).
-
Add device pool, and Assign unit to device pool - Replicate changes manually
to take effect on other server(s).
-
Rename device pool - Changes are replicated automatically across servers.
There is no need to manually replicate.
If multiple servers are being added over time and Device Pooling will be used, the
existing servers in the large network must be in monitoring mode when the new
server is added in order for the information to be replicated properly.
Save/View
Configuration
Save/View Configuration permits screen viewing of a configuration report and
saving of the report to file.
Using Security Tools
Change Clinical
Units Password
Change Clinical Units Password opens the Change Clinical Units Password dialog
which permits changing the Unit Settings Password.
Change Service
Password
Change Service Password opens the Change Service Password screen which
permits changing the Service User password.
Research Export
Options
EWS/Device
Location
Compatibility
7-54
Research Export Options permits sending identified or de-identified Research Data
Export files to the selected target destination clients.
EWS/Device Location Compatibility opens a dialog that can permit an earlier
software release EWS workstation to connect to the Server.
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Warning User Manager provides read/write access to all Internet configurations.
User Manager
User Manager opens a dialog to view, set, or change logon account configurations
that permit access to patient data on the Server from the hospital web.
Using Other Service Tools
Control Panel
The Control Panel selection enables use of Windows tools to make installation and
configuration settings for Philips systems.
Warning During Philips software installation, the Philips Installation media and Installation
Support Tool automatically set Operating System parameters to the proper values.
Therefore, the tools described in this section should only be used to validate
settings and not to change or modify them.
More detailed descriptions of the Windows Control Panel tools are included in
Windows Help.
The service applications, when opened, may display over the Main Screen. If this
happens, you can use the mouse to move the window. If an application is open, but
not maximized, press Alt + Tab keys simultaneously to view and select from the
active applications.
!Services
Displays the status of Windows and OS software applications and provides for
stopping and starting them without having to restart the software. Clicking on
!Services, brings up the Services window. (Figure 7-27)
Figure 7-27: Services Window
If the Status of an application is Stopped, you can restart it.
1. Select the desired serviced from the Services screen.
2. Right-click and select Start from the drop-down menu.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-55
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
If the Status of a service is Started, but the application does not seem to work
properly, you can stop the service and restart it.
Warning Internet Service Manager provides read/write access to all Internet configurations.
Software
Versions
Software Version displays the current versions of the Product, Application, Network,
and Operating software currently installed on the system.
Internet Service
Manager
Internet Service Manager is used to configure settings that control hospital network
PC access to patient data on the PIIC Server.
System
Validation
System Validation checks system level settings for configuration components and
networking. It is available on Database Servers and M3150 IntelliVue Information
Centers. The selected items are checked and labeled with one of the following
symbols.
Information - No action necessary
Warning - Steps may be taken to correct the problem or understand why the
warning message is logged.
Error - Steps must be taken to correct problem.
Double-click an item to display information about how to resolve any issues
associated with that item.
Shutting Down a System
In some cases, software problems can be resolved by shutting down and restarting
equipment.
In some cases, a dialog box will open when the operating system cannot shut down
a process. If this dialog box appears, select End Task to continue the shutdown
process.
Shutdown Normal
Shutdown - Normal permits a controlled software shutdown while saving all data
and configuration settings.
Caution Shutdown Normal is the only recommended way to shut down the Philips system. If
you use the Reset or power Off buttons or remove the power plug to shut down the
Philips system, you can corrupt the NTFS.
To perform a normal shut down:
1. Go to Shutdown > Shutdown-Normal in the Service screen.
The Shutdown Server screen displays a warning (Figure 7-28).
The Shutdown Server warning shows the shutdown mode options:
Shutdown - The Philips system shuts down normally. Windows messages follow
describing the process.
7-56
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Figure 7-28: Shutdown Server Warning
Shutdown and Restart - The Philips system shuts down normally and
automatically restarts system software and opens all Philips applications.
Desktop Tools - The Philips system shuts down and the Windows Desktop
displays. A complete restart is required to open Philips application software and
return to central monitoring.
Desktop Tools is disabled unless you are in Configuration Mode. To properly
drop IICs into local database mode during an upgrade, for example, always use
Configuration Mode.
2. Click the option button next the desired option to select it.
3. Click OK.
Desktop Tools
Desktop Tools shuts down Philips application software and returns the Server to the
Operating System mode.
When you select Desktop Tools, a warning (Figure 7-29) displays.
Figure 7-29: Desktop Tools Shutdown Warning
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-57
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
If you select Yes, the Philips software shuts down and all IntelliVue Information
Centers and Clients and goes into local database mode. The Windows Desktop
displays with a Config Wizard icon.
Note Desktop Tools is disabled unless you are in Config Mode. To properly drop IICs into
local database mode during an upgrade, for example, always use Config Mode.
Using Maintenance Tools
Restart IIS
Admin Service
Restart IIS Admin Service restarts the Internet Information Server used in the Web
Access and Paging functions. Use this tool when:
• The Web Access feature persistently fails from various locations,
• The Server busy message appears, or
• There are persistent failures notifying you to Contact System Administrator.
Restart DBServ
Restart DBServ stops and restarts the DBServ process with no interruptions to
monitoring. This should only be run when all of the following services are
persistently failing:
• Patient Data storage and retrieval
• 12 Lead Analysis/Export
• Patient Data Transfer
• Holter Export
• Web Overview
• HL7 Export
• SNTP Time Source
• Bed-to-bed overview
• Care Groups
Contact the Response Center or factory for recommendations if this condition
persists.
Restart Network
Service
Restart NetworkService restarts the network related services. It does not cause loss
of patient data and will not cause the information centers to transition to local
mode. This option is available on large and small Database servers. This process is
responsible for the following engines:
• Network Infrastructure Status
• Bootp
• Bedside/Telemetry Monitoring Connections
• Bedside Remote Printing
• Alarm Reflector/overview
• WMTS/BEAR8 Statistics
• RAID Checker Service
7-58
Service Personnel Troubleshooting Tools
Synchronize
Large Network
Server List
Synchronize Large Network Server List manually synchronizes the server list on
each server in a Large network system configuration only available on the M3154
Database Server). This is a rare condition which occurs during configuration and
startup on the non-master Database Server when it cannot locate the Master
Database Server.
When the dialog opens that requests the Master Database Server name, enter the
name and click Synchronize.
Reset Recorder
Logs
Reset Recorder Logs resets the USB Recorder log files.
Reset Database
Log
Reset Database Log resets the SQL server transaction log files. When using this
utility, all Information Centers and Clients will restart into local database mode. This
should only be run when all of the patient-related operations fail:
• Admit/Discharge
• Transfer
• changing alarm limits
• Arrhythmia settings
• Care Groups
A failure message is logged into the System Error Log Files:
[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server] The log file for
Database ‘viridia’ is full. Back up the transaction log for the
database to free up some log space
Contact the Response Center or factory for recommendations.
!Upgrade NLS
Catalogs
Upgrade NLS Catalogs permits upgrading the Native Language Support (NLS) text
catalog on all devices when new bedside releases are available. When you select
this option all connected IntelliVue Information Center and Clients go into Config
Mode.
Upgrade NLS Catalogs - Automatic Process
You must get the NLS text catalog files from the patient monitor Support Tool CD.
1. Insert the media containing the NLS text catalog files into the appropriate drive
of the Database Server.
2. Select !Upgrade NLS Files from the Maintenance menu on the Database Server
service shell window.
A dialog opens.
3. Click Browse to open the Browse for Folder dialog.
4. Select the drive containing the NLS text catalogs, and click OK in the Browse for
Folder dialog.
5. Select the appropriate NLS version from the New Version of NLS Catalog list,
then click Begin File Transfer. The Transfer Status text box shows success or
error messages.
If a device continues to fail you can skip the device, then use the manual
process to upgrade it (Upgrade NLS Catalogs - Manual Process).
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-59
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Figure 7-30: NLS Catalog Upgrade Dialog
Figure 7-31: Sample NLS Catalog Upgrade
6. When complete, restart the connected M3155 Information Centers and Clients.
They automatically return to monitoring.
Upgrade NLS Catalogs - Manual Process
The patient monitor Support Tool media contains NLS text catalog files that are
required for the NLS Catalog upgrade process.
You cannot have two folders with the same major revision number in the nls
directory. If the device has an earlier version of the major revision NLS catalog you
must delete it before you copy the new NLS catalog in the directory. Different major
revision folders (i.e. 5_12, 6_45) can reside in the nls directory.
Major Revision
Version
Figure 7-32: NLS Catalog Revision and Version Numbers
7-60
Using HL7 Troubleshooting Tools
All devices go into Non-monitoring Mode during the upgrade process.
To manually upgrade NLS catalogs:
1. Insert the media containing the NLS text catalog files into the appropriate
device drive.
2. Using Windows Explorer browse the CD for the folder that contains the desired
NLS text catalog file.
[CD drive]:Stardate\PicoNetDa\nls.
3. Copy the folder, then paste it in the appropriate device location.
C:\Stardate\PicoNetDa\nls
Figure 7-33: Sample NLS Catalog Text Files
4. Verify that all language folders are in the new NLS text catalog directory (e.g.,
6_45) and that there is a file in each language folder.
5. Restart the device. It will restart automatically in Monitoring Mode.
6. Repeat Steps 1 - 5 for each Information Center, Client, and Database Server in
the system.
WMTS Data
Collection
WMTS Data Collection permits data collection for the wireless medical telemetry
system (IntelliVue Telemetry System).
Using HL7 Troubleshooting Tools
The tools available to assist in troubleshooting HL7 problems are:
• the client.exe tool for the Unsolicited Message Interface (UMI) and
• the qryclnt.exe tool for the Query Message Interface.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-61
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
These tools are located on the PIIC Application software USB and can be run on the
M3154 Database Server or on a PC on the hospital LAN.
The Export.log file located in the Stardate\Log directory contains HL7 interface and
external receiving system messages that can be useful in the troubleshooting
process.
Client.exe tool
The Client.exe tool is to be used for troubleshooting UMI messages.
To run this tool on the Database Server, the Database Server HL7 settings must
reflect the target host name and the IP Address of the second NIC. If this is done
when the tool is run, all connected IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients will
restart into local database mode. If this is unacceptable, run the tool on a PC
connected to the hospital LAN.
To run the client.exe tool:
1. Insert the PIIC Software installation media in the appropriate drive. Copy the
client.exe tool located in the Viridia\Tools\HL7 directory to the C:\Temp
directory.
2. Open a Command Prompt window, and change the directory to C:\Temp.
3. Type CLIENT xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (IP Address of second NIC or DBS hostname) >
test.txt (e.g., CLIENT 192.35.0.55 > test.txt or CLIENT DBSSVR1 > test.txt).
4. Press Enter.
HL7 output is saved as ASCII text in a file in the C:\Temp directory. Let the data
collection continue for five minutes.
5. Press Ctrl + C keys simultaneously to end the program.
6. After you review the file save it to removable media.
7. Delete test.txt from the C:\Temp directory.
8. If the tool was used on the Database Server, the HL7 target client name must
be changed back to the original hostname using Config Wizard.
Qryclnt.exe Tool
The Qryclnt.exe tool is for troubleshooting the Query Message Interface. It is to be
used by the third party that programs the HL7 Query message interface for the
hospital. This tool can be run on the hospital HL7 target client (Windows based) to
troubleshoot HL7 problems configured for the solicited message interface.
Syntax:
QRYCLNT <server> [/CONTINUOUS] [query1. queryn]
where:
<server> is the host name or IP address of the target client.
/CONTINUOUS if used, repeats the query continuously
query1 .. queryn lists with bed labels specifications
Example:
7-62
Using HL7 Troubleshooting Tools
ICU1 ICU2 “Bed12”
If the list with bed labels specifications is empty, then a query for all beds is
generated.
First Character Codes
The first character identifies the software version on the IntelliVue Information
Center.
IIC Release Version
First Character
K
D
L/M/N
E
Second Character Codes
The second character identifies the patient category, pacing mode, and analysis
level..
Patient Type
Paced Mode
Arrhythmia Level
Second Character
Neo
True
Cardiotach
0
Basic
1
Enhanced
2
Cardiotach
3
Basic
4
Enhanced
5
Cardiotach
6
Basic
7
Enhanced
8
False
Ped
True
False
Adult
True
False
Cardiotach
9
Basic
B
Enhanced
C
Cardiotach
D
Basic
F
Enhanced
G
Cardiotach
H
Basic
J
Enhanced
K
Third and Fourth Character Codes
The third and fourth character identifies the:
• Classification mode (single or multi-lead)
• Detection mode (auto or manual)
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-63
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
• User specified lead label (manual detection mode only)
• User specified minimum threshold (150-350uV) (manual detection mode only)
• Algorithm minimum detection threshold (150-350uV) (manual detection mode
only)
Use the Multi/Manual/Lead I entries as a guideline in determining the appropriate
expanded values for each Lead listed.
Classification
Mode
Multi
Single
7-64
User Specified
Detection Lead
User-Specified
Detection
Threshold
Algorithm
Minimum
Detection
Threshold
Auto
N/A
N/A
150
00
Manual
Lead I
150
150
350
10
11a
200
200
350
12
131
250
250
350
14
151
300
300
350
16
171
350
350
350
18
191
Lead II
150 - 350
150 - 350
20 - 29
Lead III
150 - 350
150 - 350
30 - 39
Lead AVR
150 - 350
150 - 350
40 - 49
Lead AVL
150 - 350
150 - 350
50 - 59
Detection
Mode
Third & Fourth
Character
Lead AVF
150 - 350
150 - 350
60 - 69
Lead V1
150 - 350
150 - 350
70 - 79
Lead V2
150 - 350
150 - 350
80 - 89
Lead V3
150 - 350
150 - 350
90 - 99
Lead V4
150 - 350
150 - 350
B0 - B9
Lead V5
150 - 350
150 - 350
C0 - C9
Lead V6
150 - 350
150 - 350
D0 - D9
Lead V
150 - 350
150 - 350
F0 - F9
Lead V7
150 - 350
150 - 350
G0 - G9
Lead V8
150 - 350
150 - 350
H0 - H9
Lead V9
150 - 350
150 - 350
J0 - J9
Lead V3R
150 - 350
150 - 350
K0 - K9
Lead V4R
150 - 350
150 - 350
L0 - L9
Lead V5R
150 - 350
150 - 350
M0 - M9
Lead V6R
150 - 350
150 - 350
w0 - w9
Lead MCL
150 - 350
150 - 350
N0 - N9
Auto
N/A
N/A
150
01
Manual
Lead I
150 - 350
150 - 350
P0 - P9
Lead II
150 - 350
150 - 350
R0 - R9
Lead III
150 - 350
150 - 350
S0 - S9
Using HL7 Troubleshooting Tools
Classification
Mode
Detection
Mode
a.
User Specified
Detection Lead
User-Specified
Detection
Threshold
Algorithm
Minimum
Detection
Threshold
Third & Fourth
Character
Lead AVR
150 - 350
150 - 350
T0 - T9
Lead AVL
150 - 350
150 - 350
V0 - V9
Lead AVF
150 - 350
150 - 350
W0 - W9
Lead V1
150 - 350
150 - 350
X0 - X9
Lead V2
150 - 350
150 - 350
Y0 - Y9
Lead V3
150 - 350
150 - 350
Z0 - Z9
Lead V4
150 - 350
150 - 350
b0 - b9
Lead V5
150 - 350
150 - 350
c0 - c9
Lead V6
150 - 350
150 - 350
d0 - d9
Lead V
150 - 350
150 - 350
f0 - f9
Lead V7
150 - 350
150 - 350
g0 - g9
Lead V8
150 - 350
150 - 350
h0 - h9
Lead V9
150 - 350
150 - 350
j0 - j9
Lead V3R
150 - 350
150 - 350
k0 - k9
Lead V4R
150 - 350
150 - 350
m0 - m9
Lead V5R
150 - 350
150 - 350
n0 - n9
Lead V6R
150 - 350
150 - 350
x0 - x9
Lead MCL
150 - 350
150 - 350
p0 - p9
User specified lead is not active
Fifth Character Codes
The fifth character identifies the number of active classification and detection
channels and EASI mode/EASI coefficient set.
EASI Mode
Active Classification Channels
Active Detection Channels
Fifth Character
Standard (nonEASI) electrode
placement
0
0
0
1
1
2
2
0
3
1
4
2
5
0
6
1
7
2
8
1
2
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-65
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
EASI Mode
Active Detection Channels
Fifth Character
EASI placement for 0
conventional 12Lead derivation
Active Classification Channels
0
9
1
B
2
C
1
0
D
1
F
2
G
0
H
1
J
2
K
2
Sixth Character Codes
The sixth character identifies the ECG hardware source and lead set in use (3-wire,
EASI, etc.).
ECG HW Source
Lead Set
Sixth Character
unknown
unknown
0 or z
3w
1
4w
2
5w
3
6w
4
10w
5
unknown
6
3w
7
4w
8
M1400 A/B Telemetry
M1001A ECG Module
M1002A
ECG/Resp Module
M1001B
ECG Module
M1002B
ECG/Resp Module
M3000A Measurement Server
M2601 A/B
7-66
5w
9
unknown
B
3w
C
5w
D
unknown
F
3w
G
5w
H
unknown
J
3w
K
5w
L
unknown
M
3w
N
5w
P
unknown
R
3w
S
5w
T
unknown
V
3w
W
5w
X
Using HL7 Troubleshooting Tools
ECG HW Source
Lead Set
Sixth Character
M2601 A/B as
M1400A/B
unknown
Y
3w
Z
5w
b
unknown
c
3w
d
5w
f
10w
g
unknown
h
3w
j
5w
k
M3001A Measurement Server
M353xA
M4841A
10w
m
unknown
n
3w
p
5w
r
6w
s
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-67
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Seventh Character Code
The seventh character identifies the Source of Asystole, Pause, Missed Beat, PNP or
PNC alarm (detection or beat interval).
Event Source
Asystole
Pause
Seventh Character
N/A
g_look_ahead
N/A
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
N/A
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.25
2.25
2.25
2.25
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.25
2.25
2.25
2.25
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
C
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
V
W
X
Y
Z
b
c
d
f
g
h
j
k
m
n
p
r
s
t
v
g_look_back
g_look_ahead_beat_
rejection
7-68
LED Diagnostics
LED Diagnostics
When investigating signal flow, many hardware components have diagnostic LEDs
that can be used to determine whether they are functioning properly and are
receiving and passing data. These include:
• LAN Interface Card
• Access Point*
• Switch*
• Repeater*
• 10 Mbit/s Media Translator Transceiver*
• 100 Mbit/s Media Translator*
* The LED descriptions for these components are in the IntelliVue Clinical
Network documentation.
Brief description of LAN Interface Card LED diagnostic tools and the meaning of
their lighting codes are presented in this section as a guide for determining
operational status, identifying hardware problems, and tracing signal continuity in
the IntelliVue Clinical Network. For more detailed discussions of the use of these
LEDs in troubleshooting, consult the manufacturer service documentation.
Continuity of signal flow in LAN cards can be determined by the Link LEDs as shown
in Figure 7-34.
Figure 7-34: LAN Card Link LEDs
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-69
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-15 describes the Link LED behavior.
Table 7-15: LAN Card LED Diagnostics
LED Condition
Description
Possible Cause
Off
No Link
no connection
device at other end of cable is Off
faulty cable
inverted TX/RX
Solid Green
Flashing Green
Operational
proper operation with or without activity
Performing Corrective Actions
Once a problem is localized to a specific hardware device or software application,
causes of the problem can be identified and corrective actions taken.
For most Philips system hardware the documentation provided with the unit is the
primary source of repair information. Refer to specific hardware documentation for
proper troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair procedures.
Clearing Tripp Lite UPS Watchdog Events
The Tripp Lite UPS with Hardware Watchdog ensures that if a monitored service
stops responding the Watchdog will restart it. If the service cannot be restarted the
system is restarted. A repeating series of triple beeps suggests a Watchdog event.
The tones continue until you manually silence them or until the Operating System
successfully restarts.
The Tripp Lite UPS with Hardware Watchdog has Power Alert Software that can
confirm, disable, or enable the Watchdog status.
Confirming
Watchdog
Status
Confirm the Watchdog status in the Power Alert Software as follows:
1. Go to Start > Programs > Tripp Lite > PowerAlert > PowerAlert Console.
The Power Alert Console displays.
2. Click the Detail icon and use the scroll bar to view the Device Details.
3. Scroll to Watchdog Information, and verify that the Watchdog Status is Enabled.
4. Close the Power Alert Console window.
7-70
Performing Corrective Actions
Figure 7-35: Confirming Watchdog Status
Enabling/
Disabling the
Watchdog
If you need to enable or disable the Watchdog, do the following:
1. Go to Start > Programs > Tripp Lite > PowerAlert > PowerAlert Console.
2. Click the Actions icon in the Power Alert Console screen.
The Device Control Commands displays.
Figure 7-36: Enabling/Disabling the Watchdog
3. In the Control Comment drop-down menu, select Disable Watchdog or Enable
Watchdog.
4. Click the Execute Command button.
5. Confirm the Watchdog status and close the Power Alert Console screen.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-71
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Correcting APC UPS Problems
Table 7-16 describes Symptoms, Possible Causes, and Corrective Actions for
problems with the APC UPS. Corrective actions described in this table take
precedence over those described in the APC UPS User’s Manual.
The most common problem encountered is a tripped UPS circuit breaker due to
excessive loads. If the UPS circuit breaker is tripped, remove excess loads and reset
the circuit breaker.
Table 7-16: Troubleshooting the APC UPS
Symptom
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
UPS will not turn on (lamp within
power switch is not illuminated),
but beeps when power switch is
on.
Rear panel circuit breaker is tripped.
(Circuit breaker is tripped when button
is extended.)
Unplug excessive loads and press button
to reset breaker.
Line cord plug is not properly
connected.
Check line cord plug and engage it
properly.
There is no power at wall socket.
Check power at wall socket and establish
proper power.
Building wiring error, such as a missing
ground, hot and neutral polarity
reversed, or overloaded neutral wiring.
A qualified electrician should be called to
correct the building wiring problem. The
UPS will not provide rated noise and surge
suppression with incorrect building wiring.
Ground not connected, e.g. “cheater”
plug or adapter installed on line cord
plug.
Plug the UPS into a proper 3 wire
grounded outlet only.
UPS occasionally emits a beep,
but connected equipment
operates normally.
The UPS is briefly transferring the
equipment to its alternate power
source due to incoming power spikes
or sags.
This operation is normal. The UPS is
protecting connected equipment from
abnormal line voltages. If the audible
alarm becomes annoying, set option
switch #1 to its up position.
UPS emits a beep very often
(more than once or twice an
hour), but connected equipment
operates normally.
Utility voltage is distorted or branch
circuits are too heavily loaded.
Have the line power checked by an
electrician and corrected if not adequate.
UPS emits loud tone.
Power I/O switch is on, but
connected equipment is not
powered.
UPS rear panel circuit breaker is
tripped (button extended).
Normal utility voltages are known
to be supplied.
UPS has shut down due to severe
overload.
UPS operates normally, but SITE
WIRING FAULT indicator is
illuminated.
7-72
Operate UPS from an outlet on a different
branch fuse or circuit breaker with
adequate power.
Turn off the UPS and unplug excessive
loads. Laser printers will overload the UPS
and should not be connected to the UPS.
When overload is removed, press the
button to reset the circuit breaker.
Performing Corrective Actions
Table 7-16: Troubleshooting the APC UPS
Symptom
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
UPS emits loud tone during utility
failure.
Power I/O switch is on, but
connected equipment is not
powered.
Rear panel circuit breaker is not
tripped.
UPS has shut down due to overload.
Turn off UPS and unplug excessive loads.
UPS may be turned on when line power is
restored.
UPS does not provide expected
run time. Low battery warning is
sounded prematurely.
Excessive loads connected to UPS.
Unplug excessive loads from UPS.
Battery is weak due to wear or recent
operation during utility power outage.
Recharge battery by leaving UPS plugged
in for 12 hours without use.
Test control during recharge. If UPS
sounds low battery warning prematurely
when retested, replace battery or UPS.
UPS beeps continuously.
Lamp within I/O power switch is
illuminated.
Line power has not failed.
Circuit breaker is tripped
Unplug excessive loads and press button
to reset circuit breaker.
Line cord plug is not properly
connected
Check line cord plug and engage it
properly.
Signal is not applied during line power
failure.
UPS responds to this signal only during
utility failures (load is operating from the
UPS’s internal power source).
Signal is not referenced to the UPS
common.
Signal must be referenced to the UPS
common at pins 4 or 9.
Excessive loads connected to the UPS.
Excessive loading may shorten run time to
less than the 2 or 5 minute low battery
warning interval. Remove excessive loads.
Battery capacity is low due to wear or
consecutive line power failures.
Consecutive line power failures may not
allow time for the battery to recharge,
thereby causing shortened run time.
Recharge battery by leaving UPS plugged
in for 12 hours without use.
UPS is loaded to less than 10% of rated
capacity.
This operation is normal. The low battery
warning interval is adjusted at the factory
for consistent operation at loads above
10% of rated capacity.
UPS does not shut down when
RS-232 HI level is applied to
computer interface port pin 1.
Low battery warning interval is
shorter than 2 or 5 minutes,
according to rear panel option
switch #4 setting:
down = 2 minutes
up = 5 minutes
Low battery warning interval is
much longer than 2 or 5 minutes,
according to rear panel option
switch #4 setting:
down = 2 minutes
up = 5 minutes
If an APC UPS problem cannot be resolved, record the UPS model, serial number,
and date of purchase. Report the problem and the recorded information to the UPS
Customer Service Department at the phone number listed in the UPS User’s
Manual. Replace the UPS on the Philips system to ensure continuous patient
monitoring.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-73
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Reconfiguring the APC UPS
Philips PCs and Servers are preconfigured for proper UPS operation when shipped
from Philips. If you must reset lost configurations, do the following.
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel to open the Control Panel window.
2. Click the Power Options icon.
The Power Options Property window displays.
3. Select the UPS tab in the Power Options Property window and click the
Configure button in the Details section of the window.
The UPS Configuration dialog displays.
Figure 7-37: Enabling/Disabling the Watchdog
4. Verify the UPS configuration settings (Figure 7-37) and click OK to close the
UPS Configuration dialog.
5. Close the Power Options Property window and Control Panel to return to the
Windows desktop.
Correcting Philips Recorder Problems
Table 7-17 describes problem Symptoms, Possible Causes, and Corrective Actions
for the Philips Recorder.
7-74
Performing Corrective Actions
Table 7-17: Troubleshooting the Recorder
Symptom/Message
XXX recorder out of paper
Possible Cause(s)
Corrective Action(s)
Recorder is out of paper.
Replace paper roll.
Paper-out sensor is dirty.
Clean paper-out sensor.
Recorder is faulty.
Replace Recorder.
Recorder door is open.
Close Recorder door.
Door switch is dirty.
Clean door switch.
Door switch is defective.
Replace door switch.
Recorder is faulty.
Replace Recorder.
No Recorder is in the Recorder Rack.
Insert Recorder in Recorder Rack.
Recorder Rack or Rack Power Supply
cable is disconnected or faulty.
Connect or replace cable.
XXX recorder hardware fault
Poor Recorder connection to the Rack.
Unplug the Recorder from the Rack
and plug it in again (watch for LED
to flash).
Recorder Rack or Power Supply
Fault or No Recorder
Power supply cable is faulty.
Check Rack and Recorder power
supply cables.
Recorder is faulty.
Replace Recorder.
Recorder Rack is faulty.
Replace Rack.l
(XXX = Left, Center, or Right)
XXX recorder door is open
No recorders available
Restoring Printer Configurations
With Release N.01, your printer configuration will not be archived, so be sure to
save and restore your local printer configuration using the Microsoft Windows
Printer Migration Wizard or equivalent.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-75
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Adding DBS Printers
PIIC Release N.01 uses the standard Windows Operating System Printer Service to
configure printers other than BootP Monitoring LAN printers which must be added
with Config Wizard (Chapter 6). Compatible printers are those that use the HP
Universal Printer Driver (HP Universal Printing PCL 5).
If you want to print the DBS configuration file or share a printer that resides on the
Hospital LAN you must configure the printer on the DBS as follows:
1. From the Service screen, go to Other Services > Control Panel and double-click
the Devices and Printers icon.
2. Double-click Add a printer at the top of the window.
The Add Printer dialog appears.
3. Select Add a local printer, and click Next >.
4. In the Choose a printer port screen select, the Create a new port option, and
select Standard TCP/IP Port in the Type of port drop-down list. Then click Next >.
Before you enter the Printer Name or IP Address, the desired printer must be
connected to the network switch and configured with a TCP/IP Address for the
Monitoring LAN. If necessary refer to Printer Manufacturer documentation for
setting an IP Address at the printer.
5. Enter the printer IP Address in the Host Name or IP Address text box. The Port
Name text box automatically populates.
Un-check the Query the printer and automatically select the driver to use
checkbox.
Then Click Next >.
If you see the Additional Port Information Required screen, the printer is offline
or not configured correctly.
6. In the Install Printer Software screen, select HP as the printer Manufacturer,
and HP Universal Printing PCL 5 on the Printers list. Then click Next >.
All Philips-supplied printers are compatible with the HP Universal Printing PCL 5
Driver.
7. In the Use Existing Driver screen, do not select Replace Existing Driver. Then
click Next >.
8. In the Name Your Printer screen, enter the desired name in the text box. Then
select the desired option (Yes or No) for the Do you want to use this printer as
the default printer setting. Click Next > to continue.
9. In the Printer Sharing screen, do not share the printer. Then click Next > to
continue.
10. In the Location and Comment screen, enter descriptive information in the
Location and Comment text boxes. Then click Next >.
11. In the Print Test Page screen, click Yes if you want to print a test page. Then click
Next >.
12. Review the printer information in the Completing the Add Printer Wizard screen
and click Finish.
7-76
Performing Corrective Actions
If you chose to print a test page, a dialog opens. If the page printed correctly,
click Yes in the dialog. If the page did not print correctly, click Troubleshoot.
13. Refer to Setting Printer Attributes to configure printer settings.
14. Set the new printer properties.
The DBS Network Configuration screen in Config Wizard permits configuration of
BootP for Networked Printers on the Monitoring LAN. See Adding Network Devices in
Chapter 6.
Repairing Philips Software
Restarting the
System
If you are experiencing software problems restart the system (page 7-56) to see if
the problem corrects itself.
If the system does not respond to the keyboard or mouse so that software shutdown
and restart procedures can be followed, try the following:
Shut down and restart the Server or PC.
Remove the power cord for at least 20 seconds and then reconnect it. When you
turn the computer On the system should restart properly.
Re-installing
Software
If a system restart does not resolve the problem, refer to Software Re-Installation
Procedure (Chapter 6).
Configuring the ILO Setting for the Large Database Server
The integrated Lights-Out (ILO) configuration is required for a new Server that has
not been previously configured, or if the server mother board has been replaced.
If the following message appears during startup, ILO is properly configured.
For ML350 G6 or DL380 G6 - Integrated Lights-Out 2 is disabled
For DL380 G7 - Integrated Lights-Out 3 is disabled
For DL380 G8 - Integrated Lights-Out 4is disabled
If ILO configuration is required, complete the following steps:
1. During the Boot sequence of an ML350 G6 or DL380 G6, watch for the
message, Integrated Lights-Out 2 Standard. When you see this message press
<F8> to configure.
During the Boot sequence of a DL380 G7, watch for the message, Integrated
Lights-Out 3 Standard, When you see the message, press <F8> to configure.
During the Boot sequence of a DL380 G8, watch for the message, Integrated
Lights-Out 4 Standard, When you see the message, press <F8> to configure.
2. From the Settings menu in the iLO menu, select Configure and press Enter.
3. Press the Space Bar twice to change the setting for Lights-Out Functionality to
Disabled.
4. Verify the following settings:
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-77
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Selection
Setting
ML350 G5, ML350 G6, DL380 G6
Lights-Out Functionality:
Disabled
ILO 2 ROM-Based Setup Utility:
Disabled
Require iLO2 RBSU Login:
Disabled
Show iLO2 IP during Post:
Enabled
(Default setting)
Two-Factor Authentication
Disabled
Lights-Out Functionality:
Disabled
ILO3 ROM-Based Setup Utility:
Disabled
Required iLO3 RBSU Login:
Disabled
Show iLO3 IP during Post:
Enabled
(Default setting)
Lights-Out Functionality:
Disabled
ILO4 ROM-Based Setup Utility:
Disabled
Required iLO4 RBSU Login:
Disabled
Show iLO4 IP during Post:
Enabled
(Default setting)
DL380 G7
DL380 G8
5. Press F10 to Save.
6. From the File menu, select Exit and press Enter twice to confirm.
The Server continues the boot sequence.
Restoring Large DataBase Server RAID Configurations
If the RAID Configuration on the Large DataBase Server is lost or accidentally
deleted, it must be restored. After you restore the RAID configurations, the Windows
Operating System and Philips software must be re-installed.
Note The HP DL380 G6 and HP DL380 G8 Servers are configured with RAID 1 Array.
The HP ML 350 G6 and HP DL 380 G7 Servers are configured with RAID 1 + 0 Array.
During boot sequence watch for the message, Press any key to view option ROM
Messages. When you see the message, press any key. This allows you to see
additional ROM Messages needed for ILO 3, RAID Configuration, and BIOS Settings.
Restore the server RAID configuration as follows.
7-78
Updating the BIOS
1. During the Boot sequence, watch for the message Press <F8> key to run the
Option ROM Configuration for Arrays Utility. When you see this message, press
F8.
2. Use the arrow key to select Create Logical Drive from the Option ROM
Configuration for Arrays (ORCA) Main Menu and press Enter.
3. If you see the message There are no available physical drives, the drives may be
configured already or there are no hot swap drives installed.
a) To determine if the drives are already configured, press Esc to return to the
Create Logical Drive menu.
b) Select View Logical Drive, then press Enter.
If the logical drives are configured, you are ready to update BIOS
(page 7-81);
If the logical drives must be configured, return to the Create Logical Drive
menu and continue.
4. In the Available Physical Drives section verify that the two available drives are
selected (an X should appear in the brackets next to each drive).
5. In the Raid Configuration section verify the following selection:
HP DL380 G6 or HP DL380 G8 - RAID 1
HP ML 350 G6 or HP DL 380 G7 - RAID 1 + 0
6. In the Spare section verify that Use one drive as a spare is not selected.
7. In the Maximum Boot Partition section verify that Disabled (4Gb) maximum is
selected.
8. Press Enter to create the Logical Drive.
9. When prompted to save the configuration, press F8, and when Configuration
Saved appears press Enter.
10. Press Esc to exit Raid Configuration.
The system will restart.
11. If necessary, configure BIOS (page 7-81)
Note If you get a RAID drive failure message after successful RAID recovery, open Event
Viewer and clear the Applications log, then restart RAID service.
Updating the BIOS
Follow the procedures given in this section to update the BIOS on a PIIC PC/Server
as required.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-79
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
BIOS Files on InCenter
Table 7-18 lists BIOS files available for download from the Philips InCenter website
for installation on PIIC hardware platforms. Always download the latest BIOS file
version available for download from Philips InCenter.
Table 7-18: PIIC Platform BIOS Files
Philips P/N
BIOS
Designation
BIOS
Version
rp5700 PC
453564377881
786E4 vA1.20
A1.20
rp5700T PC
453564377881
786E4 vA1.20
A1.20
rp5800 PC
453564377891
J20 vA.02.10
A.2.10
ML350 G5
Tower Server
453564377841
D21
2011.05.02
ML350 G6
Tower Server
453564377851
D22
2011.05.05
DL380 G6
Rack Server
453564377861
P62
2011.05.05
DL380G7
Rack Server
453564377871
P67
2011.05.05
DL380G8
Rack Server
453564414321
P73
2012.07.01
Platform
Flashing the BIOS
The correct BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) is installed and set up prior to Philips
IntelliVue Information Center/DBS shipment. The BIOS includes microcode that is
matched to a particular revision of PC microprocessor.
Software for flashing the BIOS on Philips-provided hardware is available on the
InCenter System.
To flash the BIOS:
1. Download the correct software from Philips InCenter to media.
2. Put the media with the correct BIOS in the appropriate device port on the PC.
3. Start the PC.
4. Press F10 immediately.
5. Select Flash System BIOS from the BIOS section of the first screen that
appears.
6. Follow the screen prompts to complete the BIOS installation.
Once you have flashed the BIOS, you must change some of the default BIOS
settings. These changes vary depending on the hardware. Changes to BIOS default
settings are described in the following sections.
7-80
Configuring BIOS Settings
Configuring BIOS Settings
The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) is set correctly prior to product shipment.
However, the BIOS may require reconfiguration if the equipment BIOS has been
updated or if equipment is replaced or repaired. Some BIOS settings require
changes from the defaults in order to support the specific IntelliVue Information
Center hardware. Follow the procedure for the particular hardware platform you
must update.
Navigating the Setup Utility
Use the Arrow, Enter, and Esc keys to navigate the HP Setup Utility as summarized in
Table 7-19.
Table 7-19: Setup Utility Control Keys
Right/left Arrow keys select menus (move the cursor left or
right). Up/down Arrow keys select menu items and change
settings (move the cursor up or down).
The Enter key executes a command or opens a submenu.
The Escape key exits the menu or exits the Setup Utility
without saving.
M3154 Database Server BIOS Settings
If the server mother board is replaced, use the BIOS that is pre-installed on the
board. Then make changes to the default BIOS settings described in Table 7-20,
Table 7-21, and Table 7-22. All possible BIOS settings are not described; only BIOS
settings that require changes from default settings are described.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-81
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-20: ML350 G6 BIOS Setting Changes
Setup Utility Menus
Selection
System Default Options
Restore Default System Settings
System Options
Serial Port Options
Virtual Serial Port
Setting
Disabled
Embedded NICs
NIC1 Boot Options
Disabled
NUMLOCK Power-On State
On
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
Hard Drive C:
Date and Time
Use number keys to enter desired values.
Server Availability
ASR Timeout
5 Min
Wake-On LAN
Disabled
POST F1 Prompt
Enabled
Automatic Power On
Enabled
BIOS Serial Console & EMS
BIOS Serial Console Port
Disabled
Server Asset Text
Server Info Text
Server Asset Tag
Advanced Options
System Default Options
7-82
1
Philips-HC
(case sensitive)
Advanced System ROM Options
NMI Debug Button
Disabled
Virtual Install Disk
Disabled
Video Options
Embedded Video
Primary, Optional
Video Secondary
Asset Tag Protection
Locked
User Default Options
Save User Defaults
Configuring BIOS Settings
Table 7-21: DL380 G6 BIOS Setting Changes
Setup Utility Menus
Selection
System Default Options
Restore Default System Settings
System Options
Serial Port Options
Virtual Serial Port
Setting
Disabled
Embedded NICs
NIC1 Boot Options
Disabled
NUMLOCK Power-On State
On
PCI Device Enable/Disable
PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe DP
multifunction 1 Gb Adapter Port 3&4
Disabled
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
Hard Drive C:
1
Date and Time
Use number keys to enter desired values.
Server Availability
ASR Timeout
5 Min
Wake-On LAN
Disabled
POST F1 Prompt
Enabled
Automatic Power On
Enabled
BIOS Serial Console & EMS
BIOS Serial Console Port
Disabled
Server Asset Text
Server Info Text
Server Asset Tag
Advanced Options
System Default Options
Philips-HC
(case sensitive)
Advanced System ROM Options
NMI Debug Button
Disabled
Virtual Install Disk
Disabled
Video Options
Embedded Video
Primary, Optional
Video Secondary
Asset Tag Protection
Locked
User Default Options
Save User Defaults
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-83
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Table 7-22: DL380 G7 BIOS Setting Changes
Setup Utility Menus
Selection
System Default Options
Restore Default System Settings
System Options
Serial Port Options
Virtual Serial Port
Setting
Disabled
Embedded NICs
NIC1 Boot Options
Disabled
NUMLOCK Power-On State
On
PCI Device Enable/Disable
PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe DP
multifunction 1Gb Adapter Port 3&4
Disabled
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
Hard Drive C:
1
Date and Time
Use number keys to enter desired values.
Server Availability
ASR Timeout
5 Min
Wake-On LAN
Disabled
POST F1 Prompt
Enabled
Automatic Power On
Enabled
BIOS Serial Console & EMS
BIOS Serial Console Port
Disabled
Advanced Options
Advanced System ROM Options
System Default Options
7-84
NMI Debug Button
Disabled
Virtual Install Disk
Disabled
Video Options
Embedded Video Primary,
Optional Video Secondary
Asset Tag Protection
Locked
User Default Options
Save User Defaults
Configuring BIOS Settings
Table 7-23: HP DL380e Gen8 BIOS Default Setting Change Overview
Setup Utility Menus
Selection
System Default Options
Restore Default System Settings
System Options
Serial Port Options
Virtual Serial Port
Setting
Disabled
Embedded NICs
NIC1 Boot Options
Disabled
NUMLOCK Power-On State
On
SATA Controller Options
Embedded SATA Configuration
Enable SATA AHCI Support
PCI Device Enable/Disable
PCI Embedded HP Dynamic Smart Array
B120i RAID Controller
Disabled
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
USB DriveKey (C:)
Set the IPL Device Boot
Order to 4
Boot Controller Order
Ctlr:1
Controller Order 2
Date and Time
Use number keys to enter desired values.
Server Availability
ASR Timeout
5 Min
Wake-On LAN
Disabled
POST F1 Prompt
Enabled
Automatic Power On
Always Power On
BIOS Serial Console & EMS
BIOS Serial Console Port
Disabled
Advanced Options
Advanced System ROM Options
NMI Debug Button
System Default Options
Disabled
Video Options
Embedded Video Primary,
Optional Video Secondary
User Default Options
Save User Defaults
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-85
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Configuring the ML350 G6 Server BIOS Settings
To configure the ML350 G6 Server BIOS settings:
1. Turn on the Server.
During the server Boot sequence watch for the message, Press <F9> Key for
ROM-Based Setup Utility (Two beeps may sound just before this message
appears).
2. When you see the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup Utility, press
the F9 key to display the ROM-Based Setup Utility (RBSU).
Note You must press the F9 immediately after the message, Press <F9> Key for ROMBased Setup Utility, appears or the Server will continue the boot sequence. If you
miss the F9 prompt, restart the Server by pressing the Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys
simultaneously.
System Default Options
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
2. Delete User Defaults and press Enter.
3. Select Restore Default System Settings and press Enter twice. Then select Yes,
Select to Restore and press Enter.
Default settings are restored and the server restarts.
4. When you see the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup Utility, press
F9 to access the setup menu again.
System Options
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select System Options and press
Enter. Then change the following System Options settings.
a) Select Serial Port Options and press Enter, select Virtual Serial Port and
press Enter, then change its setting to Disabled and press Enter. Press Esc
to return to the previous menu.
b) Select Embedded NICs and press Enter, then select NIC1 Boot Options and
press Enter twice.
Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter, then press Esc to return to
the previous menu.
c) Select NUMLOCK Power-On State and press Enter.
Change its setting to On and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main screen.
7-86
Configuring BIOS Settings
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
1. Select Standard Boot Order (IPL) and press Enter to display its menu.
2. Select Hard Drive C: and press Enter. Then select Set the IPL Device Boot Order
to 1 and press Enter.
3. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility.
Date and Time
1. Select Date and Time and press Enter.
2. Set the Date and Time to desired values using the number keys, and press
Enter.
Server Availability
1. Select Server Availability and press Enter to display its menu.
2. Select ASR Timeout and press Enter. Change its setting to 5 Min and press
Enter.
3. Select Wake-On LAN and press Enter twice to change its setting to Disabled,
and press Enter.
4. Select POST F1 Prompt and press Enter. Change its setting to Enabled and
press Enter.
5. Select Automatic Power On and press Enter. Change its setting to Enabled and
press Enter.
6. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility.
BIOS Serial Console & EMS
1. Select BIOS Serial Console & EMS and press Enter to display its menu.
2. Select BIOS Serial Console Port and press Enter. Select Disabled and press
Enter.
3. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility.
Server Asset Text
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu, select Server Asset Text and press
Enter.
a) Select Server Info Text and press Enter.
b) Type the following exactly (case sensitive):
Philips-HC
c) Press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-87
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Advanced Options
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu select Advanced Options and press Enter.
Select Advanced System ROM Options and press Enter, then change the
following settings.
a) Select NMI Debug Button and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Disabled and press Enter.
b) Select Virtual Install Disk and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Disabled and press Enter.
2. Press Esc to return to the previous menu selections.
a) Select Video Options and press Enter.
b) Select Embedded Video Primary, Optional Video Secondary, then press
Enter.
3. Press Esc to return to the previous menu selections.
a) Select Asset Tag Protection and press Enter.
b) Select Locked, then press Enter.
4. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
System Default Options
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
2. Select User Default Options and press Enter.
3. Select Save User Defaults and press Enter. Then select Yes, Save and press
Enter.
Confirm Settings and Exit
1. Press the Esc key to display <F10> to Confirm Exit Utility.
2. Press the F10 key to confirm the BIOS settings, and exit the ROM Based Setup
Utility. This saves the BIOS setting changes.
The system will restart to Windows.
7-88
Configuring BIOS Settings
Configuring the DL380 G6 Server BIOS Settings
To configure the DL 380 G6 Server BIOS settings:
1. Turn on the Server.
During the server Boot sequence watch for the message, Press <F9> Key for
ROM-Based Setup Utility.
2. When you see the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup Utility, press
F9 to display the ROM-Based Setup Utility (RBSU).
Note You must press F9 immediately after the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based
Setup Utility, appears or the Server will continue the boot sequence. If you miss the
F9 prompt, restart the Server by pressing the Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys simultaneously.
System Default Options
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
2. Delete User Defaults and press Enter.
3. Select Restore Default System Settings and press Enter twice. Then select Yes,
Select to Restore and press Enter.
Default settings are restored and the server restarts.
4. When you see the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup Utility, press
F9 to access the setup menu again.
System Options
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select System Options and press
Enter. Then change the following System Options settings.
a) Select Serial Port Options and press Enter, select Virtual Serial Port and
press Enter, then change its setting to Disabled and press Enter. Press Esc
to return to the previous menu.
b) Select Embedded NICs and press Enter, then select NIC1 Boot Options and
press Enter twice.
Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter, then press Esc to return to
the previous menu.
c) Select NUMLOCK Power-On State and press Enter.
Change its setting to On and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main screen.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-89
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
PCI Device Enable/Disable
1. Select PCI Device Enable/Disable and press Enter to open its menu.
2. Select PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe DP Multifunction 1Gb Adapter Port 3&4
and press Enter to show its options:
Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter.
3. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
1. Select Standard Boot Order (IPL) and press Enter to display its menu.
2. Select Hard Drive C: and press Enter. Then select Set the IPL Device Boot Order
to 1 and press Enter.
3. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility.
Date and Time
1. Use the down arrow key to select Date and Time and press Enter.
2. Set the Date and Time to desired values using the number keys and press Enter.
Server Availability
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select Server Availability and press
Enter to open its menu. Then change the Server Availability settings as follows.
a) Select ASR Timeout and press Enter. Change its setting to 5 Min and press
Enter.
b) Select Wake-On LAN and press Enter twice. Change its setting to Disabled
and press Enter.
c) Select POST F1 Prompt and press Enter. Change its setting to Enabled and
press Enter.
d) Select Automatic Power On and press Enter. Change its setting to Enabled
and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
BIOS Serial Console & EMS
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select BIOS Serial Console & EMS
and press Enter to open its menu. Then change the BIOS Serial Console & EMS
settings as follows.
a) Select BIOS Serial Console Port and press Enter.
b) Select Disabled and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
7-90
Configuring BIOS Settings
Server Asset Text
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu, select Server Asset Text and press
Enter.
a) Select Server Info Text and press Enter.
b) Select Server Asset Tag and press Enter.
c) Type the following exactly (case sensitive):
Philips-HC
d) Press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Advanced Options
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu select Advanced Options and press Enter.
Select Advanced System ROM Options and press Enter, then change the
following settings.
a) Select NMI Debug Button and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Disabled and press Enter.
b) Select Virtual Install Disk and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Disabled and press Enter.
2. Press Esc to return to the previous menu selections.
a) Select Video Options and press Enter.
b) Select Embedded Video Primary, Optional Video Secondary, then press
Enter.
3. Press Esc to return to the previous menu selections.
a) Select Asset Tag Protection and press Enter.
b) Select Locked, then press Enter.
4. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
System Default Options
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
2. Select User Default Options and press Enter.
3. Select Save User Defaults and press Enter. Then select Yes, Save and press
Enter.
Confirm Settings and Exit
1. Press the Esc key three times
2. Press the F10 key to confirm and save new BIOS settings and exit the ROM
Based Setup Utility.
The system will restart.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-91
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Configuring the DL380 G7 Server BIOS Settings
Note During the Boot sequence, watch for the message Press any key to see option ROM
messages. When you see the message, press any key This allows you to see
additional ROM Messages needed for ILO 3, RAID Configuration, and BIOS Settings.
To configure the DL380 G7 Server BIOS settings:
1. Shut down and restart the Server.
During the server Boot sequence watch for the message, Press <F9> Key for
ROM-Based Setup Utility.
2. When you see this message, press F9 to display the ROM-Based Setup Utility
(RBSU).
The ROM-Based Setup Utility (RBSU) appears.
Figure 7-38: Sample RSBU Main Menu
Note You must press F9 immediately after the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based
Setup Utility, appears or the Server will continue the boot sequence. If you miss the
F9 prompt, restart the Server by pressing the Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys simultaneously.
3. Configure the DL380 G7 Server BIOS settings as described in the sections that
follow on page 7-93 to page 7-95.
7-92
Configuring BIOS Settings
System Default Options
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
2. Select Restore Default System Settings and press Enter twice. Then select Yes,
Select to Restore and press Enter.
Default settings are restored and the server restarts.
3. When you see the message, Press <F9> Key for ROM-Based Setup Utility, press
F9 to access the setup menu again.
System Options
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select System Options and press
Enter. Then change the following System Options settings.
a) Select Serial Port Options and press Enter, select Virtual Serial Port and
press Enter, then change its setting to Disabled and press Enter. Press Esc
to return to the previous menu.
b) Select Embedded NICs and press Enter, then select NIC1 Boot Options and
press Enter twice.
Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter, then press Esc to return to
the previous menu.
c) Select NUMLOCK Power-On State and press Enter.
Change its setting to On and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main screen.
PCI Device Enable/Disable
1. Select PCI Device Enable/Disable and press Enter to open its menu.
Select PCI Embedded HP NC382i PCIe DP Multifunction 1Gb Adapter Port 3&4
and press Enter to show its options:
Change its setting to Disabled and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
1. Select Standard Boot Order (IPL) and press Enter to display its menu.
2. Select Hard Drive C: and press Enter. Then select Set the IPL Device Boot Order
to 1 and press Enter.
3. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-93
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Date and Time
1. Use the down arrow key to select Date and Time and press Enter.
2. Set the Date and Time to desired values using the number keys and press Enter.
Server Availability
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select Server Availability and press
Enter to open its menu. Then change the Server Availability settings as follows.
a) Select ASR Timeout and press Enter. Change its setting to 5 Min and press
Enter.
b) Select Wake-On LAN and press Enter twice. Change its setting to Disabled
and press Enter.
c) Select POST F1 Prompt and press Enter. Change its setting to Enabled and
press Enter.
d) Select Automatic Power On and press Enter. Change its setting to Enabled
and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
BIOS Serial Console & EMS
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select BIOS Serial Console & EMS
and press Enter to open its menu. Then change the BIOS Serial Console & EMS
settings as follows.
a) Select BIOS Serial Console Port and press Enter.
b) Select Disabled and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key twice to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
7-94
Configuring BIOS Settings
Advanced Options
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu select Advanced Options and press Enter.
Select Advanced System ROM Options and press Enter, then change the
following settings.
a) Select NMI Debug Button and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Disabled and press Enter.
b) Select Virtual Install Disk and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Disabled and press Enter.
2. Press Esc to return to the previous menu selections.
a) Select Video Options and press Enter.
b) Select Embedded Video Primary, Optional Video Secondary, then press
Enter.
3. Press Esc to return to the previous menu selections.
a) Select Asset Tag Protection and press Enter.
b) Select Locked, then press Enter.
4. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
System Default Options
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
2. Select User Default Options and press Enter.
3. Select Save User Defaults and press Enter. Then select Yes, Save and press
Enter.
Confirm Settings and Exit
Press the Esc key three times, then press the F10 key to confirm and save new BIOS
settings and exit the ROM Based Setup Utility.
The system will restart.
Updating the HP DL380e Gen8 BIOS Settings
The HP DL380e Gen8 Setup Utility, which can be accessed by pressing the F9 key at
start up, enables you to verify system configuration and change factory-default BIOS
settings (if necessary). If you have not replaced the Server mother board and the
software for the DL380e Gen8 was loaded at the Philips factory, you do not have to
change the server BIOS settings using the Setup Utility.
If you must replace the DL380e Gen8 mother board, verify that a PIIC-qualified
version of the BIOS (see page 7-80) is installed on the replacement board. Then
make the changes to the factory default BIOS settings described in the following
sections. All possible BIOS settings are not shown; only BIOS settings that require
changes from their factory defaults are described. A summary of default BIOS
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-95
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
setting changes appears in Table 7-23.
To make changes to the HP factory default BIOS settings, do the following.
Note During the Boot sequence, watch for the message Press any key to see option ROM
messages. When you see the message, press any key. This allows you to see
additional ROM Messages needed for ILO, RAID Configuration, and BIOS Settings.
1. Shut down and restart the Server.
During the server Boot sequence watch for the F9 icon on the lower left of the
screen.
2. Press F9 to display the ROM-Based Setup Utility (RBSU).
Note You must press F9 immediately after the icon appears or the Server will continue
the boot sequence. If you miss the F9 icon, restart the Server by pressing the
Ctrl-Alt-Delete keys simultaneously.
3. Configure the DL380 G8 Server BIOS settings as described in the sections that
follow on page 7-96 to page 7-99.
System Default Options
To configure the System Default Options BIOS settings:
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
2. Select User Default Options and press Enter.
3. Select Erase User Defaults and press Enter twice.
4. Select Yes, Erase and press Enter.
The Server will restart.
5. When you see the F9 icon, press F9 to access the ROM-Based Setup Utility
(RBSU) again.
6. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
7. Select Restore Default System Settings and press Enter twice.
8. Select Yes, Select to Restore and press Enter.
Default settings are restored and the server restarts.
9. When you see the F9 icon, press F9 to access the ROM-Based Setup Utility
(RBSU) again.
7-96
Configuring BIOS Settings
System Options
To configure the System Options BIOS settings:
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select System Options and press
Enter. Then change the following System Options settings.
a) Select Serial Port Options and press Enter, select Virtual Serial Port and
press Enter, then change its setting to Disabled and press Enter. Press Esc
to return to the previous menu.
b) Select Embedded NICs and press Enter, then select NIC1 Boot Options and
press Enter twice.
Change the setting to Disabled and press Enter, then press Esc to return to
the previous menu.
c) Select NUMLOCK Power-On State and press Enter.
Change the setting to On and press Enter.
d) Select SATA Controller Options and press Enter, then select Embedded SATA
Configuration and press Enter twice.
Select Enable SATA AHCI Support and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key twice to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
PCI Device Enable/Disable
To configure the PCI Device Enable/Disable BIOS settings:
1. Select PCI Device Enable/Disable and press Enter to open its menu.
2. Select PCI Embedded HP Dynamic Smart Array B120i RAID Controller and press
Enter to show its options:
Change the setting to Disabled and press Enter.
3. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Standard Boot Order (IPL)
To configure the Standard Boot Order (IPL) BIOS settings:
1. Use the down arrow key to select Standard Boot Order (IPL) and press Enter.
2. Use the down arrow key to select USB DriveKey (C:) and press Enter.
3. Use the down arrow key to select Set the IPL Device Boot Order to 4 and press
Enter.
The final settings should be:
CD-ROM Drive
Floppy Drive (A:)
Hard Drive C:
USB Drive Key (C:)
4. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-97
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Boot Controller Order
To configure the Boot Controller Order BIOS settings:
1. Use the down arrow key to select Boot Controller Order and press Enter.
2. Select Ctlr: 1 and press Enter.
3. Use the down arrow key to select Controller Order 2 and press Enter.
4. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
Date and Time
To configure the Date and Time BIOS settings:
1. Use the down arrow key to select Date and Time and press Enter.
2. Set the Date and Time to desired values using the number keys and press Enter.
Server Availability
To configure the Server Availability BIOS settings:
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select Server Availability and press
Enter to open its menu. Then change the Server Availability settings as follows.
a) Select ASR Timeout and press Enter. Change its setting to 5 Min and press
Enter.
b) Select Wake-On LAN and press Enter twice. Change its setting to Disabled
and press Enter.
c) Select POST F1 Prompt and press Enter. Change the setting to Enabled and
press Enter.
d) Select Automatic Power On and press Enter. Change the setting to Always
Power On and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
BIOS Serial Console & EMS
To configure the BIOS Serial Console and EMS BIOS settings:
1. In the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu select BIOS Serial Console & EMS
and press Enter to open the configuration menu. Change the BIOS Serial
Console & EMS settings as follows.
a) Select BIOS Serial Console Port and press Enter.
b) Select Disabled and press Enter.
2. Press the Esc key to return to the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
7-98
Configuring BIOS Settings
Advanced Options
To configure the Advanced Options BIOS settings:
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility Main Menu, select Advanced Options and
press Enter. Select Advanced System ROM Options and press Enter, then
change the following settings.
a) Select NMI Debug Button and press Enter. Then change its setting to
Disabled and press Enter, then press Esc to return to the previous menu
selections.
b) Select Video Options and press Enter.
Select Embedded Video Primary, Optional Video Secondary, then press
Enter.
2. Press Esc to return to the ROM Based Setup Utility Main Menu.
System Default Options
To configure the System Default Options BIOS settings:
1. From the ROM-Based Setup Utility menu use the keyboard down arrow to select
System Default Options and press Enter to open its submenu.
2. Select User Default Options and press Enter.
3. Select Save User Defaults and press Enter twice. Then select Yes, Save and
press Enter.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-99
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
IntelliVue Information Center/Client PC BIOS Settings
If the rp5800 or rp5700 PC mother board is replaced, use the BIOS that is preinstalled on the board. Then make changes to the default BIOS settings described in
Table 7-24 and Table 7-25. All possible BIOS settings are not described; only BIOS
settings that require changes from defaults are described.
Table 7-24: HP rp5800 BIOS Setting Changes
Setup Utility
Menus
File Menu
Selection
Default Setup
Setting/Selection
Restore Factory Settings as Default
Apply Defaults and Exit
Storage Menu
Setting/Action
Restart PC.
Set Time and Date
Use tab key to move between hour and
minute or day, month, and year fields;
use right/left arrow keys to change
settings; use up/down arrow keys to
move between Time and Date.
Boot Order
Legacy Boot Sources
Move Hard Drive to the first
position in Boot Order list.
Move USB Hard Drive to the
fourth position in Boot order
list.
Security Menua
Network Boot
Power Menu
OS Power Management
Idle Power Saving
Normal
Advanced Menu
Power On Options
POST Mode
Full Boot
POST Messages
Enable
Option ROM Prompt
Disable
After Power Loss
Power On
POST Delay
5 Seconds
Num Lock at Power-On
On
NIC Option ROM Download
Disable
Cash Drawer Port
Disable
AMT Configuration
AMT
Disable (If option appears)
Default Setup
Save Current Settings as Default
Device Options
File Menu
Disable
a. If you have not replaced the PC mother board and software for the HP rp5800 PC was loaded at the Philips
factory, you do not have to change BIOS settings in the Setup Utility. If you must replace the rp5800 PC mother
board, use the BIOS that is pre-installed on the board. Then make the changes to the factory default BIOS settings
described in the following steps. All possible BIOS settings are not shown; only BIOS settings that require
changes from defaults are described.
7-100
Configuring BIOS Settings
Table 7-25: RP 5700 BIOS Setting Changes
Setup Utility Menus
File Menu
Selection
Default Setup
Setting/Selection
Restore Factory Settings as
Default
Apply Defaults and Exit
Storage Menu
Setting/Action
Restart Workstation.
Set Time and Date
Use tab key to move between
hour and minute or day, month,
and year fields; use right/left
arrow keys to change settings;
use up/down arrow keys to
move between Time and Date.
Device Configuration
Hard Disk: SATA 0
Default Values: IDE/SATA
Translation Mode:LBA
Assisted
Boot Order
Select Hard Drive
For RP 5700 move Hard
Drive to the first position in
Boot Order list
Security Menua
Network Service Boot
Network Service Boot
Disable
Advanced Menu
Power On Options
POST Mode
Full Boot
POST Messages
Enable
F9 Prompt
Hidden
F11 Prompt
F12 Prompt
Device Options
After Power Loss
On
Num Lock at Power-On
On
S5 Wake On Lan
Disable
NIC PXE Option ROM
Download:
File Menu
Default Setup
Save Current Settings as
Default
a. Additional configuration required when HP rp5700 system Board is replaced.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-101
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Changing the rp5800 PC BIOS Settings
To make changes to the HP factory default BIOS settings, do the following.
1. Shut down and restart the PC.
2. As the PC boots up, watch for the on-screen message <F10 = Setup>.
Note The message <F10 = Setup> appears only briefly. If you miss it, restart the PC.
3. Press the F10 key when you see the message <F10 = Setup>.
4. Update the File Menu, Storage Menu, Security Menu, Power Menu, and
Advanced Menu settings as described in the following sections.
5. Save the current settings and then Exit the Setup Utility as described
on page 7-105.
File Menu
Make the following BIOS settings for the File Menu options. Steps 1 through 5
restore the original HP BIOS defaults as a baseline for applying the Philips settings:
1. From the Setup Utility, select File > Default Setup and press Enter.
A Default Setup dialog appears.
2. From the Default Setup dialog, select Restore Factory Settings as Default and
then press Enter.
A Success dialog shows the message, Restored Factory Settings as Default.
3. Press Enter to execute OK in the dialog.
4. Press Esc to return to the Setup Utility. Select File > Apply Defaults and Exit and
then press Enter. Press Enter in the dialog to Accept.
The PC will restart.
5. When the PC restarts press F10.
The Setup Utility appears.
6. From the Setup Utility select File > Set Time and Date and press Enter.
The Set Time and Date dialog opens.
7. Set the desired time and date.
a) Use up/down arrow keys to move between Time and Date.
b) Use the tab key to move between Hour and Minute or Month, Day, and Year
selections.
c) Use right/left arrow keys to adjust settings.
d) When changes are complete, press F10 to accept changes and return to the
Setup Utility.
7-102
Configuring BIOS Settings
Storage Menu
Make the following BIOS settings for the Storage Menu options:
1. From the Setup Utility select Storage > Boot Order and then press Enter.
The Boot Order dialog appears.
2. In the Boot Order dialog under Legacy Boot Sources, select Hard Drive and then
press Enter.
The selection is highlighted which permits dragging it to the desired position.
Use the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the Hard Drive selection to the second
position in the Boot Order list.
3. In the Boot Order dialog under Legacy Boot Sources, select USB Hard Drive and
then press Enter.
The selection is highlighted which permits dragging it to the desired position.
Use the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the USB Hard Drive selection to the
fourth position in the Boot Order list.
The final Legacy Boot Sources settings should be:
ATAPI CD/DVD Drive
Hard Drive
SATA0
USB Hard Drive
USB Floppy/CD
Network Controller
Note Network Controller may not be listed in your screen settings.
4. Press F10 to Accept the settings.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-103
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Security Menu
Make the following BIOS settings for the Security Menu options:
1. From Setup Utility go to Security > Network Boot and then press Enter.
A Network Boot dialog appears.
2. In the Network Boot dialog use the right or left arrow keys to change the setting
to Disabled, and then press F10 to Accept.
3. If you did not replace the System Board, continue to the Power Menu.
If you replaced the System Board, you must update information stored on the
System Board as follows:
a) Select System IDs, then press Ctrl + A keys simultaneously.
b) After you release the Ctrl + A keys, press Enter.
The expanded System IDs menu opens.
c) Go to Chassis Serial Number and then enter the PC Serial Number from
your PC label. You must use the Backspace key to correct any typing errors.
d) Select Product Name and type the following case-sensitive text exactly.
Philips rp5800 Desktop
e) Press F10 to Accept changes and exit.
f)
Go to File > Save Changes and Exit. In the Save Changes and Exit dialog,
press Enter to Accept.
The System restarts.
g) When the System restarts press F10.
h) To verify the changes you made to System IDs, go to File > System
Information in the Setup Utility. Verify the changed information for accuracy.
If you must make corrections, repeat steps a. through f.
i)
If information is correct, press any key to continue.
Power Menu
Make the following BIOS settings for the Power Menu options:
1. From the Power Menu, select OS Power Management.
2. Select Idle Power Saving and change its setting to Normal.
3. Press F10 to Accept the settings.
7-104
Configuring BIOS Settings
Advanced Menu
Make the following BIOS settings for the Advanced Menu options:
1. From Setup Utility go to Advanced > Power On Options and then press Enter.
The Power- On Options dialog appears.
2. Change the following Power- On Options settings as shown:
POST Mode: FullBoot
POST Messages: Enabled
Option ROM Prompt: Disabled
After Power Loss: Power On
POST Delay: 5 Seconds
3. Press F10 to Accept.
4. Go to Advanced > Device Options and press Enter.
The Device Options dialog opens.
5. Change the following Device Options settings as shown.
Num Lock State at Power-On: On
NIC Option ROM Download: Disabled
Cash Drawer Port: Disabled
6. Press F10 to Accept and then return to the Advanced Menu.
7. Go to Advanced > AMT Configuration (if listed) and then press Enter.
The AMT Configuration dialog appears.
8. Select AMT and change its setting to Disabled, and then press F10 to Accept.
Saving the BIOS settings and Exiting the Setup Utility
To save the BIOS settings you have made and to exit the setup utility:
1. From the Setup Utility go to File > Default Setup and then press Enter.
2. Select Save Current Settings as Default and then press Enter to Accept. Press
Enter again when the Success dialog appears.
3. Press ESC to exit the Success dialog.
4. From the Setup Utility go to File > Save Changes and Exit and then press Enter.
5. When you see the message, Are you sure you want to Save Changes and Exit?,
select Yes and then press Enter.
6. The system restarts.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-105
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Changing the rp5700 PC BIOS Settings
The HP rp5700 Setup Utility, which you can by access by pressing the F10 key at
start up, permits verifying system configuration or changing factory default BIOS
settings (if necessary).
If you have not replaced the PC mother board and software for the HP rp5700 PC
was loaded at the Philips factory, you do not have to change BIOS settings in the
Setup Utility.
If you must replace the rp5700 PC mother board, use the BIOS that is pre-installed
on the board. Then make the changes to the factory default BIOS settings described
in the following steps. All possible BIOS settings are not shown; only BIOS settings
that require changes from defaults are described.
1. Shut down and restart the PC.
2. As the PC boots up, watch for the on-screen message <F10 = Setup>.
Note The message <F10 = Setup> appears only briefly. If you miss it, restart the PC.
3. Press the F10 key when you see the message <F10 = Setup>.
4. Update the Language Menu, File Menu, Storage Menu, Security Menu, Power
Menu, and Advanced Menu settings as described in the following sections.
5. Save the current settings and then Exit the Setup Utility.
Language Menu
Select English in the Language selection menu, and press Enter.
The Setup Utility opens.
7-106
Configuring BIOS Settings
File Menu
1. From the Setup Utility, select File > Default Setup and press Enter.
A Default Setup dialog opens.
2. From the Default Setup dialog, select Restore Factory Settings as Default and
press F10.
A Success dialog shows the message, Default setup was successful. Apply
defaults to activate. Press any key to continue.
3. Press any key to return to the Setup Utility. Then go to File > Apply Defaults and
Exit and press Enter.
An Apply Defaults and Exit dialog shows the message, Are you sure you want to
set defaults and exit?
4. Press F10 for Yes. The PC will restart.
5. When you see <F10 = Setup> at the lower edge of the start up screen, press
F10. Then, select English in the Language selection menu and press Enter.
The Setup Utility appears.
6. From the Setup Utility, select File > Set Time and Date and press Enter.
The Set Time and Date dialog opens.
7. Set the desired time and date.
a) Use up/down arrow keys to move between Time and Date.
b) Use the tab key to move between Hour and Minute or Month, Day, and Year
selections.
c) Use right/left arrow keys to adjust settings.
d) When changes are complete, press F10 to return to the Setup Utility.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-107
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Storage Menu
1. From the Setup Utility select Storage > Device Configuration and press Enter.
The Device Configuration dialog opens.
2. In the Device Configuration dialog use the Up or Down arrow key to move to the
Hard Disk : SATA 0 selection and press Enter.
The SATA 0 dialog appears.
3. In the SATA 0 dialog, use the Up or Down arrow key to move to the Translation
Mode selection, and use the Right or Left arrow key to change the setting to
LBA Assisted. Then press F10 to Accept.
4. In the Device Configuration dialog, use the Up or Down arrow key to move to the
Default Values : SATA Defaults selection, and press Enter.
The SATA Defaults dialog appears.
5. In the SATA Defaults dialog, use the Up or Down arrow key to move to the
Translation Mode selection, and use the Right or Left arrow key to change the
setting to LBA Assisted. Then press F10 to Accept. Press the ESC key to return to
the Setup Utility.
6. From the Setup Utility select Storage > Boot Order and press Enter.
The Boot Order dialog opens.
7. In the Boot Order dialog use the up or down arrow to select Hard Drive, and
press Enter.
The selection is highlighted and an up/down Drag arrow appears next to the
selection. Use the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the Hard Drive to the first
position in the Boot Order list. The final settings should be:
Hard Drive
ATAPI CD-ROM Drive
Integrated SATA
USB Device
Broadcom Ethernet Controller
Intel Ethernet Controller (only appears if there is a second NIC installed)
8. Press the F10 key to Accept.
7-108
Configuring BIOS Settings
Security Menu
1. From Setup Utility go to Security > Network Service Boot and press Enter.
A Network Service Boot dialog appears.
2. In the Network Service Boot dialog, use the right or left arrow keys to change the
setting to Disable and press F10 to Accept.
3. If you did not replace the System Board, continue to Advanced Menu.
If you replaced the System Board, you must update information stored on the
System Board as follows.
a) From the Setup Utility select Security.
The Security menu opens.
b) Select System IDs, then press Ctrl + A keys simultaneously.
c) When you release the keys, press Enter.
The expanded System IDs menu opens.
d) Select Enter Chassis Serial Number and enter the PC Serial Number from
your PC label. You must use the Backspace key to correct typing errors.
e) Select Enter Product Name and type the following case-sensitive text
exactly.
HP rp5700 Business System
f)
Press F10 then press Esc to save changes and exit.
The PC will restart.
g) When you see the message,<F10 = Setup>, press the F10 key.
h) From the Setup Utility go to File > System Information. Verify the changed
information for accuracy.
If you must make corrections, repeat steps a. through h.
i)
If information is correct, proceed to Advanced Menu.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-109
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Advanced Menu
1. From Setup Utility go to Advanced > Power On Options and press Enter.
The Power On Options dialog appears.
2. Change the following Power On Options settings:
POST mode:
POST messages:
F9 prompt:
F11 prompt:
F12 prompt:
After Power Loss:
FullBoot
enable
hidden
hidden
hidden
on
3. Press F10 to Accept.
4. From the Setup Utility go to Advanced > Onboard Devices and press Enter. Then
press Enter in the Help dialog.
The Onboard Devices dialog appears.
5. In the Onboard Devices dialog change the following items to the settings:
Serial Port B: 2E8-2EF IRQ 3 (COM4) for 4-Channel serial recorder connection
6. Press F10 to Accept.
7. Go to Advanced > Device Options and press Enter.
The Device Options dialog opens.
8. Change the following Device Options to the settings:
Num Lock state at power-on: on
S5 Wake on LAN: disable
NIC PXE Option ROM Download: disable
9. Press F10 to Accept.
File Menu
1. From the Setup Utility go to File > Default Setup and press Enter.
2. Select Save Current Settings as Default and press F10 to Accept.
The current settings are saved as the defaults.
3. When you see the message, Default Setup was successful. Press any key to
continue, press any key.
4. Go to File > Save Changes and Exit, and press Enter.
5. When you see the message, Are you sure you want to Save Changes and Exit?,
press F10 to Accept.
The system restarts.
7-110
Using the Japanese Keyboard
Using the Japanese Keyboard
When the IntelliVue Information Center software is newly installed on a system with
a Japanese language selection, the keyboard initially will use English characters.
You can toggle the Japanese keyboard between English and Japanese characters as
follows:
1. To switch from English to Japanese, press the keys ALT, Shift, and J-tab.
J-tab
Figure 7-39: Locating the J-tab key
The system is configured with two input languages and two keyboards - English
and Japanese.
2. If you want to toggle between the two input languages press ALT + Shift.
3. If you want to toggle between the two keyboards when the input language is
Japanese, press Alt + J-tab.
If the input language is English nothing will change when you press Alt + J-tab.
Using Antivirus Software
These guidelines apply to Symantec and McAfee antivirus software only. Be sure to
contact the Philips Response Center for a list of antivirus software versions tested.
Other antivirus software packages have not been tested by Philips and are not
supported.
Supported products include:
• M3140 IntelliVue Information Center Low Acuity Local Database
• M3150 IntelliVue Information Center Local Database
• M3145 IntelliVue Information Center Network Database
• M3155 IntelliVue Information Center Network Database
• M3151 IntelliVue Information Center Client
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-111
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
• M3170 IntelliVue Patient Link
• M3169 IntelliVue Small Database Server
• M3154 IntelliVue Database Server
Warning This procedure applies only to the products described and must not be applied to
any other Philips device unless separate, written authorization is obtained from
Philips.
Philips makes an effort to test products with current antivirus software. This
information serves as a guideline to outline the product-related features and
configuration of antivirus software that may impact performance of the supported
products.
At a high level, the following rules apply to the following features/options of antivirus
software:
• Virus Signature file updates - Automatic signature file updates must be disabled
(e.g. Norton LiveUpdate must be turned off). These must be updated manually.
Procedures are provided in the section Updating Virus Definitions.
• Full System Scans - Automated full system scans are not supported.
Full system scans while the Philips device is in monitoring mode (manual or
user-initiated) is not supported
• Active Scanning/Scanning configuration - Active scanning is not supported.
Scan only on file Create (or equivalent) is supported. (Active scanning may
degrade system performance)
Excluded directories must be configured as listed in the Antivirus Configuration
section for the appropriate product.
• Other features - Other antivirus features that may be added have not been
qualified and are not supported (e.g. Intrusion prevention, firewall)
7-112
Using Antivirus Software
Configuring Antivirus Software
To configure anti-virus software on a PIIC system:
1. Install the Antivirus software.
2. Exclude the following directories:
IntelliVue Information Center Releases E.01.xx and later
Configure the following exclusions at each M3140/M3150/M3151/M3145/
M3155/M3170:
C:\WINNT\system32\Spool\Printers
D:\Stardate (or C:\Stardate for L.00.16 and later)
If the IntelliVue Information Center has a local database:
C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\Images
Database Server Releases E.01.xx and later:
Configure the following exclusions at the M3154 and M3169:
C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\Images
D:\Stardate (or C:\Stardate for L.00.16 and later)
3. Verify that Scan only on Demand (or equivalent) is configured.
Active scanning may degrade system performance and potentially affect patient
care. This configuration ensures that scanning is performed under observation.
If it is not possible to remove all scheduled scans, then configure those scans to
check the smallest number of files possible.
4. Verify that Scan only on file Create is configured.
Scanning on creation identifies newly created suspicious files. Files may change
during normal system operation; therefore, scanning on file modification may
degrade system performance. If Scan only on file Create is not an option, select
Scan on Modify.
Updating Virus Definitions
In order to Update the Virus Definition List, you must either copy it to removable
media or run it from the Internet Web site.
Copying
Updated Virus
Definition List
You can copy an Updated Virus Definition List to removable media With a Full
System Scan or Without a Full System Scan.
The following procedures require a PC with internet access and a writable
removable media drive.
With a Full System Scan
1. Locate the Antivirus signature files on the vendor Web site.
2. Download the new signature files and copy them to removable media.
3. On the target device (IntelliVue Information Center, Database Server, Clinical
Data Server, for example) verify by means of Antivirus software that no viruses
have been found since the last update.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-113
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
If viruses are discovered, refer to “If a Virus is Found” on page 7-115.
4. For IntelliVue Information Center Systems, notify all clinical unit personnel (for
each Information Center and Client) that their systems will restart and run in
Local mode (Information Centers) or at the desktop (Clients) while the Antivirus
software scans. There is no Wave Review, Event Review, or ST Review when in
Local mode. Also, data trended in Local mode is lost when you reconnect to the
Database Server. Once all notification is complete, put each device in Local
mode.
5. Go to the Windows Desktop on the system to be scanned.
6. Put the media into the appropriate drive and load the signature file.
7. Start “on demand” antivirus scan. Be sure to monitor system during scan.
8. Verify that the scan completes and no viruses are found.
9. Return the system to Monitoring mode, and verify that all systems are
successfully running in Monitoring mode.
Without a Full System Scan
1. Locate the Antivirus signature files on the vender Web site, and copy them to
removable media.
2. On the target device (Information Center, Database Server, Clinical Data Server,
for example) verify by means of Antivirus Software that no viruses have been
found since the last update. If viruses are discovered, refer to Virus Found.
3. For IntelliVue Information Center Systems, notify all clinical unit personnel (for
each Information Center and Client) that their systems will restart and run in
Local mode (Information Centers) or at the desktop (Clients) while the Antivirus
software scans. There is no Wave Review, Event Review, or ST Review when in
Local mode. Data trended in Local mode is lost when you reconnect to the
Database Server. Once all notification is complete, put each device in Local
mode.
4. On the system to be updated, go to the Windows Desktop.
5. Put the removable media into the appropriate drive and load the signature file.
6. Return the system to Monitoring mode, and verify that all devices systems are
successfully running in Monitoring mod.
Updating the
Virus Definition
List from the
Internet
You can update the Virus Definition List from the internet With a Full System Scan or
Without a Full System Scan.on devices with internet access.
With a Full System Scan
1. On the target device (Information Center, Database Server, for example) verify
by means of Anti-virus software that no viruses have been found since the last
update.
If viruses are discovered, refer to “If a Virus is Found” on page 7-115.
2. For IntelliVue Information Center Systems, notify all clinical unit personnel (for
each Information Center and Client) that their systems will restart and run in
Local mode (Information Centers) or at the desktop (Clients) while the Antivirus
software scans. There is no Wave Review, Event Review, or ST Review when in
7-114
Using Antivirus Software
Local mode. Data trended in local mode is lost when you reconnect to the
Database Server. Then put each device in Local mode.
3. On the system to be scanned go to the Windows Desktop.
4. Open the Web browser and locate the Antivirus signature files on the vendor
Web site.
Verify that the download completes without error.
5. Start “on demand” antivirus scan; be sure to monitor system during scan.
6. Verify that the scan completes and no viruses are found.
7. Return system to Monitoring mode and verify that the system is successfully
running in Monitoring mode.
Without a Full System Scan
1. On the target device (IntelliVue Information Center, Database Server, Clinical
Data Server, for example) verify by means of Antivirus software that no viruses
have been found since the last update. If viruses are discovered, refer to “If a
Virus is Found” on page 7-115.
2. For IntelliVue Information Center Systems, notify all clinical unit personnel (for
each Information Center and Client) that their systems will restart and run in
Local mode (Information Centers) or at the desktop (Clients) while the Antivirus
software scans. There is no Wave Review, Event Review, or ST Review when in
Local database mode. Data trended in local mode is lost when you reconnect to
the Database Service. Then put each device in Local mode.
3. On the system to be scanned go to the Windows Desktop.
4. Open the Web browser and locate the Antivirus signature files on the vendor
Web site.
Verify that the download completes without error.
5. Return the system to Monitoring mode, and verify that the system is
successfully running in Monitoring mode.
If a Virus is Found
If you find a virus during the scan process:
1. Stop product operation and turn off the PC/Server.
2. Reload the Operating System Software and Application Software.
3. Reload Antivirus Software.
4. Resume product operation.
If you require further assistance, contact the Philips Response Center.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-115
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
This section provides procedures for replacing adapter cards on the PIIC PC and
Server platforms Including:
• Replacing rp5800 PC Adapter Cards
• Replacing rp5700 PC Adapter Cards
Replacing rp5800 PC Adapter Cards
Your PC should come fully equipped the factory-installed NIC and audio amplifier
adapter cards required for the PIIC system. You should only need to install a NIC or
an audio amplifier adapter card in the field if the installed card fails.
Note that the rp5800 uses the following PCIe adapter cards:
• Network Interface Card (NIC) P/N: 4535 642 93731
• Audio Amplifier Card P/N: 4535 642 58521
Before you install or replace a PC adapter card, create an archive, as described in
the next section.
Creating an
Archive
The HP rp5800 has a USB port that you can use for saving an archive on a USB
memory stick, that is included in the PC Accessory Kit. You can remove the memory
stick from the holder and use it on other PCs in your system.
For details about creating an archive, refer to the Philips IntelliVue Information
Center System Installation and Service Manual supplied with your PIIC system.
Replacing a
Network
Interface Card
This procedure describes how to replace the optional secondary NIC card installed
in the lower horizontal slot in the rp5800 chassis.
To replace a network interface card in the rp5800:
1. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the
computer.
3. Disconnect the PS/2 device cables from the computer, as these are subject to
damage when the power supply is raised to the upright position.
4. While observing proper ESD precautions, remove the PC cover.
a) Slide the access panel handle toward the rear of the computer
b) Then lift the access panel up and off the computer
7-116
.
.
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
5. With the PC cover removed, press the latch release on the front of the power
supply
, and then raise the power supply to the upright position
.
6. Release the retainer that secures the slot covers and adapter cards in place.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-117
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
7. Remove the non-functioning NIC from the lower PCIe slot in the PCIe Riser Card.
NIC
Lower
PCIe
Socket
Serial
Card
Socket
8. Align the replacement NIC with the lower PCIe slot in the Riser Card and press
the card straight into the socket. When installing the NIC, press firmly on the
card so that the whole connector seats properly in the socket.
Replacement
NIC
Lower
PCIe
Socket
Serial
Card
Socket
9. Swing the retainer clip back in place to secure the NIC.
10. Replace the PC cover.
11. Re-connect the PS/2 device cables and power cord.
After adding or changing the NIC, you must reconfigure the system using the archive
you created before beginning the card replacement procedure.
Replacing an
Audio Amplifier
Card
This procedure describes how to replace the audio amplifier card installed in the
upper horizontal slot in the rp5800 chassis.
Previously, from Q2 2012 to Q2 2013, the Audio Amplifier Card was shipped with
two connecting cables, but starting in Q3 2013, it is now shipped with only a single
connecting cable as shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-6.
This procedure describes how to replace the audio amplifier card equipped with a
single connecting cable and installed in the upper horizontal slot in the rp5800
chassis (see callout 9 in Figure 2-2 on page 2-4).
To replace an audio amplifier card equipped with a single connecting cable in the
rp5800:
1. Turn off the computer and any peripheral devices that are connected to it.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and then from the
computer.
7-118
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
3. Disconnect the PS/2 device cables from the computer as these are subject to
damage when the power supply is raised to the upright position.
4. While observing proper ESD precautions, remove the PC cover.
a) Slide the access panel handle toward the rear of the computer.
b) Lift the access panel up and off the computer.
5. Rotate the drive cage upright
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-119
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
6. Rotate the power supply upright so you can remove or install the Audio Card.
7. Disconnect the Connecting Cable from Connector J2 on the Audio Card, but
leave the other end of the cable connected to Connector P23 on the PC system
board.
Connector
J2
7-120
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
8. Un-clip Retainer that secures card.
9. Remove the non-functioning Audio Card from the unit.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-121
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
10. Before installing the new Audio Card, verify the position of Jumper J11. Jumper
J11 on the Audio Amplifier Card controls the function of the internal PC speaker.
In the default position for Jumper J11 (Across Pins 1 & 2 as shown below), the
PC internal speaker will annunciate PC-boot-diagnostic beeps only (which sound
when there is a PC technical issue). Jumper J11 should not be moved from its
default position.
Jumper J11
Must be Installed
Across Pins 1 and 2
as Shown
11. Before installing the new Audio Card, connect its connecting cable
(4535 642 59361) to Connector J2 on the card.
Connector
J2
7-122
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
12. Press the new Audio Card into the bay. Align the tabs with the slot.
13. Use the Retainer to secure the Audio Card in the bay.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-123
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
14. Rotate the Power Supply and Drive Cage back to initial orientation.
15. Replace the PC cover.
16. Re-connect the PS/2 device cables and power cord.
Warning Be sure to follow the Test and Inspection Performance Assurance Procedures after
any installation or upgrade to a Philips Information Center or Clinical Network/
Database Server system before using the system with patients. Refer to the
IntelliVue Information Center System Installation and Service Manual.
7-124
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
Replacing rp5700 PC Adapter Cards
Removing the
rp5700 PC
Cover
1. Place the PC on an ESD approved work surface facing front.
2. Push in on the tabs
on each side of the computer to release the latches that
secure the cover to the computer chassis.
3. Slide the cover forward
cover in a safe place.
About the
rp5700 PC
Expansion Slots
about 1.3 cm (½ in), and lift it off. Then place the
The HP rp5700 has the following Expansion Slots.
1 An NVS300 Expansion Slot
Accommodates Second Video Card
2 A PCI Express x1 Expansion Slot
Accommodates Additional PCI Express Card
3 A PCI Expansion Slot populated with Riser Card
The Riser Card accommodates two additional cards--NIC and Audio Card
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-125
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
Installing a NIC
in the rp5700
1. With the PC cover removed (page 7-125), press the latch release on the front of
the power supply
.
, and then raise the power supply to the upright position
2. Open the Riser Card slot cover retainer that secures the slot covers.
3. Pull the lower slot cover straight out of the chassis.
Riser Card that has 2
sockets for PCI cards
7-126
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
4. Align the NIC with the lower slot in the Riser Card and press the card straight
into the socket. When installing the NIC, press firmly on the card so that the
whole connector seats properly in the socket.
Riser Card
Socket
After adding or changing the NIC, you must re-install the Operating System and
Application Software and reconfigure the system using the archive.
Installing an
Audio Card in
the rp5700 PC
1. With the PC cover removed (page 7-125), press the latch release on the front of
the power supply
.
, and then raise the power supply to the upright position
2. Open the Riser Card slot cover retainer.
3. For the Audio Card pull the upper slot cover straight out of the chassis.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
7-127
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
4. Before installing the Audio Card, connect the appropriate Input Sound Cable
connector to the card. Refer to the following illustration for the correct Input
Sound Cable connector.
Input Sound Cable
Mother Board
Connector
Input Sound Cable
Connector
to PC Front Speaker Plug
(Optional)
Input Sound Cable
Audio Card
Connector
5. Align the card with the upper slot in the Riser Card (see arrow) and press the
Audio Card straight into the socket. When installing the Audio Card, press firmly
on the card so that the whole connector seats properly in the socket.
6. Close the slot cover retainer.
7. Return the power supply to the down position until it locks.
7-128
Replacing PC and Server Adapter Cards
8. Raise the drive cage to the upright position.
9. Rotate the fan duct out of the chassis.
10. Unplug the PC front speaker connector from the mother board. Then connect
the appropriate Input Sound Cable connector (which is attached to the Audio
Card)
to the mother board
.
11. Attach the appropriate Input Sound Cable connector to the PC front speaker
plug
. You must push the speaker plug into the cable connector until you
hear it click. It is a recessed connection which may require using a small
screwdriver, or equivalent, to secure the connection.
If you do not intend to use the PC front speaker (e.g. remote speakers are being
used) you do not have to attach the Input Sound Cable connector
speaker.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
to the
7-129
Chapter 7: Maintaining and Troubleshooting the PIIC
12. Connect power connector P3 from power supply to the Audio Card.
13. Return the fan duct and drive cage to original orientation.
Warning Be sure that the external speaker connection is secure and cannot be accidentally
pulled out.
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable parts for the IntelliVue Information Center system can be ordered from
the Philips Support Materials Organization. A complete list of replaceable parts that
can be ordered is available in the Replaceable Parts List included with the service
documentation on the PIIC installation media.
7-130
8
Verifying Product Assurance
This chapter provides a series of Product Assurance Tests that shall be
performed after PIIC system installation, and after any system repair or
upgrade to verify system functionality and includes:
• Overview
• Performing Visual Tests
• Performing a Power On Test
• Performing the Performance Test
• Performing the Database Storage Test
• Performing the Power Failure Response Test
• Verifying Display Sweep Speed
• Performing Test and Inspection Procedures
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
8-1
Chapter 8: Verifying Product Assurance
Overview
Before using the Philips system clinically with patients, proper performance of the
system shall be verified. This section includes a series of Product Assurance Tests
that shall be performed after system installation and any system repair or upgrade
to verify system functionality.
Note These validation tests do not check all system specifications but are intended to
verify performance of the primary features of Information Center functionality.
However, successful completion of the performance tests shall yield a fully
functioning system. When performing product assurance tests, IntelliVue
Information Centers and Clients must be connected to the IntelliVue Clinical
Network.
Performing Visual Tests
Prior to using the Philips system with patients, thoroughly inspect all system
components, cables, and connectors.
Visually inspect system components as follows:
1. Check all components of the IntelliVue Information Center system for signs of
mechanical damage. If you find any damage to a component, assess the
damage to determine if repair or replacement is required. Repair or replace the
component as required before continuing the Product Assurance Tests.
2. Check all cables of the IntelliVue Information Center system for signs of
abrasion, wear, or other damage. If any cable appears damaged, repair or
replace the cable before you use the Information Center system for patient
monitoring.
3. Check all cable connectors for signs of mechanical damage and each cable
connection for connection integrity. If any cable connector appears damaged,
replace the cable before you use the IntelliVue Information Center system for
patient monitoring.
4. Check that all cable connectors are securely fastened to the rear of each
device, including all cable ties. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-9 for an example.
Warning Verify that the speaker plug is securely fastened and cannot accidentally be pulled
out. Verify the Strain Relief bracket and cable ties are attached. If a Keyboard-VideoMouse Switch is connected, verify that the keyboard and mouse cables are securely
fastened and cannot accidentally be pulled out. Refer to Chapter 5 for hardware
installation details.
8-2
Performing a Power On Test
Performing a Power On Test
Turn on the PIIC components in the following sequence:
1. Turn on each UPS and Display. Verify that each unit turns on correctly and that
the Power On LED is illuminated.
2. Verify that all active Network devices (switches, repeaters, etc.) are on and that
each On LED is illuminated.
3. Turn on the PIIC PC or Server.
The software boot process initiates and includes the Operating System boot
process (approximately 120 seconds) and the Philips application boot process.
The software boot process includes:
• The Power-On Self-Test (POST) checks each of the PC/server subsystems.
Warning If any of the tests fail during POST, an Error Message displays and the POST is
terminated. If an Error Message displays, record the error message(s) and contact
the Response Center. DO NOT USE THE EQUIPMENT WITH PATIENTS!
• The OS Services are loaded.
• The Windows subsystem is initiated and the Microsoft Windows logo
appears.
• The IntelliVue Information Center Boot Process begins.
Philips Services are first initialized and the stardate screen appears with
Waiting for services to initialize displayed in the center followed by Entering
monitoring mode....
IntelliVue Information Center services software is initialized and the screen
displays Testing sound system....
During the sound system test, four distinct tone sequences play. If possible,
listen to the external speaker for the tones.
After loading the SDProcess application, the IntelliVue Information Center
system immediately enters Monitoring Mode and the Main Screen appears
on the Philips display.
4. Turn on the Printer (if included).
5. Conduct the Performance Test described in the next section.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
8-3
Chapter 8: Verifying Product Assurance
Performing the Performance Test
After the Philips PIIC system enters Monitoring Mode, fully test Philips patient
monitoring software as follows:
1. Verify that the date and time display correctly.
2. Verify mouse or trackball functionality by moving the cursor across the display to
see that it tracks normally. Click a Patient Window button to verify control and
display(s) response.
3. Verify normal system operation by checking that:
• Patient data appear for all configured Patient Sectors,
• Patient numerics display normally,
• Waveforms update smoothly,
• Arrhythmia softkeys appear on bedside monitors,
4. Test the Philips Recorder(s) by requesting a recording from a Patient Sector, a
bedside monitor, or use the Recording/Printing Diagnostics application in the
Diagnostics menu of the Service screen. Verify that annotated data and
waveforms are recorded correctly.
5. Verify alarm annunciation, sound, and recording, by making an alarm limit
adjustment or other means that does not interfere with patient care. Verify that
the alarm sound and alarm recording activate correctly.
6. Test the printer by printing a text report or a graphical report with waveforms.
You can also use Diagnostics > Recording/Printing Diagnostics on the Service
menu. Check that reports print correctly.
7. Test the keyboard by accessing the Purchased Options and Support Information
from the Service screen. Type characters from all keys, (upper and lower case)
in the Contact field and verify that the correct entries appear.
8. Select each IntelliVue Information Center using the buttons on the KVM Switch
front panel and verify that the keyboard and mouse correctly control that
IntelliVue Information Center’s Main Screen applications.
9. If the KVM Switch is being used to control a second display, verify the following
for each IntelliVue Information Center connected to the Switch that has dual
display capability:
• The proper applications are activated on the second display when selected
on the IntelliVue Information Center Main Screen.
• The mouse cursor moves freely between the Main Screen and the second
Display for the selected IntelliVue Information Center.
• The keyboard and mouse correctly control the applications in the second
Display, and the connected second display is not a touch display.
8-4
Performing the Database Storage Test
Performing the Database Storage Test
After at least ten minutes of monitoring, review Patient Data Review applications to
verify that stored data are correctly displayed for all patient monitors -- M3/M4
(wired and wireless) and the IntelliVue Patient Monitors.
Performing the Power Failure Response Test
Verify that the UPS will provide power in case of a loss of power to the Philips system
as follows:
1. Disconnect the power cord of the UPS from the wall outlet or Power Distribution
Module for about three seconds.
2. Verify that the Philips system continues to operate and the UPS makes an
audible tone.
3. Restore the power cord connection.
For an APC UPS, perform these additional steps.
4. From the Service screen, go to Support Logs > Event Logs > System.
5. Review the log and verify that there are two UPS entries at the time of the test.
One entry should indicate that a power failure was detected, and one entry
should indicate that power was restored.
Verifying Display Sweep Speed
For full compliance with Philips system specifications, the sweep speed of the
display(s) shall be 25mm/s + 10%. It is required that you set this value for any new
or replaced display, but not for replacement of the graphics card or video driver.
Verify the accuracy of the 25mm/s setting for the PIIC display as follows:
1. Use the ruler to measure (in millimeters) the full width (W) of a waveform in a
Patient Sector of the Main Screen display.
(W)
0
Waveform Width in Millimeters (W)
Width
Figure 8-1: Measuring Waveform Width
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
8-5
Chapter 8: Verifying Product Assurance
2. Measure (in seconds) the time (t) for 10 full sweeps of the erase bar for the
same waveform as shown in Figure 8-2. The measurement shall be to the
nearest second.
(t) Total Time of 10 Sweeps in Seconds (t)
10
Figure 8-2: Measuring the Time Required for Ten Full Sweeps
To meet the sweep speed specification of 25 mm/s +10%, the measured time (t)
shall be between:
9.1 x W
25
xW
< t < 11.1
25
Performing Test and Inspection Procedures
This section is intended for Philips PIIC System Service Providers. It documents
requirements for test, inspection, and results reporting for Information Center
systems to help assure safe and reliable operation. The tests and inspections
provided in this section must be followed by Philips Service Providers when the
Philips PIIC system is installed and again after any service event.
On all PIIC systems, verify that the latest Operating System security patch is
installed. Consult the most recent security Field Change Order (FCO) for the correct
Operating System Security Update.
Check the Operating System Security update version as follows:
From Service Mode, navigate to Other Services > Software Versions....
The System Software Versions and Updates appears as shown in Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3: Verifying the OS Security Update Version
8-6
Performing Test and Inspection Procedures
Table 8-1 lists the tests which must be performed for Philips system components—
IntelliVue Information Centers, Clients, Database Servers, Clinical Network
components—for each type of service event.
Table 8-1: M3150/M3151/M3145/M3155/M3170/M3154/M3169/M3185
Test and Inspection Requirements
When performing . . .
. . . Complete these tests
Installation
Visual, Power On, Performance
Preventive Maintenance
Visual
Any component repair or replacement
Power On, Performance
Hardware Upgrade
Power On, Performance
Software Upgrade
Power On, Performance
All other Service Events
Visual, Performance
Procedures for IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients
Table 8-2 describes the test or inspection to perform for each Information Center
and Client for each type of test specified in Table 8-1. Detailed procedures for
performing the tests in the tables are given in the previous sections of this chapter.
Table 8-2: M3150/M3145/M3155/M3151 - Test and Inspection Matrix
Test Block
Name
Visual
Power On
Test/Inspection to Perform
Expected Results
1.
For installation, perform visual
inspection of shipping cartons and
contents. All other cases, inspect
installed device.
No visible damage.
2.
Is the speaker cable securely fastened?
3.
If a Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch is
installed, are keyboard and mouse
cables securely fastened to the rear of
the KVM switch with cable ties?
Expected answer is
“Yes”. for steps 1 3. If so, Visual test
passed.
1.
Power on all devices.
2.
Observe software startup.
3.
Observe that resting display shows
appropriate information for device
configuration and options.
4.
Observe that all lights visible from the
front panels are in proper status
5.
If Elo Touch flat panel display is
installed, were onscreen display and
display power controls disabled?
Devices power up
into expected
resting display
status
What to Record
on Service
Record
V:P or V:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
PO:P or PO:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Select onscreen
display and power
controls and no
visual changes
occur on screen
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
8-7
Chapter 8: Verifying Product Assurance
Table 8-2: M3150/M3145/M3155/M3151 - Test and Inspection Matrix
Test Block
Name
Performance
8-8
Test/Inspection to Perform
Expected Results
What to Record
on Service
Record
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
P:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
If a Keyboard-Video-Mouse Switch is used,
has the KVM Switch successfully passed its
Performance Test?
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
PKVM:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
If HL7 Export option is installed, verify
successful ping to the target HL7 client
device by using hostname.
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
PHL7:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
If 12-Lead Analysis/Export option is
installed, verify successful ping to the 12Lead TraceMaster system device by using
hostname.
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
P12LEAD:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
If Holter Export option is installed, verify
successful Ping to Holter System by using
hostname.
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
PHE:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
If Alert Data Integration is installed, verify
successful ping to Alert Data Integration
device by using host name.
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
PADE:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
1.
Verify purchased options are enabled.
2.
Do appropriate data (waveforms and
parameters) appear?
3.
Verify normal system operation.
4.
Do the devices respond to user inputs?
5.
Do audible speaker tones occur?
Performing Test and Inspection Procedures
Procedures for M3170 Patient Link
Table 8-3 describes the test or inspection to perform for each M3170 Patient Link
for each type of test specified in Table 8-1.
Note Detailed procedures for performing the tests in the tables are given in the previous
sections of this chapter.
Table 8-3: M3170 - Test and Inspection Matrix
Test Block
Name
What to Record
on Service
Record
Test/Inspection to Perform
Expected Results
Visual
For installation, perform visual inspection of
shipping cartons and contents.
No visible damage.
V:P or V:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Power On
Power on all devices.
Observe software boot up.
Observe that support display shows that the
DataServer Startup was complete.
Devices power up
into expected
status on support
display
PO:P or PO:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Performance
Verify purchased options are enabled.
Verify normal system operation.
Do LAN based monitors record and print
requests respond to user inputs?
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
P:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
If HL7 Export is installed, ping by host name
the target HL7 client device
Expected answer is
“Yes”. If so,
Performance test
passed.
PHL7:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
8-9
Chapter 8: Verifying Product Assurance
Procedures for M3169 Small Database Server
Table 8-4 describes the test or inspection to perform for the M3169 Database
Server for each type of test specified in Table 8-1.
Table 8-4: M3169 - Test and Inspection Matrix
Test Block
Name
Expected Results
Visual
For installation, perform visual inspection of
shipping cartons and contents.
No visible damage.
V:P or V:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Power On
Power on all devices.
Observe software boot up.
After Self-Test, observe that DBS status LED
is solid green.
Devices power up
into expected
status on support
display
PO:P or PO:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Performance
Verify purchased options are enabled.
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
P:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Observe that all M3145/M3155 and M3151
Client Device names configured on the DBS
are displayed at the bottom of the service
screen with a status of Monitoring.
8-10
What to Record
on Service
Record
Test/Inspection to Perform
Performing Test and Inspection Procedures
Procedures for M3154 Database Server
Table 8-5 describes the test or inspection to perform for the M3154 Database
Server for each type of test specified in Table 8-1.
Table 8-5: M3154 - Test and Inspection Matrix
Test Block
Name
What to Record
on Service
Record
Test/Inspection to Perform
Expected Results
Visual
For installation, perform visual inspection of
shipping cartons and contents.
No visible damage.
V:P or V:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Power On
Power on all devices.
Observe software boot up.
After Self-Test, observe that DBS status LED
is solid green.
Devices power up
into expected
status on support
display
PO:P or PO:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Performance
Verify purchased options are enabled.
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
P:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
If IIC Web Access option is installed, log in to
the Database Server from a PC on the
hospital’s intranet or from the Database
Server.
Verify that stored patient data are displayed
properly.
Expected answer is
“Yes”. If so,
Performance test
passed.
PWA:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
If Patient Data Transfer option is installed,
verify in Add/Remove Database Servers
configuration that all DBS hostnames
participating in patient data transfer are
listed.
Ping by hostname each of the Database
Servers
Expected answer is
“Yes”. If so,
Performance test
passed.
PPDT:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Observe that all M3155 and M3151 Client
Device names configured on the DBS are
displayed at the bottom of the service
screen with a status of Monitoring.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
8-11
Chapter 8: Verifying Product Assurance
Procedures for the IntelliVue Clinical Network
Table 8-6 describes the test or inspection to perform for the IntelliVue Clinical
Network components for each type of test specified in Table 8-1.
Table 8-6: IntelliVue Clinical Network - Test and Inspection Matrix
Test Block
Name
8-12
Test/Inspection to Perform
Expected Results
What to Record
on Service
Record
Visual
Inspect all system components for obvious
damage.
No visible damage.
V:P or V:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Power On
Power on each active Network device.
Observe that all lights visible on the front
panel are in proper status and that no error
conditions are shown.
Per device documentation observe normal
conditions for each type of device.
Devices power up
into expected
status on support
display
PO:P or PO:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Performance
Perform an operational test of the Clinical
Network by executing a data passing
operation from each connected Information
Center to every other Information Center,
Client, or Printer on the Network
For each M3150 and M3155 Information
Center:
Verify that a review application (e.g. Wave
Review) can be executed. This verifies
connection to the M3154 Database Server
(if a M3155 Information Center).
For each M3151 Client:
Verify that a review application (e.g. Wave
Review) can be executed. This verifies
connection to the M3154 Database Server
For each wireless Patient Monitor:
Verify that waveforms from each wireless
patient monitor on the network are
displayed on an Information Center and that
the waveforms are continuous.
Expected answers
are “Yes”.
If so, Performance
test passed.
P:P or P:F
where:
P = Pass
F = Fail
Safety
No safety test is required.
S:NA
where:
NA= Not
Required
A
Worksheets
This appendix provides a set of worksheets that can be copied and used in
the design, installation, and configuration of Information Center Systems.
These worksheets are designed to assist with:
• Device Installation
• Network Configuration
• Equipment Setup
• Patient Data Transfer/IIC Web Access
Note
It is recommend that you copy these worksheets as needed and complete
them before you begin each associated task. Completed worksheets can
be retained as a record for future reference.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-1
Appendix A: Worksheets
Device Installation
Tables Table A-1 through Table A-15 permit recording names, IP Addresses, and
locations of ICN devices. Up to (22) M3154 Database Server systems can be
connected.
Use these tables to ensure that each device has a unique host name, device name,
and IP address. M3169 Database Server systems cannot be connected together.
Note If you intend to connect M3154 Database Servers to create a Large Central
Database System, you must identify and configure the “Master” Database Server.
Device
Speed (in Mbps)
Duplex setting
Database Server*
100
Full
Managed Switch (Core or Tier)
100
Full
IntelliVue Information Center*
100
Full
IntelliVue Information Center Client
100
Full
ITS Smart-hopping
Access Point Controller
100
Full
ITS Smart-hopping
Access Point
100
Full
Unmanaged Switch (Edge)
Auto
Auto
M3/M4 Bedside
10
Half
IntelliVue Patient Monitor
10
Half
Network Printer
10
Half
Paging Transmitter
10
Half
* - If a second NIC is installed, the connection can be set to Auto, 100 Full, or whatever the infrastructure requires.
A-2
Device Installation
Table A-1: IntelliVue Clinical Network 1 - Device Names and Addresses
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.3.32
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.3.33
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.3.34
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.3.35
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.3.36
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.3.37
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.3.38
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.3.39
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.3.64
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.3.65
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.3.66
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.3.67
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.3.68
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.3.69
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.3.70
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.3.71
172.31.0.1
172.31.3.0
255.255.248.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
a
M3154 Master
Database Server
172.31.3.0
0.0.0.0
M3169 Server
172.31.3.0
172.31.0.1
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
a. Database Server Default Gateway for the primary NIC (with a second NIC) is set to blank automatically by the
OS installer. The Default Gateway address comes from the hospital for the second NIC. The values in these
tables are for reference only.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-3
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-2: IntelliVue Clinical Network 2- Device Names and Addresses
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
M3155
172.31.11.32
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.11.33
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.11.34
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.11.35
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.11.36
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.11.37
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.11.38
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.11.39
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.11.64
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.11.65
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.11.66
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.11.67
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.11.68
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.11.69
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.11.70
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.11.71
172.31.8.1
172.31.11.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.11.0
172.31.8.1
Device Model
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-4
Host Name
Device Name
Location
Default
Gateway no Router
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
255.255.248.0
Device Installation
Table A-3: IntelliVue Clinical Network 3 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.19.32 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.19.33 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.19.34 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.19.35 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.19.36 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.19.37 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.19.38 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.19.39 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.19.64 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.19.65 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.19.66 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.19.67 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.19.68 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.19.69 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.19.70 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.19.71 172.31.16.1
172.31.19.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.19.0
172.31.16.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-5
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-4: IntelliVue Clinical Network 4 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.27.32 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.27.33 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.27.34 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.27.35 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.27.36 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.27.37 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.27.38 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.27.39 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.27.64 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.27.65 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.27.66 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.27.67 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.27.68 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.27.69 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.27.70 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.27.71 172.31.24.1
172.31.27.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.27.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-6
172.31.24.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
Device Installation
Table A-5: IntelliVue Clinical Network 5 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.35.32 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.35.33 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.35.34 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.35.35 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.35.36 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.35.37 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.35.38 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.35.39 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.35.64 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.35.65 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.35.66 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.35.67 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.35.68 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.35.69 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.35.70 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.35.71 172.31.32.1
172.31.35.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.35.0
172.31.32.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-7
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-6: IntelliVue Clinical Network 6 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.43.32 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.43.33 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.43.34 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.43.35 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.43.36 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.43.37 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.43.38 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.43.39 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.43.64 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.43.65 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.43.66 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.43.67 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.43.68 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.43.69 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.43.70 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.43.71 172.31.40.1
172.31.43.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.43.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-8
172.31.40.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
Device Installation
Table A-7: IntelliVue Clinical Network 7 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.51.32 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.51.33 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.51.34 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.51.35 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.51.36 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.51.37 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.51.38 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.51.39 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.51.64 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.51.65 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.51.66 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.51.67 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.51.68 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.51.69 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.51.70 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.51.71 172.31.48.1
172.31.51.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.51.0
172.31.48.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-9
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-8: IntelliVue Clinical Network 8 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.59.32 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.59.33 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.59.34 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.59.35 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.59.36 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.59.37 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.59.38 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.59.39 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.59.64 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.59.65 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.59.66 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.59.67 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.59.68 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.59.69 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.59.70 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.59.71 172.31.56.1
172.31.59.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.59.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-10
172.31.56.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
Device Installation
Table A-9: IntelliVue Clinical Network 9 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.67.32 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.67.33 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.67.34 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.67.35 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.67.36 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.67.37 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.67.38 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.67.39 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.67.64 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.67.65 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.67.66 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.67.67 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.67.68 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.67.69 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.67.70 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.67.71 172.31.64.1
172.31.67.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.67.0
172.31.64.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-11
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-10: IntelliVue Clinical Network 10 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.75.32 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.75.33 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.75.34 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.75.35 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.75.36 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.75.37 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.75.38 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.75.39 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.75.64 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.75.65 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.75.66 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.75.67 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.75.68 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.75.69 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.75.70 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.75.71 172.31.72.1
172.31.75.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.75.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-12
172.31.72.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
Device Installation
Table A-11: IntelliVue Clinical Network 11 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.83.32 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.83.33 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.83.34 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.83.35 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.83.36 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.83.37 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.83.38 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.83.39 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.83.64 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.83.65 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.83.66 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.83.67 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.83.68 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.83.69 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.83.70 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.83.71 172.31.80.1
172.31.83.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.83.0
172.31.80.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-13
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-12: IntelliVue Clinical Network 12 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.91.32 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.91.33 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.91.34 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.91.35 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.91.36 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.91.37 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.91.38 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.91.39 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.91.64 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.91.65 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.91.66 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.91.67 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.91.68 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.91.69 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.91.70 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.91.71 172.31.88.1
172.31.91.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.91.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-14
172.31.88.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
Device Installation
Table A-13: IntelliVue Clinical Network 13 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.99.32 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.99.33 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.99.34 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.99.35 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.99.36 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.99.37 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.99.38 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.99.39 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.99.64 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.99.65 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.99.66 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.99.67 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.99.68 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.99.69 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.99.70 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.99.71 172.31.96.1
172.31.99.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.99.0
172.31.96.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-15
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-14: IntelliVue Clinical Network 14 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.107.32 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.107.33 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.107.34 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.107.35 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.107.36 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.107.37 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.107.38 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.107.39 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.107.64 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.107.65 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.107.66 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.107.67 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.107.68 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.107.69 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.107.70 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.107.71 172.31.104.1 172.31.107.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.107.0 172.31.104.1
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
A-16
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
Device Installation
Table A-15: IntelliVue Clinical Network 15 - Device Names and Addresses
Device Model
Host Name
Device Name
Location
IP Address
Default
Gateway w/ Router
Default
Gateway no Router
Subnet Mask
M3155
172.31.115.32 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.115.33 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.115.34 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.115.35 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.115.36 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.115.37 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.115.38 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3155
172.31.115.39 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.115.64 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.115.65 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.115.66 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.115.67 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.115.68 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.115.69 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.115.70 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3151 Client
172.31.115.71 172.31.112.1 172.31.115.0 255.255.248.0
M3154 Server
172.31.115.0 172.31.112.1
0.0.0.0
255.255.248.0
12-Lead ECG
Management
System
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
HL7 Client
SNTP Time Source
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-17
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-16: ICN Printers Device Names and IP Addresses
Printer Name
Location
IIC Device
Names
(using this Printer)
Client
Device Names
(using this
Printer)
Hardware
Address
(from Printer
Configuration
Page)
IP Address
172.31. .96
172.31. .97
172.31. .98
172.31. .99
172.31. .100
172.31. .101
172.31. .102
172.31. .103
Network Configuration
Network Configuration permits identifying the network devices. Enter the Model
Number, Names, and Location selected for each IntelliVue Information Center and
Client. Complete this information this for each Clinical Unit.
Table A-17: Network Configuration
Clinical Unit Name
A-18
Model #
Host Name
Device Name
Location
Equipment Setup
Equipment Setup
Equipment Setup worksheets (Table A-18) list the patient monitors (hardwired and
telemetry) that will be available to each Information Center for monitoring. The
following tables can be used to assign monitoring equipment to branches and beds.
Table A-18: Equipment Setup Worksheets
Clinical
Unit Name
Equipment
Type
Bed
Label
Monitor
Label
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
Equipment
Label
Setup
Equipment
Only
A-19
Appendix A: Worksheets
Table A-18: Equipment Setup Worksheets
Clinical
Unit Name
A-20
Equipment
Type
Bed
Label
Monitor
Label
Equipment
Label
Setup
Equipment
Only
Patient Data Transfer/IIC Web Access
Patient Data Transfer/IIC Web Access
Use the following checklists to identify and record information and installation
procedures necessary for installing IIC Web Access capability in a hospital.
IIC Web Access Requirements and Specifications
The following specifications are required to install and utilize the IIC Web Access
capability.
• requirements for hospital LAN:
-
100 Mbit/s connection from Database Server to hospital LAN
• requirements for hospital LAN PCs
-
industry standard web browsers
-
Netscape, Release 4.7 or greater. Netscape does not support near real time
overview,
-
Microsoft IE, Release 5.0 or greater and must allow downloads of signed
Active X controls
-
TCP/IP and HTTP networking protocols
• requirements for patient data access:
-
customer specified User name(s), log-in, and Password
-
specification of patient data access privileges by Domain or IP Address range
Note Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol for public-key and encryption is not
implemented for access to patient data.
• limitations on patient data access:
-
100 PCs maximum can simultaneously access the Database Server
-
8,096 KB/s maximum Bandwidth Throttling for web access traffic on
Internet Information Server (IIS)
Passive Infrastructure Installation
Table A-19 specifies requirements for the passive hospital infrastructure
installation.
Table A-19: Passive Infrastructure Installation Information
Description
Installation of communication outlets near
Database Server and connection to hospital
LAN
Completion
Date
Comments
Label faceplates IntelliVue
Information Center Web
Installation of UTP patch cable from Server’s
Web NIC to communication outlet
Installation of in-wall cable run from Server to
location of hospital LAN network device
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-21
Appendix A: Worksheets
TCP/IP Network Card Configuration
Table A-20 specifies address requirements for the TCP/IP network card.
Table A-20: TCP/IP Network Card Configuration
Description
Answer
IP Address specified for Information Center Web Server
Comments
IP Address cannot be in the same Subnet
mask of the IntelliVue Clinical Network
(i.e. 172.31.xxx.xxx)
Managing IP Addresses by DHCP protocol
is not supported - static IP Address
required
Subnet Mask specified for Web Server
Default Gateway specified for Web Server
Security Configuration
The following table specifies requirements for customer password and domain
name restrictions.
Table A-21: Security Configuration
Description
Answer
Comments
Web login information for each New User:
Username:
Full Name:
Description:
Password:
Computer Access: All computers? Yes/No
Single computer?
IP Address required
Group of computers? Network ID and
Subnet Mask required
Domain of computers? Domain Name
required
A-22
If No, answer one of the selections below
Default = Yes
Patient Data Transfer/IIC Web Access
Web Operation from Network PCs Verification
After configuration of IIC Web option at the PIIC Database Server, perform the
following performance verification steps.
Table A-22: IIC Web Operation Verification
Description
Completion
Date
Comments
Ping IP Address of Web NIC from a PC on the hospital LAN
For each PC on the hospital LAN:
- verify or load either Netscape Navigator (Revision 4.7 or
later) or Microsoft Internet Explorer (Version 5.0 or later)
- connect to IP Address of Database Server Web NIC
(http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
- log in to Database Server with proper User Name and
Password
IP Address of Database Server IC Web
NIC = http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP Address of the
server’s Web NIC
User Name:
Password:
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
A-23
Appendix A: Worksheets
A-24
B
Installing the IIC Web Access Option
This appendix details the steps for installing the IIC Web Access option on
a IntelliVue Database Server or IntelliVue Information Center. The IIC Web
Access option permits viewing Patient Data Review Applications stored on
the Server via the hospital intranet. This appendix includes:
• Compatibility
• Installing the IIC Web Access Option
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
B-1
Appendix B: Installing the IIC Web Access Option
Compatibility
The Web access option permits up to 100 simultaneous users to view stored patient
data (waves, alarms, events, ST segments, trends, viewable recording strip data)
using standard web browsers such as Internet Explorer.
Table B-1: PIIC Release Compatibility
Compatible DBSa
IIC Release
E.00
M3154
E.01
F.00
M3150, M3154, M3169
G.00
H.00
J.00
K.00
L.00
M.00
N.01
a. Each DBS must have Web Server option installed
and operating.
Web access installation with Software Release N.01, requires that the following
conditions are met.
• The Web Serving option must be purchased and enabled in the Purchased
Options and Support Information application on the DBS.
• If your hardware does not have a second NIC, a Network Interface Card (NIC)
must be installed in the appropriate slot of the DBS.
• A 100 Mbit/s network connection must be made between the Database Server
Web NIC and the hospital intranet.
• The hospital IT service must provide Database Server:
-
IP Address,
-
IP Subnet Mask,
-
Default Gateway,
-
DNS IP Address & Search Order, and
-
WINS IP Address.
• Microsoft Internet Explorer (Release 5.5 or higher and must allow downloads of
signed Active X controls) web browser is installed on hospital intranet PCs
accessing the Information Center Web.
B-2
Installing the IIC Web Access Option
• Netscape (Release 4.7 or higher) web browser is installed on hospital intranet
PCs accessing the Information Center Web. Note that this does not support near
real-time overview.
• Windows NT, 2003 or XP (or higher) is installed on hospital intranet PCs
accessing the Information Center Web.
• TCP/IP and HTTP networking protocol is on hospital intranet PCs accessing the
Database Server.
• A local printer must be installed.
• Web Access User Logon information including log on name, password, patient
access user rights (clinical unit permissions) is configured.
Note It is the responsibility of the hospital to manage the Web Access User Logon
configuration, not Philips HealthCare.
• SQL access from EWS to Information Center Database Servers requires
Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC 2.8) and that the appropriate SQL
port (default 1433) is open.
• Real-time data access from EWS client(s) to Information Center Database
Servers requires that the configured port (default 9000) is open.
• Communications between EWS clients and the EWS Server requires that the
configured port (default 9001) is open.
IIC Web access option installation requires that you modify an HTML file on the
Database Server to support its functionality. The application does not permit saving
Favorite sites.
Installing the IIC Web Access Option
The procedure for installing IIC web access is described in the following sections.
• Updating System files (For Enhanced Web Server only)
• Installing the Web NIC
• Updating the Database Server BIOS
• Entering customer specified IP Address on the Web NIC
• Changing the default Web Password to a customer specified password
• Testing web access to Database Server patient data
Updating System Files For EWS Systems
For an Information Center Database Server Web to be launched in a topmost frame
and for the EWS retrospective Review Applications to display properly, you must edit
the C:\InetPub\wwwRoot\VerifyFrame.html file on each Database Server
connected to the EWS.
1. On each DBS that is configured in the EWS, open:
C:\InetPub\wwwRoot\VerifyFrame.html
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
B-3
Appendix B: Installing the IIC Web Access Option
2. Right-click the file, and select Properties from the drop-down menu.
3. On the General tab of the file Properties window, clear the checkbox adjacent to
the Read Only attribute.
4. Click OK to close the Properties window.
5. Open the file with Notepad (or an equivalent ASCII text editor), and delete the
highlighted text:
Figure B-1: Editing the VerifyFrame.html File
6. Save the changes. Then change the file properties back to Read Only.
Editing the Client PC Registry
If problems occur when you try to run Review Applications from Enhanced Web
Server, you must properly install Internet Explorer on the client PC running EWS and
set the registry key to the full path specification for Internet Explorer.
Use regedt32 (or equivalent) to verify/edit the registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\App
Paths\IEXPLORE.EXE\(Default): C:\Program Files\Internet Explorer\iexplore.exe
Setting Client Internet Options
If the client IIC Browser Internet Options > Client Advisor is enabled, you may have
problems viewing graphics when you run Review Applications from a IIC-Web. If this
is the case you can add the Database Server URL to the Browser Approved Sites list.
1. From the Windows task bar, select Start > Programs > Internet Explorer.
2. Select Tools > Internet Options.
The Internet Options dialog appears.
3. Select the Content tab in the dialog, and then click Enable.
The Content Advisor dialog appears.
4. Select the Approved Sites tab in the dialog and then enter the Database server
URL in the Allow this Web Site text box. Click Always to add the URL to the List of
approved Web sites.
5. Click OK in the Content Advisor and Internet Properties dialogs to close them.
B-4
Installing the IIC Web Access Option
Installing the IIC Web NIC
Large DBS hardware does not require this NIC. Refer to page 2-61 for details about
installing a second NIC on a Small Database Server or IntelliVue Information Center.
Configuring the Web NIC IP Address
The IP Address for the Network Interface Card should be provided by the hospital IT
department and be compatible with the hospital intranet.
Note If upgrading an existing Database Server with a second NIC, the OS must be reinstalled. See Software Re-Installation Procedure, page 7-133.
Network settings are site-specific and required for the NIC to connect to the hospital
network. The factory default of the second NIC IP address is DHCP.
To configure the second NIC for Web Access:
1. Navigate to Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center.
The System Properties dialog opens.
2. Click the Monitoring LAN link, and then click Properties from the Local Area
Connection Status dialog.
3. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the LAN Properties dialog and
click Properties.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog opens.
Figure B-2: IP Address Settings
4. Click the Use the following IP address option and enter the following customersupplied information in the adjacent text boxes:
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Default gateway
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
B-5
Appendix B: Installing the IIC Web Access Option
If a customer-supplied IP Address is not available, change the factory default IP
Address to 172.30.221.0 until a customer address is supplied. Do not use an IP
Address of the form 172.31.xxx.x; this form is used for the primary Clinical
Network. If the LAN portion of the web access card’s IP Address is the same as
that of the LAN card Web Acces will not function.
5. Click the Advanced button. Select the DNS and/or the WINS tab, and enter the
appropriate name and service information provided by the hospital. See
page 5-26 for recommended settings.
6. Click OK to close the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog.
7. Shut down and restart the Database Server using Shutdown > !Shutdown Normal from the Service screen.
Using the Web User Access Config Tool
The IntelliVue Information Center Web User Access Config Tool permits setting up
user and access privilege. It is recommended that at installation time there is at
least one user (defined by the hospital) configured. The Web Config Tool can be
accessed from any PC connected to the intranet. You can use this tool to set the
Username and Password for users who will have access to patient data on the
Server.
1. Log on to a PC that has access to a supported web browser.
2. Open the browser and enter the hostname of the Database Server or IntelliVue
Information Center in Address box: http://hostname/.
Once connection is established, a login screen opens.
Note The default setting for the Username is ClinicalUser. The password is provided with
documentation accompanying your system shipment.
It is the hospital’s responsibility to manage clinical web access and audit trail data.
Users are to be defined by the hospital. Clinical Operators with administrative
privileges can add/remove Information Center Web clinicians and set up their
access privileges. Clinical operators without Administrative privileges can only
change their password.
Adding
Clinicians
A maximum of 1000 clinicians can be added. User names are checked for
uniqueness by the Master Database Server.
To add a clinician:
1. Log on to the Information Center Web.
2. Click Clinician Management.
B-6
Installing the IIC Web Access Option
The available Clinician Management options appear.
Figure B-3: Clinician Management Options
3. Click Add Clinician.
4. Enter a user name (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) defined by the hospital
in the Username box.
5. Enter the first (up to 20 alphanumeric characters) and last name (up to 20
alphanumeric characters) of the user in the appropriate text boxes.
This information is used in the Audit Trail function only.
6. Enter a new password (5 to 20 alphanumeric characters) in the appropriate
Password text box, and re-enter the password to confirm it.
7. Select the Administrator checkbox if you want the user to manage the Clinical
Web Access and Audit Trail data.
8. Click Update Information.
After a user logs on, a Patient List screen shows all beds from clinical units to which
the user has access. Each DataBase Server is listed along with the Clinical Units
configured to that Database Server. For details on the Web Access interface, refer to
the IntelliVue Information Center Instructions for Use.
Removing/
Viewing the
Clinician List
To remove or view the list of clinicians configured for web access:
1. Log on to the Information Center Web.
2. Click Clinician Management.
3. Click REMOVE / VIEW CLINICIAN LIST.
Figure B-4: Viewing the Clinician List
4. Select the clinician(s) for you want to remove or view.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
B-7
Appendix B: Installing the IIC Web Access Option
Note A blue arrow beside the User Name indicates that the clinician has Administrator
privileges. A black arrow means that the clinician does not have those privileges.
5. Click Update Information.
Changing
Clinician
Password
To change the password a clinician uses for web access:
1. Log on to the Information Center Web.
2. Click Clinician Management.
3. Click CHANGE CLINICIAN PASSWORD.
4. Enter the User Name, and the New Password.
5. Click Change Password.
Viewing
Clinician
Assignments
To view clinician assignments:
1. Log on to the Information Center Web.
2. Click Clinician Management.
3. Click CLINICIAN ASSIGNMENTS.
Figure B-5: Reviewing Clinician Assignments
4. View and modify (if necessary) the Clinical Unit-to-Clinician assignments.
Viewing Audit
Data
The View Audit Data feature allows clinicians with administrative privileges to view
an audit trail of all clinical operations. The administrator can perform specific
searches based on the criteria entered in the search boxes.
Note The IIC Web Audit feature must be enabled for use via the Database Server General
Configuration screen as described in “Database Server General Configuration” on
page 6-24. The IIC Web Audit feature is disabled by default.
To view audit data:
1. Log on to the Information Center Web.
2. Click Clinician Management.
3. Click VIEW AUDIT DATA.
4. Type search criteria in the search boxes, if necessary.
5. Click View Audit Data.
The Audit trail stores approximately 100,000 entries. When entries exceed the
maximum, the earliest entries are deleted as required.
B-8
Installing the IIC Web Access Option
Exporting Audit
Data
Audit Data can also be exported. The export file is an.xml file (named with the date
on which is was exported). Audit files can only be exported to the Master Database
Server.
To export audit data:
1. Log on to the Information Center Web.
2. Click Clinician Management.
3. Click the EXPORT AUDIT DATA link.
4. Enter the Export Path.
5. Click Export Data.
Installing a Local Printer on the Web Client Host
If there are only network printers installed and configured on the Web Client, you
must configure a local printer.
1. From the Service screen, go to Other Services > Control Panel and double-click
Devices and Printers.
2. The Devices and Printers window opens.
3. Double-click Add Printer.
4. Double-click Add a local printer.
The Add Printer Wizard appears.
5. Complete each Add Printer Wizard dialog box.
Testing and Inspecting Web Access
To test LAN connectivity of the NIC installed for web access, open the Command
Prompt and type ping hostname (where hostname is the computer name of the
device with the second NIC given in the Installing the Web NIC procedure).
If there is a reply from that hostname and the hostname can be resolved to the
proper IP Address, the LAN connection has been made. If the ping fails, the reason
for the failure will be shown. Identify the problem, correct it, and repeat the process.
Access patient data on the Database Server to verify that the Information Center
Web is functioning properly. It is recommended that you run the following test from
a PC on the hospital’s intranet, but you can run it from the Database Server.
Note At least one IntelliVue Information Center on the Network must be monitoring
patients for patient data to be available for review.
If accessing Server data from a PC on the hospital intranet, perform this test:
1. Open the web browser and enter the URL, http://IP Address, (IP Address is the
IP Address of the NIC installed in the DBS or IntelliVue Information Center.
The the Information Center Web Login screen appears.
2. Log in using an account you added using the Web User Access Config Tool.
3. Assign a new user and password.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
B-9
Appendix B: Installing the IIC Web Access Option
4. Log out and log back in using the new user information.
5. Verify that patient lists and data from all IntelliVue Database Servers are
present.
Note The URL can also be the Host name of the Server if the hospital LAN’s DNS
(Dynamic Name Server) and/or WINS (Windows Naming Service) is properly
configured to resolve the name. If there are multiple Servers on the LAN, each
Server’s Host name must be unique.
If you are accessing data from the Database Server, perform this test:
Note Accessing patient data from the Database Server should only be done for testing
Information Center Web performance. It is not supported under normal operating
conditions.
1. Open the Service menu.
2. Go to Support Logs > Network Statistics.
The Network Statistics screen appears.
3. Click Search by IP to open the Enter Switch or Access Point IP Address dialog.
Figure B-6: Searching for DBS by IP Address
4. Enter the IP Address of the DBS NIC and then click OK.
The Information Center Web Login window opens.
5. Log in using an account you added using the Web User Access Config Tool.
6. Assign a new user and password.
7. Log out and log back in using the new user information.
8. Verify that patient lists and data from all IntelliVue Database Servers are
present.
Note The selected IntelliVue Information Center must be in Monitoring mode to verify that
you are accessing the most recent patient data.
9. Close the Web Main Menu screen.
B-10
C
Enabling Remote Access to PIIC Systems
This appendix describes the procedures used to remotely access the
IntelliVue Database Server from a remote PC using the Windows OS
remote capabilities and includes:
• Overview
• Using Remote Desktop
• Accessing Log Files
• Test and Inspection Procedures
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
C-1
Appendix C: Enabling Remote Access to PIIC Systems
Overview
You can remotely access the \Stardate\Logs drive of a networked Information
Center, or Client. Log files on the Information Center hard drive can then be
reviewed or copied to the accessing PC.
Examples of files that appear on the installation drive are:
• Run Time Error Log Files
• Exception Error Log Files
• Suspend Alarm Log Files
PIIC DBS Requirements
To access a PIIC Database Server remotely, the server must meet the following
requirements:
• VPN connection to PIIC server on the Hospital LAN.
• DBS has network connectivity to the remote PC.
Accessing Remote PC Requirements
To access a PIIC Database Server, the accessing PC must meet the following
requirements:
• Proper protocols are installed.
-
Protocol for Information Centers is TCP/IP.
-
VPN setup parameters are Network/Dial out Protocols /TCP/IP.
• Remote PC has network connectivity to the PIIC DBS.
• Additional information required to access a Database Server is:
-
Specific DBS Hostname (e.g., Serv01).
-
User Name (ServiceUser).
-
Philips Service User password.
Using Remote Desktop
IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients cannot support remote desktop; only PIIC
Database Servers support remote desktop.
You can access the remote device as follows:
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start and then enter Remote Desktop in the
Search box.
2. Click the link that appears to the Remote Desktop Connection program.
C-2
Using Remote Desktop
The Remote Desktop Connection window appears.
Figure C-1: Remote Desktop Connection Window
3. Type the desired DBS Hostname in the Computer field, and then click the
Options button.
The Remote Desktop Connection dialog expands.
Figure C-2: Remote Desktop Connection Options
4. Select the General tab and type the DBS Hostname in the Computer field; type
ServiceUser in the User name field; and Mark the Allow me to save credentials
checkbox.
5. Click Connect to establish the connection to the DBS.
A warning popup may display during the connection process. If the warning
displays, click OK in the popup to complete the connection to the remote
DataBase Server.
When the connection to the DBS is complete, you are prompted to enter a
password.
6. Enter the Service password in the Password field to gain access to the DBS.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
C-3
Appendix C: Enabling Remote Access to PIIC Systems
Accessing Log Files
This section describes how to access files in the Stardate\Log directory of the
remote DBS or IntelliVue Information Center. The files are found in the
C:\Stardate\Logs directory of the remote DBS or Information Center PC.
Reviewing the Remote Log Files
The following procedure describes how to review the Philips Log files, but you can
also access available web browser support applications and utilities (e.g., Switch
and Access Point).
To view log files on the DBS:
1. Locate the Stardate\Logs directory on the remote device drive and open the
NetDeviceLink.html file.
2. Click the IntelliVue Information Center or Client Hostname icons to view the log
files for those devices.
Accessing the Remote Event Viewer or Application Files
To access the DBS Remote Event Viewer or application files:
1. From the Windows desktop go to Start > Control Panel, and then select
Administrative Tools.
The Administrative Tools window displays.
2. Double-click the Event Viewer icon.
The Event Viewer window appears.
3. If you want to connect to another networked IntelliVue Information Center or
Client in the monitoring LAN, go to Action > Connect to Another Computer....
The Select Computer dialog displays.
4. To select a computer, enter the Hostname of the desired computer.
5. After you specify the computer, click OK.
6. View the file, selecting either System or Application, depending on log file type
you want to review.
Using the System Tools Feature
To use the System Tools feature:
1. From the Windows desktop, click Start and then enter systemapps in the Search
box.
2. Click the link that appears to the systemapps program.
3. The System Tools window appears.
C-4
Test and Inspection Procedures
Figure C-3: System Tools Window
System Tools provides the same applications, System Validation, Backup Logs,
Archive, that are available through Service mode. You cannot access Service mode
with Remote Access.
Warning Do not run other executable files located on the DBS drive as this can cause
monitoring interruption.
Logging Out of the Remote Desktop Connection
To log out of the Remote Desktop Connection:
From the Windows desktop, Start > Log Off ServiceUser.
The Remote Desktop Connection terminates.
Test and Inspection Procedures
Refer to the Test and Inspection procedures listed in Chapter 8. These performance
assurance procedures must be performed.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
C-5
Appendix C: Enabling Remote Access to PIIC Systems
C-6
D
Installing the DBS Data Export Option
This Appendix describes the procedure for installing and activating the
PIIC DBS Data Export options and includes:
• Overview
• Installing Data Export
• Receiving Exported Data
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
D-1
Appendix D: Installing the DBS Data Export Option
Overview
This Appendix describes the procedure for installing and activating the Data Export
options:
• Holter option - this feature provides the ability to export a patient’s ECG
waveform data stored on the Database Server to a Philips/Zymed Holter
Scanner for Windows - Model 2010 for Holter analysis via the hospital’s
Network.
• 12-Lead option - this feature provides the ability to export 12-Lead ECG
captured conventional 12-lead ECG to a configured receiving system
Data Export requires that the following conditions be met:
• Philips PIIC Application Software Release J.0 or later installed on the Database
Server and all IntelliVue Information Centers and Clients on the Network.
• The Holter Export and/or 12-Lead Export must be purchased and the interface
configured on the Information Center to recognize the hospital receiving system.
• The hospital Holter System must be the Philips/Zymed Holter Scanner for
Windows - Model 2010 running Software Version 2.0 or higher on a Windows
98/2000/2003, ME, or XP PC. The hospital’s Holter PC must also be enabled to
receive the exported patient data from the Information Center/Database server.
• The hospital’s TraceMasterVue must be the running software version B.01 or
higher.
• A second Network Interface Card (NIC) must be installed.
• A 100 Mbit/s network connection must be made between the Database
Server’s NIC and the hospital’s LAN.
• The hospital must provide the following configuration information for the PIIC
Database Server:
-
IP Address
-
IP Subnet Mask
-
Default Gateway
-
Host Name(s)
-
User Name
-
Password
• The networking protocol on the Hospital LAN PCs accessing the Database
Server must be TCP/IP and HTTP.
• The Holter System PC Host Name must be configured via Config Wizard.
• The TraceMaster server Host Name must be configured via Config Wizard.
• The Username and Password must be configured in both the Database Server
and Zymed/Holter machine.
D-2
Installing Data Export
Installing Data Export
The procedures for installing the Data Export feature include:
• Installing and configuring a second NIC (if necessary) on the DBS server.
• Entering the Host Name for Holter or 12-Lead ECG Management System in the
Network Configuration (via Config Wizard).
• Testing export of patient ECG data via hospital LAN to the receiving system.
Note If your PIIC system includes the Web Option, a second NIC is already installed. If this
is the case you do not need to install another NIC for the Data Export feature.
Installing a Second NIC on the DBS
Refer to for the procedure to physically install a second NIC in the DBS server.
Configuring the Second NIC for Data Export
To configure the second NIC for Data Export:
1. Navigate to Start > Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center.
The System Properties dialog opens.
2. Click the Monitoring LAN link, and then click Properties from the Local Area
Connection Status dialog.
3. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the LAN Properties dialog and
click Properties.
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog opens.
Figure D-1: IP Address Settings
4. Click the Use the following IP address option and enter the following customersupplied information in the adjacent text boxes:
• IP address
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
D-3
Appendix D: Installing the DBS Data Export Option
• Subnet mask
• Default gateway
If a customer-supplied IP Address is not available, change the factory default IP
Address to 172.30.221.0 until a customer address is supplied. Do not use an IP
Address of the form 172.31.xxx.x; this form is used for the primary Clinical
Network. If the LAN portion of the web access card’s IP Address is the same as
that of the LAN card Data Export will not function.
5. Click the Advanced button. Select the DNS and/or the WINS tab, and enter the
appropriate name and service information provided by the hospital. See
page 5-26 for recommended settings.
6. Click OK to close the Advanced TCP/IP Settings dialog.
7. Shut down and restart the Database Server using Shutdown > !Shutdown Normal from the Service screen.
Configuring the Data Export Hostname in Config Wizard
The host name of the hospital Holter System and 12-Lead ECG Management
system is provided by the hospital’s IT service and must be configured in the NIC in
order to export data via the hospital LAN.
To configure the Data Export hostname in Config Wizard:
1. Run Config Wizard and open the Network Configuration screen. In the List of
Network Devices section, click New.
Figure D-2: Adding a Network Device in Config Wizard
The Network Devices dialog appears.
D-4
Installing Data Export
Figure D-3: Network Devices Dialog
2. Select Holter or 12-Lead ECG Management from the Device Type drop-down
menu.
3. Enter the customer-provided export device Host Name in the IP/Address/Host
Name field.
4. Click OK and verify that the entered Host Name appears in the List of network
devices.
Testing Data Export Network Connectivity
After all of the configuration settings are made, proper operation of the Data Export
function should be tested to verify that patient data can be accessed. Philips
recommends that you run this test from a PC on the hospital intranet; but it can also
be run from the PIIC Database Server.
To verify network connectivity for the Data Export function:
1. Test Network connectivity of the NIC by pinging the NIC IP Address from the
Database Server.
a) From the Windows desktop, select Start > Command Prompt.
The Command Prompt window opens.
b) At the command prompt, enter ping IPAddress, where IPAddress is the IP
addresses that you configured for the second NIC in the DBS.
If you see a reply, the NIC is working properly. If the ping request fails, try to
identify the problem, correct it, and repeat the process. If you cannot correct
the problem, contact the hospital IT department.
2. Test the Network connectivity by pinging the Host Name of the Holter System PC
on the hospital’s intranet as follows:
a) From the Windows desktop, select Start > Command Prompt.
The Command Prompt window opens.
b) At the command prompt, enter ping Host Name, where Host Name is the
name of the Holter System PC NIC.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
D-5
Appendix D: Installing the DBS Data Export Option
If you see a reply, the connection is successful. If the ping request fails,
notify the hospital IT department to determine cause of failure. When
connection problem is corrected, repeat the process.
3. Verify that the Philips/Zymed Holter Scanner for Windows - Model 2010 is
running Software Version 2.0 or higher.
Note The hospital Holter System must be the Philips/Zymed Holter Scanner for Windows Model 2010 running Software Version 2.0 or higher on a Windows 98, ME, or
Server 2003 PC.
From the Philips/Zymed Holter Scanner System PC, select Help > About Holter.
Receiving Exported Data
In order for a system to receive data exported from a Database Server, the receiving
computer must have network connectivity to the Information Center network.
Note The configuration activity listed in this section is to be performed at the
Philips/Zymed Holter or 12-Lead ECG Management system, not at the Database
Server. Determine the system operating system (Windows NT, 98, 2000, 2003, XP,
ME), then follow the appropriate procedure.
Windows NT
1. Configure the receiving system with a Computer Name and an IP Address.
a) Right click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop.
b) Select Properties from the drop-down menu.
c) The System Properties dialog displays.
d) Select the Identification tab.
e) Verify the computer name. This is the name that will be used during the
Information Center network device configuration as the Host Name.
2. Verify that your computer has a Network Interface Card and that it has an IP
address. You can use either static IP or DHCP.
a) Add the appropriate customer-defined Username and Password.
b) From the Windows Start Menu, go to Settings > Administrative Tools > User
Manager.
c) Under User, select New User.
d) Enter the customer-defined Username and Password, and the confirm the
password.
e) Click the checkboxes adjacent to User Cannot Change Password and
Password Never Expires.
f)
Click OK
3. Create a shared PMDExport folder.
a) From the Windows desktop, click the My Computer icon.
D-6
Receiving Exported Data
b) Double-click the C: drive.
c) Go to File > New > Folder.
d) Name the folder PMDExport.
e) Right-click the PMDExport folder, and select Sharing and Security from the
drop-down menu.
The folder Properties window displays.
f)
On the Sharing tab, click the option button adjacent to Share This Folder.
g) Enter PMDExport in the Share name text box.
h) Click OK.
Windows 2000
1. Configure the receiving system with a Computer Name and an IP Address.
a) From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon.
b) Select Properties from the drop-down menu.
c) The System Properties dialog displays.
d) Select the Identification tab.
e) Verify that you have a computer name. This is the name that will be used
during the Information Center network device configuration as the Host
Name.
f)
Verify that your computer has a network interface card and that it has an IP
address. Either static IP or DHCP can be used.
2. Add appropriate Username and Password (defined by customer).
a) Go to Start > Settings > Taskbar and Start Menu.
b) Select the Advanced tab.
Figure D-4: Displaying Administrative Tools on the Start Menu
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
D-7
Appendix D: Installing the DBS Data Export Option
c) Check Display Administrative Tools under Start Menu Settings.
d) Click OK.
e) Go to Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
f)
Under Computer Management (Local), choose System Tools, then Local
Users and Groups, then Users.
g) Under the Actions menu. Choose New User….
h) Enter user defined Username and Password and confirm password.
i)
Uncheck the User must change password at next logon checkbox.
j)
Click the checkboxes adjacent to User cannot change password and
Password never expires.
k) Click Create.
Note The Username and Password defined in the Zymed/Holter system must match
exactly what is configured in the PIIC Database Server.
3. Create a PMDExport folder, and make it sharable.
a) From the Windows desktop, double-click the My Computer icon.
b) Double-click the C: drive.
c) Go to File > New > Folder.
d) Name your folder PMDExport.
e) Right-click the PMDExport folder, and Select Properties.
Figure D-5: Defining Folder Properties
f)
Select the Sharing tab.
g) Click the Share this folder option button.
D-8
Receiving Exported Data
h) Type PMDExport in the Share name text box.
i)
Click OK.
Windows XP/2003
1. Enable Network Sharing on the PC
a) From the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer.
b) Select Properties from the drop-down menu.
c) Select the Computer Name tab and verify that you have a computer name.
This is the name that will be used during the Information Center network
device configuration as Host Name.
d) Verify that your computer has a network interface card that has an IP
address. This can be either static IP or DHCP.
2. Add User-defined Username and Password.
a) From the Windows task bar go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > User
Accounts.
The User Accounts window displays.
b) Go to Pick a Task > Create a new account.
c) Select the Users tab and enter user-defined User Name in Type a name for
the new account text box. Then click Next.
The User Accounts window displays.
Figure D-6: Creating a User Account
d) Select Computer Administrator as account type and click Create Account.
e) Select desired account name, and click Create a password.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
D-9
Appendix D: Installing the DBS Data Export Option
f)
Type the user-defined password in the Type a new password field and again
in the password confirmation field.
Figure D-7: Assigning User Account Password
g) When complete, click Create Password and close the User Accounts screen.
3. Create a PMDExport folder, and make it sharable.
a) Click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop.
b) Double-click the C: drive.
c) Go to File > New > Folder.
d) Name your folder PMDExport.
e) Right click the PMDExport folder, and select Properties from the drop-down
menu.
f)
The PMDExport Properties dialog displays.
g) Select the Sharing tab of the PMDExport Properties dialog, and select Share
this folder.
h) Type PMDExport in the Share name text box.
i)
Click Permissions.
j)
Under Access Type select Full.
k) Click OK.
Note The Username and Password defined in the Zymed/Holter system must match
exactly what is configured in the Database Server.
D-10
Receiving Exported Data
Windows 7/2008
1. Enable Network Sharing on the PC
a) From the Windows desktop, click Start.
b) Select Computer from the Start menu.
c) Select System Properties and verify that the PC has a computer name. This
is the name that will be used during the IntelliVue Information Center
network device configuration as Host Name.
d) Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center, and verify that your
computer has a network interface card that has an IP address. This can be
either static IP or DHCP.
2. Add User-defined Username and Password.
a) From the Windows desktop, select Start > Control Panel > User Accounts.
The User Accounts window displays.
b) Click Manage another account.
c) Click Create a new account.
The Create New Account screen (Figure D-8) appears.
Figure D-8: Creating a User Account
d) Enter the user-defined name for the account, mark the Administrator radio
button, and then click Create Account.
e) After creating the account, select the newly created account, and click
Create a password.
The Create a password screen appears.
f)
Enter the user-defined password for the account, re-enter the password to
confirm it, and then click Create password.
3. Create a PMDExport folder, and make it sharable.
a) Open Windows Explorer.
b) Double-click the C: drive.
c) Click New folder.
d) Name your folder PMDExport.
e) Right click the PMDExport folder, and select Properties from the drop-down
menu.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
D-11
Appendix D: Installing the DBS Data Export Option
The PMDExport Properties dialog displays.
f)
Select the Sharing tab of the PMDExport Properties dialog, and select
Advanced Sharing.
The Advanced Sharing dialog appears.
Figure D-9: Sharing the PMDExport Folder
g) Mark the Share this folder checkbox.
h) Type PMDExport in the Share name text box.
i)
Click Permissions.
j)
Mark the Full Control checkbox.
k) Click Apply, and OK.
Note The Username and Password defined in the Zymed/Holter system must match
exactly what is configured in the Database Server.
D-12
E
Using the ActiveX Control Deployment Tool
This Appendix describes the ActiveX Control Deployment Tool which
enables you to download required ActiveX controls to IIC Web Server
clients, and includes:
• Overview
• Installing the ActiveX Deployment Tool
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
E-1
Appendix E: Using the ActiveX Control Deployment Tool
Overview
The ActiveX Control Deployment Tool enables you to download required ActiveX
controls to Web Server clients.
When you disable ActiveX downloading and installing controls via the web it
presents a problem for the delivery and installation mechanism of the IIC Web
Server.
The ActiveX Deployment Tool is an installer that accommodates a manual
installation of the required IIC Web Server Active X controls, effectively bypassing
the security limitation from Internet Explorer (IE). This installer manually installs the
IIC Web ActiveX control and allows client users to view IIC Web data.
The IIC Web provides a Patient Window that allows viewing Near Real Time (NRT)
bedside data over the web using Internet Explorer. The first time a user browses to
the Patient List screen and clicks on a bed, Internet Explorer prompts the client to
download and install the ActiveX control as follows:
Click Yes to install the ActiveX control from the web server and install it on your
machine/client.
ActiveX control installation is allowed by IT in most customer locations because
it does not cause security risk.
If your IT Department does not allow download and installation of ActiveX controls,
you must manually copy the required .dll files to your computer and register them
with the Windows OS.
The ActiveX Deployment Tool installs the files shown in Figure E-1.
Figure E-1: Files Installed by ActiveX Deployment Tool
The tool is designed so that patient safety is not compromised. The IIC Web provides
read-only access to patient data from a remote client. If the installation fails for any
reason, there will be no impact on actual patient data or the Philips IntelliVue
Information Center.
Use of IIC Web is supported on theses PIIC releases: IIC Release E.01, IIC Release
F.00, IIC Release G.00, IIC Release H.00, IIC Release J.00, IIC Release K.00, IIC
Release L.00, IIC Release M.00, IIC Release N.00 and IIC Release N.01.
E-2
Installing the ActiveX Deployment Tool
Installing the ActiveX Deployment Tool
To install the ActiveX Deployment Tool on an IIC Web Client host computer:
1. Load the IIC - Web Client ActiveX Deployment Tool CD in the appropriate device
drive.
2. Run setup.exe on the installation CD. If a silent installation is required (such as
when run from a login script), execute the following command:
Setup.exe /S /v/qn
If the installer is run in silent mode, no other prompts will occur. If you are not
running the installer in silent mode the InstallShield Wizard appears.
Figure E-2: ActiveX Deployment Tool Installation Wizard
3. Click Next to continue.
The IIC - Web Client ActiveX Deployment Tool - InstallShield Wizard screen
appears.
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
E-3
Appendix E: Using the ActiveX Control Deployment Tool
Figure E-3: Installing the ActiveX Deployment Tool
4. Click Install.
The installation wizard performs the required tasks and an installation progress
screen appears.
When the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen
displays.
5. Click Finish to complete the installation.
Note If an IIC Web Client is running during the ActiveX deployment, you will be prompted
to reboot the server. Reboot the server at this time.
E-4
Index
Symbols
!Upgrade NLS Catalogs 7-59
Numerics
12-lead export/holter export, troubleshooting 7-10
12-Lead option D-2
12-Lead review 1-23, 1-25
2-channel recorder, maintaining 7-4
802.11 profiles 6-82
A
Activating the Database Server 6-107
ActiveX control deployment tool, using E-1
Adapter cards, replacing on the rp5800 PC 7-116
Adapter cards, rp5800 PC 2-5, 2-9
Add/Remove Database Servers 7-52
Adding new IICs or Clients to the Server 6-44
ADT settings 6-16
Alarm annunciation 1-35
Alarm management and setup 1-22
Alarm review 1-23, 1-24
Alarm services 3-12
Alert data integration 1-26
Alert data integration feature 6-31
Alert data integration, troubleshooting 7-7
All controls window 1-22, 3-10
Antivirus software, using on PIIC systems 7-111
Application software, PIIC 3-5
Applications, patient monitoring 1-29
Approved components, required use of 1-3
Archive 7-52
Archive, creating 6-96
Archiving system settings 1-30
Arrhythmia, monitoring 1-37
Assigning beds to patient sectors 6-86
Audio amplifier card 2-6
Audit data feature, enabling/disabling for IIC Web 6-25
Audit On configuration setting 6-25
B
Backup error logs 7-33
Backup logs 6-14
Batteries, replacing UPS 7-4
Bed Config 6-83
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
Index-1
Bed label, adding 6-70
BIOS Files on InCenter 7-80
C
Cable plant installation 5-2, 8-2
Cables, securing on PIIC PC 5-9
Category 5 (CAT5) UTP cable 2-28
Central reports 1-25
Cleaning agents, use of 7-2
Client.exe tool 7-62
Clinical configuration settings, storage of 3-5
Clinical units, configuring 6-39
Compatible monitors and software 1-8
Config Wizard 1-28, 7-52
Config Wizard configuration tool, using 6-11
Configuration and support 1-25
Configuration report, viewing 7-42
Configuration service screen selection 1-29
Configuration tools, using 7-51
Configuring the PIIC 1-28
Customer responsibilities for site planning and preparation 4-3
Customer-supplied displays 2-18
D
Data export option, using D-1
Data storage for patient data 1-21
Database server 1-5
Database server general configuration 6-24
Database Server, activating 6-107
Database storage test 8-5
Date and Time Setup 6-95
DBS Rack-mount UPS 2-25
Default Gateway 5-21
Desktop tools 7-57
Device drivers 3-5
Device Name 5-21
Device pooling configuration 6-64
Diagnostics 1-29
Display mounts 5-7
Display resolution warning, possible causes 7-16
Display setup 6-66
Display sweep speed, verifying 8-5
Displays, connecting to the rp5800 PC 2-7
Displays, customer-supplied 2-18
Displays, PIIC 2-16
Displays, remote slave 2-18
DL380 G7 database server platform 2-14
DL380 G8 database server platform 2-15
Index-2
Documentation status services 3-13
Dual display option 2-17
Dual display systems 1-21, 2-7
E
Electrical power, providing to PIIC components 5-18
Equipment labels, assigning 6-103
Equipment location requirements 4-4
Equipment Setup 6-67
Error and status messages 7-18
Error handling 3-6
Event review 1-23, 1-25
Export applications supported in PIIC models 1-39
F
Fiber optic cable 2-29
File system 3-4
H
Hardware components, PIIC 2-1
Help screens, accessing 1-30
HL7 auto unsolicited setting 6-80
HL7 export, troubleshooting 7-9
HL7 settings 6-78
HL7 troubleshooting tools 7-61
Holter option D-2
Host Name 5-21
I
ICN Configuration with a Database Server 1-13
ICN Configuration with Small Database Server 1-14
ICN Configuration without a Database Server 1-12
IIC web clients, deploying ActiveX controls to E-2
Inspecting PIIC components 5-5
Installation materials 5-2
IntelliVue Telemetry System (ITS) topologies 1-15
IP Addresses, assigning to PIIC devices 5-19
ITS equipment list configuration options 6-76
J
Japanese installations, required use of PDM 2-26
Japanese keyboard, use of 7-111
K
KaVoom software, installing 5-16
KM software, troubleshooting 7-11
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
Index-3
KVM switch 2-21, 5-16
KVM switch, setting up 5-16
L
Label assignment 1-25
Label, system serial number 5-5
Large database server installation 5-10
Large network database system 1-16
LC connectors 2-30
List of networked devices, configuring 6-44
Local general configuration 6-27
Local printer, adding 6-94
Location requirements, PIIC equipment 4-4
Low acuity PIIC model 1-4
M
M3140 Local Database 1-4
M3145/M3155 Network Database 1-4
M3150 Local Database 1-4
M3151 Client 1-4
M3154 Database Server 1-5
M3169 Small Database Server 1-5
M3170 Patient Link 1-4
M3177 Trend Display 1-5
MAC Address 5-21
Main screen 1-20
Main screen application 3-8
Maintenance service screen selection 1-29
Maintenance tools, using 7-58
Measurement services 3-12
MiniConfig, using 6-97
Models, PIIC 1-4
Monitor label, adding 6-72
Monitoring mode 3-6
Mounting components 5-7
MT-RJ connectors 2-30
N
Native language support (NLS) catalogs, upgrading 7-59
Network Configuration 6-39
Network connectivity, testing 5-25
Network devices, adding 6-47
Network domain configuration options 6-44
Network statistics, viewing 7-39
Network topologies, supported for PIIC 1-12
Networked centrals and hallways, configured 6-41
NIC, configuring optional second 5-26
Node type, checking 5-27
Index-4
Non-monitoring mode 3-6
Non-routed ICN topology 1-15
O
Operating system on the PIIC platform 3-3
Other services service screen selection 1-29
Overview of the PIIC system 1-2
P
Packaging 5-5
Paper, loading recorder 7-5
Parameters, displaying on the PIIC 1-32
Password, changing service 7-54
Password, clinical units 7-54
Patch panels for UTP cables 2-32
Patient data review 1-22
Patient Data Transfer - Bandwidth Utilization 7-53
Patient database Services 3-12
Patient Link 1-4
Patient management functionality 1-22
Patient window 1-21
Patient window application 3-8
PC workstation platform, description of 3-2
PCL 5 driver 2-24
Performance test 8-4
Physio data server 3-12
PIIC applications 3-7
PIIC features and functionality 1-20
PIIC iX portal, configuring support for 6-57
PIIC models 1-4
PIIC patient monitoring capabilities 1-31
PIIC releases and Patient Monitor software release compatibility 1-9
PIICiX Portal 6-50
Pinging network devices 7-42
Platform, PC and server for PIIC 2-3
Plug-in modules for IntelliVue patient monitors 1-31
Power distribution module 2-26
Power distribution module (PDM) mount 5-9
Power failure response test 8-5
Power on test 8-3
Preventive maintenance 7-2
Printer attributes, setting 6-94
Printer documentation services 3-13
Printers, adding at the PIIC 6-93
Printers, installing 5-11
Prior unit data feature 6-57
Product assurance, verifying 8-1
Purchased options and support information 6-19
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
Index-5
Q
Qryclnt.exe tool 7-62
Quick unit status log 7-36
R
RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) 1-26
RAID utilities 7-51
Read Only Config Wizard 7-52
Recorder documentation services 3-13
Recorder management services 3-13
Recorder paper, loading 7-5
Registry 3-4
Remote access 1-26
Remote display, setting up 5-15
Repackaging components for shipment 5-6
Replaceable parts 7-130
Report and Recording Destination 6-91
Report Configuration 7-52
Report configuration file, viewing 6-97
Report Settings 6-88
Report/Recording Destination 7-52
Research export options 7-54
Reset Database Log 7-59
Reset Recorder Logs 7-59
Restart DBServ 7-58
Restart Network Service 7-58
Resting display screen settings 6-86
Restore from archive 6-15
Restoring system settings 1-30
Review applications 3-11
Review functions for patient data 1-23
RJ45 connectors 5-3
RJ-45 connectors and jacks 2-29
RJ-45 wall boxes for UTP cable 2-30
Routed Bedside Monitors (RBM) 6-45
Routed ICN topology 1-16
Routed ICN, topology 1-16
Routine maintenance, performing 7-3
rp5700 PC
Controls and Connectors 2-8
description of 2-8
rp5800 PC
adapter cards 2-5, 2-9
audio amplifier card 2-6
Controls and Connectors 2-3
description of 2-3
Index-6
S
SC connectors 2-30
Security Access 6-90
Security platform tool 6-17
Security service screen selection 1-29
Security tools, using 7-54
Service function 1-25
Service log 7-33
Services 3-12
Set Time/Date 7-52
Shutdown service screen selection 1-29
Shutting down a system 7-56
Single-display systems 2-7
Site planning considerations 4-2
Small Database Server 1-14
Small database server installation 5-10
Small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules 2-30
Software versions and security updates 6-17
Software, re-installing 6-2
Spanning tree values 7-43
ST connectors 2-30
ST review 1-23
ST segment monitoring 1-38
Status logs 1-25
Subnet Mask 5-21
Support Applications 3-11
Support logs 1-29
Support logs, reviewing 7-24
Surface cleaning 7-2
Sweep Speed 6-66
Synchronize Large Network Server List 7-59
System components 1-2
System configuration settings, storage of 3-5
System serial number 5-5, 6-20
System settings, archiving and restoring 1-30
System validation 7-56
T
TCP/IP properties 5-24
Telemetry monitoring 1-35
Test and inspection procedures 8-6
Time synchronization 1-18
Touch displays, setting up 5-12
Trend display 1-5
Trend review 1-23
Troubleshooting procedures 7-6
IntelliVue Information Center System Release N.01 Installation and Service Guide
Index-7
U
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 2-24
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) location requirements 4-5
Unit paging settings 6-31
Unit settings 1-25, 3-9
Unpacking PIIC components 5-4
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cables 2-28
UPS batteries, replacing 7-4
UPS with Hardware Watchdog 2-24
USB Flash Drive (UFD) media kits 6-2
User issues, troubleshooting 7-18
UTP cable installation 5-2
UTP cable, wire coloring and number pairing 2-28
V
Video resolution 2-17
Video splitter, six-way 2-18
Visual tests 8-2
VueLink modules 1-31
W
Wall mount hardware 5-7
Wave review 1-23
Waves, displaying on the PIIC 1-32
Web Access option, installing and using B-1
Web access to the PIIC 1-27
Windows OS, supported versions 3-3
Windows print manager service 2-24
Wiring closet considerations 4-4
Worksheets A-1
Index-8